This manual documents how to run, install and maintain the GNU Pascal Compiler (GPC), as well as its new features and incompatibilities, and how to report bugs. It corresponds to GPC 20060325 (GCC 2.8.1, 2.95.x, 3.2.x, 3.3.x or 3.4.x).
Introduction:
Installation:
Using GNU Pascal:
Development:
Licenses:
Appendix:
the free 32/64-bit Pascal compiler of the GNU Compiler Collection (GNU CC or GCC). It combines a Pascal front-end with the proven GCC back-end for code generation and optimization. Other compilers in the collection currently include compilers for the Ada, C, C++, Objective C, Chill, FORTRAN, and Java languages. Unlike utilities such as p2c, this is a true compiler, not just a converter.
This version of GPC corresponds to GCC version 2.8.1, 2.95.x, 3.2.x, 3.3.x or 3.4.x.
The purpose of the GNU Pascal project is to produce a Pascal compiler (called GNU Pascal or GPC) which
Pascal was originally designed for teaching. GNU Pascal provides a smooth way to proceed to challenging programming tasks without learning a completely different language.
The current release implements Standard Pascal (ISO 7185, levels 0 and 1), most of Extended Pascal (ISO 10206, aiming for full compliance), is highly compatible to Borland Pascal (version 7.0), has some features for compatibility to other compilers (such as VAX Pascal, Sun Pascal, Mac Pascal, Borland Delphi and Pascal-SC).
It provides a lot of useful GNU extensions not found in other Pascal compilers, e.g. to ease the interfacing with C and other languages in a portable way, and to work with files, directories, dates and more, mostly independent of the underlying operating system.
Included units provide support for regular expressions, arithmetic with integer, rational and real numbers of unlimited size, internationalization, inter-process communication, message digests and more. Demo programs show the usage of these units and of many compiler features.
This manual contains
If you are familiar with Standard Pascal (ISO 7185) programming, you can probably just go ahead and try to compile your programs. Also, most of the ISO Extended Pascal Standard (ISO 10206) is implemented into GNU Pascal. The Extended Pascal features still missing from GPC are set types with variable bounds and discriminated ordinal schema as schema discriminants.
If you are a Borland Pascal programmer, you should probably start reading the QuickStart guide from BP to GNU Pascal, see Borland Pascal. If you are curious about the new features GPC offers, you can get an idea in the overview of GPC highlights (see Highlights), and read in more detail about them in the Programmer's Guide to GPC (see Programming) and in the alphabetical GPC Language Reference (see Reference).
And, please, think about how you can contribute to the GNU Pascal project, too. Please support our work by contributing yours in form of example programs, bug reports, documentation, or even actual improvements of the compiler.
All trademarks used in this manual are properties of their respective owners.
The GNU Pascal Compiler (GPC) is, as the name says, the Pascal compiler of the GNU family (http://www.gnu.org/software/gcc/). This means:
and more (note: the runtime system only supports ASCII based systems; that includes almost all of today's systems, but a few IBM machines still use EBCDIC; on those, the compiler might run, but the runtime support might need major changes),
The compiler supports the following language standards and quasi-standards:
foo := Succ (bar, 5);
).
![]() (PNG, 21 kB) |
The demo programs mentioned above are available both on the WWW and in GPC source and binary distributions.
Co-workers welcome!
Able, committed programmers are always welcome in the GNU Pascal team. If you want to be independent of companies that you have to pay in order to get a compiler with more restrictive licensing conditions that only runs on one operating system, be invited to join the development team, Acknowledgments.
GPC's new or changed features since the last (non alpha/beta) GPC release are listed here. Items without further description refer to new routines, variables or options.
Features implemented for compatibility to other compilers are marked with, e.g., ‘(B)’ for BP compatibility.
A few old and obsolete features have been dropped or replaced by cleaner, more flexible or otherwise more useful ones. This might lead to minor problems with old code, but we suppose they're rare and easy to overcome. Backward-incompatible changes are marked with ‘(@)’.
Have fun,
The GNU Pascal Development Team
This is the Frequently Asked Questions List (FAQ) for GNU Pascal. If the FAQ and the documentation do not help you, you have detected a bug in it which should be reported, Mailing List. Please really do it, so we can improve the documentation.
The purpose of the GNU Pascal project is to produce a Pascal compiler (called GNU Pascal or GPC) which
Pascal was originally designed for teaching. GNU Pascal provides a smooth way to proceed to challenging programming tasks without learning a completely different language.
The current release implements Standard Pascal (ISO 7185, levels 0 and 1), most of Extended Pascal (ISO 10206, aiming for full compliance), is highly compatible to Borland Pascal (version 7.0), has some features for compatibility to other compilers (such as VAX Pascal, Sun Pascal, Mac Pascal, Borland Delphi and Pascal-SC).
It provides a lot of useful GNU extensions not found in other Pascal compilers, e.g. to ease the interfacing with C and other languages in a portable way, and to work with files, directories, dates and more, mostly independent of the underlying operating system.
Included units provide support for regular expressions, arithmetic with integer, rational and real numbers of unlimited size, internationalization, inter-process communication, message digests and more. Demo programs show the usage of these units and of many compiler features.
The current version is 20060325.
Releases are available as a source archive and precompiled binaries for several common platforms from the GPC web site, http://www.gnu-pascal.de.
For details about new features, see the section ‘News’ on the web site. On bugs fixed recently, see the ‘Done’ section of the To-Do list (on the same web site).
GPC uses GCC as a back-end. It supports GCC version 2.8.1, 2.95.x, 3.2.x, 3.3.x or 3.4.x. (The newest supported GCC version is usually preferable, unless it contains serious bugs in itself.)
There are no fixed time frames for new releases. Releases are made when enough interesting changes have been made and the compiler is somewhat stable.
GPC is not a drop-in replacement for Borland's Turbo Pascal (R). Almost all BP language features are supported. Notable exceptions are the string format (as discussed below), or the ‘Mem’ and ‘Port’ pseudo arrays, though replacement functions for the latter on IA32 platforms exist in the ‘Ports’ unit.
Almost all of BP's run time library is supported in GPC, either by built-in compiler features or in units with the same names as their BP counterparts.
For details about the compatibility, the few remaining incompatibilities and some useful alternatives to BP features, see the ‘Borland Pascal’ chapter in the GPC Manual. (see Borland Pascal)
GPC uses the GCC backend, so it should run on any system that is supported by GNU CC. This includes a large variety of Unix systems, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32. A full list of platforms supported by GCC can be found in the file INSTALL of the GCC distribution. Not all of these have actually been tested, but it is known to run on these platforms:
ix86-gnu | (GNU Hurd)
|
ix86-linux | (Linux 2.x, ELF)
|
Linux/AMD64
| |
i486-linuxaout
| |
i486-linuxoldld
| |
i386-freebsd1.2.0
| |
AIX 4.2.1
| |
AIX 4.3
| |
DJGPP V2 | (Dos)
|
EMX 0.9B | (OS/2, Dos)
|
Cygwin32 beta20 and higher | (MS-Windows95/98, MS-Windows NT)
|
mingw32 | (MS-Windows95/98, MS-Windows NT)
|
MSYS | (MS-Windows)
|
Mac OS/X 10.3
| |
mips-sgi-irix5.3
| |
mips-sgi-irix6.5
| |
sun-sparc-sunos4.1.4
| |
sparc-sun-solaris2.x
| |
sun-sparc-solaris 2.5.1
| |
sun-sparc-solaris 2.6
| |
sun-sparc-solaris 7
| |
sun-sparc-solaris 8
| |
alpha-unknown-linux
| |
alpha-dec-osf4.0b
| |
s390-ibm-linux-gnu
|
OK people – send us your success stories, with canonical machine name!
You find the most up-to-date installation instructions in the GPC Manual or the file ‘INSTALL’ in source distributions, or on the GPC web site. (see Installation)
The following sections describe things you might need or want to install besides GPC itself.
After installing GPC, please check the files in the directory /usr/local/doc/gpc:
README | General Information about GPC
|
FAQ | This FAQ :−)
|
NEWS | Changes since the last release
|
BUGS | How to report bugs, about the Test Suite
|
AUTHORS | List of GPC authors
|
COPYING | The GNU General Public License
|
COPYING.LIB | The GNU Lesser General Public License
|
A complete Pascal compiler system should at least have:
For most people, the GNU binutils and GNU debugger (‘gdb’) are a good choice, although some may prefer to use vendor specific tools.
To debug your programs, (a) GNU Pascal must be able to generate executables with debug info for your platform, and (b) you must have a debugger which understands this.
gpc: -g not supported for this platform
then GPC is unable to generate debugging info. Usually, installing ‘gas’ (part of GNU binutils) instead of your system's assembler can overcome this. When you configure the GCC used for GPC, specify ‘--with-gnu-as’, and possibly ‘--with-gnu-ld’ and/or ‘--with-stabs’. More information can be found in the INSTALL file in the GNU CC source directory.
The bottom line: if you can debug GCC compiled programs, you should be able to do this with GPC too.
The GNU debugger (‘gdb’) currently does not have a “Pascal” mode, so it is unable to display certain Pascal structures etc. When debugging, please note that the Initial Letter In Each Identifier Is In Upper Case And The Rest Are In Lower Case. If you want to display variable ‘foo’ in the debugger, type ‘show Foo’ or ‘display Foo’ instead.
Although ‘gdb’ is an excellent debugger, it's user interface is
not everybody's preference. If you like to debug under X11, please
refer to the comp.windows.x FAQ:
“Where can I get an X-based debugger?” at:
http://www.faqs.org/faqs/x-faq/part6/section-2.html
Some useful frontends include: XXGDB, tGDB and XWPE. See:
http://www.ee.ryerson.ca:8080/~elf/xapps/Q-IV.html
Very nice, but resource consuming is the Motif based DDD:
http://sol.ibr.cs.tu-bs.de/softech/ddd/
Furthermore, RHIDE (see IDE) contains built-in debugging suport, similar to the IDE of BP.
You will need certain additional libraries when you compile some of the units. These can be found in the directory http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/.
Currently, there are the following libraries:
Unix: You can compile terminal applications with ncurses and applications that run in an X11 window with PDCurses (though terminal applications can, of course, also run in an xterm under X11). ncurses is used by default. If you want to use PDCurses (a.k.a. XCurses), give the option ‘-DX11’ when compiling CRT.
Dos with DJGPP and MS-Windows with mingw: Only PDCurses is available and will be used by default.
MS-Windows with Cygwin: PDCurses and ncurses are available. PDCurses is used by default. If you want to use ncurses, give the option ‘-DUSE_NCURSES’ when compiling CRT.
Other systems: Please see the READMEs and installation
instructions of PDCurses and ncurses to find out which one(s)
can be built on your system. See the conditionals at the end of
crt.inc and crtc.h (and change them if necessary) on which
library is used by default.
The source code of the libraries is available in the main ‘libs’ directory. Most libraries come with one or several patches which should be applied before compiling them.
Binaries for some platforms are available in the binary/platform subdirectories. If you compile the libraries for other platforms, be invited to make the binaries available to us for distribution on the web site.
There are also the following files:
Several people have contributed units for GPC. They are usually announced on the mailing list, Mailing List. Most of them can be found in http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/.
Users of Borland Pascal may wonder if there's a replacement for the IDE (Integrated Development Environment). Here's a few suggestions:
This chapter discusses some potential problems with GNU Pascal on MS-DOS, using DJGPP.
The following paragraph is from the site http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/:
DJGPP is a complete 32-bit C/C++ development system for Intel 80386 (and higher) PCs running DOS. It includes ports of many GNU development utilities. The development tools require a 80386 or newer computer to run, as do the programs they produce. In most cases, the programs it produces can be sold commercially without license or royalties.
GPC/DJGPP is a DJGPP V2 application, and most of the DJGPP documentation applies for GPC too. A great source of information is the DJGPP FAQ: http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/v2faq/230b.zip
Another place to look for DJGPP documentation is the DJGPP Knowledge Base, at this URL: http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/doc/kb/
As discussed in Components, other than GPC itself, you need an assembler, linker and friends, a C library and possibly a debugger. The site http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/ recommended the following files and they will help you find a mirror:
v2/djdev203.zip | (C library)
|
v2gnu/bnu2951b.zip | (assembler, ...)
|
v2gnu/gcc2952b.zip | (gcc)
|
v2gnu/gdb418b.zip | (debugger)
|
v2gnu/mak379b.zip | (make)
|
v2gnu/txi40b.zip | (texi)
|
This list is about 10 MB not counting GPC. You can use a binary version of GPC from the web site.
If you don't have DJGPP installed on your harddisk, create a directory for GNU Pascal (c:\gpc), and unzip the archives. Make sure you preserve the directory structure (use ‘pkunzip -d’). Now, add the directory where gpc.exe lives (c:\gpc\bin) to your path and set the DJGPP environment variable to point to your djgpp.env file:
set DJGPP=c:\gpc\djgpp.env
Then, add this to your djgpp.env file:
--------------------------------------------------------- [gpcpp] C_INCLUDE_PATH=%/>;C_INCLUDE_PATH%%DJDIR%/lang/pascal;%DJDIR%/include [gpc] COMPILER_PATH=%/>;COMPILER_PATH%%DJDIR%/bin LIBRARY_PATH=%/>;LIBRARY_PATH%%DJDIR%/lib;%DJDIR%/contrib/grx20/lib ---------------------------------------------------------
The GPC online documentation is in GNU info format; you need the Info reader (txi390b.zip) to read it, or use the built-in Info reader of the RHIDE or PENG IDE. To add the GPC documentation to the info directory file, edit the c:\gpc\info\dir file, and locate this section:
--------------------------------------------------------- * GCC: (gcc.inf). The GNU C, C++, and Objective-C Compiler * GDB: (gdb.inf). The GNU Debugger (gdb and gdb-dpmi). ---------------------------------------------------------
To add GPC, change it to look like this:
--------------------------------------------------------- * GCC: (gcc.inf). The GNU C, C++, and Objective-C Compiler * GPC: (gpc.inf). The GNU Pascal Compiler * GDB: (gdb.inf). The GNU Debugger (gdb and gdb-dpmi). ---------------------------------------------------------
Specific information for low-memory conditions and more can be found in the DJGPP FAQ and documentation.
To read the Info documentation, you need the ‘info’ program from txi390b.zip or an IDE like RHIDE or PENG.
You don't have a DPMI server installed, and DJGPP v2 requires it to run. You can either use one of the commercial DPMI servers (e.g., run ‘gpc’ in a DOS box under MS-Windows) or download and install CWSDPMI (csdpmi3b.zip) which is a free DPMI server written for DJGPP.
The GNU Assembler (as.exe), or gas, called by GCC accepts “AT&T” syntax which is different from “Intel” syntax. Differences are discussed in section 17.1 of the DJGPP FAQ.
A guide is available which was written by Brennan Mr. Wacko Underwood brennan@mack.rt66.com and describes how to use inline assembly programming with DJGPP, at this URL: http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/doc/brennan/brennan_att_inline_djgpp.html
There's also a GPC assembler tutorial at
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/misc/gpcasm.zip
Section 17.3 of the DJGPP FAQ discusses some methods to convert “Intel” syntax to “AT&T” syntax.
However, please note that assembler code is unportable, i.e. it will work on IA32 (“x86”) and compatible processors if written for them, but will not even compile for other processors. So by writing assembler code in your programs, you will limit their usefulness substantially.
If you think you “need” assembler code for speed – and you've checked that your assembler code actually runs faster than Pascal code compiled with suitable optimizations – you might want to put both Pascal and assembler versions of the critical sections in your program, and let, e.g., an ‘{$ifdef i386}’ decide which one to use. This way, your program will at least compile on all processors.
DPMI, BIOS and other functions are no different than other system functions. Refer to the GPC Manual on how to access your system's C-library. This small example shows how to use DPMI, copying some structures and function prototypes of ‘<dpmi.h>’:
program DPMIDemo; { Only for DJGPP } {$X+} { `Byte' is `unsigned char' in C, `ShortCard' is `unsigned short' in C, `MedCard' is `unsigned long' in C, `Word' is `unsigned' in C, etc. (all these types are built-in). } type TDpmiVersionRet = record Major : Byte; Minor : Byte; Flags : ShortCard; CPU : Byte; Master_PIC: Byte; Slave_PIC : Byte; end; type TDpmiFreeMemInfo = record LargestAvailableFreeBlockInBytes, MaximumUnlockedPageAllocationInPages, MaximumLockedPageAllocationInPages, LinearAddressSpaceSizeInPages, TotalNumberOfUnlockedPages, TotalNumberOfFreePages, TotalNumberOfPhysicalPages, FreeLinearAddressSpaceInPages, SizeOfPagingFilePartitionInPages, Reserved1, Reserved2, Reserved3: MedCard; end; function DpmiGetVersion (var Version: TDpmiVersionRet): Integer; external name '__dpmi_get_version'; function DpmiGetFreeMemoryInformation (var MemInfo: TDpmiFreeMemInfo): Integer; external name '__dpmi_get_free_memory_information'; var Version: TDpmiVersionRet; MemInfo: TDpmiFreeMemInfo; begin if DpmiGetVersion (Version) = 0 then begin WriteLn ('CPU type: ', Version.CPU, '86'); WriteLn ('DPMI major: ', Version.Major); WriteLn ('DPMI minor: ', Version.Minor); end else WriteLn ('Error in DpmiGetVersion'); if DpmiGetFreeMemoryInformation (MemInfo) = 0 then WriteLn ('Free DPMI memory: ', MemInfo.TotalNumberOfFreePages, ' pages.') else WriteLn ('Error in DpmiGetMemoryInformation'); end.
Per default, the maximum stack size of a DJGPP application is 256K. If you need more, you have to adjust it with the stubedit program, i.e.:
stubedit your_app.exe minstack=5000K
Another way is to add the following code to your program to define a minimum stack size (here: 2 MB). This value will be honored even if a user sets a lower value by using stubedit, so this method might be a little safer. (The linker name ‘_stklen’ is essential; the Pascal identifier doesn't matter. The constant doesn't have to be used anywhere in the program. It is recommended to put this declaration in the main program file, not in any unit/module, so programs using a unit/module can set whatever limit they need.)
{$ifdef __GO32__} const MinStackSize: Cardinal = $200000; attribute (name = '_stklen'); {$endif}
Still, it might be a good idea to use pointers for large structures, and allocate the memory at runtime.
DJGPP has to allocate the stack in physical memory at program startup, so one might have to be careful with too large stack limits. Most other systems allocate stack pages on demand, so the only reason to set a limit at all might be to prevent a runaway recursion from eating up all memory ...
On Unix-like systems, you can set a resource limit, but you usually don't do it in normal programs, but rather in the shell settings (bash: ‘ulimit’; csh: ‘limit’; syscall: ‘setrlimit’(2)).
Turbo Pascal strings have a length byte in front. Since a byte has the range 0 .. 255, this limits a string to 255 characters. However, the Pascal string schema, as defined in section 6.4.3.3.3 of the ISO 10206 Extended Pascal standard, is a schema record:
type String (Capacity: Integer) = record Length: 0 .. Capacity; String: packed array [1 .. Capacity + 1] of Char end;
The ‘+ 1’ is a GPC extension to make it feasible to automatically add the ‘#0’ terminator when passing or assigning them to CStrings. Thus at the expense of a little added complexity (must declare capacity, don't use ‘GetMem’ without explicit initialization of the ‘Capacity’ field, and the additional space requirement) you can now have very long strings.
Q: Should the different variants in a variant record overlay in the same memory? Previous Pascals I have used have guaranteed this, and I've got low-level code that relies on this. The variants are not the same length, and they are intended not to be.
A: No, this is intentional so that the discriminants are not overwritten, and they can be properly initialized in the first place. Consider:
record case Boolean of False: (s1: String (42)); True: (s2: String (99)); end;
If the strings would overlay, in particular their discriminants would occupy the same place in memory. How should it be initialized? Either way, it would be wrong for at least one of the variants ...
So, after a discussion in the ISO Pascal newsgroup where this topic came up concerning file variables (which also require some automatic initialization and finalization), we decided to do this in GPC for all types with automatic initialization and finalization (currently files, objects and schemata, including strings, in the future this might also be Delphi compatible classes and user-defined initialized and finalized types), since the standard does not guarantee variants to overlay, anyway ...
There are two ways in GPC to get guaranteed overlaying (both non-standard, of course, since the standard does not assume anything about internal representations; both BP compatible), ‘absolute’ declarations and variable type casts. E.g., in order to overlay a byte array ‘b’ to a variable ‘v’:
var b: array [1 .. SizeOf (v)] of Byte absolute v;
Or you can use type-casting:
type t = array [1 .. SizeOf (v)] of Byte;
then ‘t (v)’ can be used as a byte array overlayed to ‘v’.
Q: In standard Pascal you expect ‘s[1]’ to align with the first character position of ‘s’ and thus one character to the left is the length of ‘s’. Thus ‘s[0]’ is the length of ‘s’. True?
A: This holds for UCSD/BP strings (which GPC does not yet implement, but that's planned). The only strings Standard Pascal knows are arrays of char without any length field.
GPC also supports Extended Pascal string schemata (see String schema), but they also don't have a length byte at “position 0”, but rather a ‘Length’ field (which is larger than one byte).
Q: Any “gotchas” with string parameters?
A: Be careful when passing string literals as parameters to routines accepting the string as a value parameter and that internally modify the value of the parameter. Inside the routine, the value parameter gets a fixed capacity – the length of the string literal that was passed to it. Any attempt to assign a longer value will not work.
This only applies if the value parameter is declared as ‘String’. If it is declared as a string with a given capacity (e.g., ‘String (255)’), it gets this capacity within the routine.
Q: Two different kinds of strings with the same name – ‘String’ – does make a bit of confusion. Perhaps the oldstyle strings could be renamed ‘short string’ ?
A: When we implement the short strings, we'll have to do such a distinction. Our current planning goes like this:
‘String (n)’: string schema (EP compatible)
‘String [n]’: short string (UCSD/BP compatible, where n must be <= 255)
‘String’: dependent on flags, by default undiscriminated schema, but in BP mode (or with a special switch) short string of capacity 255 (UCSD/BP compatible).
Q: So when will these short strings be available?
A: It's been planned for some years. The delay has been caused by more pressing problems.
A C string (‘char *’) is an array of char, terminated with a ‘#0’ char.
C library functions require C, not Pascal style string arguments. However, Pascal style strings are automatically converted to C style strings when passed to a routine that expects C style strings. This works only if the routine reads from the string, not if it modifies it.
E.g., this is how you could access the ‘system()’ call in your C library (which is not necessary anymore, since ‘Execute’ is already built-in):
program SysCall; function System (CmdLine: CString): Integer; external name 'system'; var Result: Integer; begin Result := System ('ls -l'); WriteLn ('system() call returned: ', Result) end.
You could use the type ‘PChar’ instead of ‘CString’. Both ‘CString’ and ‘PChar’ are predefined as ‘^Char’ – though we recommend ‘CString’ because it makes it clearer that we're talking about some kind of string rather than a single character.
A lot of library routines in Pascal for many applications exist in the GPC unit and some other units. Where available, they should be preferred (e.g. ‘Execute’ rather than ‘system()’, and then you won't have to worry about ‘CString’s.)
Do not pass a C style string as a ‘const’ or ‘var’ argument if the C prototype says ‘const char *’ or you will probably get a segfault.
Please read the GPC Manual (info files or other formats) as well as the README and BUGS files that come with GPC (usually installed in directory /usr/local/doc/gpc), plus other docs that might help (the DJGPP FAQ if you use DJGPP, etc.) before you send email to the maintainers or mailing list.
In particular, the BUGS file contains information on how to submit bug reports in the most efficient way.
The ‘Support’ chapter of the GPC Manual tells you where to find more information about GPC and how to contact the GPC developers. (see Support)
If you want to contribute, please write to the mailing list, Mailing List.
The GPC homepage on the web, for information and downloads, is
http://www.gnu-pascal.de.
The GPC To-Do list, listing the latest features and fixed bugs can also be found there.
Current Maintainer: Russ Whitaker, russ@ashlandhome.net
This is the second incarnation of the GNU Pascal FAQ list, based on the previous FAQ by J.J. van der Heijden. Comments about, suggestions for, or corrections to this FAQ list are welcome.
Please make sure to include in your mail the version number of the document to which your comments apply (you can find the version at the beginning of this FAQ list).
Many people have contributed to this FAQ, only some of them are acknowledged above. Much of the info in, and inspiration for this FAQ list was taken from the GPC mailing list traffic, so you may have (unbeknownst to you) contributed to this list.
You can download the source code of the current GNU Pascal release from
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/current/
and binaries for some platforms from
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/binary/
The binary archive files are named gpc-version.platform.extension – for example ‘gpc-2.1.alpha-unknown-linux-gnu.tar.gz’ for GPC version 2.1 on an Alpha workstation running the Linux kernel with GNU C Library, or ‘gpc-20000616.i386-pc-msdosdjgpp’ for GPC version 20000616 on an Intel IA32 compatible PC running DOS with DJGPP.
After you have downloaded the correct archive file for your platform, please read the installation notes on how to install such a binary distribution.
If you are running Dos or MS Windows, you will need additional tools – see “What else to download and where” below.
GNU Pascal is subject to steady development. Alpha and beta snapshots (source only, use at your own risk) can be found at:
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/alpha/ http://www.gnu-pascal.de/beta/
When you are using GNU Pascal on a DOS system, you will need either the DJGPP or the EMX development environment (see below). On an OS/2 system, you will need EMX. On an MS Windows 95/98/NT system you will need either the CygWin or the mingw32 ot the MSYS environment.
GNU Pascal uses the compiler back-end from the GNU Compiler Collection, GNU CC or GCC. If you want to compile GPC, you will need the source of GCC as well as the source of GPC itself. From the same place as GPC, please download GCC 2.8.1, 2.95.x, 3.2.x, 3.3.x or 3.4.x. (It is also available from any GNU mirror; see http://www.gnu.org/software/gcc/.)
For some of GPC's units, you will need some standard libraries. In particular:
Unit | Platform | Library
|
CRT | Unix/terminal | ncurses >= 5.0 (1), (2)
|
CRT | Unix/X11 | PDCurses (2)
|
CRT | Dos, MS-Windows | PDCurses (3)
|
GMP | any | gmp
|
RegEx | any | rx
|
(debugging) | Unix, MS-Windows | ElectricFence (4)
|
Notes:
(1) ncurses version 5.0 or newer is strongly recommended because older versions contain a bug that severely affects CRT programs.
(2) You can install both ncurses and PDCurses on a Unix system, and choose at compile time whether to generate a terminal or X11 version of your program.
(3) ncurses also runs under MS-Windows with CygWin (not mingw32, however), but doesn't appear to behave much differently from PDCurses on that platform.
(4) ElectricFence is not used by any unit, but can be used for debugging memory allocation bugs by simply linking it (see the accompanying documentation).
You can find those libraries on many places on the Net. Also, many GNU/Linux distributions, DJGPP mirrors and other OS distributions already contain some of the libraries. In any case, you can find the sources of the libraries (sometimes together with patches that you should apply before building if you choose to build from the sources) and binaries for some platforms in
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/
For more information and descriptions of these libraries, see Libraries.
DJGPP is available from any SimTel mirror in the gnu/djgpp subdirectory; for addresses look into the DJGPP FAQ. To use GNU Pascal you need at least
We also recommend you to get:
EMX is an environment for creating 32-bit applications for DOS and OS/2. To develop EMX programs with GNU Pascal you need at least
If your DOS box has DPMI (it does if you are using MS Windows or OS/2) you will also need RSX, available from the same sites as EMX in the subdirectory rsxnt.
The GNU development tools contain the GNU C compiler which is in fact not needed to use GNU Pascal. However, the C library is needed.
CygWin is an environment which implements a POSIX layer under MS Windows, giving it large parts of the functionality of Unix. CygWin contains development tools such as an assembler, a linker, etc. GPC needs for operation. More information about CygWin can be found at
http://cygwin.com
The Minimalists' GNU Win32 environment, mingw32, allows a large number of Unix programs – including GPC and GCC – to run under MS Windows 95/98/NT using native MS libraries. mingw32 ressources can be found at
http://www.mingw.org
To install a binary distribution, cd
to the root directory and
unpack the archive while preserving the stored directory structure. Under
a Unix compatible system with GNU tar
installed, the following
(performed as ‘root’) will do the job:
# cd / # tar xzf archive.tar.gz
If you are using a ‘tar’ utility other than GNU tar
, it
might be necessary to do the above in an explicit pipe:
# cd / # gzip -c -d archive.tar.gz | tar xf -
Some binary distributions are now distributed packed with ‘bzip2’. You can recognize them by their file name suffix .bz2 instead of .gz. For such archives, make sure you have ‘bunzip2’ installed and then use the following command:
# cd / # tar xjf archive.tar.bz2
Or:
# cd / # bunzip2 -c -d archive.tar.bz2 | tar xf -
If you want to install a GPC binary distribution in another directory than it was prepared for (for example, if you do not have root access to the computer and want to install GPC somewhere under your home directory), you can do the following:
install-gpc-binary
, available from
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/binary/.
To install a ZIP archive under DOS with ‘PKunzip’, ‘cd’ to the appropriate directory (usually ‘\’ for EMX, ‘\DJGPP’ for DJGPP), then call ‘PKunzip’ with the ‘-d’ option:
C:\> cd djgpp C:\DJGPP> pkunzip -d archive.zip
where archive.zip is the name of the distribution file.
For DJGPP you must edit your djgpp.env in the DJGPP directory to complete the installation: Please copy the entries from ‘[gcc]’ to create a new ‘[gpc]’ section. The result may look as follows:
[gcc] COMPILER_PATH=%/>;COMPILER_PATH%%DJDIR%/bin LIBRARY_PATH=%/>;LIBRARY_PATH%%DJDIR%/lib [gpc] COMPILER_PATH=%/>;COMPILER_PATH%%DJDIR%/bin LIBRARY_PATH=%/>;LIBRARY_PATH%%DJDIR%/lib
If you are using the DJGPP version of GPC but do not have a DJGPP directory, please download and install DJGPP (see Download).
Binary distributions include libgcc.a and specs, files that are normally part of GCC. If you have GCC installed, they will be replaced unless you manually install the archive.
The preferred way to distribute GNU software is distribution of the source code. However, it can be a non-trivial exercise to build GNU Pascal on some non-Unix systems, so we also provide ready-to-run binaries for a number of platforms. (See Binary Distributions for how to install a binary distribution.)
GPC is based on the GNU Compiler Collection, GNU CC or GCC. You will
need the GCC sources to build it. It must be the same version as the
one GPC is implemented with – 2.8.1, 2.95.x, 3.2.x, 3.3.x or 3.4.x
as of this
writing. Although you need GCC to build the GNU Pascal compiler, you
don't need GCC to compile Pascal programs once GNU Pascal is
installed. (However, using certain libraries will require compiling
C wrappers, so it is a good idea to install the C compiler as well.)
Because GNU Pascal shares its back-end with GCC, it should run on any system supported by GCC. A full list of platforms supported by GCC can be found in the GCC installation instructions.
The GCC source can be obtained from any mirror of the GNU FTP site, ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/. The “core” distribution is sufficient for GPC.
Here is the generic procedure for installing GNU Pascal on a Unix system. See Compilation Notes for extra information needed to install GPC on DOS-like platforms.
Make sure that GNU make is installed and that you use it in the following steps. When unsure, you can try ‘make --version’ and/or ‘gmake --version’. It should tell you that it is GNU make. If you don't have it, you can obtain it from http://www.gnu.org/software/make/.
(In the following, we will simply speak of ‘make’ when invoking GNU make; you might need to call ‘gmake’ instead.)
You also need a patch program. If such a program is not installed on your system, you can get GNU patch from http://www.gnu.org/directory/patch.html.
For extracting the example programs from the documentation to the doc/docdemos directory a non-crippled ‘sed’ is needed. GNU sed is known to work.
If you have downloaded a “minimal” source distribution, most derived files have to be rebuilt. This is done automatically when building GPC, but you need additional tools:
‘bash’, ‘bzip2’, GNU ‘sed’, GNU ‘awk’, GNU ‘m4’, ‘bison’ (at least version 2.1), ‘flex’ (version 2.5.27), ‘autoconf’ (version 2.12), ‘texinfo’ (at least version 4.2), ‘help2man’.
Make sure that these are installed. The minimal distributions are compressed with ‘bzip2’ instead of ‘gzip’, so substitute it in the instructions below.
If your bison and flex programs are installed under different names, you may have to set some or all of the following environment variables before running ‘configure’:
FLEX=/path/to/flex LEX=/path/to/flex BISON=/path/to/bison YACC=/path/to/bison INTLBISON=/path/to/bison
If you want to build the GPC WWW pages you will also need a TeX distribution (including ‘pdftex’ and ‘dvips’).
If you run into trouble during the installation process, please check whether you are using outdated versions of the required utilities and upgrade if necessary.
The GNU versions of the packages above are available from http://www.gnu.org/software/, in a subdirectory whose name is the name of the package.
From a directory of your choice (e.g. /home/fred), unpack the GCC and GNU Pascal source distributions. This will create separate subdirectories for GCC and GPC. Let us assume gcc-3.4.3 and gpc-20041218 in this example.
% cd /home/fred % bzip2 -d < gcc-core-3.4.3.tar.bz2 | tar xf - % gzip -c -d gpc-20041218.tar.gz | tar xf -
‘cd’ to the GPC directory and move the contents (a subdirectory p) to the subdirectory gcc of the GCC directory:
% mv /home/fred/gpc-20041218/p /home/fred/gcc-3.4.3/gcc/
Instead of moving the directory, it is now also possible to make a symbolic link (if the OS supports symlinks). This is useful if you want to build GPC with several different GCC versions:
% ln -s /home/fred/gpc-20041218/p /home/fred/gcc-3.4.3/gcc/p
It is recommended, though not required, to use a separate directory for building the compiler, rather than compiling in the source directory. In this example, let us create /home/fred/gpc-build for this purpose:
% mkdir /home/fred/gpc-build
If you use a separate directory, you do not need to write into the GCC source directory once you have patched the GCC source (see below), and can build GPC for more than one platform from the same source tree.
In case you are re-using a directory where you have already built GCC and/or GPC for a different target machine, do ‘make distclean’ to delete all files that might be invalid. One of the files this deletes is Makefile; if ‘make distclean’ complains that Makefile does not exist, it probably means that the directory is already suitably clean.
GNU Pascal is automatically configured with GCC. Configuration of GCC is treated in depth in the GCC installation instructions. The normal procedure is as follows:
‘cd’ to the GPC build directory. From there, run the ‘configure’ script in the GCC source directory:
% cd /home/fred/gpc-build % /home/fred/gcc-3.4.3/configure --enable-languages=pascal
This creates all the necessary config files, links and Makefile in the GCC object directory.
Note 1: The configuration will prompt you for patching the GCC source for GPC support, so you need write access to that directory. All changes to GCC are surrounded by ‘#ifdef GPC ... #endif’, so they should not interfere when you build a C compiler from this source tree.
Note 2: The ‘--enable-languages=pascal’ option means that we only want to build the Pascal compiler and not, for instance, the C++ compiler.
Note 3: The standard base directory for installing GCC and GPC is /usr/local. If you want to install files to an alternate directory dir, specify ‘--prefix=dir’ when you run configure. For installing into a system directory such as /usr/local you will, of course, need appropriate permissions (often root). Therefore, if you want to install GPC on a system where you don't have those permissions, you must specify a prefix (e.g., ‘$HOME/usr’).
Some environments require other GNU tools (such as the GNU assembler or linker) instead of the standard system tools for GCC to work. (See the GCC installation instructions for details.) If this is the case for your system, install the required tools in the GPC build directory under the names as, ld, or whatever is appropriate. This will enable the compiler to find the proper tools for compilation of the program enquire (a part of GCC) and to install the GNU tools to a place where they are found by GCC but do not interfere with the standard system tools.
Alternatively, you can do subsequent compilation using a value of the
PATH
environment variable such that the necessary GNU tools come
before the standard system tools.
Once you are satisfied with the configuration as determined by configure, you can build the compiler:
% make
Notice that this procedure will build the C compiler (and maybe some other compilers) too, because that is used to compile the GPC runtime library.
Optionally, you may supply CFLAGS, LDFLAGS or RTSFLAGS. CFLAGS is used for compiler and RTS, RTSFLAGS are for RTS only, i.e.: ‘make CFLAGS="-O2" RTSFLAGS=-Wall’
Note: The documentation may fail to build from *.texi sources if GCC 2.95.x tries to use an older version of ‘makeinfo’ supplied in GCC package itself. This can be prevented by supplying explicit instruction to use your system's ‘makeinfo’:
% make MAKEINFO=`which makeinfo`
optionally followed by the rest of arguments.
When everything has been compiled, you can check the installation process with:
% make -n install
To complete the installation, run the command ‘make install’. You need write access to the target directories (/usr/local/bin, /usr/local/lib, /usr/local/info, /usr/local/doc, and /usr/local/man in this example), so this is usually done as ‘root’:
% su -c "make install"
If you want to install only the Pascal compiler (for example if you already have the correct version of GCC installed), ‘cd’ to the ‘gcc’ subdirectory of the build directory (e.g. /home/fred/gpc-build/gcc) and run ‘make pascal.install’. This installation process does not overwrite existing copies of libgcc.a or specs, should they exist.
However, if you do not have the exactly matching GCC version installed, you might need some additional files (otherwise GPC will complain about missing files at runtime). You can install them by doing ‘make pascal.install-with-gcc’ in the gcc subdirectory of the build directory.
There is a (partial) translation of the GPC manual into Croatian available now. It is not installed by default. If you want to install it, do a ‘pascal.install-hr’ in the ‘gcc’ directory. This will install the manpage gpc-hr.1 and the info documentation gpc-hr.info*. Other formats like PS, PDF and HTML can be built manually (it's also easy to add appropriate make targets for them when needed).
Also from the ‘gcc’ subdirectory you can do some more “exotic” builds. For instance, you can build the GPC WWW pages by typing ‘make pascal.html’ or a binary distribution by typing ‘make pascal.bindist’. See the Makefile in that directory for more examples.
The only compiler that is capable of compiling the GNU Compiler Collection (GNU CC or GCC) under MS-DOS is GCC itself. In order to compile GPC or GCC for MS-DOS with DJGPP you will therefore need either a working copy of DJGPP installed, or you will have to cross-build from a non-MS-DOS system.
Building GPC under MS-DOS with DJGPP follows the same scheme as building GPC under a Unix-like system: Place the p subdirectory in the gcc directory and follow the instructions for compiling GCC. This requires ‘bash’ and many other tools installed, and you must be very careful at many places to circumvent the limitations of the DOS platform.
Our preferred way to build GPC for DJGPP is to cross-build it from a Unix-like platform – which is much easier. For instructions, see Cross-Compilers and Crossbuilding.
EMX is a free 32-bit DOS extender which adds some properties of Unix to MS-compatible DOS and IBM's OS/2 operating systems.
As of this writing, we are not aware of current versions of GCC for EMX, and EMX support in GPC has not been maintained. Please contact us if you know about recent development in EMX and are interested in continuing EMX support in GPC.
There are two ports of the GNU development tools to MS Windows 95/98/NT: CygWin and mingw32.
The CygWin environment implements a POSIX layer under MS Windows, giving it large parts of the functionality of Unix. Thus, compiling GCC and GPC under the CygWin environment can be done following the instructions for compiling it under a Unix-like system (see Compiling GPC).
The Minimalists' GNU Win32 environment, mingw32, uses the native crtdll.dll library of MS Windows. It is much smaller than CygWin, but it is not self-hosting and must be crossbuilt from another system (see Crossbuilding).
GNU Pascal can function as a cross-compiler for many machines. Information about GNU tools in a cross-configuration can be found at ‘ftp://ftp.cygnus.com/pub/embedded/crossgcc/’.
If you want a cross-compiler targetting Linux you may use Dan Kegel's crosstool from ‘http://www.kegel.com/crosstool/’
Since GNU Pascal generates assembler code, you need a cross-assembler that GNU Pascal can run, in order to produce object files. If you want to link on other than the target machine, you need a cross-linker as well. It is straightforward to install the GNU binutils to act as cross-tools – see the installation instructions of the GNU binutils for details.
You also need header files and libraries suitable for the target machine that you can install on the host machine. Please install them under prefix/platform/include/, for instance /usr/local/i386-pc-msdosdjgpp/include/ for a cross-compiler from a typical Unix-like environment to MS-DOS with DJGPP.
Configuration and compilation of the compiler can then be done using the scripts cfgpc and mkgpc which are included in the source distribution in the subdirectory p/script. Please call them with the ‘-h’ option for instructions.
Using a cross-compiler to build GNU Pascal results in a compiler binary that runs on the cross-target platform. This is called “crossbuilding”. A possible reason why anybody would want to do this, is when the platform on which you want to run the GNU Pascal compiler is not self-hosting. An example is mingw32.
To crossbuild GNU Pascal, you have to install a cross-compiler for your target first, see Cross-Compilers.
As when building a cross-compiler, configuration and compilation of the compiler can be done using the scripts cfgpc and mkgpc which are included in the source distribution in the subdirectory p/script. Please call them with the ‘-h’ option for instructions.
GPC is a command-line compiler, i.e., to compile a program you have to invoke gpc passing it the name of the file you want to compile, plus options.
GPC supports all command-line options that GCC knows, except for many preprocessor options. For a complete reference and descriptions of all options, see GCC Command Options. Below, you will find a list of the additional options that GPC supports, and a list of GPC's most important options (including some of those supported by GCC as well).
You can mix options and file names on the command line. For the most part, the order doesn't matter. Order does matter, e.g., when you use several options of the same kind; for example, if you specify ‘-L’ more than once, the directories are searched in the order specified. Note: Since many options have multiletter names; multiple single-letter options may not be grouped as is possible with many other programs: ‘-dr’ is very different from ‘-d -r’.
Many options have long names starting with ‘--’ or, completely equivalent ‘-f’. E.g., ‘--mixed-comments’ is the same as ‘-fmixed-comments’. Some options tell GPC when to give warnings, i.e. diagnostic messages that report constructs which are not inherently erroneous but which are risky or suggest there may have been an error. Those options start with ‘-W’.
Most GPC specific options can also be changed during one compilation by using compiler directives in the source, e.g. ‘{$X+}’ or ‘{$extended-syntax}’ for ‘--extended-syntax’ (see Compiler Directives).
GPC understands the same environment variables GCC does (see Environment Variables Affecting GCC). In addition, GPC recognizes ‘GPC_EXEC_PREFIX’ with the same meaning that ‘GCC_EXEC_PREFIX’ has to GCC. GPC also recognizes ‘GCC_EXEC_PREFIX’, but ‘GPC_EXEC_PREFIX’ takes precedence.
Some of the long options (e.g., ‘--unit-path’) take an argument. This argument is separated with a ‘=’ sign, e.g.:
--unit-path=/home/foo/units
The following table lists the command line options GPC understands in addition to those understood by GCC.
--debug-tree
--debug-gpi
--debug-automake
--debug-source
--no-debug-source
--disable-debug-info
--progress-messages
--no-progress-messages
--progress-bar
--no-progress-bar
--automake-gpc
--automake-gcc
--automake-g++
--amtmpfile
--autolink
--no-autolink
--automake
--no-automake
--autobuild
--no-autobuild
--maximum-field-alignment
--ignore-packed
--no-ignore-packed
--ignore-garbage-after-dot
--no-ignore-garbage-after-dot
--extended-syntax
--no-extended-syntax
--ignore-function-results
--no-ignore-function-results
--pointer-arithmetic
--no-pointer-arithmetic
--cstrings-as-strings
--no-cstrings-as-strings
-Wabsolute
-Wno-absolute
--short-circuit
--no-short-circuit
--mixed-comments
--no-mixed-comments
--nested-comments
--no-nested-comments
--delphi-comments
--no-delphi-comments
--macros
--no-macros
--truncate-strings
--no-truncate-strings
--exact-compare-strings
--no-exact-compare-strings
--double-quoted-strings
--no-double-quoted-strings
--longjmp-all-nonlocal-labels
--no-longjmp-all-nonlocal-labels
--iso-goto-restrictions
--no-iso-goto-restrictions
--nonlocal-exit
--no-nonlocal-exit
--io-checking
--no-io-checking
--pointer-checking-user-defined
--no-pointer-checking-user-defined
--pointer-checking
--no-pointer-checking
--object-checking
--no-object-checking
--range-checking
--no-range-checking
--range-and-object-checking
--no-range-and-object-checking
--case-value-checking
--no-case-value-checking
--stack-checking
--no-stack-checking
--read-base-specifier
--no-read-base-specifier
--read-hex
--no-read-hex
--read-white-space
--no-read-white-space
--write-clip-strings
--no-write-clip-strings
--write-real-blank
--no-write-real-blank
--write-capital-exponent
--no-write-capital-exponent
--transparent-file-names
--no-transparent-file-names
--field-widths
--no-field-widths
--pedantic
--no-pedantic
--typed-address
--no-typed-address
--enable-keyword
--disable-keyword
--implicit-result
--no-implicit-result
--enable-predefined-identifier
--disable-predefined-identifier
--assertions
--no-assertions
--setlimit
--gpc-main
--propagate-units
--no-propagate-units
--interface-only
--implementation-only
--executable-file-name
--unit-path
--no-unit-path
--object-path
--no-object-path
--executable-path
--no-executable-path
--unit-destination-path
--no-unit-destination-path
--object-destination-path
--no-object-destination-path
--disable-default-paths
--gpi-destination-path
--uses
--init-modules
--cidefine
--csdefine
--big-endian
--little-endian
--print-needed-options
-Wwarnings
-Wno-warnings
-Widentifier-case-local
-Wno-identifier-case-local
-Widentifier-case
-Wno-identifier-case
-Winterface-file-name
-Wno-interface-file-name
--methods-always-virtual
--no-methods-always-virtual
--objects-are-references
--no-objects-are-references
--objects-require-override
--no-objects-require-override
--delphi-method-shadowing
--no-delphi-method-shadowing
--borland-objects
--mac-objects
--ooe-objects
--gnu-objects
--preprocessed
-nostdinc
-remap
-A
-E
-H
-P
-Wimplicit-abstract
-Wno-implicit-abstract
-Winherited-abstract
-Wno-inherited-abstract
-Wobject-assignment
-Wno-object-assignment
-Wimplicit-io
-Wno-implicit-io
-Wfloat-equal
-Wno-float-equal
-Wtyped-const
-Wno-typed-const
-Wnear-far
-Wno-near-far
-Wunderscore
-Wno-underscore
-Wsemicolon
-Wno-semicolon
-Wlocal-external
-Wno-local-external
-Wdynamic-arrays
-Wno-dynamic-arrays
-Wmixed-comments
-Wno-mixed-comments
-Wnested-comments
-Wno-nested-comments
--classic-pascal-level-0
--standard-pascal-level-0
--classic-pascal
--standard-pascal
--extended-pascal
--object-pascal
--ucsd-pascal
--borland-pascal
--delphi
--pascal-sc
--vax-pascal
--sun-pascal
--mac-pascal
--gnu-pascal
As the most simple example, calling
gpc foo.pas
tells GPC to compile the source file foo.pas and to produce an executable of the default name which is foo.exe on EMX, a.exe on Cygwin, both a.out and a.exe on DJGPP, and a.out on most other platforms.
Users familiar with BP, please note that you have to give the file name extension ‘.pas’: GPC is a common interface for a Pascal compiler, a C, ObjC and C++ compiler, an assembler, a linker, and perhaps an Ada and a FORTRAN compiler. From the extension of your source file GPC figures out which compiler to run. GPC recognizes Pascal sources by the extension .pas, .p, .pp or .dpr. GPC also accepts source files in other languages (e.g., .c for C) and calls the appropriate compilers for them. Files with the extension .o or without any special recognized extension are considered to be object files or libraries to be linked.
Another example:
gpc -O2 -Wall --executable-file-name --automake --unit-path=units foo.pas
This will compile the source file foo.pas to an executable named foo (‘--executable-file-name’) with fairly good optimization (‘-O2’), warning about possible problems (‘-Wall’). If the program uses units or imports modules, they will be searched for in a directory called units (‘--unit-path’) and automatically compiled and linked (‘--automake’).
The following table lists the most commonly used options to GPC.
--automake
--unit-path=
dir[:
dir...]
--object-path=
dir[:
dir...]
--unit-destination-path=
dir--object-destination-path=
dir--executable-path=
dir-o
fileSince only one output file can be specified, it does not make sense
to use ‘-o’ when compiling more than one input file, unless you
are producing an executable file as output.
--executable-file-name[=
name]
-L
dir-I
dir-l
library-O[
n]
With optimization, the compiler tries to reduce code size and execution time. The higher the value of n, the more optimizations will be done, but the longer the compilation will take.
If you use multiple ‘-O’ options, with or without n, the
last such option is the one that is effective.
-g
-s
-Wall
Note that some warnings (e.g., those about using uninitialized
variables) are never given unless you compile with optimization (see
above), because otherwise the compiler doesn't analyze the usage
patterns of variables.
-Werror
-S
-c
-static
-D
macro[=
def]
-b
machine-v
--classic-pascal-level-0
--classic-pascal
--extended-pascal
--object-pascal
--ucsd-pascal
--borland-pascal
--delphi
--pascal-sc
--mac-pascal
By default, GNU Pascal allows the redefinition of some keywords. Each of these switches causes GNU Pascal to forbid the redefinition of keywords of the specified standard.
Most ISO 7185 Pascal programs should compile properly with or without ‘--classic-pascal’. However, without this option, some constructs behave in non-standard way. Moreover, certain GNU extensions and Pascal features from other dialects are supported as well. With this option, they are rejected.
These options are not intended to be useful; they exist only to
satisfy pedants who would otherwise claim that GNU Pascal fails to
support the ISO Standard or is not really compatible to Borland
Pascal, or whatever. We recommend, rather, that users take advantage
of the extensions of GNU Pascal and disregard the limitations of
other compilers.
-pedantic-errors
--gpc-main=
nameThis chapter is still under development.
This chapter tells you how the source of a valid GNU Pascal program should look like. You can use it as tutorial about the GNU Pascal language, but since the main goal is to document all special GPC features, implementation-dependent stuff, etc., expect a steep learning curve.
This chapter does not cover how to compile your programs and to produce an executable – this is discussed above in Invoking GPC.
A source file accepted by GNU Pascal may contain up to one program, zero or more ISO-style modules, and/or zero or more UCSD-style units. Units and modules can be mixed in one project.
One trivial example for a valid GPC source file follows. Note that the code below may either be in one source file, or else the unit and the program may be in separate source files.
unit DemoUnit; interface procedure Hello; implementation procedure Hello; begin WriteLn ('Hello, world!') end; end.
program UnitDemo; uses DemoUnit; begin Hello end.
A generic GNU Pascal program looks like the following:
program name (Input, Output); import_part declaration_part begin statement_part end.
The program
headline may be omitted in GPC, but a warning
will be given except in ‘--borland-pascal’ mode.
While the program parameters (usually ‘Input’, ‘Output’) are obligatory in ISO Pascal if you want to use ‘ReadLn’ and ‘WriteLn’, they are optional in GNU Pascal. GPC will warn about such missing parameters in ‘--extended-pascal’ mode. However if you give parameters to the program headline, they work like ISO requires.
The import_part consists either of an ISO-style ‘import’ specification or a UCSD/Borland-style ‘uses’ clause. While ‘import’ is intended to be used with interfaces exported by ISO 10206 Extended Pascal modules, and ‘uses’ is intended to be used with units, this is not enforced. (See also uses, import.)
The declaration_part consists of label, constant, type, variable or subroutine declarations in free order. However, every identifier must be declared before it is used. The only exception are type identifiers pointing to another type identifier which may be declared below.
The statement_part consists of a sequence of statements.
As an extension, GPC supports a “declaring statement” which can be used in the statement part to declare variables (see var).
A label declaration has the following look:
label label_name, ..., label;
A label declaration part starts with the reserved word label
,
which contains a list of labels.
A constant declaration has the following look:
const constant_identifier = constant_expression; ... constant_identifier = constant_expression;
A constant declaration part starts with the reserved word const
.
It declares a constant_identifier which is defined by
constant_expression. This expression has to be evaluatable during
compilation time, i.e. it can include numbers, parentheses, predefined
operators, sets and type casts (the last, however, is a Borland extension).
In ISO 7185 Pascal, constant_expression must be a constant or
a set. All Pascal Dialects but ISO-Pascal allow the use of these
intrinsic functions in constant_expression:
Abs, Round, Trunc, Chr, Ord, Length, Pred, Succ, SizeOf, Odd.
In Borland Pascal, in the constant declaration part variables can be declared as well, which are given an initial value. These variables are called “typed constants”. It is good style to avoid this use, especially since Extended Pascal and GNU Pascal allow to initialize a variable in variable declaration part or give a type a preset value on declaration.
const FiveFoo = 5; StringFoo = 'string constant'; AlphabetSize = Ord ('Z') - Ord ('A') + 1; type PInteger = ^Integer; { Define a pointer to an Integer } const { Constant which holds a pointer to an Integer at address 1234 } AddressFoo = PInteger (1234);
An example of a typed constant:
const i: Integer = 0;
If you want to use it as a constant only, that's perfectly fine. However, if you modify ‘i’, we suggest to translate the declaration to an initialized variable. The EP syntax is:
var i: Integer value 0;
GPC supports this as well as the following mixture of dialects:
var i: Integer = 0;
Furthermore, you can also assign initialization values to types:
program InitTypeDemo; type MyInteger = Integer value 42; var i: MyInteger; begin WriteLn (i) end.
Here, all variables of type MyInteger are automatically initialized to 42 when created.
program BPArrayInitDemo; const MyStringsCount = 5; type Ident = String [20]; const MyStrings: array [1 .. MyStringsCount] of Ident = ('export', 'implementation', 'import', 'interface', 'module'); begin end.
And the following way in EP:
program EPArrayInitDemo; const MyStringsCount = 5; type Ident = String (20); var MyStrings: array [1 .. MyStringsCount] of Ident value [1: 'export'; 2: 'implementation'; 3: 'import'; 4: 'interface'; 5: 'module']; begin end.
There seem to be pros and cons to each style. GPC supports both as well as just about any thinkable mixture of them.
Some folks don't like having to specify an index since it requires renumbering if you want to add a new item to the middle. However, if you index by an enumerated type, you might be able to avoid major renumbering by hand.
Subroutine Parameter List Declaration
A type declaration looks like this:
type type_identifier = type_definition; ... type_identifier = type_definition;
or, with preset content:
type type_identifier = type_definition value constant_expression; ... type_identifier = type_definition value constant_expression;
A type declaration part begins with the reserved word type
.
It declares a type_identifier which is defined by type_definition.
A type definition either can be an array, a record, a schema, a set, an
object, a subrange, an enumerated type, a pointer to another type_identifier
or simply another type_identifier which is to alias.
If a schema type is to be declared, type_identifier is followed by a
discriminant enclosed in parentheses:
type_identifier (discriminant) = schema_type_definition;
If value
is specified, followed by a constant satisfying
the type definition, every variable of this type is initialized with
constant_expression, unless it is initialized by value
itself.
The reserved word value
can be replaced by ‘=’, however
value
is not allowed in ISO-Pascal and Borland Pascal, and the
replacement by ‘=’ is not allowed in Extended Pascal.
type { This side is the } { That side is the } { type declaration } { type definition } Arrayfoo = array [0 .. 9] of Integer; { array definition } Recordfoo = record { record definition } Bar: Integer; end; { schema def with discriminants ``x, y: Integer'' } SchemaFoo (x, y: Integer) = array [x .. y] of Integer; CharSetFoo = set of Char; { Def of a set } ObjectFoo = object { Def of an object } procedure DoAction; constructor Init; destructor Done; end; SubrangeFoo = -123..456; { subrange def } EnumeratedFoo = (Pope,John,the,Second); { enum type def } { Def of a pointer to another type identifier } PInteger = ^arrayfoo; { Def of an alias name for another type identifier } IdentityFoo = Integer; { Def of an integer which was initialized by 123 } InitializedFoo = Integer value 123;
Type Definition, Data Types, Variable Declaration
A variable declaration looks like this:
var var_identifier: type_identifier; ... var_identifier: type_identifier;
or
var var_identifier: type_definition; ... var_identifier: type_definition;
and with initializing value:
var var_identifier: type_identifier value constant_expression; ... var_identifier: type_identifier value constant_expression;
or
var var_identifier: type_definition value constant_expression; ... var_identifier: type_definition value constant_expression;
A variable declaration part begins with the reserved word var
.
It declares a var_identifier whose type
either can be specified by a type identifier, or by a type definion which
either can be an array, a record, a set, a subrange, an enumerated type
or a pointer to an type identifier.
If value
is specified followed by a constant expression satisfying
the specified type, the variable declared is initialized with
constant_expression.
The reserved word value
can be replaced by ‘=’, however
value
is not allowed in ISO-Pascal and Borland Pascal, and the
replacement by ‘=’ is not allowed in Extended Pascal.
Type Definition, Type Declaration, Data Types, The Declaring Statement, Subroutine Parameter List Declaration
procedure procedure_identifier; declaration_part begin statement_part end;
or with a parameter list:
procedure procedure_identifier (parameter_list); declaration_part begin statement_part end;
A procedure is quite like a sub-program: The declaration_part consists of label, constant, type, variable or subroutine declarations in free order. The statement_part consists of a sequence of statements. If parameter_list is specified, parameters can be passed to the procedure and can be used in statement_part. A recursive procedure call is allowed.
The Function, Subroutine Parameter List Declaration
function function_identifier: function_result_type; declaration_part begin statement_part end;
or with a parameter list:
function function_identifier (parameter_list): result_type; declaration_part begin statement_part end;
A function is a subroutine which has a return value of type function_result_type. It is structured like the program: the declaration_part consists of label, constant, type, variable or subroutine declarations in free order. The statement_part consists of a sequence of statements. If parameter_list is specified, parameters can be passed to the function and can be used in statement_part. The result is set via an assignment:
function_identifier := expression
Recursive function calls are allowed. Concerning the result type, ISO 7185 Pascal and Borland Pascal only allow the intrinsic types, subranges, enumerated types and pointer types to be returned. In Extended Pascal, function_result_type can be every assignable type. Of course, there are no type restrictions in GNU Pascal as well. If extended syntax is switched on, functions can be called like procedures via procedure call statement.
The Procedure, Subroutine Parameter List Declaration, Data Types
GNU Pascal allows to define operators which can be used the infix style in expressions. For a more detailed description, see Operators
parameter; ...; parameter
Each parameter can start with a prefix (see below) describing how the parameters are passed, followed by a comma seperated list of one or more parameter_identifiers and an optional parameter_type.
procedure DoIt (var x, y, z: OneType; a, b: AnotherType; var q);
To understand parameter passing, first some definitions.
Technical note: Parameters are not always passed on the stack, they may also be passed in registers, especially on RISC machines.
The prefix defines how a variable is passed on the stack and how you can access the formal_parameter inside the procedure. The prefix can be one of:
procedure DoIt (x: SomeType);
Technical: The actual parameter is passed by value or reference, but if passed by reference, it is then copied to a local copy on the stack. Aliasing has no effect on x.
What it means: you can modify ‘x’ inside the routine, but your
changes will not affect the actual parameter (and vice versa). The
actual parameter can be a constant or other immutable object, or a
protected or const variable.
procedure DoIt (protected x: SomeType);
Technical: The actual parameter is passed by value or reference, but
if passed by reference, it is then copied to a local copy on the
stack. Aliasing has no effect on x. protected
is a Extended
Pascal extension.
What it means: if you modify the actual parameter, this will not
affect ‘x’ inside the routine. The actual parameter can be a
constant or other immutable object, or a protected or const
variable. You are forbidden from modifying x inside the routine.
procedure DoIt (var x: SomeType);
Technical: The actual parameter is passed by reference. Aliasing will definitely change ‘x’.
What it means: modifications to ‘x’ inside the routine will change the actual parameter passed in. The actual parameter must be an addressable L-value (ie, it must be something you can take the address of and assign to).
A parameter of this kind is called variable parameter and internally
corresponds to an L-value pointer (to the specified type identifier
if any). This declaration is necessary if the parameter is to be
modified within the routine and to hold its value still after
return.
procedure DoIt (const x: SomeType);
Technical: The actual parameter is passed by value or reference.
The compiler will make a copy of the actual parameter to have
something it can address if the actual parameter is not addressable.
You are forbidden from modifying ‘x’ inside the routine, and
therefore you cannot modify the actual parameter. Aliasing may or
may not change ‘x’. const
is a Borland Pascal extension.
What it means: You can pass any R-value. You cannot modify ‘x’
inside the routine. If you change the actual parameter while inside
the routine, ‘x’ will have an undefined value.
procedure DoIt (protected var x: SomeType);
Technical: The actual parameter is passed by reference. The compiler will never make a copy of the actual parameter. You are forbidden from modifying ‘x’ inside the routine, and therefore you cannot modify the actual parameter. Aliasing will definitely change ‘x’.
What it means: You can pass anything addressable. You cannot modify ‘x’ inside the routine. If you change the actual parameter while inside the routine, ‘x’ will change as well.
In GPC, the protected var
mode guarantees that the parameter
is always passed by reference, making it the correct choice for
calling C routines with ‘const’ pointer parameters.
If you omit the formal parameter type specification, then any type may be passed to that parameter. Generally this is a bad idea, but occasionally it can be useful, especially for low level code.
As an Extended Pascal extension, you can also declare procedural parameters directly:
procedure parameter_identifier
or:
function parameter_identifier: parameter_identifier_result_type
Example for parameter lists:
program ParameterDemo; procedure Foo (var Bar; var Baz: Integer; const Fred: Integer); procedure Glork1 (function Foo: Integer; procedure Bar (Baz: Integer)); begin Bar (Foo) end; begin Baz := Integer (Bar) + Fred end; var a, b, c: Integer; begin Foo (a, b, c) end.
Data Types, var, const, protected
The way an assignment looks like:
L-value := expression;
This statement assigns any valid expression to L-value. Make sure that the result of expression is compatible with L-value, otherwise an compilation error is reported. The ‘:=’ is called assignment operator. As long as L-value and expression are type compatible, they are assignment compatible for any definable type as well.
begin statement; statement; ... statement end
This statement joins several statements together into one compound statement which is treated as a single statement by the compiler. The finishing semicolon before ‘end’ can be left out.
This statement has the following look:
if boolean_expression then statement
or with an alternative statement:
if boolean_expression then statement1 else statement2
The ‘if’ ... ‘then’ statement consists of a boolean expression and a statement, which is conditionally executed if the evaluation of boolean_expression yields true.
If ‘if’ ... ‘then’ ... ‘else’ is concerned, statement1 is executed depending on boolean_expression being true, otherwise statement2 is executed alternatively. Note: the statement before else must not finish with a semicolon.
case expression of selector: statement; ... selector: statement; end
or, with alternative statement sequence:
case ordinal_expression of selector: statement; ... selector: statement; otherwise { ``else'' instead of ``otherwise'' allowed } statement; ... statement; end
or, as part of the invariant record
type definition:
type foo = record field_declarations case bar: variant_type of selector: (field_declarations); selector: (field_declarations); ... end;
or, without a variant selector field,
type foo = record field_declarations case variant_type of selector: (field_declarations); selector: (field_declarations); ... end;
The case
statement compares the value of ordinal_expression
to each selector, which can be a constant, a subrange, or a list of
them separated by commas, being compatible with the result of
ordinal_expression.
Note: duplicate selectors or range crossing is not allowed unless
{$borland-pascal} is specified. In case of
equality the corresponding statement is executed. If otherwise
is specified and no appropriate selector matched the expression, the
series of statements following otherwise
is executed. As a synonym
for otherwise
, else
can be used. The semicolon before
otherwise
is optional.
@@ ???? The expression must match one of the selectors in order to continue, unless an alternative statement series is specified.
For case
in a variant record type definition, see Record Types.
for ordinal_variable := initial_value to final_value do statement
or
for ordinal_variable := initial_value downto final_value do statement
For sets:
for set_element_type_variable in some_set do statement
For pointer index variables:
for pointer_variable := initial_address to final_address do statement
or
for pointer_variable := initial_address downto final_address do statement
The for statement is a control statement where an index variable assumes every value of a certain range and for every value the index variable assumes statement is executed. The range can be specified by two bounds (which must be of the same type as the index variable, i.e. ordinal or pointers) or by a set.
For ordinal index variables:
For pointer index variables:
Since gpc provides a flat memory modell, all addresses are linear, so they can be compared. Still, such loops should be used (if at all) only for iterating through successive elements of an array.
For sets:
Please note: A modification of the index variable may result in unpredictable action.
Set Types, Pointer Arithmetics, repeat Statement, for Statement
The while loop has the following form
while boolean_expression do statement
The while
statement declares a loop which is executed while
boolean_expression is true. Since the terminating condition is
checked before execution of the loop body, statement may never
be executed.
repeat Statement, for Statement
repeat statement; ... statement; until boolean_expression
The repeat
... until
statement declares a loop which is
repeated until boolean_expression is true. Since the terminating
condition is checked after execution of the loop body, the statement
sequence is executed at least once.
while Statement, for Statement
asm (StatementList: String);
The asm
inline statement is a GNU Pascal extension. It
requires its parameter to be AT&T-noted assembler statements, and
therefore it is not compatible with that one of Borland Pascal.
statementlist is a string containing asm statements separated
by semicolons.
@@ ???? This statement looks like this:
goto label
(Under construction.)
subroutine_name;
This statement calls the subroutine subroutine_name which can either be a procedure or, if GNU extended syntax is turned on, a function. In this case, the result is ignored.
This statement allows to declare a variable within a statement part. It looks like this:
var var_identifier: type_identifier;
or
var var_identifier: type_definition;
and with initializing value:
var var_identifier: type_identifier value expression;
or
var var_identifier: type_definition value expression;
Unlike in declaration parts, the initializing expression does
not have to be a constant expression. Note that every declaring
statement has to start with var
. The name space of the
variable extends from its declaration to the end of the current
matching statement sequence (which can be a statement part (of the
program, a function, a procedure or an operator) or, within that
part, a begin end compound statement, a repeat loop, or the else
branch of a case statement). This statement is a GNU Pascal
extension.
Continue;
and
Break;
These simple statements must not occur outside a loop, i.e. a ‘for’, ‘while’ or ‘repeat’ statement. ‘Continue’ transfers control to the beginning of the loop right by its call, ‘Break’ exits the current loop turn and continues loop execution.
A module can have one or more ‘export’ clauses and the name of an ‘export’ clause doesn't have to be equal to the name of the module.
Sample module code with separate interface
and
implementation
parts:
module DemoModule interface; { interface part } export DemoModule = (FooType, SetFoo, GetFoo); type FooType = Integer; procedure SetFoo (f: FooType); function GetFoo: FooType; end. module DemoModule implementation; { implementation part } import StandardInput; StandardOutput; var Foo: FooType; { Note: the effect is the same as a `forward' directive would have: parameter lists and result types are not allowed in the declaration of exported routines, according to EP. In GPC, they are allowed, but not required. } procedure SetFoo; begin Foo := f end; function GetFoo; begin GetFoo := Foo end; to begin do begin Foo := 59; WriteLn ('Just an example of a module initializer. See comment below') end; to end do begin Foo := 0; WriteLn ('Goodbye') end; end.
Alternatively the module interface and implementation may be combined as follows:
module DemoMod2; { Alternative method } export Catch22 = (FooType, SetFoo, GetFoo); type FooType = Integer; procedure SetFoo (f: FooType); function GetFoo: FooType; end; { note: this `end' is required here, even if the module-block below would be empty. } var Foo: FooType; procedure SetFoo; begin Foo := f end; function GetFoo; begin GetFoo := Foo end; end.
Either one of the two methods may be used like this:
program ModuleDemo (Output); import DemoModule; begin SetFoo (999); WriteLn (GetFoo); end.
program ModDemo2 (Output); import Catch22 in 'demomod2.pas'; begin SetFoo (999); WriteLn (GetFoo); end.
Somewhat simpler GPC modules are also supported. Please note: This is not supported in the Extended Pascal standard.
This is a simpler module support that does not require exports, imports, module headers etc.
These non-standard simple GPC modules look like the following example. They do not have an export part, do not have a separate module-block, do not use import/export features.
Instead, you have to emulate the exporting/importing yourself using ‘attribute’ and ‘external name’.
module DemoMod3; type FooType = Integer; var Foo: FooType; procedure SetFoo (f: FooType); attribute (name = 'SetFoo'); begin Foo := f end; function GetFoo: FooType; attribute (name = 'GetFoo'); begin GetFoo := Foo; end; end.
program ModDemo3 (Output); {$L demomod3.pas} { explicitly link module } { Manually do the "import" from DemoMod3 } type FooType = Integer; procedure SetFoo (f: FooType); external name 'SetFoo'; function GetFoo: FooType; external name 'GetFoo'; begin SetFoo (999); WriteLn (GetFoo) end.
Module initialization and finalization:
The to begin do
module initialization and to end do
module finalization constructs now work on every target.
By the way: The “GPC specific” module definition is almost identical to the PXSC standard. With an additional keyword `global' which puts a declaration into an export interface with the name of the module, it will be the same. @@This is planned.
A generic GNU Pascal unit looks like the following:
unit name; interface import_part interface_part implementation implementation_part initialization_part end.
The name of the unit should coincide with the name of the file with the extension stripped. (If not, you can tell GPC the file name with ‘uses foo in 'bar.pas'’, see uses.)
The import_part is either empty or contains a ‘uses’ clause to import other units. It may also consist of an ISO-style ‘import’ specification. Note that the implementation part is not preceeded by a second import part in GPC (see import).
The interface_part consists of constant, type, and variable declarations, procedure and function headings which may be freely mixed.
The implementation_part is like the declaration part of a program, but the headers of procedures and functions may be abbreviated: Parameter lists and function results may be omitted for procedures and functions already declared in the interface part.
The initialization_part may be missing, or it may be a ‘begin’ followed by one or more statements, such that the unit has a statement part between this ‘begin’ and the final ‘end’. Alternatively, a unit may have ISO-style module initializers and finalizers, see to begin do, to end do.
Note that GPC does not yet check whether all interface declarations are resolved in the same unit. The implementation of procedures and functions which are in fact not used may be omitted, and/or procedures and functions may be implemented somewhere else, even in a different language. However, relying on a GPC bug (that will eventually be fixed) is not a good idea, so this is not recommended. Instead, declare such routines as ‘external’.
A unit exports everything declared in the interface section. The exported interface has the name of the unit and is compatible with Extended Pascal module interfaces since GPC uses the same code to handle both.
As described in Type Declaration, a type declaration part looks like this:
type type_identifier = type_definition; ... type_identifier = type_definition;
where the left side is the type declaration and the right one the type definition side. GNU Pascal offers various possibilities to implement highly specialized and problem-specific data types.
An ordinal type is one that can be mapped to a range of whole numbers. It includes integer types, character types, enumerated types and subrange types of them.
A character type is represented by the intrinsic type ‘Char’
which can hold elements of the operating system's character set
(usually ASCII). Conversion between character types and integer
types is possible with the intrinsic functions Ord
and
Chr
.
An enumerated type defines a range of elements which are referred to
by identifiers. Conversion from enumerated types to integer types is
possible with the intrinsic function Ord
. Conversion from
integer to ordinal types is only possible by type-casting or using
the extended form of ‘Succ’.
var Foo: Char; { foo can hold a character } Num: '0' .. '9'; { Can hold decimal digits, is a subrange type of Char } Day: (Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday); { Can hold weekdays }
Ord, Chr, Type Casts
Besides ‘Integer’, GNU Pascal supports a large zoo of integer types. Some of them you will find in other compilers, too, but most are GNU Pascal extensions, introduced for particular needs. Many of these types are synonyms for each other. In total, GPC provides 20 built-in integer types, plus seven families you can play with. (Four of these “families” are signed and unsigned, packed and unpacked subrange types; the others are explained below.)
See also: Subrange Types.
For most purposes, you will always use ‘Integer’, a signed integer type which has the “natural” size of such types for the machine. On most machines GPC runs on, this is a size of 32 bits, so ‘Integer’ usually has a range of ‘-2147483648..2147483647’ (see Integer).
If you need an unsigned integer type, the “natural” choice is ‘Cardinal’, also called ‘Word’. Like ‘Integer’, it has 32 bits on most machines and thus a range of ‘0..4294967295’ (see Cardinal, Word).
These natural integer types should be your first choice for best performance. For instance on an IA32 CPU operations with ‘Integer’ usually work faster than operations with shorter integer types like ‘ShortInt’ or ‘ByteInt’ (see below).
‘Integer’, ‘Cardinal’, and ‘Word’ define the three “main branches” of GPC's integer types. You won't always be able to deal with the natural size; sometimes something smaller or longer will be needed. Especially when interfacing with libraries written in other languages such as C, you will need equivalents for their integer types.
The following variants of integer types (plus one Boolean type) are guaranteed to be compatible to the respective types of GNU C as listed below (whereas ‘Integer’, ‘Cardinal’ and ‘Word’ themselves are not guaranteed to be compatible to any given C type). The sizes given, however, are not guaranteed. They are just typical values currently used on some platforms, but they may be actually shorter or longer on any given platform.
signed | unsigned | also unsigned | GNU C equivalent | size in bits (example)
|
ByteInt | ByteCard | Byte | [un]signed char | 8
|
ShortInt | ShortCard | ShortWord | [unsigned] short int | 16
|
CInteger | CCardinal | CWord | [unsigned] int | 32
|
MedInt | MedCard | MedWord | [unsigned] long int | 32
|
LongInt | LongCard | LongWord | [unsigned] long long int | 64
|
— | SizeType | — | size_t | 32
|
PtrDiffType | — | — | ptrdiff_t | 32
|
PtrInt | PtrCard | PtrWord | — | 32
|
— | CBoolean | — | _Bool, bool | 8
|
Since we don't know whether ‘LongInt’ will always remain the “longest” integer type available – maybe GNU C will get ‘long long long int’, one day, which we will support as ‘LongLongInt’ – we have added the synonym ‘LongestInt’ for the longest available singed integer type, and the same holds for ‘LongestCard’ and ‘LongestWord’.
In some situations you will need an integer type of a well-defined size. For this purpose, GNU Pascal provides type attributes (see attribute). The type
Integer attribute (Size = 42)
is guaranteed to have a precision of 42 bits. In a realistic context, you will most often give a power of two as the number of bits, and the machine you will need it on will support variables of that size. If this is the case, the specified precision will simultaneously be the amount of storage needed for variables of this type.
In short: If you want to be sure that you have a signed integer with 32 bits width, write ‘Integer attribute (Size = 32)’, not just ‘Integer’ which might be bigger. The same works with unsigned integer types such as ‘Cardinal’ and ‘Word’ and with Boolean types.
This way, you can't get a higher precision than that of ‘LongestInt’ or ‘LongestCard’ (see Main Branch Integer Types). If you need higher precision, you can look at the ‘GMP’ unit (see GMP) which provides integer types with arbitrary precision, but their usage is different from normal integer types.
If you care about ISO compliance, only use ‘Integer’ and subranges of ‘Integer’.
Some of GPC's non-ISO integer types exist in Borland Pascal, too: ‘Byte’, ‘ShortInt’, ‘Word’, and ‘LongInt’. The sizes of these types, however, are not the same as in Borland Pascal. Even for ‘Byte’ this is not guaranteed (while probable, though).
When designing GNU Pascal, we thought about compatibility to Borland Pascal. Since GNU Pascal is (at least) a 32-bit compiler, ‘Integer’ must have (at least) 32 bits. But what to do with ‘Word’? Same size as ‘Integer’ (like in BP) or 16 bits (like in BP)? We decided to make ‘Word’ the “natural-sized” unsigned integer type, thus making it (at least) 32 bits wide. Similarly, we decided to give ‘LongInt’ twice the size of ‘Integer’ (like in BP) rather than making it 32 bits wide (like in BP). So ‘LongInt’ has 64 bits, and ‘ShortInt’ has 16 bits on the IA32 platform.
On the other hand, to increase compatibility to Borland Pascal and Delphi, GPC provides the alias name ‘Comp’ for ‘LongInt’ (64 bits on IA32) and ‘SmallInt’ for ‘ShortInt’ (16 bits on IA32). Note that BP treats ‘Comp’ as a “real” type and allows assignments like ‘MyCompVar := 42.0’. Since we don't consider this a feature, GPC does not copy this behaviour.
Here is a summary of all integer types defined in GPC. The sizes and ranges are only typical values, valid on some, but not all platforms. Compatibility to GNU C however is guaranteed.
To specify the number of bits definitely, use type attributes, attribute.
program IntegerTypesDemo (Output); var ByteVar: Byte; ShortIntVar: ShortInt; Foo: MedCard; Big: LongestInt; begin ShortIntVar := 1000; Big := MaxInt * ShortIntVar; ByteVar := 127; Foo := 16#deadbeef end.
See also: Subrange Types.
GPC has three built-in floating point types to represent real numbers. Each of them is available under two names (for compatibility to other compilers and languages).
For most purposes, you will always use ‘Real’ which is the only one of them that is part of Standard and Extended Pascal. If memory constraints apply, you might want to choose ‘ShortReal’ for larger arrays. On the other hand, if high precision is needed, you can use ‘LongReal’. When interfacing with libraries written in other languages such as C, you will need the equivalents for their real types.
Note that not all machines support longer floating point types, so ‘LongReal’ is the same as ‘Real’ on these machines. Also, some machines may support a longer type, but not do all arithmetic operations (e.g. the ‘Sin’ function, Sin) in a precision higher than that of ‘Real’. If you need higher precision, you can look at the ‘GMP’ unit (see GMP) which provides rational and real numbers with arbitrary precision, but their usage is different from normal real types.
The following real types are guaranteed to be compatible to the real types of GNU C. The sizes given, however, are not guaranteed. They are just typical values used on any IEEE compatible floating point hardware, but they may be different on some machines.
type name | alternative name | GNU C equivalent | size in bits (typically)
|
ShortReal | Single | float | 32
|
Real | Double | double | 64
|
LongReal | Extended | long double | 80
|
There are several ways to use strings in GNU Pascal. One of them is
the use of the intrinsic string type ‘String’ which is a
predefined schema type. The schema discriminant of this type holds
the maximal length, which is of type Integer, so values up to
MaxInt
can be specified. For ‘String’, an assignment is
defined. There are many built-in functions and procedures for
comfortable strings handling.
@@ ???? String procedures and functions.
Another way to use strings is to use arrays of type ‘Char’. For these, an intrinsic assignment is defined as well. Besides, ‘String’ and ‘Char’ are assignment compatible. The preferred way, however, is ‘String’ because of the numerous possibilities for string handling.
Character types are a special case of ordinal types.
Ordinal Types, Chr, Ord, Pred, Succ.
type enum_type_identifier = (identifier, ..., identifier);
An enumerated type is a a special case of ordinal types and
defines a range of elements which are referred to by
identifiers. Enumerated types are ordered by occurence in the identifier
list. So, they can be used as index types in an array
definition, and it is possible to define subranges of them. Since they are
ordered, they can be compared to one another. The intrinsic function
Ord
applied to name_identifier returns the number of occurence
in the identifier list (beginning with zero), Pred
and Succ
return the predecessor and successor of name_identifier.
‘Boolean’ is a special case of an enumerated type.
Ordinal Types, Array Types, Subrange Types, Ord, Boolean, Char, Pred, Succ.
Files are used to store data permanently, normally on hard drives or floppies. There are tree types of files available: text files, typed and untyped files.
Text files are used to store text in them, where typed files are used to store many entries of the same type in them, e.g. addresses. Text files and typed files are accessible by ‘Read’ and ‘Write’ operations and do not need the parameter ‘BlockSize’ in ‘Reset’ or ‘Rewrite’. On the other hand, untyped files are used to store any type of information in them but you need to use ‘BlockWrite’ or ‘BlockRead’ to store or retrieve data out of this file.
var F1: Text; { a textfile } F2: file of Real; { a typed filed used to store real values in it } F3: File; { an untyped file }
File Routines, Write, Read, BlockRead, BlockWrite, Reset, Rewrite
The intrinsic Boolean represents boolean values, i.e. it can only assume true and false (which are predefined constants). This type corresponds to the enumerated type
type Boolean = (False, True);
Since it is declared this way, it follows:
Ord (False) = 0 Ord (True) = 1 False < True
There are four intrinsic logical operators. The logical and
,
or
and not
. In Borland Pascal and GNU Pascal, there is
a logical “exclusive or” xor
.
Enumerated Types, and, or, not, xor
The intrinsic Pointer Type is a so-called unspecified or typeless pointer (i.e. a pointer which does not point to any type but holds simply a memory address).
GNU Pascal supports Standard Pascal's subrange types:
program SubrangeDemo; type MonthInt = 1 .. 12; Capital = 'A' .. 'Z'; ControlChar = ^A .. ^Z; { `^A' = `Chr (1)' is a BP extension } begin end.
Also possible: Subranges of enumerated types:
program EnumSubrangeDemo; type { This is an enumerated type. } Days = (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun); { This is a subrange of `Days'. } Working = Mon .. Fri; begin end.
To increase performance, variables of such a type are aligned in a way which makes them fastest to access by the CPU. As a result, ‘1 .. 12’ occupies 4 bytes of storage on an IA32 CPU.
For the case you want to save storage at the expense of speed, GPC provides a ‘packed’ variant of these as an extension:
program PackedSubrangeDemo; type MonthInt = packed 1 .. 12; begin end.
A variable of this type occupies the shortest possible (i.e., addressable) space in memory – one byte on an IA32 compatible CPU.
See also: packed.
type array_type_identifier = array [index_type] of element_type
or
type array_type_identifier = array [index_type, ..., index_type] of element_type
The reserved word array
defines an array type. index_type
has to be an ordinal type, subrange type or an enumerated type, where
several index types, separated by commas, are allowed. element_type
is an arbitrary type. An element of an array is accessed
by array_type_variable [index_number]. The upper and
lower index bounds can be determined by the intrinsic functions High
and Low
.
type IntArray = array [1 .. 20] of Integer; Foo = array [(Mo, Tu, We, Th, Fr, Sa, Su)] of Char; Bar = array [0 .. 9, 'a' .. 'z', (Qux, Glork1, Fred)] of Real; Baz1 = array [1 .. 10] of IntArray; { equal (but declared differently): } Baz2 = array [1 .. 10, 1 .. 20] of Integer;
type record_type_identifier = record field_identifier: type_definition; ... field_identifier: type_definition; end;
or, with a variant part,
type record_type_identifier = record field_identifier: type_definition; ... field_identifier: type_definition; case bar: variant_type of selector: (field_declarations); selector: (field_declarations); ... end;
or, without a variant selector field,
type record_type_identifier = record field_identifier: type_definition; ... field_identifier: type_definition; case variant_type of selector: (field_declarations); selector: (field_declarations); ... end;
The reserved word record
defines a structure of fields.
Records can be ‘packed’ to save memory usage at the expense of
speed.
The reserved word ‘record’ and record types are defined in ISO 7185 Pascal. According to ISO Pascal, the variant type must be an identifier. GNU Pascal, like UCSD and Borland Pascal, also allows a subrange here.
A record field is accessed by record_type_variable . field_identifier
See also: packed, case Statement.
GPC supports variant records like in EP and BP. The following construction is not allowed in Extended Pascal, but in BP and GPC:
program BPVariantRecordDemo; type PersonRec = record Age: Integer; case EyeColor: (Red, Green, Blue, Brown) of Red, Green : (WearsGlasses: Boolean); Blue, Brown: (LengthOfLashes: Integer); end; begin end.
In EP, the variant field needs a type identifier, which, of course, also works in GPC:
program EPVariantRecordDemo; type EyeColorType = (Red, Green, Blue, Brown); PersonRec = record Age: Integer; case EyeColor: EyeColorType of Red, Green : (WearsGlasses: Boolean); Blue, Brown: (LengthOfLashes: Integer); end; begin end.
Schemata are types that depend on one or more variables, called discriminants. They are an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal feature.
type RealArray (n: Integer) = array [1 .. n] of Real; Matrix (n, m: PositiveInteger) = array [1 .. n, 1 .. m] of Integer;
The type ‘RealArray’ in this example is called a Schema with the discriminant ‘n’.
To declare a variable of such a type, write:
var Foo: RealArray (42);
The discriminants of every global or local schema variable are initialized at the beginning of the procedure, function or program where the schema variable is declared.
Schema-typed variables “know” about their discriminants. Discriminants can be accessed just like record fields:
program Schema1Demo; type PositiveInteger = 1 .. MaxInt; RealArray (n: Integer) = array [1 .. n] of Real; Matrix (n, m: PositiveInteger) = array [1 .. n, 1 .. m] of Integer; var Foo: RealArray (42); begin WriteLn (Foo.n) { yields 42 } end.
Schemata may be passed as parameters. While types of schema variables must always have specified discriminants (which may be other variables), formal parameters (by reference or by value) may be of a schema type without specified discriminant. In this, the actual parameter may posses any discriminant. The discriminants of the parameters get their values from the actual parameters.
Also, pointers to schema variables may be declared without a discriminant:
program Schema2Demo; type RealArray (n: Integer) = array [1 .. n] of Real; RealArrayPtr = ^RealArray; var Bar: RealArrayPtr; begin end.
When applying ‘New’ to such a pointer, you must specify the intended value of the discriminant as a parameter:
New (Bar, 137)
As a GNU Pascal extension, the above can also be written as
Bar := New (RealArrayPtr, 137)
The allocated variable behaves like any other schema variable:
program Schema3Demo; type RealArray (n: Integer) = array [1 .. n] of Real; RealArrayPtr = ^RealArray; var Bar: RealArrayPtr; i: Integer; begin Bar := New (RealArrayPtr, 137); for i := 1 to Bar^.n do Bar^[i] := 42 end.
Since the schema variable “knows” its size, pointers to schemata can be disposed just like other pointers:
Dispose (Bar)
Schemata are not limited to arrays. They can be of any type that normally requires constant values in its definition, for instance subrange types, or records containing arrays etc. (Sets do not yet work.)
References to the schema discriminants are allowed, and the
with
statement is also allowed, so one can say:
program SchemaWithDemo; type RealArray (n: Integer) = array [1 .. n] of Real; var MyArray: RealArray (42); begin WriteLn (MyArray.n); { writes 42 } with MyArray do WriteLn (n); { writes 42 } end.
Finally, here is a somewhat exotic example. Here, a ‘ColoredInteger’ behaves just like an ordinary integer, but it has an additional property ‘Color’ which can be accessed like a record field.
program SchemaExoticDemo; type ColorType = (Red, Green, Blue); ColoredInteger (Color: ColorType) = Integer; var Foo: ColoredInteger (Green); begin Foo := 7; if Foo.Color = Red then Inc (Foo, 2) else Foo := Foo div 3 end.
An important schema is the predefined ‘String’ schema
(according to Extended Pascal). It has one predefined discriminant
identifier Capacity
. GPC implements the String
schema
as follows:
type String (Capacity: Cardinal) = record Length: 0 .. Capacity; Chars: packed array [1 .. Capacity + 1] of Char end;
The Capacity
field may be directly referenced by the user,
the Length
field is referenced by a predefined string
function Length (Str)
and contains the current string length.
Chars
contains the chars in the string. The Chars
and
Length
fields cannot be directly referenced by a user
program.
If a formal value parameter is of type ‘String’ (with or
without discriminant), the actual parameter may be either a
String
schema, a fixed string (character array), a single
character, a string literal or a string expression. If the actual
parameter is a ‘String’ schema, it is copied for the parameter
in the usual way. If it is not a schema, a ‘String’ schema is
created automatically, the actual parameter is copied to the new
variable and the Capacity
field of the new variable is set to
the length of the actual parameter.
Actual parameters to ‘var’ parameters of type ‘String’ must be ‘String’ schemata, not string literals or character arrays.
program StringDemo (Output); type SType = String (10); SPtr = ^String; var Str : SType; Str2: String (100000); Str3: String (20) value 'string expression'; DStr: ^String; ZStr: SPtr; Len : Integer value 256; Ch : Char value 'R'; { `String' accepts any length of strings } procedure Foo (z: String); begin WriteLn ('Capacity: ', z.Capacity); WriteLn ('Length : ', Length (z)); WriteLn ('Contents: ', z); end; { Another way to use dynamic strings } procedure Bar (SLen: Integer); var LString: String (SLen); FooStr: type of LString; begin LString := 'Hello world!'; Foo (LString); FooStr := 'How are you?'; Foo (FooStr); end; begin Str := 'KUKKUU'; Str2 := 'A longer string variable'; New (DStr, 1000); { Select the string Capacity with `New' } DStr^ := 'The maximum length of this is 1000 chars'; New (ZStr, Len); ZStr^ := 'This should fit here'; Foo (Str); Foo (Str2); Foo ('This is a constant string'); Foo ('This is a ' + Str3); Foo (Ch); { A char parameter to string routine } Foo (''); { An empty string } Foo (DStr^); Foo (ZStr^); Bar (10000); end.
In the above example, the predefined procedure New
was used
to select the capacity of the strings. Procedure Bar
also has
a string whose size depends of the parameter passed to it and
another string whose type will be the same as the type of the first
string, using the type of
construct.
All string and character types are compatible as long as the destination string is long enough to hold the source in assignments. If the source string is shorter than the destination, the destination is automatically blank padded if the destination string is not of string schema type.
set_type_identifier = set of set_element_type;
set_type_identifier is a set of elements from set_element_type which is either an ordinal type, an enumerated type or a subrange type. Set element representatives are joined together into a set by brackets:
[set_element, ..., set_element]
‘[]’ indicates the empty set, which is compatible with all set types. Note: Borland Pascal restricts the maximal set size (i.e. the range of the set element type) to 256, GNU Pascal has no such restriction. The number of elements a set variable is holding can be determined by the intrinsic set function Card (which is a GNU Pascal extension, in Extended Pascal and Borland Pascal you can use SizeOf instead but note the element type size in bytes, then) to the set. There are four intrinsic binary set operations: the union ‘+’, the intersection ‘*’ and the difference ‘-’. The symmetric difference ‘><’ is an Extended Pascal extension.
pointer_type_identifier = ^type_identifier;
A pointer of the type pointer_type_identifier holds the address at which data of the type type_identifier is situated. Unlike other identifier declarations, where all identifiers in definition part have to be declared before, in a pointer type declaration type_identifier may be declared after pointer_type_identifier. The data pointed to is accessed by ‘pointer_type_variable^’. To mark an unassigned pointer, the ‘nil’ constant (which stands for “not in list”) has to be assigned to it, which is compatible with all pointer types.
type ItselfFoo = ^ItselfFoo; { possible but mostly senseless } PInt = ^Integer; { Pointer to an Integer } PNode = ^TNode; { Linked list } TNode = record Key : Integer; NextNode: PNode; end; var Foo, Bar: PInt; begin Foo := Bar; { Modify address which foo is holding } Foo^ := 5; { Access data foo is pointing to } end.
GPC also suports pointers to procedures or function and calls through them. This is a non-standard feature.
program ProcPtrDemo (Output); type ProcPtr = ^procedure (i: Integer); var PVar: ProcPtr; procedure WriteInt (i: Integer); begin WriteLn ('Integer: ', i : 1) end; begin { Let PVar point to function WriteInt } PVar := @WriteInt; { Call the function by dereferencing the function pointer } PVar^ (12345) end.
See also: Pointer (Intrinsic).
For procedures without a parameter list:
procedure_type_identifier = procedure name_identifier;
or functions:
function_type_identifier = function name_identifier: function_result_type;
For procedures with a parameter list:
procedure_type_identifier = procedure name_identifier (parameter_list);
or functions:
function_type_identifier = function name_identifier (parameter_list): function_result_type;
Procedural types can be used as procedures or functions respectively, but also a value can be assigned to them. Procedural types are a Borland Pascal extension. In Borland Pascal, function_result_type can only be one of these types: ordinal types, real types, pointer types, the intrinsic ‘String’ type. In GNU Pascal every function result type for procedural types is allowed.
BP has procedural and functional types:
type CompareFunction = function (Key1, Key2: String): Integer; function Sort (Compare: CompareFunction); begin ... end;
Standard Pascal has procedural and functional parameters:
function Sort (function Compare (Key1, Key2: String): Integer); begin ... end;
Both ways have pros and cons, e.g. in BP you can save, compare, trade, etc. procedural values, or build arrays of them, while the SP way does not require a type declaration and prevents problems with uninitialized or invalid pointers (which in BP will usually crash the program).
GPC supports both ways. An important feature of Standard Pascal (but not BP) that GPC also supports is the possibility to pass local routines as procedural or functional parameters, even if the called routine is declared far remote. The called routine can then call the passed local routine and it will have access to the original caller's local variables.
program LocalProceduralParameterDemo; procedure CallProcedure (procedure Proc); begin Proc end; procedure MainProcedure; var LocalVariable: Integer; procedure LocalProcedure; begin WriteLn (LocalVariable) end; begin LocalVariable := 42; CallProcedure (LocalProcedure) end; begin MainProcedure end.
See also: The Procedure, The Function, Subroutine Parameter List Declaration, Procedure Call.
Object types are used to encapsulate data and methods. Furthermore, they implement a mechanism for inheritance.
A type may be initialized to a value of expression when it is declared, like a variable, as in:
program TypeVarInitDemo; type Int10 = Integer value 10; FooType = Real; MyType = Char value Pred ('A'); EType = (a, b, c, d, e, f, g) value d; const Answer = 42; var ii : Int10; { Value of ii set to 10 } ch : MyType value Pred ('z'); aa : Integer value Answer + 10; foo: FooType value Sqr (Answer); e1 : EType; { value set to d } e2 : EType value g; { value set to g } begin end.
Extended Pascal requires the type initializers to be constant expressions. GPC allows any valid expression.
Note, however, that the expressions that affect the size of storage allocated for objects (e.g. the length of arrays) may contain variables only inside functions or procedures.
GPC evaluates the initial values used for the type when an identifier is declared for that type. If a variable is declared with a type-denoter that uses a type-name which already has an initial value the latter initialization has precedence.
@@ GPC does not know how to calculate constant values for math functions in the runtime library at compile time, e.g. ‘Exp (Sin (2.4567))’, so you should not use these kind of expressions in object size expressions. (Extended Pascal allows this.)
GPC supports ‘restricted’ types, defined in Extended Pascal. A value of a restricted type may be passed as a value parameter to a formal parameter possessing its underlying type, or returned as the result of a function. A variable of a restricted type may be passed as a variable parameter to a formal parameter possessing the same type or its underlying type. No other operations, such as accessing a component of a restricted type value or performing arithmetic, are possible.
program RestrictedDemo; type UnrestrictedRecord = record a: Integer; end; RestrictedRecord = restricted UnrestrictedRecord; var r1: UnrestrictedRecord; r2: RestrictedRecord; i: restricted Integer; k: Integer; function AccessRestricted (p: UnrestrictedRecord): RestrictedRecord; var URes: UnrestrictedRecord; begin { The parameter is treated as unrestricted, even though the actual parameter may be restricted } URes.a := p.a; { It is allowed to assign a function result } AccessRestricted := URes; end; begin r1.a := 354; { Assigning a restricted function result to a restricted variable } { @@ Verify if this should really be allowed????? } r2 := AccessRestricted (r1); { Passing a restricted value to unrestricted formal parameter is ok } r2 := AccessRestricted (r2); {$ifdef BUG} { *** The following statements are not allowed *** } k := r2.a; { field access (reading) } r2.a := 100; { field access (writing) } r1 := r2; { assignment source is restricted } r2 := r1; { assignment target is restricted } r1 := AccessRestricted (r2); { assigning a restricted function result to an unrestricted object } i := 16#ffff; { assignment target is restricted } k := i + 2; { arithmetic with restricted value } {$endif} end.
Endianness means the order in which the bytes of a value larger than one byte are stored in memory. This affects, e.g., integer values and pointers while, e.g., arrays of single-byte characters are not affected. The GPC ‘String’ schema, however, contains ‘Capacity’ and ‘Length’ fields before the character array. These fields are integer values larger than one byte, so the ‘String’ schema is affected by endianness.
Endianness depends on the hardware, especially the CPU. The most common forms are:
Little-endian machines store the least significant byte on the lowest memory address (the word is stored little-end-first).
E.g., if the 32 bit value $deadbeef
is stored on memory
address $1234
on a little-endian machine, the following bytes
will occupy the memory positions:
Address | Value
|
$1234 | $ef
|
$1235 | $be
|
$1236 | $ad
|
$1237 | $de
|
Examples for little-endian machines are IA32 and compatible microprocessors and Alpha processors.
Big-endian machines store the most significant byte on the lowest memory address (the word is stored big-end-first).
E.g., if the 32 bit value $deadbeef
is stored on memory
address $1234
on a big-endian machine, the following bytes
will occupy the memory positions:
Address | Value
|
$1234 | $de
|
$1235 | $ad
|
$1236 | $be
|
$1237 | $ef
|
Examples for big-endian machines are the Sparc and Motorola m68k CPU families and most RISC processors. Big-endian byte order is also used in the Internet protocols.
Note: There are processors which can run in both little-endian and big-endian mode, e.g. the MIPS processors. A single program, however, (unless it uses special machine code instructions) will always run in one endianness.
Under normal circumstances, programs do not need to worry about endianness, the CPU handles it by itself. Endianness becomes important when exchanging data between different machines, e.g. via binary files or over a network. To avoid problems, one has to choose the endianness to use for the data exchange. E.g., the Internet uses big-endian data, and most known data formats have a specified endianness (usually that of the CPU on which the format was originally created). If you define your own binary data format, you're free to choose the endianness to use.
To deal with endianness, GPC predefines the symbol ‘__BYTES_LITTLE_ENDIAN__’ on little-endian machines and ‘__BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN__’ on big-endian machines. Besides, the Run Time System defines the constant ‘BytesBigEndian’ as False on little-endian machines and True on big-endian machines.
There are also the symbols ‘__BITS_LITTLE_ENDIAN__’, ‘__BITS_BIG_ENDIAN__’, ‘__WORDS_LITTLE_ENDIAN__’, ‘__WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN__’ and the constants ‘BitsBigEndian’ and ‘WordsBigEndian’ which concern the order of bits within a byte (e.g., in packed records) or of words within multiword-numbers, but these are usually less important.
The Run Time System also contains a number of routines to convert endianness and to read or write data from/to binary files in a given endianness, independent of the CPU's endianness. These routines are described in the RTS reference (see Run Time System), under ‘endianness’. The demo program endiandemo.pas contains an example on how to use these routines.
GNU Pascal supports all operators of ISO Pascal and Borland Pascal. In addition, you can define your own operators according to the Pascal-SC (PXSC) syntax.
The following table lists all built-in GNU Pascal operators, ordered by precedence: ‘<’ etc. have the lowest precedence, ‘not’ etc. the highest. As usual, the precedence of operators can be superseded with parentheses.
In an assignment statement, ‘:=’ has lower precedence than all operators. (This is rather obvious from the syntax of assignment statements, and is merely noted for programmers familiar with C where ‘=’ is an operator.)
< = > in <> >= <= + - or +< -< +> -> * / div mod and shl shr xor *< /< *> /> pow ** >< not @
The Pascal-SC (PXSC) operators ‘+<’, ‘-<’, ‘+>’, ‘->’, ‘*<’, ‘/<’, ‘*>’, and ‘/>’ are not yet implemented into GNU Pascal but may be defined by the user (see below).
GNU Pascal allows the (re-)definition of binary operators according to the Pascal-SC (PXSC) syntax. The following vector addition example illustrates how to do this:
program OperatorDemo; type Vector3 = record x, y, z: Real; end; var a, b, c: Vector3 = (1, 2, 3); operator + (u, v: Vector3) w: Vector3; begin w.x := u.x + v.x; w.y := u.y + v.y; w.z := u.z + v.z; end; begin c := a + b end.
Between the closing parenthesis of the argument list and the result variable (‘w’ in the above example), GPC allows an optional equal sign. This is not allowed in PXSC, but it is consistent with Extended Pascal's function result variable definitions, where the equal sign is obligatory (but also optional in GPC).
The argument types needn't be equal, and the name of the operator may be an identifier instead of a known symbol. You cannot define new symbols in GPC.
The PXSC operators ‘+>’, ‘+<’, etc. for exact numerical calculations currently are not implemented in GPC, but you can define them. Also, the other real-type operators do not meet the requirements of PXSC; a module which fixes that would be a welcome contribution.
All the following works in GPC:
procedure Foo (protected a, b, c: Integer); { 3 arguments } procedure Foo (a, b, c, protected: Integer); { 4 arguments } procedure Foo (a, b, protected, c: Integer); { 4 arguments } procedure Foo (protected: Integer); { 1 argument } procedure Foo (var protected: Integer); { 1 argument } procedure Foo (protected protected: Integer); { 1 argument }
Furthermore, GPC supports const
, according to BP, which is
equivalent to either protected
or protected var
, up to
the compiler's discretion.
A feature of Standard Pascal level 1.
Borland Pascal “open array” formal parameters are implemented into GPC. Within the function body, they have integer type index with lower bound 0.
In constrast to conformant arrays (which are not supported by BP), open arrays allow any ordinal type as the index of the actual parameter (which is useful, e.g., if you want to be able to pass values of any enumeration type). However, they lose information about the lower bound (which is a problem, e.g., if you want to return information to the caller that relates to the actual array index, like the function ‘IOSelect’ in the Run Time System does).
GPC allows the access of parts (“slices”) of strings as defined in Extended Pascal. For example:
program StringSliceDemo; const HelloWorld = 'Hello, world!'; begin WriteLn (HelloWorld[8 .. 12]) { yields `world' } end.
As an extension, it also allows write access to a string slice:
program SliceWriteDemo; var s: String (42) = 'Hello, world!'; begin s[8 .. 12] := 'folks'; WriteLn (s) { yields `Hello, folks!' } end.
As a further extension, GPC allows slice access also to non-string arrays. However, the usefulness of this feature is rather limited because of Pascal's strict type checking rules: If you have, e.g., an ‘array [1 .. 10] of Integer’ and take a slice ‘[1 .. 5]’ of it, it will not be compatible to another ‘array [1 .. 5] of Integer’ because distinct array types are not compatible in Pascal, even if they look the same.
However, array slice access can be used in connection with conformant or open array parameters. See the program arrayslicedemo.pas (in the demos directory) for an example.
GPC allows to increment, decrement, compare, and subtract pointers or to use them in ‘for’ loops just like the C language.
GPC implements the address operator @
(a Borland Pascal
extension).
program PointerArithmeticDemo; var a: array [1 .. 7] of Char; p, q: ^Char; i: Integer; {$X+} { We need extended syntax for pointer arithmetic } begin for p := @a[1] to @a[7] do p^ := 'x'; p := @a[7]; q := @a[3]; while p > q do begin p^ := 'y'; Dec (p) end; p := @a[7]; q := @a[3]; i := q - p; { yields 4 } end.
Incrementing a pointer by one means to increment the address it contains by the size of the variable it is pointing to. For typeless pointers (‘Pointer’), the address is incremented by one instead.
Similar things hold when decrementing a pointer.
Subtracting two pointers yields the number of variables pointed to between both pointers, i.e. the difference of the addresses divided by the size of the variables pointed to. The pointers must be of the same type.
In some cases, especially in low-level situations, Pascal's strong typing can be an obstacle. To temporarily circumvent this, GPC defines explicit “type casts” in a Borland Pascal compatible way.
There are two kinds of type casts, value type casts and variable type casts.
Value type casts
To convert a value of one data type into another type, you can use the target type like the name of a function that is called. The value to be converted can be a variable or an expression. Both the value's type and the destination type must be ordinal or pointer types. The ordinal value (extended to pointers to mean the address) is preserved in the cast.
An example:
program TypeCastDemo; var Ch: Char; i: Integer; begin i := Integer (Ch) end.
Another, more complicated, example:
program TypeCst2Demo; type CharPtr = ^Char; CharArray = array [0 .. 99] of Char; CharArrayPtr = ^CharArray; var Foo1, Foo2: CharPtr; Bar: CharArrayPtr; {$X+} { We need extended syntax in order to use ``Succ'' on a pointer } begin Foo1 := CharPtr (Bar); Foo2 := CharPtr (Succ (Bar)) end.
However, because of risks involved with type casts, explained below, and because type-casts are non-standard, you should try to avoid type casts whenever possible – and it should be possible in most cases. For instance, the first example above could use the built-in function “Ord” instead of the type cast:
i := Ord (Ch);
The assignments in the second example could be written in the following way without any type casts:
Foo1 := @Bar^[0]; Foo2 := @Bar^[1];
Note: In the case of pointers, a warning is issued if the dereferenced target type requires a bigger alignment than the dereferenced source type (see Alignment).
Variable type casts
It is also possible to temporarily change the type of a variable (more generally, any “lvalue”, i.e. something whose address can be taken), without converting its contents in any way. This is called variable type casting.
The syntax is the same as for value type casting. The type-casted variable is still the same variable (memory location) as the original one, just with a different type. Outside of the type cast, the variable keeps its original type.
There are some important differences between value and variable type casting:
There are cases where a type-cast could be either a value or a variable cast. This is when both types are ordinal or pointer, and of the same size, and the value is an lvalue. Fortunately, in those cases, the results of both forms are the same, since the same ordinal values (or pointer addresses) are represented by the same bit patterns (when of the same size). Therefore, it doesn't matter which form of type-casting is actually used in these cases.
When dealing with objects (see OOP), it is sometimes necessary to cast a polymorphic pointer to an object into a pointer to a more specialized (derived) object (after checking the actual type). However, the ‘as’ operator is a safer approach, so type-casts should be used there only for backward-compatibility (e.g., to BP).
See also: absolute, Alignment, Endianness, OOP, Ord, Chr, Round, Trunc.
GNU Pascal allows multiple object models. The oldest one follows the object model of Borland Pascal 7.0. The BP object extensions are almost fully implemented into GPC. This includes inheritance, virtual and non-virtual methods, constructors, destructors, pointer compatibility, extended `New' syntax (with constructor call and/or as a Boolean function), extended `Dispose' syntax (with destructor call).
The Borland object model is different from the ISO draft, but now we have also partial support of ISO draft (plus the Borland Delphi Object Extensions which are quite similar to the ISO draft). Moreover most of traditional Mac Pascal object model is covered.
The syntax for an object type declaration is as follows:
program ObjectDemo; type Str100 = String (100); FooParentPtr = ^FooParent; FooPtr = ^Foo; FooParent = object constructor Init; destructor Done; virtual; procedure Bar (c: Real); virtual; function Baz (b, a, z: Char) = s: Str100; { not virtual } end; Foo = object (FooParent) x, y: Integer; constructor Init (a, b: Integer); destructor Done; virtual; procedure Bar (c: Real); virtual; { overrides `FooParent.Bar' } z: Real; { GPC extension: data fields after methods } function Baz: Boolean; { new function } end; constructor FooParent.Init; begin WriteLn ('FooParent.Init') end; destructor FooParent.Done; begin WriteLn ('I''m also done.') end; procedure FooParent.Bar (c: Real); begin WriteLn ('FooParent.Bar (', c, ')') end; function FooParent.Baz (b, a, z: Char) = s: Str100; begin WriteStr (s, 'FooParent.Baz (', b, ', ', a, ', ', z, ')') end; constructor Foo.Init (a, b: Integer); begin inherited Init; x := a; y := b; z := 3.4; FooParent.Bar (1.7) end; destructor Foo.Done; begin WriteLn ('I''m done.'); inherited Done end; procedure Foo.Bar (c: Real); begin WriteLn ('Foo.Bar (', c, ')') end; function Foo.Baz: Boolean; begin Baz := True end; var Ptr: FooParentPtr; begin Ptr := New (FooPtr, Init (2, 3)); Ptr^.Bar (3); Dispose (Ptr, Done); New (Ptr, Init); with Ptr^ do WriteLn (Baz ('b', 'a', 'z')) end.
Remarks:
A pointer to ‘FooParent’ may be assigned the address of a ‘Foo’ object. A ‘FooParent’ formal ‘var’ parameter may get a ‘Foo’ object as the actual parameter. In such cases, a call to a ‘virtual’ method calls the child's method, whereas a call to a non-‘virtual’ method selects the parent's one:
var MyFooParent: FooParentPtr; SomeFoo: Foo; [...] SomeFoo.Init (4, 2); MyFooParent := @SomeFoo; MyFooParent^.bar (3.14); { calls `foo.bar' } MyFooParent^.baz ('b', 'a', 'z'); { calls `fooParent.baz' } if SomeFoo.baz then { calls `foo.baz' } WriteLn ('Baz!');
In a method, an overwritten method of a parent object can be called either prefixing it with the parent type name, or using the keyword ‘inherited’:
procedure Foo.Bar (c: Real); begin z := c; inherited bar (z) { or: FooParent.Bar (z) } end;
Use ‘FooParent.bar (z)’ if you want to be sure that this method is called, even if somebody decides not to derive ‘foo’ directly from ‘fooParent’ but to have some intermediate object. If you want to call the method ‘bar’ of the immediate parent – whether it be ‘fooParent’ or whatever – use ‘inherited bar (z)’.
To allocate an object on the heap, use ‘New’ in one of the following manners:
var MyFoo: FooPtr; [...] New (MyFoo, Init (4, 2)); MyFooParent := New (FooPtr, Init (4, 2))
The second possibility has the advantage that ‘MyFoo’ needn't be a ‘FooPtr’ but can also be a ‘FooParentPtr’, i.e. a pointer to an ancestor of ‘foo’.
Destructors can and should be called within Dispose:
Dispose (MyFooParent, Fini)
GPC, like UCSD Pascal and BP, treats comments beginning with a
‘$’ immediately following the opening ‘{’ or ‘(*’ as
a compiler directive. As in Borland Pascal, {$...}
and
(*$...*)
are equivalent. When a single character plus a
‘+’ or ‘-’ follows, this is also called a compiler switch.
All of these directives are case-insensitive (but some of them have
case-sensitive arguments). Directives are local and can be changed
during one compilation (except include files etc. where this makes
no sense).
In general, compiler directives are compiler-dependent. (E.g., only
the include directive {$I FileName}
is common to UCSD and
BP.) Because of BP's popularity, GPC supports all of BP's compiler
directives (and ignores those that are unnecessary on its platforms
– these are those not listed below), but it knows a lot more
directives.
Some BP directives are – of course not by chance – just an
alternative notation for C preprocessor directives. But there are
differences: BP's conditional definitions
(‘{$define Foo}’) go into another name space than the
program's definitions. Therefore you can define conditionals and
check them via {$ifdef Foo}
, but the program will not see
them as an identifier ‘Foo’, so macros do not exist in Borland
Pascal.
GPC does support macros, but disables this feature when the ‘--no-macros’ option or the dialect option ‘--borland-pascal’ or ‘--delphi’ is given, to mimic BP's behaviour. Therefore, the following program will react differently when compiled with GPC either without special options or with, e.g., the ‘--borland-pascal’ option (and in the latter case, it behaves the same as when compiled with BP).
program MacroDemo; const Foo = 'Borland Pascal'; {$define Foo 'Default'} begin WriteLn (Foo) end.
Of course, you should not rely on such constructs in your programs. To test if the program is compiled with GPC, you can test the ‘__GPC__’ conditional, and to test the dialect used in GPC, you can test the dialect, e.g., with ‘{$ifopt borland-pascal}’.
In general, almost every GPC specific command line option (see GPC Command Line Options) can be turned into a compiler directive (exceptions are those options that contain directory names, such as ‘--unit-path’, because they refer to the installation on a particular system, and therefore should be set system-wide, rather than in a source file):
--foo {$foo}
--no-foo {$no-foo}
-Wbar {$W bar} { note the space after the ‘W’ }
-Wno-bar {$W no-bar}
The following table lists some such examples as well as all those directives that do not correspond to command-line options or have syntactical alternatives (for convenience and/or BP compatibility).
--[no-]short-circuit $B+ $B- like in Borland Pascal: $B- means short-circuit Boolean operators; $B+ complete evaluation --[no-]io-checking $I+ $I- like in Borland Pascal: enable/disable I/O checking --[no-]range-checking $R+ $R- like in Borland Pascal: enable/disable range checking --[no-]stack-checking $S+ $S- like in Borland Pascal: enable/disable stack checking --[no-]typed-address $T+ $T- like in Borland Pascal: make the result of the address operator and the Addr function a typed or untyped pointer -W[no-]warnings $W+ $W- enable/disable warnings. Note: in ‘--borland-pascal’ mode, the short version is disabled because $W+/$W- has a different meaning in Borland Pascal (which can safely be ignored in GPC), but the long version is still available. --[no-]extended-syntax $X+ $X- mostly like in Borland Pascal: enable/disable extended syntax (ignore function resuls, operator definitions, ‘PChar’, pointer arithmetic, ...) --borland-pascal disable or warn about GPC features --extended-pascal not supported by the standard or --pascal-sc dialect given, do not warn about its etc. ``dangerous'' features (especially BP). The dialect can be changed during one compilation via directives like, e.g., ‘{$borland-pascal}’. {$M Hello!} write message ‘Hello!’ to standard error during compilation. In ‘--borland-pascal’ mode, it is ignored it if only numbers follow (for compatibility to Borland Pascal's memory directive) {$define FOO} like in Borland Pascal: or define FOO (for conditional compilation) {$CIDefine FOO} (case-insensitively) --cidefine=FOO the same on the command line {$CSDefine FOO} define FOO case-sensitively -D FOO the same on the command line or Note: ‘--define’ on the command --csdefine=FOO line is case-sensitive like in GCC, or but ‘{$define}’ in the source code --define=FOO is case-insensitive like in BP {$define loop while True do} define ‘loop’ to be ‘while True do’ or as a macro like in C. The name of the {$CIDefine loop ...} macro is case-insensitive. Note: Macros are disabled in ‘--borland-pascal’ mode because BP doesn't support macros. --cidefine="loop=..." the same on the command line {$CSDefine loop ...} define a case-sensitive macro --csdefine="loop=..." the same on the command line or --define="loop=..." {$I FileName} like in Borland Pascal: include filename.pas (the name is converted to lower case) {$undef FOO} like in Borland Pascal: undefine FOO {$ifdef FOO} conditional compilation ... (like in Borland Pascal). {$else} Note: GPC predefines the symbol ... ‘__GPC__’ (with two leading {$endif} and trailing underscores). {$include "filename.pas"} include (case-sensitive) {$include <filename.pas>} the same, but don't search in the current directory...
and all the other C preprocessor directives.
You also can use the preprocessor directives in C style, e.g. ‘#include’, but this is deprecated because of possible confusion with Borland Pascal style ‘#42’ character constants. Besides, in the Pascal style, e.g. ‘{$include "foo.bar"}’, there may be more than one directive in the same line.
In this section we describe the routines and other declarations that are built into the compiler or part of the Run Time System, sorted by topics.
Extended Pascal treats files quite differently from Borland Pascal. GPC supports both forms, even in mixed ways, and provides many extensions.
@@ A lot missing here
function FileSize (FileName : String) : LongInt; var f: bindable file [0 .. MaxInt] of Char; b: BindingType; begin Unbind (f); b := Binding (f); b.Name := FileName; Bind(f, b); b := Binding(f); SeekRead (f, 0); if Empty (f) then FileSize := 0 else FileSize := LastPosition (f) + 1; Unbind(f); end;
Prospero's Extended Pascal has a bug in this case. Replace the MaxInt in the type definition of f by a sufficiently large integer. GNU Pascal works correct in this case.
Put
as
soon as possible and a Get
as late as possible. This should
avoid most of the problems sometimes considered to be the most
stupid feature of Pascal. When passing a file buffer as parameter
the buffer is validated when the parameter is passed.
program DirectAccessFileDemo; type DFile = file [1 .. 100] of Integer; var F: DFile; P, N: 1 .. 100; begin Rewrite (F); P := 42; N := 17; SeekWrite (F, P); Write (F, N) end.
The following direct access routines may be applied to a direct access file:
SeekRead (F, N); { Open file in inspection mode, seek to record N }
SeekWrite (F, N); { Open file in generation mode, seek to record N }
SeekUpdate (F, N); { Open file in update mode, seek to record N }
Update (F); { Writes F^, position not changed. F^ kept. }
p := Position (F); { Yield the current record number }
p := LastPosition (F); { Yield the last record number in file }
If the file is open for inspection or update, Get
may be applied.
If the file is open for generation or update, Put
may be applied.
program AssignTextDemo; var t: Text; Line: String (4096); begin Assign (t, 'mytext.txt'); Reset (t); while not EOF (t) do begin ReadLn (t, Line); WriteLn (Line) end end.
GPC supports these routines when applied to files. The compiler will reject binding of other object types.
Only the fields ‘Bound’ and ‘Name’ of the predefined record type ‘BindingType’ are required by Extended Pascal. Additionally, GPC implements some extensions. For the full definition of ‘BindingType’, see BindingType.
The following is an example of binding:
program BindingDemo (Input, Output, f); var f: bindable Text; b: BindingType; procedure BindFile (var f: Text); var b: BindingType; begin Unbind (f); b := Binding (f); repeat Write ('Enter a file name: '); ReadLn (b.Name); Bind (f, b); b := Binding (f); if not b.Bound then WriteLn ('File not bound -- try again.') until b.Bound end; begin BindFile (f); { Now the file f is bound to an external file. We can use the implementation defined fields of BindingType to check if the file exists and is readable, writable or executable. } b := Binding (f); Write ('The file '); if b.Existing then WriteLn ('exists.') else WriteLn ('does not exist.'); Write ('It is '); if not b.Readable then Write ('not '); Write ('readable, '); if not b.Writable then Write ('not '); Write ('writable and '); if not b.Executable then Write ('not '); WriteLn ('executable.') end.
Note that Prospero's Pascal defaults to creating the file if it does
not exists! You need to use Prospero's local addition of setting
b.Existing
to True
to work-around this. GPC does not
behave like this.
In the following description, s1
and s2
may be
arbitrary string expressions, s
is a variable of string type.
WriteStr (s, write-parameter-list)
ReadStr (s1, read-parameter-list)
Text
files. The semantics is closely modeled after file I/O.
Index (s1, s2)
s2
is empty, return 1 else if s1
is empty return 0
else returns the position of s2
in s1
(an integer).
Length (s1)
s1
(an integer from 0 .. s1.Capacity
).
Trim (s1)
s
.
SubStr (s1, i)
SubStr (s1, i, j)
s1
that contains j
characters starting from i
. If j
is missing, return
all the characters starting from i
.
EQ (s1, s2)
NE (s1, s2)
LT (s1, s2)
LE (s1, s2)
GT (s1, s2)
GE (s1, s2)
s1
and s2
. Returns
a boolean result. Strings are not padded with spaces.
s1 = s2
s1 <> s2
s1 < s2
s1 <= s2
s1 > s2
s1 >= s2
s1
and s2
. Returns a
boolean result. The shorter string is blank padded to length of the
longer one, but only in ‘--extended-pascal’ mode.
GPC supports string catenation with the +
operator or the
‘Concat’ function. All string-types are compatible, so you may
catenate any chars, fixed length strings and variable length
strings.
program ConcatDemo (Input, Output); var Ch : Char; Str : String (100); Str2: String (50); FStr: packed array [1 .. 20] of Char; begin Ch := '$'; FStr := 'demo'; { padded with blanks } Write ('Give me some chars to play with: '); ReadLn (Str); Str := '^' + 'prefix:' + Str + ':suffix:' + FStr + Ch; WriteLn (Concat ('Le', 'ng', 'th'), ' = ', Length (Str)); WriteLn (Str) end.
Note: The length of strings in GPC is limited only by the range of ‘Integer’ (at least 32 bits, i.e., 2 GB, on most platforms), or the available memory, whichever is smaller).
When trying to write programs portable to other EP compilers, it is however safe to assume a limit of about 32 KB. At least Prospero's Extended Pascal compiler limits strings to 32760 bytes. DEC Pascal limits strings to 65535 bytes.
GPC supports access to the command line arguments with the
BP compatible ParamStr
and ParamCount
functions.
ParamStr[0]
is the program name,
ParamStr[1] .. ParamStr[ParamCount]
are the arguments.
The program below accesses the command line arguments.
program CommandLineArgumentsDemo (Output); var Counter: Integer; begin WriteLn ('This program displays command line arguments one per line.'); for Counter := 0 to ParamCount do WriteLn ('Command line argument #', Counter, ' is `', ParamStr (Counter), '''') end.
Besides the standard ‘New’ and ‘Dispose’ routines, GPC
also allows BP style dynamic memory management with GetMem
and FreeMem
:
GetMem (MyPtr, 1024); FreeMem (MyPtr, 1024);
One somehow strange feature of Borland is not supported:
You cannot free parts of a variable with FreeMem
, while the
rest is still used and can be freed later by another FreeMem
call:
program PartialFreeMemDemo; type Vector = array [0 .. 1023] of Integer; VecPtr = ^Vector; var p, q: VecPtr; begin GetMem (p, 1024 * SizeOf (Integer)); q := VecPtr (@p^[512]); { ... } FreeMem (p, 512 * SizeOf (Integer)); { ... } FreeMem (q, 512 * SizeOf (Integer)); end.
shl
and
shr
exist in GPC as well as bitwise and
, or
,
xor
and not
for integer values.
2#100101 and (1 shl 5) = 2#100000
GPC also supports and
, or
, xor
and not
as procedures:
program BitOperatorProcedureDemo; var x: Integer; begin x := 7; and (x, 14); { sets x to 6 } xor (x, 3); { sets x to 5 } end.
Inc
and Dec
exist in GPC.
program IncDecDemo; var i: Integer; c: Char; begin Inc (i); { i := i + 1; } Dec (i, 7); { i := i - 7; } Inc (c, 3); { c := Succ (c, 3); } end.
Min
, Max
:
These are a GNU Pascal extension and work for reals as well as for
ordinal types. Mixing reals and integers is okay, the result is real
then.
@@ A lot of details missing here
+
, -
, *
, /
and
unary -
, +
pow
and **
)
Sqr
, SqRt
, Exp
, Ln
,
Sin
, Cos
, ArcSin
, ArcCos
, ArcTan
)
Re
, Im
and Arg
functions
Cmplx
or Polar
The following sample programs illustrates most of the Complex
type operations.
program ComplexOperationsDemo (Output); var z1, z2: Complex; Len, Angle: Real; begin z1 := Cmplx (2, 1); WriteLn; WriteLn ('Complex number z1 is: (', Re (z1) : 1, ',', Im (z1) : 1, ')'); WriteLn; z2 := Conjugate(z1); { GPC extension } WriteLn ('Conjugate of z1 is: (', Re (z2) : 1, ',', Im (z2) : 1, ')'); WriteLn; Len := Abs (z1); Angle := Arg (z1); WriteLn ('The polar representation of z1 is: Length=', Len : 1, ', Angle=', Angle : 1); WriteLn; z2 := Polar (Len, Angle); WriteLn ('Converting (Length, Angle) back to (x, y) gives: (', Re (z2) : 1, ',', Im (z2) : 1, ')'); WriteLn; WriteLn ('The following operations operate on the complex number z1'); WriteLn; z2 := ArcTan (z1); WriteLn ('ArcTan (z1) = (', Re (z2), ', ', Im (z2), ')'); WriteLn; z2 := z1 ** 3.141; WriteLn ('z1 ** 3.141 =', Re (z2), ', ', Im (z2), ')'); WriteLn; z2 := Sin (z1); WriteLn ('Sin (z1) = (', Re (z2), ', ', Im (z2), ')'); WriteLn ('(Cos, Ln, Exp, SqRt and Sqr exist also.)'); WriteLn; z2 := z1 pow 8; WriteLn ('z1 pow 8 = (', Re (z2), ', ', Im (z2), ')'); WriteLn; z2 := z1 pow (-8); WriteLn ('z1 pow (-8) = (', Re (z2), ', ', Im (z2), ')'); end.
GPC supports Standard Pascal set operations. In addition it supports
the Extended Pascal set operation symmetric difference
(set1 >< set2
) operation whose result consists of those
elements which are in exactly one of the operannds.
It also has a function that counts the elements in the set: ‘a := Card (set1)’.
In the following description, S1 and S2 are variables of set type, s is of the base type of the set.
S1 := S2
S1 + S2
S1 - S2
S1 * S2
S1 >< S2
S1 = S2
True
if
S1
has the same elements as S2
.
S1 <> S2
True
if
S1
does not have the same elements as S2
.
S1 < S2
S2 > S1
True
if
S1
is a strict subset of S2
.
S1 <= S2
S2 >= S1
True
if
S1
is a subset of (or equal to) S2
.
s in S1
s
and a set. Returns
boolean result. True
if s
is an element of S1
.
The following example demonstrates some set
operations. The results
of the operations are given in the comments.
program SetOpDemo; type TCharSet = set of Char; var S1, S2, S3: TCharSet; Result: Boolean; begin S1 := ['a', 'b', 'c']; S2 := ['c', 'd', 'e']; S3 := S1 + S2; { S3 = ['a', 'b', 'c', 'd', 'e'] } S3 := S1 * S2; { S3 = ['c'] } S3 := S1 - S2; { S3 = ['a', 'b'] } S3 := S1 >< S2; { S3 = ['a', 'b', 'd', 'e'] } S1 := ['c', 'd', 'e']; Result := S1 = S2; { False } Result := S1 < S2; { False } Result := S1 <= S2; { True } S1 := ['c', 'd']; Result := S1 <> S2; { True } Result := S2 > S1; { True } Result := S2 >= S1 { True } end.
procedure GetTimeStamp (var t: TimeStamp);
function Date (t: TimeStamp): packed array [1 .. DateLength] of Char;
function Time (t: TimeStamp): packed array [1 .. TimeLength] of Char;
DateLength
and TimeLength
are implementation dependent
constants.
GetTimeStamp (t)
fills the record ‘t’ with values. If
they are valid, the Boolean flags are set to True.
TimeStamp
is a predefined type in the Extended Pascal
standard. It may be extended in an implementation, and is indeed
extended in GPC. For the full definition of ‘TimeStamp’, see
TimeStamp.
The standardized GNU compiler back-end makes it relatively easy to share libraries between GNU Pascal and other GNU compilers. On Unix-like platforms (not on Dos-like platforms), the GNU compiler back-end usually complies to the standards defined for that system, so communication with other compilers should be easy, too.
In this chapter we discuss how to import libraries written in other languages, and how to import libraries written in GNU Pascal from other languages. While the examples will specialize to compatibility to GNU C, generalization is straightforward if you are familiar with the other language in question.
To use a function written in another language, you need to provide an external declaration for it – either in the program, or in the interface part of a unit, or a module.
Let's say you want to use the following C library from Pascal:
File `callc.c': #include <unistd.h> #include "callc.h" int foo = 1; void bar (void) { sleep (foo); }
File `callc.h': /* Actually, we wouldn't need this header file, and could instead put these prototypes into callc.c, unless we want to use callc.c also from other C source files. */ extern int foo; extern void bar (void);
Then your program can look like this:
program CallCDemo; {$L callc.c} { Or: `callc.o' if you don't have the source } var MyFoo: CInteger; external name 'foo'; procedure Bar; external name 'bar'; begin MyFoo := 42; Bar end.
Or, if you want to provide a ‘CallCUnit’ unit:
unit CallCUnit; interface var MyFoo: CInteger; external name 'foo'; procedure Bar; external name 'bar'; implementation {$L callc.c} { Or: `callc.o' if you don't have the source } end.
program CallCUDemo; uses CallCUnit; begin MyFoo := 42; Bar end.
You can either link your program manually with ‘callc.o’ or put a compiler directive ‘{$L callc.o}’ into your program or unit, and then GPC takes care of correct linking. If you have the source of the C library (you always have it if it is Free Software), you can even write ‘{$L callc.c}’ in the program (like above). Then GPC will also link with callc.o, but in addition GPC will run the C compiler whenever callc.c has changed if ‘--automake’ is given, too.
While it is often convenient, there is no must to give the C function ‘bar’ the name ‘Bar’ in Pascal; you can name it as you like (e.g., the variable ‘MyFoo’ has a C name of ‘foo’ in the example above).
If you omit the ‘name’, the default is the Pascal identifier, converted to lower-case. So, in this example, the ‘name’ could be omitted for ‘Bar’, but not for ‘MyFoo’.
It is important that data types of both languages are mapped correctly onto each other. C's ‘int’, for instance, translates to GPC's ‘CInteger’, and C's ‘unsigned long’ to ‘MedCard’. For a complete list of integer types with their C counterparts, see Integer Types.
In some cases it can be reasonable to translate a C pointer parameter to a Pascal ‘var’ parameter. Since const parameters in GPC can be passed by value or by reference internally, possibly depending on the system, ‘const foo *’ parameters to C functions cannot reliably be declared as ‘const’ in Pascal. However, Extended Pascal's ‘protected var’ can be used since this guarantees passing by reference.
Some libraries provide a ‘main’ function and require your program's “main” to be named differently. To achive this with GPC, invoke it with an option ‘--gpc-main="GPCmain"’ (where ‘GPCmain’ is an example how you might want to name the program). You can also write it into your source as a directive ‘{$gpc-main="GPCmain"}’.
The .o files produced by GPC are in the same format as those of all other GNU compilers, so there is no problem in writing libraries for other languages in Pascal. To use them, you will need to write kind of interface – a header file in C. However there are some things to take into account, especially if your Pascal unit exports objects:
procedure FooBAR; attribute (name = 'FooBAR'); begin WriteLn ('FooBAR') end;
This one can be imported from C with ‘extern void FooBar()’.
type VMT = record ObjectSize: PtrInt; { Size of object in bytes } NegObjectSize: PtrInt; { Negated size } Methods: array [1 .. n] of procedure; { Pointers to the virtual methods. The entries are of the repective procedure or function types. } end;
You can call a virtual method of an object from C if you explicitly declare this ‘struct’ and explicitly dereference the ‘Fun’ array. The VMT of an object ‘FooBAR’ is an external (in C sense) variable ‘vmt_Foobar’ internally.
This chapter discusses shortly how to use the Internationalization (I18N) features of GNU Pascal.
You need to have gettext installed. Try to compile demos/gettextdemo.pas. Furthermore, you should download a tool named ‘pas2po’ from http://www.gnu-pascal.org/contrib/eike/.
We would like to translate the messages provided with this simple example different languages (here: German) without touching the source for each language:
program Hello1; begin WriteLn ('Hello, World!'); WriteLn ('The answer of the questions is: ', 42) end.
To do so, we must prepare the source to use gettext:
program Hello2; uses GPC, Intl; var s: TString; begin Discard (BindTextDomain ('hello2', '/usr/share/locale/')); Discard (TextDomain ('hello2')); WriteLn (GetText ('Hello, World!')); s := FormatString (GetText ('The answer of the questions is %s'), 42); WriteLn (s) end.
‘BindTextDomain’ sets the path to find our message catalogs in the system. This path is system dependent. ‘TextDomain’ tells the program to use this catalog. ‘GetText’ looks up the given string in the catalog and returns a translated string within the current locale settings. ‘FormatString’ replaces some format specifiers with the following argument. ‘%s’ is the first following argument. After this step is done, we do not need to touch the sourcefile any longer. The output of this program is as follows:
Hello, World! The answer of the questions is 42
There are lots of strings in the above example, but only those surrounded with ‘GetText’ should be translated. We use ‘pas2po hello2.pas -o hello2.po’ to extract the messages. The output is:
# This file was created by pas2po with 'hello2.pas'. # Please change this file manually. # SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. # Copyright (C) YEAR Free Software Foundation, Inc. # FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2003-04-27 20:48+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" "Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n" "Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=CHARSET\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" #hello2.pas:10 msgid "Hello, World!" msgstr "" #hello2.pas:11 msgid "The answer of the questions is %s" msgstr ""
Now we translate the message ids into German language, and set some needful informations at their appropriate places. The following steps must be repeated for each language we would like to support:
# This file was created by pas2po with 'hello2.pas'. # Copyright (C) 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # Eike Lange <eike@g-n-u.de>, 2003. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Hello2 1.0\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2003-04-27 12:00+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2003-04-27 12:06+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Eike Lange <eike@g-n-u.de>\n" "Language-Team: de <de@li.org>\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=ISO-8859-1\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" #hello2.pas:10 msgid "Hello, World!" msgstr "Hallo, Welt!" #hello2.pas:11 msgid "The answer of the questions is %s" msgstr "'%s' lautet die Antwort auf die Frage."
Please note that we swapped text and numeric arguments and added some single quotes arround the first argument. We compile the message catalog with ‘msgfmt -vv hello2.po -o hello2.mo’ and install the file hello2.mo at /usr/share/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/ With a german locale setting, the output should be as follows:
Hallo, Welt! '42' lautet die Antwort auf die Frage.
The topmost path where message catalogs reside is system dependent:
Below is a Pascal source of the declarations in GPC's Run Time System (RTS). A file gpc.pas with the same contents is included in the GPC distribution in a units subdirectory of the directory containing libgcc.a. (To find out the correct directory for your installation, type ‘gpc --print-file-name=units’ on the command line.)
{ This file was generated automatically by make-gpc-pas. DO NOT CHANGE THIS FILE MANUALLY! } { Pascal declarations of the GPC Run Time System that are visible to each program. This unit contains Pascal declarations of many RTS routines which are not built into the compiler and can be called from programs. Don't copy the declarations from this unit into your programs, but rather include this unit with a ‘uses’ statement. The reason is that the internal declarations, e.g. the linker names, may change, and this unit will be changed accordingly. @@In the future, this unit might be included into every program automatically, so there will be no need for a ‘uses’ statement to make the declarations here available. Note about ‘protected var’ parameters: Since ‘const’ parameters in GPC may be passed by value *or* by reference internally, possibly depending on the system, ‘const foo *’ parameters to C functions *cannot* reliably be declared as ‘const’ in Pascal. However, Extended Pascal's ‘protected var’ can be used since this guarantees passing by reference. Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Authors: Jukka Virtanen <jtv@hut.fi> Peter Gerwinski <peter@gerwinski.de> Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> J.J. v.der Heijden <j.j.vanderheijden@student.utwente.nl> Nicola Girardi <nicola@g-n-u.de> Prof. Abimbola A. Olowofoyeku <African_Chief@bigfoot.com> Emil Jerabek <jerabek@math.cas.cz> Maurice Lombardi <Maurice.Lombardi@ujf-grenoble.fr> Toby Ewing <ewing@iastate.edu> Mirsad Todorovac <mtodorov_69@yahoo.com> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ <> 20060325} {$error Trying to compile gpc.pas with a non-matching GPC version is likely to cause problems. In case you are building the RTS separately from GPC, make sure you install a current GPC version previously. If you are building GPC now and this message appears, something is wrong -- if you are overriding the GCC_FOR_TARGET or GPC_FOR_TARGET make variables, this might be the problem. If you are cross-building GPC, build and install a current GPC cross-compiler first, sorry. If that's not the case, please report it as a bug. If you are not building GPC or the RTS currently, you might have installed things in the wrong place, so the compiler and RTS versions do not match.} {$endif} { Command-line options must not change the layout of RTS types declared here. } {$no-pack-struct, maximum-field-alignment 0} module GPC; export GPC = all; GPC_CP = (ERead { @@ not really, but an empty export doesn't work } ); GPC_EP = (ERead { @@ not really, but an empty export doesn't work } ); GPC_BP = (MaxLongInt, ExitCode, ErrorAddr, FileMode, Pos); GPC_Delphi = (MaxLongInt, Int64, InitProc, EConvertError, ExitCode, ErrorAddr, FileMode, Pos, SetString, StringOfChar, TextFile, AssignFile, CloseFile); type GPC_FDR = AnyFile; { Pascal declarations of the GPC Run Time System routines that are implemented in C, from rtsc.pas } const { Maximum size of a variable } MaxVarSize = MaxInt div 8; { If set, characters >= #$80 are assumed to be letters even if the locale routines don't say so. This is a kludge because some systems don't have correct non-English locale tables. } var FakeHighLetters: Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_FakeHighLetters'); external; type PCStrings = ^TCStrings; TCStrings = array [0 .. MaxVarSize div SizeOf (CString) - 1] of CString; Int64 = Integer attribute (Size = 64); UnixTimeType = LongInt; { This is hard-coded in the compiler. Do not change here. } MicroSecondTimeType = LongInt; FileSizeType = LongInt; SignedSizeType = Integer attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (SizeType)); TSignalHandler = procedure (Signal: CInteger); StatFSBuffer = record BlockSize, BlocksTotal, BlocksFree: LongInt; FilesTotal, FilesFree: CInteger end; InternalSelectType = record Handle: CInteger; Read, Write, Exception: Boolean end; PString = ^String; { ‘Max’ so the range of the array does not become invalid for Count = 0 } PPStrings = ^TPStrings; TPStrings (Count: Cardinal) = array [1 .. Max (Count, 1)] of PString; GlobBuffer = record Result: PPStrings; Internal1: Pointer; Internal2: PCStrings; Internal3: CInteger end; { Mathematical routines } function SinH (x: Real): Real; attribute (const); external name '_p_SinH'; function CosH (x: Real): Real; attribute (const); external name '_p_CosH'; function ArcTan2 (y: Real; x: Real): Real; attribute (const); external name '_p_ArcTan2'; function IsInfinity (x: LongReal): Boolean; attribute (const); external name '_p_IsInfinity'; function IsNotANumber (x: LongReal): Boolean; attribute (const); external name '_p_IsNotANumber'; procedure SplitReal (x: LongReal; var Exponent: CInteger; var Mantissa: LongReal); external name '_p_SplitReal'; { Character routines } { Convert a character to lower case, according to the current locale. } function LoCase (ch: Char): Char; attribute (const); external name '_p_LoCase'; function IsUpCase (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute (const); external name '_p_IsUpCase'; function IsLoCase (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute (const); external name '_p_IsLoCase'; function IsAlpha (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute (const); external name '_p_IsAlpha'; function IsAlphaNum (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute (const); external name '_p_IsAlphaNum'; function IsAlphaNumUnderscore (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute (const); external name '_p_IsAlphaNumUnderscore'; function IsSpace (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute (const); external name '_p_IsSpace'; function IsPrintable (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute (const); external name '_p_IsPrintable'; { Time routines } { Sleep for a given number of seconds. } procedure Sleep (Seconds: CInteger); external name '_p_Sleep'; { Sleep for a given number of microseconds. } procedure SleepMicroSeconds (MicroSeconds: CInteger); external name '_p_SleepMicroSeconds'; { Set an alarm timer. } function Alarm (Seconds: CInteger): CInteger; external name '_p_Alarm'; { Convert a Unix time value to broken-down local time. All parameters except Time may be Null. } procedure UnixTimeToTime (Time: UnixTimeType; var Year: CInteger; var Month: CInteger; var Day: CInteger; var Hour: CInteger; var Minute: CInteger; var Second: CInteger; var TimeZone: CInteger; var DST: Boolean; var TZName1: CString; var TZName2: CString); external name '_p_UnixTimeToTime'; { Convert broken-down local time to a Unix time value. } function TimeToUnixTime (Year: CInteger; Month: CInteger; Day: CInteger; Hour: CInteger; Minute: CInteger; Second: CInteger): UnixTimeType; external name '_p_TimeToUnixTime'; { Get the real time. MicroSecond can be Null and is ignored then. } function GetUnixTime (var MicroSecond: CInteger): UnixTimeType; external name '_p_GetUnixTime'; { Get the CPU time used. MicroSecond can be Null and is ignored then. } function GetCPUTime (var MicroSecond: CInteger): CInteger; external name '_p_GetCPUTime'; { Signal and process routines } { Extract information from the status returned by PWait } function StatusExited (Status: CInteger): Boolean; attribute (const); external name '_p_StatusExited'; function StatusExitCode (Status: CInteger): CInteger; attribute (const); external name '_p_StatusExitCode'; function StatusSignaled (Status: CInteger): Boolean; attribute (const); external name '_p_StatusSignaled'; function StatusTermSignal (Status: CInteger): CInteger; attribute (const); external name '_p_StatusTermSignal'; function StatusStopped (Status: CInteger): Boolean; attribute (const); external name '_p_StatusStopped'; function StatusStopSignal (Status: CInteger): CInteger; attribute (const); external name '_p_StatusStopSignal'; { Install a signal handler and optionally return the previous handler. OldHandler and OldRestart may be Null. } function InstallSignalHandler (Signal: CInteger; Handler: TSignalHandler; Restart: Boolean; UnlessIgnored: Boolean; var OldHandler: TSignalHandler; var OldRestart: Boolean): Boolean; external name '_p_InstallSignalHandler'; { Block or unblock a signal. } procedure BlockSignal (Signal: CInteger; Block: Boolean); external name '_p_BlockSignal'; { Test whether a signal is blocked. } function SignalBlocked (Signal: CInteger): Boolean; external name '_p_SignalBlocked'; { Sends a signal to a process. Returns True if successful. If Signal is 0, it doesn't send a signal, but still checks whether it would be possible to send a signal to the given process. } function Kill (PID: CInteger; Signal: CInteger): Boolean; external name '_p_Kill'; { Constant for WaitPID } const AnyChild = -1; { Waits for a child process with the given PID (or any child process if PID = AnyChild) to terminate or be stopped. Returns the PID of the process. WStatus will contain the status and can be evaluated with StatusExited etc.. If nothing happened, and Block is False, the function will return 0, and WStatus will be 0. If an error occurred (especially on single tasking systems where WaitPID is not possible), the function will return a negative value, and WStatus will be 0. } function WaitPID (PID: CInteger; var WStatus: CInteger; Block: Boolean): CInteger; external name '_p_WaitPID'; { Returns the process ID. } function ProcessID: CInteger; external name '_p_ProcessID'; { Returns the process group. } function ProcessGroup: CInteger; external name '_p_ProcessGroup'; { Returns the real or effective user ID of the process. } function UserID (Effective: Boolean): CInteger; external name '_p_UserID'; { Tries to change the real and/or effective user ID. } function SetUserID (Real: CInteger; Effective: CInteger): Boolean; external name '_p_SetUserID'; { Returns the real or effective group ID of the process. } function GroupID (Effective: Boolean): CInteger; external name '_p_GroupID'; { Tries to change the real and/or effective group ID. } function SetGroupID (Real: CInteger; Effective: CInteger): Boolean; external name '_p_SetGroupID'; { Low-level file routines. Mostly for internal use. } { Get information about a file system. } function StatFS (Path: CString; var Buf: StatFSBuffer): Boolean; external name '_p_StatFS'; function CStringOpenDir (DirName: CString): Pointer; external name '_p_CStringOpenDir'; function CStringReadDir (Dir: Pointer): CString; external name '_p_CStringReadDir'; procedure CStringCloseDir (Dir: Pointer); external name '_p_CStringCloseDir'; { Returns the value of the symlink FileName in a CString allocated from the heap. Returns nil if it is no symlink or the function is not supported. } function ReadLink (FileName: CString): CString; external name '_p_ReadLink'; { Returns a pointer to a *static* buffer! } function CStringRealPath (Path: CString): CString; external name '_p_CStringRealPath'; { File mode constants that are ORed for BindingType.Mode, ChMod, CStringChMod and Stat. The values below are valid for all OSs (as far as supported). If the OS uses different values, they're converted internally. } const fm_SetUID = 8#4000; fm_SetGID = 8#2000; fm_Sticky = 8#1000; fm_UserReadable = 8#400; fm_UserWritable = 8#200; fm_UserExecutable = 8#100; fm_GroupReadable = 8#40; fm_GroupWritable = 8#20; fm_GroupExecutable = 8#10; fm_OthersReadable = 8#4; fm_OthersWritable = 8#2; fm_OthersExecutable = 8#1; { Constants for Access and OpenHandle } const MODE_EXEC = 1 shl 0; MODE_WRITE = 1 shl 1; MODE_READ = 1 shl 2; MODE_FILE = 1 shl 3; MODE_CREATE = 1 shl 4; MODE_EXCL = 1 shl 5; MODE_TRUNCATE = 1 shl 6; MODE_APPEND = 1 shl 7; MODE_BINARY = 1 shl 8; { Check if a file name is accessible. } function Access (FileName: CString; Request: CInteger): CInteger; external name '_p_Access'; { Get information about a file. Any argument except FileName can be Null. } function Stat (FileName: CString; var Size: FileSizeType; var ATime: UnixTimeType; var MTime: UnixTimeType; var CTime: UnixTimeType; var User: CInteger; var Group: CInteger; var Mode: CInteger; var Device: CInteger; var INode: CInteger; var Links: CInteger; var SymLink: Boolean; var Dir: Boolean; var Special: Boolean): CInteger; external name '_p_Stat'; function OpenHandle (FileName: CString; Mode: CInteger): CInteger; external name '_p_OpenHandle'; function ReadHandle (Handle: CInteger; Buffer: Pointer; Size: SizeType): SignedSizeType; external name '_p_ReadHandle'; function WriteHandle (Handle: CInteger; Buffer: Pointer; Size: SizeType): SignedSizeType; external name '_p_WriteHandle'; function CloseHandle (Handle: CInteger): CInteger; external name '_p_CloseHandle'; procedure FlushHandle (Handle: CInteger); external name '_p_FlushHandle'; function DupHandle (Src: CInteger; Dest: CInteger): CInteger; external name '_p_DupHandle'; function SetFileMode (Handle: CInteger; Mode: CInteger; On: Boolean): CInteger; attribute (ignorable); external name '_p_SetFileMode'; function CStringRename (OldName: CString; NewName: CString): CInteger; external name '_p_CStringRename'; function CStringUnlink (FileName: CString): CInteger; external name '_p_CStringUnlink'; function CStringChDir (FileName: CString): CInteger; external name '_p_CStringChDir'; function CStringMkDir (FileName: CString): CInteger; external name '_p_CStringMkDir'; function CStringRmDir (FileName: CString): CInteger; external name '_p_CStringRmDir'; function UMask (Mask: CInteger): CInteger; attribute (ignorable); external name '_p_UMask'; function CStringChMod (FileName: CString; Mode: CInteger): CInteger; external name '_p_CStringChMod'; function CStringChOwn (FileName: CString; Owner: CInteger; Group: CInteger): CInteger; external name '_p_CStringChOwn'; function CStringUTime (FileName: CString; AccessTime: UnixTimeType; ModificationTime: UnixTimeType): CInteger; external name '_p_CStringUTime'; { Constants for SeekHandle } const SeekAbsolute = 0; SeekRelative = 1; SeekFileEnd = 2; { Seek to a position on a file handle. } function SeekHandle (Handle: CInteger; Offset: FileSizeType; Whence: CInteger): FileSizeType; external name '_p_SeekHandle'; function TruncateHandle (Handle: CInteger; Size: FileSizeType): CInteger; external name '_p_TruncateHandle'; function LockHandle (Handle: CInteger; WriteLock: Boolean; Block: Boolean): Boolean; external name '_p_LockHandle'; function UnlockHandle (Handle: CInteger): Boolean; external name '_p_UnlockHandle'; function SelectHandle (Count: CInteger; var Events: InternalSelectType; MicroSeconds: MicroSecondTimeType): CInteger; external name '_p_SelectHandle'; { Constants for MMapHandle and MemoryMap } const mm_Readable = 1; mm_Writable = 2; mm_Executable = 4; { Try to map (a part of) a file to memory. } function MMapHandle (Start: Pointer; Length: SizeType; Access: CInteger; Shared: Boolean; Handle: CInteger; Offset: FileSizeType): Pointer; external name '_p_MMapHandle'; { Unmap a previous memory mapping. } function MUnMapHandle (Start: Pointer; Length: SizeType): CInteger; external name '_p_MUnMapHandle'; { Returns the file name of the terminal device that is open on Handle. Returns nil if (and only if) Handle is not open or not connected to a terminal. If NeedName is False, it doesn't bother to search for the real name and just returns DefaultName if it is a terminal and nil otherwise. DefaultName is also returned if NeedName is True, Handle is connected to a terminal, but the system does not provide information about the real file name. } function GetTerminalNameHandle (Handle: CInteger; NeedName: Boolean; DefaultName: CString): CString; external name '_p_GetTerminalNameHandle'; { System routines } { Sets the process group of Process (or the current one if Process is 0) to ProcessGroup (or its PID if ProcessGroup is 0). Returns True if successful. } function SetProcessGroup (Process: CInteger; ProcessGroup: CInteger): Boolean; external name '_p_SetProcessGroup'; { Sets the process group of a terminal given by Terminal (as a file handle) to ProcessGroup. ProcessGroup must be the ID of a process group in the same session. Returns True if successful. } function SetTerminalProcessGroup (Handle: CInteger; ProcessGroup: CInteger): Boolean; external name '_p_SetTerminalProcessGroup'; { Returns the process group of a terminal given by Terminal (as a file handle), or -1 on error. } function GetTerminalProcessGroup (Handle: CInteger): CInteger; external name '_p_GetTerminalProcessGroup'; { Set the standard input's signal generation, if it is a terminal. } procedure SetInputSignals (Signals: Boolean); external name '_p_SetInputSignals'; { Get the standard input's signal generation, if it is a terminal. } function GetInputSignals: Boolean; external name '_p_GetInputSignals'; { Internal routines } { Returns system information if available. Fields not available will be set to nil. } procedure CStringSystemInfo (var SysName: CString; var NodeName: CString; var Release: CString; var Version: CString; var Machine: CString; var DomainName: CString); external name '_p_CStringSystemInfo'; { Returns the path of the running executable *if possible*. } function CStringExecutablePath (Buffer: CString): CString; external name '_p_CStringExecutablePath'; { Sets ErrNo to the value of ‘errno’ and returns the description for this error. May return nil if not supported! ErrNo may be Null (then only the description is returned). } function CStringStrError (var ErrNo: CInteger): CString; external name '_p_CStringStrError'; { Mathematical routines, from math.pas } function Ln1Plus (x: Real) = y: Real; attribute (const, name = '_p_Ln1Plus'); external; { String handling routines (lower level), from string1.pas } { TString is a string type that is used for function results and local variables, as long as undiscriminated strings are not allowed there. The default size of 2048 characters should be enough for file names on any system, but can be changed when necessary. It should be at least as big as MAXPATHLEN. } const MaxLongInt = High (LongInt); TStringSize = 2048; SpaceCharacters = [' ', #9]; NewLine = "\n"; { the separator of lines within a string } LineBreak = {$if defined (__OS_DOS__) and not defined (__CYGWIN__) and not defined (__MSYS__)} "\r\n" {$else} "\n" {$endif}; { the separator of lines within a file } type TString = String (TStringSize); TStringBuf = packed array [0 .. TStringSize] of Char; CharSet = set of Char; Str64 = String (64); TInteger2StringBase = Cardinal(2) .. Cardinal(36); TInteger2StringWidth = 0 .. High (TString); var NumericBaseDigits: array [0 .. 35] of Char; attribute (const, name = '_p_NumericBaseDigits'); external; NumericBaseDigitsUpper: array [0 .. 35] of Char; attribute (const, name = '_p_NumericBaseDigitsUpper'); external; CParamCount: Integer; attribute (name = '_p_CParamCount'); external; CParameters: PCStrings; attribute (name = '_p_CParameters'); external; function MemCmp (const s1, s2; Size: SizeType): CInteger; external name 'memcmp'; function MemComp (const s1, s2; Size: SizeType): CInteger; external name 'memcmp'; function MemCompCase (const s1, s2; Size: SizeType): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_MemCompCase'); external; procedure UpCaseString (var s: String); attribute (name = '_p_UpCaseString'); external; procedure LoCaseString (var s: String); attribute (name = '_p_LoCaseString'); external; function UpCaseStr (const s: String) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_UpCaseStr'); external; function LoCaseStr (const s: String) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_LoCaseStr'); external; function StrEqualCase (const s1, s2: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_StrEqualCase'); external; function Pos (const SubString, s: String): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_Pos'); external; function PosChar (const ch: Char; const s: String): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_PosChar'); external; function LastPos (const SubString, s: String): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_LastPos'); external; function PosCase (const SubString, s: String): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_PosCase'); external; function LastPosCase (const SubString, s: String): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_LastPosCase'); external; function CharPos (const Chars: CharSet; const s: String): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_CharPos'); external; function LastCharPos (const Chars: CharSet; const s: String): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_LastCharPos'); external; function PosFrom (const SubString, s: String; From: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_PosFrom'); external; function LastPosTill (const SubString, s: String; Till: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_LastPosTill'); external; function PosFromCase (const SubString, s: String; From: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_PosFromCase'); external; function LastPosTillCase (const SubString, s: String; Till: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_LastPosTillCase'); external; function CharPosFrom (const Chars: CharSet; const s: String; From: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_CharPosFrom'); external; function LastCharPosTill (const Chars: CharSet; const s: String; Till: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_LastCharPosTill'); external; function IsPrefix (const Prefix, s: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_IsPrefix'); external; function IsSuffix (const Suffix, s: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_IsSuffix'); external; function IsPrefixCase (const Prefix, s: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_IsPrefixCase'); external; function IsSuffixCase (const Suffix, s: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_IsSuffixCase'); external; function CStringLength (Src: CString): SizeType; attribute (inline, name = '_p_CStringLength'); external; function CStringEnd (Src: CString): CString; attribute (inline, name = '_p_CStringEnd'); external; function CStringNew (Src: CString): CString; attribute (name = '_p_CStringNew'); external; function CStringComp (s1, s2: CString): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_CStringComp'); external; function CStringCaseComp (s1, s2: CString): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_CStringCaseComp'); external; function CStringLComp (s1, s2: CString; MaxLen: SizeType): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_CStringLComp'); external; function CStringLCaseComp (s1, s2: CString; MaxLen: SizeType): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_CStringLCaseComp'); external; function CStringCopy (Dest, Source: CString): CString; attribute (ignorable, name = '_p_CStringCopy'); external; function CStringCopyEnd (Dest, Source: CString): CString; attribute (ignorable, name = '_p_CStringCopyEnd'); external; function CStringLCopy (Dest, Source: CString; MaxLen: SizeType): CString; attribute (ignorable, name = '_p_CStringLCopy'); external; function CStringMove (Dest, Source: CString; Count: SizeType): CString; attribute (ignorable, name = '_p_CStringMove'); external; function CStringCat (Dest, Source: CString): CString; attribute (ignorable, name = '_p_CStringCat'); external; function CStringLCat (Dest, Source: CString; MaxLen: SizeType): CString; attribute (ignorable, name = '_p_CStringLCat'); external; function CStringChPos (Src: CString; ch: Char): CString; attribute (inline, name = '_p_CStringChPos'); external; function CStringLastChPos (Src: CString; ch: Char): CString; attribute (inline, name = '_p_CStringLastChPos'); external; function CStringPos (s, SubString: CString): CString; attribute (name = '_p_CStringPos'); external; function CStringLastPos (s, SubString: CString): CString; attribute (name = '_p_CStringLastPos'); external; function CStringCasePos (s, SubString: CString): CString; attribute (name = '_p_CStringCasePos'); external; function CStringLastCasePos (s, SubString: CString): CString; attribute (name = '_p_CStringLastCasePos'); external; function CStringUpCase (s: CString): CString; attribute (name = '_p_CStringUpCase'); external; function CStringLoCase (s: CString): CString; attribute (name = '_p_CStringLoCase'); external; function CStringIsEmpty (s: CString): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_CStringIsEmpty'); external; function NewCString (const Source: String): CString; attribute (name = '_p_NewCString'); external; function CStringCopyString (Dest: CString; const Source: String): CString; attribute (name = '_p_CStringCopyString'); external; procedure CopyCString (Source: CString; var Dest: String); attribute (name = '_p_CopyCString'); external; function NewString (const s: String) = Result: PString; attribute (name = '_p_NewString'); external; procedure DisposeString (p: PString); external name '_p_Dispose'; procedure SetString (var s: String; Buffer: PChar; Count: Integer); attribute (name = '_p_SetString'); external; function StringOfChar (ch: Char; Count: Integer) = s: TString; attribute (name = '_p_StringOfChar'); external; procedure TrimLeft (var s: String); attribute (name = '_p_TrimLeft'); external; procedure TrimRight (var s: String); attribute (name = '_p_TrimRight'); external; procedure TrimBoth (var s: String); attribute (name = '_p_TrimBoth'); external; function TrimLeftStr (const s: String) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_TrimLeftStr'); external; function TrimRightStr (const s: String) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_TrimRightStr'); external; function TrimBothStr (const s: String) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_TrimBothStr'); external; function LTrim (const s: String) = Result: TString; external name '_p_TrimLeftStr'; function GetStringCapacity (const s: String): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_GetStringCapacity'); external; { A shortcut for a common use of WriteStr as a function } function Integer2String (i: Integer) = s: Str64; attribute (name = '_p_Integer2String'); external; { Convert integer n to string in base Base. } function Integer2StringBase (n: LongestInt; Base: TInteger2StringBase): TString; attribute (name = '_p_Integer2StringBase'); external; { Convert integer n to string in base Base, with sign, optionally in uppercase representation and with printed base, padded with leading zeroes between ‘[<Sign>]<Base>#’ and the actual digits to specified Width. } function Integer2StringBaseExt (n: LongestInt; Base: TInteger2StringBase; Width: TInteger2StringWidth; Upper: Boolean; PrintBase: Boolean): TString; attribute (name = '_p_Integer2StringBaseExt'); external; { String handling routines (higher level), from string2.pas } type PChars0 = ^TChars0; TChars0 = array [0 .. MaxVarSize div SizeOf (Char) - 1] of Char; PPChars0 = ^TPChars0; TPChars0 = array [0 .. MaxVarSize div SizeOf (PChars0) - 1] of PChars0; PChars = ^TChars; TChars = packed array [1 .. MaxVarSize div SizeOf (Char)] of Char; { Under development. Interface subject to change. Use with caution. } { When a const or var AnyString parameter is passed, internally these records are passed as const parameters. Value AnyString parameters are passed like value string parameters. } ConstAnyString = record Length: Integer; Chars: PChars end; { Capacity is the allocated space (used internally). Count is the actual number of environment strings. The CStrings array contains the environment strings, terminated by a nil pointer, which is not counted in Count. @CStrings can be passed to libc routines like execve which expect an environment (see GetCEnvironment). } PEnvironment = ^TEnvironment; TEnvironment (Capacity: Integer) = record Count: Integer; CStrings: array [1 .. Capacity + 1] of CString end; var Environment: PEnvironment; attribute (name = '_p_Environment'); external; { Get an environment variable. If it does not exist, GetEnv returns the empty string, which can't be distinguished from a variable with an empty value, while CStringGetEnv returns nil then. Note, Dos doesn't know empty environment variables, but treats them as non-existing, and does not distinguish case in the names of environment variables. However, even under Dos, empty environment variables and variable names with different case can now be set and used within GPC programs. } function GetEnv (const EnvVar: String): TString; attribute (name = '_p_GetEnv'); external; function CStringGetEnv (EnvVar: CString): CString; attribute (name = '_p_CStringGetEnv'); external; { Sets an environment variable with the name given in VarName to the value Value. A previous value, if any, is overwritten. } procedure SetEnv (const VarName, Value: String); attribute (name = '_p_SetEnv'); external; { Un-sets an environment variable with the name given in VarName. } procedure UnSetEnv (const VarName: String); attribute (name = '_p_UnSetEnv'); external; { Returns @Environment^.CStrings, converted to PCStrings, to be passed to libc routines like execve which expect an environment. } function GetCEnvironment: PCStrings; attribute (name = '_p_GetCEnvironment'); external; type FormatStringTransformType = ^function (const Format: String): TString; var FormatStringTransformPtr: FormatStringTransformType; attribute (name = '_p_FormatStringTransformPtr'); external; { Runtime error and signal handling routines, from error.pas } const EAssert = 306; EAssertString = 307; EOpen = 405; EMMap = 408; ERead = 413; EWrite = 414; EWriteReadOnly = 422; ENonExistentFile = 436; EOpenRead = 442; EOpenWrite = 443; EOpenUpdate = 444; EReading = 464; EWriting = 466; ECannotWriteAll = 467; ECannotFork = 600; ECannotSpawn = 601; EProgramNotFound = 602; EProgramNotExecutable = 603; EPipe = 604; EPrinterRead = 610; EIOCtl = 630; EConvertError = 875; ELibraryFunction = 952; EExitReturned = 953; RuntimeErrorExitValue = 42; var { Error number (after runtime error) or exit status (after Halt) or 0 (during program run and after succesful termination). } ExitCode: Integer; attribute (name = '_p_ExitCode'); external; { Contains the address of the code where a runtime occurred, nil if no runtime error occurred. } ErrorAddr: Pointer; attribute (name = '_p_ErrorAddr'); external; { Error message } ErrorMessageString: TString; attribute (name = '_p_ErrorMessageString'); external; { String parameter to some error messages, *not* the text of the error message (the latter can be obtained with GetErrorMessage). } InOutResString: PString; attribute (name = '_p_InOutResString'); external; { Optional libc error string to some error messages. } InOutResCErrorString: PString; attribute (name = '_p_InOutResCErrorString'); external; RTSErrorFD: Integer; attribute (name = '_p_ErrorFD'); external; RTSErrorFileName: PString; attribute (name = '_p_ErrorFileName'); external; function GetErrorMessage (n: Integer): CString; attribute (name = '_p_GetErrorMessage'); external; procedure RuntimeError (n: Integer); attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_RuntimeError'); external; procedure RuntimeErrorErrNo (n: Integer); attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_RuntimeErrorErrNo'); external; procedure RuntimeErrorInteger (n: Integer; i: MedInt); attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_RuntimeErrorInteger'); external; procedure RuntimeErrorCString (n: Integer; s: CString); attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_RuntimeErrorCString'); external; procedure InternalError (n: Integer); attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_InternalError'); external; procedure InternalErrorInteger (n: Integer; i: MedInt); attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_InternalErrorInteger'); external; procedure InternalErrorCString (n: Integer; s: CString); attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_InternalErrorCString'); external; procedure RuntimeWarning (Message: CString); attribute (name = '_p_RuntimeWarning'); external; procedure RuntimeWarningInteger (Message: CString; i: MedInt); attribute (name = '_p_RuntimeWarningInteger'); external; procedure RuntimeWarningCString (Message: CString; s: CString); attribute (name = '_p_RuntimeWarningCString'); external; procedure IOError (n: Integer; ErrNoFlag: Boolean); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_IOError'); external; procedure IOErrorInteger (n: Integer; i: MedInt; ErrNoFlag: Boolean); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_IOErrorInteger'); external; procedure IOErrorCString (n: Integer; s: CString; ErrNoFlag: Boolean); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_IOErrorCString'); external; function GetIOErrorMessage = Res: TString; attribute (name = '_p_GetIOErrorMessage'); external; procedure CheckInOutRes; attribute (name = '_p_CheckInOutRes'); external; { Registers a procedure to be called to restore the terminal for another process that accesses the terminal, or back for the program itself. Used e.g. by the CRT unit. The procedures must allow for being called multiple times in any order, even at the end of the program (see the comment for RestoreTerminal). } procedure RegisterRestoreTerminal (ForAnotherProcess: Boolean; procedure Proc); attribute (name = '_p_RegisterRestoreTerminal'); external; { Unregisters a procedure registered with RegisterRestoreTerminal. Returns False if the procedure had not been registered, and True if it had been registered and was unregistered successfully. } function UnregisterRestoreTerminal (ForAnotherProcess: Boolean; procedure Proc): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_UnregisterRestoreTerminal'); external; { Calls the procedures registered by RegisterRestoreTerminal. When restoring the terminal for another process, the procedures are called in the opposite order of registration. When restoring back for the program, they are called in the order of registration. ‘RestoreTerminal (True)’ will also be called at the end of the program, before outputting any runtime error message. It can also be used if you want to write an error message and exit the program (especially when using e.g. the CRT unit). For this purpose, to avoid side effects, call RestoreTerminal immediately before writing the error message (to StdErr, not to Output!), and then exit the program (e.g. with Halt). } procedure RestoreTerminal (ForAnotherProcess: Boolean); attribute (name = '_p_RestoreTerminal'); external; procedure AtExit (procedure Proc); attribute (name = '_p_AtExit'); external; function ReturnAddr2Hex (p: Pointer) = s: TString; attribute (name = '_p_ReturnAddr2Hex'); external; { This function is used to write error messages etc. It does not use the Pascal I/O system here because it is usually called at the very end of a program after the Pascal I/O system has been shut down. } function WriteErrorMessage (const s: String; StdErrFlag: Boolean): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_WriteErrorMessage'); external; procedure SetReturnAddress (Address: Pointer); attribute (name = '_p_SetReturnAddress'); external; procedure RestoreReturnAddress; attribute (name = '_p_RestoreReturnAddress'); external; { Returns a description for a signal } function StrSignal (Signal: Integer) = Res: TString; attribute (name = '_p_StrSignal'); external; { Installs some signal handlers that cause runtime errors on certain signals. This procedure runs only once, and returns immediately when called again (so you can't use it to set the signals again if you changed them meanwhile). @@Does not work on all systems (since the handler might have too little stack space). } procedure InstallDefaultSignalHandlers; attribute (name = '_p_InstallDefaultSignalHandlers'); external; var { Signal actions } SignalDefault: TSignalHandler; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIG_DFL'; SignalIgnore : TSignalHandler; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIG_IGN'; SignalError : TSignalHandler; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIG_ERR'; { Signals. The constants are set to the signal numbers, and are 0 for signals not defined. } { POSIX signals } SigHUp : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGHUP'; SigInt : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGINT'; SigQuit : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGQUIT'; SigIll : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGILL'; SigAbrt : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGABRT'; SigFPE : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGFPE'; SigKill : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGKILL'; SigSegV : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGSEGV'; SigPipe : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGPIPE'; SigAlrm : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGALRM'; SigTerm : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGTERM'; SigUsr1 : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGUSR1'; SigUsr2 : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGUSR2'; SigChld : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGCHLD'; SigCont : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGCONT'; SigStop : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGSTOP'; SigTStp : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGTSTP'; SigTTIn : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGTTIN'; SigTTOu : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGTTOU'; { Non-POSIX signals } SigTrap : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGTRAP'; SigIOT : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGIOT'; SigEMT : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGEMT'; SigBus : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGBUS'; SigSys : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGSYS'; SigStkFlt: Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGSTKFLT'; SigUrg : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGURG'; SigIO : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGIO'; SigPoll : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGPOLL'; SigXCPU : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGXCPU'; SigXFSz : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGXFSZ'; SigVTAlrm: Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGVTALRM'; SigProf : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGPROF'; SigPwr : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGPWR'; SigInfo : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGINFO'; SigLost : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGLOST'; SigWinCh : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGWINCH'; { Signal subcodes (only used on some systems, -1 if not used) } FPEIntegerOverflow : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_FPE_INTOVF_TRAP'; FPEIntegerDivisionByZero: Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_FPE_INTDIV_TRAP'; FPESubscriptRange : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_FPE_SUBRNG_TRAP'; FPERealOverflow : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_FPE_FLTOVF_TRAP'; FPERealDivisionByZero : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_FPE_FLTDIV_TRAP'; FPERealUnderflow : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_FPE_FLTUND_TRAP'; FPEDecimalOverflow : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_FPE_DECOVF_TRAP'; { Routines called implicitly by the compiler. } procedure GPC_Assert (Condition: Boolean; const Message: String); attribute (name = '_p_Assert'); external; function ObjectTypeIs (Left, Right: PObjectType): Boolean; attribute (const, name = '_p_ObjectTypeIs'); external; procedure ObjectTypeAsError; attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_ObjectTypeAsError'); external; procedure DisposeNilError; attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_DisposeNilError'); external; procedure CaseNoMatchError; attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_CaseNoMatchError'); external; procedure DiscriminantsMismatchError; attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_DiscriminantsMismatchError'); external; procedure NilPointerError; attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_NilPointerError'); external; procedure InvalidPointerError (p: Pointer); attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_InvalidPointerError'); external; procedure InvalidObjectError; attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_InvalidObjectError'); external; procedure RangeCheckError; attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_RangeCheckError'); external; procedure IORangeCheckError; attribute (name = '_p_IORangeCheckError'); external; procedure SubrangeError; attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_SubrangeError'); external; procedure ModRangeError; attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_ModRangeError'); external; { Pointer checking with ‘--pointer-checking-user-defined’ } procedure DefaultValidatePointer (p: Pointer); attribute (name = '_p_DefaultValidatePointer'); external; type ValidatePointerType = ^procedure (p: Pointer); var ValidatePointerPtr: ValidatePointerType; attribute (name = '_p_ValidatePointerPtr'); external; { Time and date routines, from time.pas } const InvalidYear = -MaxInt; var { DayOfWeekName is a constant and therefore does not respect the locale. Therefore, it's recommended to use FormatTime instead. } DayOfWeekName: array [0 .. 6] of String [9]; attribute (const, name = '_p_DayOfWeekName'); external; { MonthName is a constant and therefore does not respect the locale. Therefore, it's recommended to use FormatTime instead. } MonthName: array [1 .. 12] of String [9]; attribute (const, name = '_p_MonthName'); external; function GetDayOfWeek (Day, Month, Year: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_GetDayOfWeek'); external; function GetDayOfYear (Day, Month, Year: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_GetDayOfYear'); external; function GetSundayWeekOfYear (Day, Month, Year: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_GetSundayWeekOfYear'); external; function GetMondayWeekOfYear (Day, Month, Year: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_GetMondayWeekOfYear'); external; procedure GetISOWeekOfYear (Day, Month, Year: Integer; var ISOWeek, ISOWeekYear: Integer); attribute (name = '_p_GetISOWeekOfYear'); external; procedure UnixTimeToTimeStamp (UnixTime: UnixTimeType; var aTimeStamp: TimeStamp); attribute (name = '_p_UnixTimeToTimeStamp'); external; function TimeStampToUnixTime (protected var aTimeStamp: TimeStamp): UnixTimeType; attribute (name = '_p_TimeStampToUnixTime'); external; function GetMicroSecondTime: MicroSecondTimeType; attribute (name = '_p_GetMicroSecondTime'); external; { Is the year a leap year? } function IsLeapYear (Year: Integer): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_IsLeapYear'); external; { Returns the length of the month, taking leap years into account. } function MonthLength (Month, Year: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_MonthLength'); external; { Formats a TimeStamp value according to a Format string. The format string can contain date/time items consisting of ‘%’, followed by the specifiers listed below. All characters outside of these items are copied to the result unmodified. The specifiers correspond to those of the C function strftime(), including POSIX.2 and glibc extensions and some more extensions. The extensions are also available on systems whose strftime() doesn't support them. The following modifiers may appear after the ‘%’: ‘_’ The item is left padded with spaces to the given or default width. ‘-’ The item is not padded at all. ‘0’ The item is left padded with zeros to the given or default width. ‘/’ The item is right trimmed if it is longer than the given width. ‘^’ The item is converted to upper case. ‘~’ The item is converted to lower case. After zero or more of these flags, an optional width may be specified for padding and trimming. It must be given as a decimal number (not starting with ‘0’ since ‘0’ has a meaning of its own, see above). Afterwards, the following optional modifiers may follow. Their meaning is locale-dependent, and many systems and locales just ignore them. ‘E’ Use the locale's alternate representation for date and time. In a Japanese locale, for example, ‘%Ex’ might yield a date format based on the Japanese Emperors' reigns. ‘O’ Use the locale's alternate numeric symbols for numbers. This modifier applies only to numeric format specifiers. Finally, exactly one of the following specifiers must appear. The padding rules listed here are the defaults that can be overriden with the modifiers listed above. ‘a’ The abbreviated weekday name according to the current locale. ‘A’ The full weekday name according to the current locale. ‘b’ The abbreviated month name according to the current locale. ‘B’ The full month name according to the current locale. ‘c’ The preferred date and time representation for the current locale. ‘C’ The century of the year. This is equivalent to the greatest integer not greater than the year divided by 100. ‘d’ The day of the month as a decimal number (‘01’ .. ‘31’). ‘D’ The date using the format ‘%m/%d/%y’. NOTE: Don't use this format if it can be avoided. Things like this caused Y2K bugs! ‘e’ The day of the month like with ‘%d’, but padded with blanks (‘ 1’ .. ‘31’). ‘F’ The date using the format ‘%Y-%m-%d’. This is the form specified in the ISO 8601 standard and is the preferred form for all uses. ‘g’ The year corresponding to the ISO week number, but without the century (‘00’ .. ‘99’). This has the same format and value as ‘y’, except that if the ISO week number (see ‘V’) belongs to the previous or next year, that year is used instead. NOTE: Don't use this format if it can be avoided. Things like this caused Y2K bugs! ‘G’ The year corresponding to the ISO week number. This has the same format and value as ‘Y’, except that if the ISO week number (see ‘V’) belongs to the previous or next year, that year is used instead. ‘h’ The abbreviated month name according to the current locale. This is the same as ‘b’. ‘H’ The hour as a decimal number, using a 24-hour clock (‘00’ .. ‘23’). ‘I’ The hour as a decimal number, using a 12-hour clock (‘01’ .. ‘12’). ‘j’ The day of the year as a decimal number (‘001’ .. ‘366’). ‘k’ The hour as a decimal number, using a 24-hour clock like ‘H’, but padded with blanks (‘ 0’ .. ‘23’). ‘l’ The hour as a decimal number, using a 12-hour clock like ‘I’, but padded with blanks (‘ 1’ .. ‘12’). ‘m’ The month as a decimal number (‘01’ .. ‘12’). ‘M’ The minute as a decimal number (‘00’ .. ‘59’). ‘n’ A single newline character. ‘p’ Either ‘AM’ or ‘PM’, according to the given time value; or the corresponding strings for the current locale. Noon is treated as ‘PM’ and midnight as ‘AM’. ‘P’ Either ‘am’ or ‘pm’, according to the given time value; or the corresponding strings for the current locale, printed in lowercase characters. Noon is treated as ‘pm’ and midnight as ‘am’. ‘Q’ The fractional part of the second. This format has special effects on the modifiers. The width, if given, determines the number of digits to output. Therefore, no actual clipping or trimming is done. However, if padding with spaces is specified, any trailing (i.e., right!) zeros are converted to spaces, and if "no padding" is specified, they are removed. The default is "padding with zeros", i.e. trailing zeros are left unchanged. The digits are cut when necessary without rounding (otherwise, the value would not be consistent with the seconds given by ‘S’ and ‘s’). Note that GPC's TimeStamp currently provides for microsecond resolution, so there are at most 6 valid digits (which is also the default width), any further digits will be 0 (but if TimeStamp will ever change, this format will be adjusted). However, the actual resolution provided by the operating system via GetTimeStamp etc. may be far lower (e.g., ~1/18s under Dos). ‘r’ The complete time using the AM/PM format of the current locale. ‘R’ The hour and minute in decimal numbers using the format ‘%H:%M’. ‘s’ Unix time, i.e. the number of seconds since the epoch, i.e., since 1970-01-01 00:00:00 UTC. Leap seconds are not counted unless leap second support is available. ‘S’ The seconds as a decimal number (‘00’ .. ‘60’). ‘t’ A single tab character. ‘T’ The time using decimal numbers using the format ‘%H:%M:%S’. ‘u’ The day of the week as a decimal number (‘1’ .. ‘7’), Monday being ‘1’. ‘U’ The week number of the current year as a decimal number (‘00’ .. ‘53’), starting with the first Sunday as the first day of the first week. Days preceding the first Sunday in the year are considered to be in week ‘00’. ‘V’ The ISO 8601:1988 week number as a decimal number (‘01’ .. ‘53’). ISO weeks start with Monday and end with Sunday. Week ‘01’ of a year is the first week which has the majority of its days in that year; this is equivalent to the week containing the year's first Thursday, and it is also equivalent to the week containing January 4. Week ‘01’ of a year can contain days from the previous year. The week before week ‘01’ of a year is the last week (‘52’ or ‘53’) of the previous year even if it contains days from the new year. ‘w’ The day of the week as a decimal number (‘0’ .. ‘6’), Sunday being ‘0’. ‘W’ The week number of the current year as a decimal number (‘00’ .. ‘53’), starting with the first Monday as the first day of the first week. All days preceding the first Monday in the year are considered to be in week ‘00’. ‘x’ The preferred date representation for the current locale, but without the time. ‘X’ The preferred time representation for the current locale, but with no date. ‘y’ The year without a century as a decimal number (‘00’ .. ‘99’). This is equivalent to the year modulo 100. NOTE: Don't use this format if it can be avoided. Things like this caused Y2K bugs! ‘Y’ The year as a decimal number, using the Gregorian calendar. Years before the year ‘1’ are numbered ‘0’, ‘-1’, and so on. ‘z’ RFC 822/ISO 8601:1988 style numeric time zone (e.g., ‘-0600’ or ‘+0100’), or nothing if no time zone is determinable. ‘Z’ The time zone abbreviation (empty if the time zone can't be determined). ‘%’ (i.e., an item ‘%%’) A literal ‘%’ character. } function FormatTime (const Time: TimeStamp; const Format: String) = Res: TString; attribute (name = '_p_FormatTime'); external; { Pseudo random number generator, from random.pas } type RandomSeedType = Cardinal attribute (Size = 32); RandomizeType = ^procedure; SeedRandomType = ^procedure (Seed: RandomSeedType); RandRealType = ^function: LongestReal; RandIntType = ^function (MaxValue: LongestCard): LongestCard; procedure SeedRandom (Seed: RandomSeedType); attribute (name = '_p_SeedRandom'); external; var RandomizePtr : RandomizeType; attribute (name = '_p_RandomizePtr'); external; SeedRandomPtr: SeedRandomType; attribute (name = '_p_SeedRandomPtr'); external; RandRealPtr : RandRealType; attribute (name = '_p_RandRealPtr'); external; RandIntPtr : RandIntType; attribute (name = '_p_RandIntPtr'); external; { File name routines, from fname.pas } { Define constants for different systems: OSDosFlag: flag to indicate whether the target system is Dos QuotingCharacter: the character used to quote wild cards and other special characters (#0 if not available) PathSeparator: the separator of multiple paths, e.g. in the PATH environment variable DirSeparator: the separator of the directories within a full file name DirSeparators: a set of all possible directory and drive name separators ExtSeparator: the separator of a file name extension DirRoot: the name of the root directory DirSelf: the name of a directory in itself DirParent: the name of the parent directory MaskNoStdDir: a file name mask that matches all names except the standard directories DirSelf and DirParent NullDeviceName: the full file name of the null device TtyDeviceName: the full file name of the current Tty ConsoleDeviceName: the full file name of the system console. On Dos systems, this is the same as the Tty, but on systems that allow remote login, this is a different thing and may reach a completely different user than the one running the program, so use it with care. EnvVarCharsFirst: the characters accepted at the beginning of the name of an environment variable without quoting EnvVarChars: the characters accepted in the name of an environment variable without quoting PathEnvVar: the name of the environment variable which (usually) contains the executable search path ShellEnvVar: the name of the environment variable which (usually) contains the path of the shell executable (see GetShellPath) ShellExecCommand: the option to the (default) shell to execute the command specified in the following argument (see GetShellPath) ConfigFileMask: a mask for the option file name as returned by ConfigFileName FileNamesCaseSensitive: flag to indicate whether file names are case sensitive } const UnixShellEnvVar = 'SHELL'; UnixShellExecCommand = '-c'; {$ifdef __OS_DOS__} {$if defined (__CYGWIN__) or defined(__MSYS__)} {$define __POSIX_WIN32__} {$endif} const OSDosFlag = True; QuotingCharacter = #0; PathSeparator = {$ifdef __POSIX_WIN32__} ':' {$else} ';' {$endif}; DirSeparator = '\'; DirSeparators = [':', '\', '/']; ExtSeparator = '.'; DirRoot = '\'; DirSelf = '.'; DirParent = '..'; MaskNoStdDir = '{*,.[^.]*,..?*}'; NullDeviceName = 'nul'; TtyDeviceName = 'con'; ConsoleDeviceName = 'con'; EnvVarCharsFirst = ['A' .. 'Z', 'a' .. 'z', '_']; EnvVarChars = EnvVarCharsFirst + ['0' .. '9']; PathEnvVar = 'PATH'; ShellEnvVar = 'COMSPEC'; ShellExecCommand = '/c'; ConfigFileMask = '*.cfg'; FileNamesCaseSensitive = False; {$else} const OSDosFlag = False; QuotingCharacter = '\'; PathSeparator = ':'; DirSeparator = '/'; DirSeparators = ['/']; ExtSeparator = '.'; DirRoot = '/'; DirSelf = '.'; DirParent = '..'; MaskNoStdDir = '{*,.[^.]*,..?*}'; NullDeviceName = '/dev/null'; TtyDeviceName = '/dev/tty'; ConsoleDeviceName = '/dev/console'; EnvVarCharsFirst = ['A' .. 'Z', 'a' .. 'z', '_']; EnvVarChars = EnvVarCharsFirst + ['0' .. '9']; PathEnvVar = 'PATH'; ShellEnvVar = UnixShellEnvVar; ShellExecCommand = UnixShellExecCommand; ConfigFileMask = '.*'; FileNamesCaseSensitive = True; {$endif} const WildCardChars = ['*', '?', '[', ']']; FileNameSpecialChars = (WildCardChars + SpaceCharacters + ['{', '}', '$', QuotingCharacter]) - DirSeparators; type DirPtr = Pointer; { Convert ch to lower case if FileNamesCaseSensitive is False, leave it unchanged otherwise. } function FileNameLoCase (ch: Char): Char; attribute (name = '_p_FileNameLoCase'); external; { Change a file name to use the OS dependent directory separator } function Slash2OSDirSeparator (const s: String) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_Slash2OSDirSeparator'); external; { Change a file name to use '/' as directory separator } function OSDirSeparator2Slash (const s: String) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_OSDirSeparator2Slash'); external; { Like Slash2OSDirSeparator for CStrings. *Note*: overwrites the CString } function Slash2OSDirSeparator_CString (s: CString): CString; attribute (ignorable, name = '_p_Slash2OSDirSeparator_CString'); external; { Like OSDirSeparator2Slash for CStrings. *Note*: overwrites the CString } function OSDirSeparator2Slash_CString (s: CString): CString; attribute (ignorable, name = '_p_OSDirSeparator2Slash_CString'); external; { Add a DirSeparator to the end of s, if there is not already one and s denotes an existing directory } function AddDirSeparator (const s: String) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_AddDirSeparator'); external; { Like AddDirSeparator, but also if the directory does not exist } function ForceAddDirSeparator (const s: String) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_ForceAddDirSeparator'); external; { Remove all trailing DirSeparators from s, if there are any, as long as removing them doesn't change the meaning (i.e., they don't denote the root directory. } function RemoveDirSeparator (const s: String) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_RemoveDirSeparator'); external; { Returns the current directory using OS dependent directory separators } function GetCurrentDirectory: TString; attribute (name = '_p_GetCurrentDirectory'); external; { Returns a directory suitable for storing temporary files using OS dependent directory separators. If found, the result always ends in DirSeparator. If no suitable directory is found, an empty string is returned. } function GetTempDirectory: TString; attribute (name = '_p_GetTempDirectory'); external; { Returns a non-existing file name in the directory given. If the directory doesn't exist or the Directory name is empty, an I/O error is raised, and GetTempFileNameInDirectory returns the empty string. } function GetTempFileNameInDirectory (const Directory: String) = Result: TString; attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_GetTempFileNameInDirectory'); external; { Returns a non-existing file name in GetTempDirectory. If no temp directory is found, i.e. GetTempDirectory returns the empty string, an I/O error is raised, and GetTempFileName returns the empty string as well. } function GetTempFileName: TString; attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_GetTempFileName'); external; { The same as GetTempFileName, but returns a CString allocated from the heap. } function GetTempFileName_CString: CString; attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_GetTempFileName_CString'); external; { Returns True if the given file name is an existing plain file } function FileExists (const aFileName: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_FileExists'); external; { Returns True if the given file name is an existing directory } function DirectoryExists (const aFileName: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_DirectoryExists'); external; { Returns True if the given file name is an existing file, directory or special file (device, pipe, socket, etc.) } function PathExists (const aFileName: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_PathExists'); external; { If a file of the given name exists in one of the directories given in DirList (separated by PathSeparator), returns the full path, otherwise returns an empty string. If aFileName already contains an element of DirSeparators, returns Slash2OSDirSeparator (aFileName) if it exists. } function FSearch (const aFileName, DirList: String): TString; attribute (name = '_p_FSearch'); external; { Like FSearch, but only find executable files. Under Dos, if not found, the function tries appending '.com', '.exe', '.bat' and ‘.cmd’ (the last one only if $COMSPEC points to a ‘cmd.exe’), so you don't have to specify these extensions in aFileName (and with respect to portability, it might be preferable not to do so). } function FSearchExecutable (const aFileName, DirList: String) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_FSearchExecutable'); external; { Replaces all occurrences of ‘$FOO’ and ‘~’ in s by the value of the environment variables FOO or HOME, respectively. If a variable is not defined, the function returns False, and s contains the name of the undefined variable (or the empty string if the variable name is invalid, i.e., doesn't start with a character from EnvVarCharsFirst). Otherwise, if all variables are found, s contains the replaced string, and True is returned. } function ExpandEnvironment (var s: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_ExpandEnvironment'); external; { Expands the given path name to a full path name. Relative paths are expanded using the current directory, and occurrences of DirSelf and DirParent are resolved. Under Dos, the result is converted to lower case and a trailing ExtSeparator (except in a trailing DirSelf or DirParent) is removed, like Dos does. If the directory, i.e. the path without the file name, is invalid, the empty string is returned. } function FExpand (const Path: String): TString; attribute (name = '_p_FExpand'); external; { Like FExpand, but unquotes the directory before expanding it, and quotes WildCardChars again afterwards. Does not check if the directory is valid (because it may contain wild card characters). Symlinks are expanded only in the directory part, not the file name. } function FExpandQuoted (const Path: String): TString; attribute (name = '_p_FExpandQuoted'); external; { FExpands Path, and then removes the current directory from it, if it is a prefix of it. If OnlyCurDir is set, the current directory will be removed only if Path denotes a file in, not below, it. } function RelativePath (const Path: String; OnlyCurDir, Quoted: Boolean) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_RelativePath'); external; { Is aFileName a UNC filename? (Always returns False on non-Dos systems.) } function IsUNC (const aFileName: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_IsUNC'); external; { Splits a file name into directory, name and extension. Each of Dir, BaseName and Ext may be Null. } procedure FSplit (const Path: String; var Dir, BaseName, Ext: String); attribute (name = '_p_FSplit'); external; { Functions that extract one or two of the parts from FSplit. DirFromPath returns DirSelf + DirSeparator if the path contains no directory. } function DirFromPath (const Path: String) = Dir: TString; attribute (name = '_p_DirFromPath'); external; function NameFromPath (const Path: String) = BaseName: TString; attribute (name = '_p_NameFromPath'); external; function ExtFromPath (const Path: String) = Ext: TString; attribute (name = '_p_ExtFromPath'); external; function NameExtFromPath (const Path: String): TString; attribute (name = '_p_NameExtFromPath'); external; { Start reading a directory. If successful, a pointer is returned that can be used for subsequent calls to ReadDir and finally CloseDir. On failure, an I/O error is raised and (in case it is ignored) nil is returned. } function OpenDir (const DirName: String) = Res: DirPtr; attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_OpenDir'); external; { Reads one entry from the directory Dir, and returns the file name. On errors or end of directory, the empty string is returned. } function ReadDir (Dir: DirPtr): TString; attribute (name = '_p_ReadDir'); external; { Closes a directory opened with OpenDir. } procedure CloseDir (Dir: DirPtr); attribute (name = '_p_CloseDir'); external; { Returns the first position of a non-quoted character of CharSet in s, or 0 if no such character exists. } function FindNonQuotedChar (Chars: CharSet; const s: String; From: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_FindNonQuotedChar'); external; { Returns the first occurence of SubString in s that is not quoted at the beginning, or 0 if no such occurence exists. } function FindNonQuotedStr (const SubString, s: String; From: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_FindNonQuotedStr'); external; { Does a string contain non-quoted wildcard characters? } function HasWildCards (const s: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_HasWildCards'); external; { Does a string contain non-quoted wildcard characters, braces or spaces? } function HasWildCardsOrBraces (const s: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_HasWildCardsOrBraces'); external; { Insert QuotingCharacter into s before any special characters } function QuoteFileName (const s: String; const SpecialCharacters: CharSet) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_QuoteFileName'); external; { Remove QuotingCharacter from s } function UnQuoteFileName (const s: String) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_UnQuoteFileName'); external; { Splits s at non-quoted spaces and expands non-quoted braces like bash does. The result and its entries should be disposed after usage, e.g. with DisposePPStrings. } function BraceExpand (const s: String) = Result: PPStrings; attribute (name = '_p_BraceExpand'); external; { Dispose of a PPStrings array as well as the strings it contains. If you want to keep the strings (by assigning them to other string pointers), you should instead free the PPStrings array with ‘Dispose’. } procedure DisposePPStrings (Strings: PPStrings); attribute (name = '_p_DisposePPStrings'); external; { Tests if a file name matches a shell wildcard pattern (?, *, []) } function FileNameMatch (const Pattern, FileName: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_FileNameMatch'); external; { FileNameMatch with BraceExpand } function MultiFileNameMatch (const Pattern, FileName: String): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_MultiFileNameMatch'); external; { File name globbing } { GlobInit is implied by Glob and MultiGlob, not by GlobOn and MultiGlobOn. GlobOn and MultiGlobOn must be called after GlobInit, Glob or MultiGlob. MultiGlob and MultiGlobOn do brace expansion, Glob and GlobOn do not. GlobFree frees the memory allocated by the globbing functions and invalidates the results in Buf. It should be called after globbing. } procedure GlobInit (var Buf: GlobBuffer); attribute (name = '_p_GlobInit'); external; procedure Glob (var Buf: GlobBuffer; const Pattern: String); attribute (name = '_p_Glob'); external; procedure GlobOn (var Buf: GlobBuffer; const Pattern: String); attribute (name = '_p_GlobOn'); external; procedure MultiGlob (var Buf: GlobBuffer; const Pattern: String); attribute (name = '_p_MultiGlob'); external; procedure MultiGlobOn (var Buf: GlobBuffer; const Pattern: String); attribute (name = '_p_MultiGlobOn'); external; procedure GlobFree (var Buf: GlobBuffer); attribute (name = '_p_GlobFree'); external; type TPasswordEntry = record UserName, RealName, Password, HomeDirectory, Shell: PString; UID, GID: Integer end; PPasswordEntries = ^TPasswordEntries; TPasswordEntries (Count: Integer) = array [1 .. Max (1, Count)] of TPasswordEntry; { Finds a password entry by user name. Returns True if found, False otherwise. } function GetPasswordEntryByName (const UserName: String; var Entry: TPasswordEntry) = Res: Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_GetPasswordEntryByName'); external; { Finds a password entry by UID. Returns True if found, False otherwise. } function GetPasswordEntryByUID (UID: Integer; var Entry: TPasswordEntry) = Res: Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_GetPasswordEntryByUID'); external; { Returns all password entries, or nil if none found. } function GetPasswordEntries = Res: PPasswordEntries; attribute (name = '_p_GetPasswordEntries'); external; { Dispose of a TPasswordEntry. } procedure DisposePasswordEntry (Entry: TPasswordEntry); attribute (name = '_p_DisposePasswordEntry'); external; { Dispose of a PPasswordEntries. } procedure DisposePasswordEntries (Entries: PPasswordEntries); attribute (name = '_p_DisposePasswordEntries'); external; { Returns the mount point (Unix) or drive (Dos) which is part of the given path. If the path does not contain any (i.e., is a relative path), an empty string is returned. Therefore, if you want to get the mount point or drive in any case, apply ‘FExpand’ or ‘RealPath’ to the argument. } function GetMountPoint (const Path: String) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_GetMountPoint'); external; type TSystemInfo = record OSName, OSRelease, OSVersion, MachineType, HostName, DomainName: TString end; { Returns system information if available. Fields not available will be empty. } function SystemInfo = Res: TSystemInfo; attribute (name = '_p_SystemInfo'); external; { Returns the path to the shell (as the result) and the option that makes it execute the command specified in the following argument (in ‘Option’). Usually these are the environment value of ShellEnvVar, and ShellExecCommand, but on Dos systems, the function will first try UnixShellEnvVar, and UnixShellExecCommand because ShellEnvVar will usually point to command.com, but UnixShellEnvVar can point to bash which is usually a better choice when present. If UnixShellEnvVar is not set, or the shell given does not exist, it will use ShellEnvVar, and ShellExecCommand. Option may be Null (in case you want to invoke the shell interactively). } function GetShellPath (var Option: String) = Res: TString; attribute (name = '_p_GetShellPath'); external; { Returns the path of the running executable. *Note*: On most systems, this is *not* guaranteed to be the full path, but often just the same as ‘ParamStr (0)’ which usually is the name given on the command line. Only on some systems with special support, it returns the full path when ‘ParamStr (0)’ doesn't. } function ExecutablePath: TString; attribute (name = '_p_ExecutablePath'); external; { Returns a file name suitable for a global (system-wide) or local (user-specific) configuration file, depending on the Global parameter. The function does not guarantee that the file name returned exists or is readable or writable. In the following table, the base name ‘<base>’ is given with the BaseName parameter. If it is empty, the base name is the name of the running program (as returned by ExecutablePath, without directory and extension. ‘<prefix>’ (Unix only) stands for the value of the Prefix parameter (usual values include '', '/usr' and '/usr/local'). ‘<dir>’ (Dos only) stands for the directory where the running program resides. ‘$foo’ stands for the value of the environment variable ‘foo’. Global Local Unix: <prefix>/etc/<base>.conf $HOME/.<base> DJGPP: $DJDIR\etc\<base>.ini $HOME\<base>.cfg <dir>\<base>.ini <dir>\<base>.cfg Other $HOME\<base>.ini $HOME\<base>.cfg Dos: <dir>\<base>.ini <dir>\<base>.cfg As you see, there are two possibilities under Dos. If the first file exists, it is returned. Otherwise, if the second file exists, that is returned. If none of them exists (but the program might want to create a file), if the environment variable (DJDIR or HOME, respectively) is set, the first file name is returned, otherwise the second one. This rather complicated scheme should give the most reasonable results for systems with or without DJGPP installed, and with or without already existing config files. Note that DJDIR is always set on systems with DJGPP installed, while HOME is not. However, it is easy for users to set it if they want their config files in a certain directory rather than with the executables. } function ConfigFileName (const Prefix, BaseName: String; Global: Boolean): TString; attribute (name = '_p_ConfigFileName'); external; { Returns a directory name suitable for global, machine-independent data. The function garantees that the name returned ends with a DirSeparator, but does not guarantee that it exists or is readable or writable. Note: If the prefix is empty, it is assumed to be '/usr'. (If you really want /share, you could pass '/' as the prefix, but that's very uncommon.) Unix: <prefix>/share/<base>/ DJGPP: $DJDIR\share\<base>\ <dir>\ Other $HOME\<base>\ Dos: <dir>\ About the symbols used above, and the two possibilities under Dos, see the comments for ConfigFileName. } function DataDirectoryName (const Prefix, BaseName: String): TString; attribute (name = '_p_DataDirectoryName'); external; { Executes a command line. Reports execution errors via the IOResult mechanism and returns the exit status of the executed program. Execute calls RestoreTerminal with the argument True before and False after executing the process, ExecuteNoTerminal does not. } function Execute (const CmdLine: String): Integer; attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_Execute'); external; function ExecuteNoTerminal (const CmdLine: String): Integer; attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_ExecuteNoTerminal'); external; { File handling routines, from files.pas } type TextFile = Text; TOpenMode = (fo_None, fo_Reset, fo_Rewrite, fo_Append, fo_SeekRead, fo_SeekWrite, fo_SeekUpdate); PAnyFile = ^AnyFile; TOpenProc = procedure (var PrivateData; Mode: TOpenMode); TSelectFunc = function (var PrivateData; Writing: Boolean): Integer; { called before SelectHandle, must return a file handle } TSelectProc = procedure (var PrivateData; var ReadSelect, WriteSelect, ExceptSelect: Boolean); { called before and after SelectHandle } TReadFunc = function (var PrivateData; var Buffer; Size: SizeType): SizeType; TWriteFunc = function (var PrivateData; const Buffer; Size: SizeType): SizeType; TFileProc = procedure (var PrivateData); TFlushProc = TFileProc; TCloseProc = TFileProc; TDoneProc = TFileProc; { Flags that can be ‘or’ed into FileMode. The default value of FileMode is FileMode_Reset_ReadWrite. The somewhat confusing numeric values are meant to be compatible to BP (as far as BP supports them). } const { Allow writing to binary files opened with Reset } FileMode_Reset_ReadWrite = 2; { Do not allow reading from files opened with Rewrite } FileMode_Rewrite_WriteOnly = 4; { Do not allow reading from files opened with Extend } FileMode_Extend_WriteOnly = 8; { Allow writing to text files opened with Reset } FileMode_Text_Reset_ReadWrite = $100; var FileMode: Integer; attribute (name = '_p_FileMode'); external; { Get the external name of a file } function FileName (protected var f: GPC_FDR): TString; attribute (name = '_p_FileName'); external; procedure IOErrorFile (n: Integer; protected var f: GPC_FDR; ErrNoFlag: Boolean); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_IOErrorFile'); external; procedure GetBinding (protected var f: GPC_FDR; var b: BindingType); attribute (name = '_p_GetBinding'); external; procedure ClearBinding (var b: BindingType); attribute (name = '_p_ClearBinding'); external; { TFDD interface @@ Subject to change! Use with caution! } procedure AssignTFDD (var f: GPC_FDR; aOpenProc: TOpenProc; aSelectFunc: TSelectFunc; aSelectProc: TSelectProc; aReadFunc: TReadFunc; aWriteFunc: TWriteFunc; aFlushProc: TFlushProc; aCloseProc: TCloseProc; aDoneProc: TDoneProc; aPrivateData: Pointer); attribute (name = '_p_AssignTFDD'); external; procedure SetTFDD (var f: GPC_FDR; aOpenProc: TOpenProc; aSelectFunc: TSelectFunc; aSelectProc: TSelectProc; aReadFunc: TReadFunc; aWriteFunc: TWriteFunc; aFlushProc: TFlushProc; aCloseProc: TCloseProc; aDoneProc: TDoneProc; aPrivateData: Pointer); attribute (name = '_p_SetTFDD'); external; { Any parameter except f may be Null } procedure GetTFDD (var f: GPC_FDR; var aOpenProc: TOpenProc; var aSelectFunc: TSelectFunc; var aSelectProc: TSelectProc; var aReadFunc: TReadFunc; var aWriteFunc: TWriteFunc; var aFlushProc: TFlushProc; var aCloseProc: TCloseProc; var aDoneProc: TDoneProc; var aPrivateData: Pointer); attribute (name = '_p_GetTFDD'); external; procedure FileMove (var f: GPC_FDR; NewName: CString; Overwrite: Boolean); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_FileMove'); external; const NoChange = -1; { can be passed to ChOwn for Owner and/or Group to not change that value } procedure CloseFile (var f: GPC_FDR); attribute (name = '_p_CloseFile'); external; procedure ChMod (var f: GPC_FDR; Mode: Integer); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_ChMod'); external; procedure ChOwn (var f: GPC_FDR; Owner, Group: Integer); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_ChOwn'); external; { Checks if data are available to be read from f. This is similar to ‘not EOF (f)’, but does not block on "files" that can grow, like Ttys or pipes. } function CanRead (var f: GPC_FDR): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_CanRead'); external; { Checks if data can be written to f. } function CanWrite (var f: GPC_FDR): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_CanWrite'); external; { Get the file handle. } function FileHandle (protected var f: GPC_FDR): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_FileHandle'); external; { Lock/unlock a file. } function FileLock (var f: GPC_FDR; WriteLock, Block: Boolean): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_FileLock'); external; function FileUnlock (var f: GPC_FDR): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_FileUnlock'); external; { Try to map (a part of) a file to memory. } function MemoryMap (Start: Pointer; Length: SizeType; Access: Integer; Shared: Boolean; var f: GPC_FDR; Offset: FileSizeType): Pointer; attribute (name = '_p_MemoryMap'); external; { Unmap a previous memory mapping. } procedure MemoryUnMap (Start: Pointer; Length: SizeType); attribute (name = '_p_MemoryUnMap'); external; type Natural = 1 .. MaxInt; IOSelectEvents = (SelectReadOrEOF, SelectRead, SelectEOF, SelectWrite, SelectException, SelectAlways); type IOSelectType = record f: PAnyFile; Wanted: set of IOSelectEvents; Occurred: set of Low (IOSelectEvents) .. Pred (SelectAlways) end; { Waits for one of several events to happen. Returns when one or more of the wanted events for one of the files occur. If they have already occurred before calling the function, it returns immediately. MicroSeconds can specify a timeout. If it is 0, the function will return immediately, whether or not an event has occurred. If it is negative, the function will wait forever until an event occurs. The Events parameter can be Null, in which case the function only waits for the timeout. If any of the file pointers (f) in Events are nil or the files pointed to are closed, they are simply ignored for convenience. It returns the index of one of the files for which any event has occurred. If events have occurred for several files, is it undefined which of these file's index is returned. If no event occurs until the timeout, 0 is returned. If an error occurs or the target system does not have a ‘select’ system call and Events is not Null, a negative value is returned. In the Occurred field of the elements of Events, events that have occurred are set. The state of events not wanted is undefined. The possible events are: SelectReadOrEOF: the file is at EOF or data can be read now. SelectRead: data can be read now. SelectEOF: the file is at EOF. SelectWrite: data can be written now. SelectException: an exception occurred on the file. SelectAlways: if this is set, *all* requested events will be checked for this file in any case. Otherwise, checks may be skipped if already another event for this or another file was found. Notes: Checking for EOF requires some reading ahead internally (just like the EOF function) which can be avoided by setting SelectReadOrEOF instead of SelectRead and SelectEOF. If this is followed by, e.g., a BlockRead with 4 parameters, the last parameter will be 0 if and only the file is at EOF, and otherwise, data will be read directly from the file without reading ahead and buffering. SelectAlways should be set for files whose events are considered to be of higher priority than others. Otherwise, if one is interested in just any event, not setting SelectAlways may be a little faster. } function IOSelect (var Events: array [m .. n: Natural] of IOSelectType; MicroSeconds: MicroSecondTimeType): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_IOSelect'); external; { A simpler interface to SelectIO for the most common use. Waits for SelectReadOrEOF on all files and returns an index. } function IOSelectRead (const Files: array [m .. n: Natural] of PAnyFile; MicroSeconds: MicroSecondTimeType): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_IOSelectRead'); external; { Bind a filename to an external file } procedure AssignFile (var t: AnyFile; const FileName: String); attribute (name = '_p_AssignFile'); external; procedure AssignBinary (var t: Text; const FileName: String); attribute (name = '_p_AssignBinary'); external; procedure AssignHandle (var t: AnyFile; Handle: Integer; CloseFlag: Boolean); attribute (name = '_p_AssignHandle'); external; { Under development } procedure AnyStringTFDD_Reset (var f: GPC_FDR; var Buf: ConstAnyString); attribute (name = '_p_AnyStringTFDD_Reset'); external; { @@ procedure AnyStringTFDD_Rewrite (var f: GPC_FDR; var Buf: VarAnyString); attribute (name = '_p_AnyStringTFDD_Rewrite'); } procedure StringTFDD_Reset (var f: GPC_FDR; var Buf: ConstAnyString; var s: array [m .. n: Integer] of Char); attribute (name = '_p_StringTFDD_Reset'); external; { @@ procedure StringTFDD_Rewrite (var f: GPC_FDR; var Buf: VarAnyString; var s: String); attribute (name = '_p_StringTFDD_Rewrite'); } { Returns True is a terminal device is open on the file f, False if f is not open or not connected to a terminal. } function IsTerminal (protected var f: GPC_FDR): Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_IsTerminal'); external; { Returns the file name of the terminal device that is open on the file f. Returns the empty string if (and only if) f is not open or not connected to a terminal. } function GetTerminalName (protected var f: GPC_FDR): TString; attribute (name = '_p_GetTerminalName'); external; { Command line option parsing, from getopt.pas } const EndOfOptions = #255; NoOption = #1; UnknownOption = '?'; LongOption = #0; UnknownLongOption = '?'; var FirstNonOption : Integer; attribute (name = '_p_FirstNonOption'); external; HasOptionArgument : Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_HasOptionArgument'); external; OptionArgument : TString; attribute (name = '_p_OptionArgument'); external; UnknownOptionCharacter: Char; attribute (name = '_p_UnknownOptionCharacter'); external; GetOptErrorFlag : Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_GetOptErrorFlag'); external; { Parses command line arguments for options and returns the next one. If a command line argument starts with ‘-’, and is not exactly ‘-’ or ‘--’, then it is an option element. The characters of this element (aside from the initial ‘-’) are option characters. If ‘GetOpt’ is called repeatedly, it returns successively each of the option characters from each of the option elements. If ‘GetOpt’ finds another option character, it returns that character, updating ‘FirstNonOption’ and internal variables so that the next call to ‘GetOpt’ can resume the scan with the following option character or command line argument. If there are no more option characters, ‘GetOpt’ returns EndOfOptions. Then ‘FirstNonOption’ is the index of the first command line argument that is not an option. (The command line arguments have been permuted so that those that are not options now come last.) OptString must be of the form ‘[+|-]abcd:e:f:g::h::i::’. a, b, c are options without arguments d, e, f are options with required arguments g, h, i are options with optional arguments Arguments are text following the option character in the same command line argument, or the text of the following command line argument. They are returned in OptionArgument. If an option has no argument, OptionArgument is empty. The variable HasOptionArgument tells whether an option has an argument. This is mostly useful for options with optional arguments, if one wants to distinguish an empty argument from no argument. If the first character of OptString is ‘+’, GetOpt stops at the first non-option argument. If it is ‘-’, GetOpt treats non-option arguments as options and return NoOption for them. Otherwise, GetOpt permutes arguments and handles all options, leaving all non-options at the end. However, if the environment variable POSIXLY_CORRECT is set, the default behaviour is to stop at the first non-option argument, as with ‘+’. The special argument ‘--’ forces an end of option-scanning regardless of the first character of OptString. In the case of ‘-’, only ‘--’ can cause GetOpt to return EndOfOptions with FirstNonOption <= ParamCount. If an option character is seen that is not listed in OptString, UnknownOption is returned. The unrecognized option character is stored in UnknownOptionCharacter. Unless GetOptErrorFlag is set to False, an error message is printed to StdErr automatically. } function GetOpt (const OptString: String): Char; attribute (name = '_p_GetOpt'); external; type OptArgType = (NoArgument, RequiredArgument, OptionalArgument); OptionType = record OptionName: CString; Argument : OptArgType; Flag : ^Char; { if nil, v is returned. Otherwise, Flag^ is ... } v : Char { ... set to v, and LongOption is returned } end; { Recognize short options, described by OptString as above, and long options, described by LongOptions. Long-named options begin with ‘--’ instead of ‘-’. Their names may be abbreviated as long as the abbreviation is unique or is an exact match for some defined option. If they have an argument, it follows the option name in the same argument, separated from the option name by a ‘=’, or else the in next argument. When GetOpt finds a long-named option, it returns LongOption if that option's ‘Flag’ field is non-nil, and the value of the option's ‘v’ field if the ‘Flag’ field is nil. LongIndex, if not Null, returns the index in LongOptions of the long-named option found. It is only valid when a long-named option has been found by the most recent call. If LongOnly is set, ‘-’ as well as ‘--’ can indicate a long option. If an option that starts with ‘-’ (not ‘--’) doesn't match a long option, but does match a short option, it is parsed as a short option instead. If an argument has the form ‘-f’, where f is a valid short option, don't consider it an abbreviated form of a long option that starts with ‘f’. Otherwise there would be no way to give the ‘-f’ short option. On the other hand, if there's a long option ‘fubar’ and the argument is ‘-fu’, do consider that an abbreviation of the long option, just like ‘--fu’, and not ‘-f’ with argument ‘u’. This distinction seems to be the most useful approach. As an additional feature (not present in the C counterpart), if the last character of OptString is ‘-’ (after a possible starting ‘+’ or ‘-’ character), or OptString is empty, all long options with a nil ‘Flag’ field will automatically be recognized as short options with the character given by the ‘v’ field. This means, in the common (and recommended) case that all short options have long equivalents, you can simply pass an empty OptString (or pass ‘+-’ or ‘--’ as OptString if you want this behaviour, see the comment for GetOpt), and you will only have to maintain the LongOptions array when you add or change options. } function GetOptLong (const OptString: String; const LongOptions: array [m .. n: Integer] of OptionType { can be Null }; var LongIndex: Integer { can be Null }; LongOnly: Boolean): Char; attribute (name = '_p_GetOptLong'); external; { Reset GetOpt's state and make the next GetOpt or GetOptLong start (again) with the StartArgument'th argument (may be 1). This is useful for special purposes only. It is *necessary* to do this after altering the contents of CParamCount/CParameters (which is not usually done, either). } procedure ResetGetOpt (StartArgument: Integer); attribute (name = '_p_ResetGetOpt'); external; { Set operations, from sets.pas } { All set operations are built-in identifiers and not declared in gpc.pas. } { Heap management routines, from heap.pas } { GPC implements both Mark/Release and Dispose. Both can be mixed freely in the same program. Dispose should be preferred, since it's faster. } { C heap management routines. NOTE: if Release is used anywhere in the program, CFreeMem and CReAllocMem may not be used for pointers that were not allocated with CGetMem. } function CGetMem (Size: SizeType): Pointer; external name 'malloc'; procedure CFreeMem (aPointer: Pointer); external name 'free'; function CReAllocMem (aPointer: Pointer; NewSize: SizeType): Pointer; external name 'realloc'; type GetMemType = ^function (Size: SizeType): Pointer; FreeMemType = ^procedure (aPointer: Pointer); ReAllocMemType = ^function (aPointer: Pointer; NewSize: SizeType): Pointer; { These variables can be set to user-defined routines for memory allocation/deallocation. GetMemPtr may return nil when insufficient memory is available. GetMem/New will produce a runtime error then. } var GetMemPtr : GetMemType; attribute (name = '_p_GetMemPtr'); external; FreeMemPtr : FreeMemType; attribute (name = '_p_FreeMemPtr'); external; ReAllocMemPtr: ReAllocMemType; attribute (name = '_p_ReAllocMemPtr'); external; { Address of the lowest byte of heap used } HeapLow: PtrCard; attribute (name = '_p_HeapLow'); external; { Address of the highest byte of heap used } HeapHigh: PtrCard; attribute (name = '_p_HeapHigh'); external; { If set to true, ‘Dispose’ etc. will raise a runtime error if given an invalid pointer. } HeapChecking: Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_HeapChecking'); external; const UndocumentedReturnNil = Pointer (-1); function SuspendMark: Pointer; attribute (name = '_p_SuspendMark'); external; procedure ResumeMark (p: Pointer); attribute (name = '_p_ResumeMark'); external; { Calls the procedure Proc for each block that would be released with ‘Release (aMark)’. aMark must have been marked with Mark. For an example of its usage, see the HeapMon unit. } procedure ForEachMarkedBlock (aMark: Pointer; procedure Proc (aPointer: Pointer; aSize: SizeType; aCaller: Pointer)); attribute (name = '_p_ForEachMarkedBlock'); external; procedure ReAllocMem (var aPointer: Pointer; NewSize: SizeType); attribute (name = '_p_ReAllocMem'); external; { Memory transfer procedures, from move.pas } { The move operations are built-in identifiers and not declared in gpc.pas. } { Routines to handle endianness, from endian.pas } { Boolean constants about endianness and alignment } const BitsBigEndian = {$ifdef __BITS_LITTLE_ENDIAN__} False {$elif defined (__BITS_BIG_ENDIAN__)} True {$else} {$error Bit endianness is not defined!} {$endif}; BytesBigEndian = {$ifdef __BYTES_LITTLE_ENDIAN__} False {$elif defined (__BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN__)} True {$else} {$error Byte endianness is not defined!} {$endif}; WordsBigEndian = {$ifdef __WORDS_LITTLE_ENDIAN__} False {$elif defined (__WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN__)} True {$else} {$error Word endianness is not defined!} {$endif}; NeedAlignment = {$ifdef __NEED_ALIGNMENT__} True {$elif defined (__NEED_NO_ALIGNMENT__)} False {$else} {$error Alignment is not defined!} {$endif}; { Convert single variables from or to little or big endian format. This only works for a single variable or a plain array of a simple type. For more complicated structures, this has to be done for each component separately! Currently, ConvertFromFooEndian and ConvertToFooEndian are the same, but this might not be the case on middle-endian machines. Therefore, we provide different names. } procedure ReverseBytes (var Buf; ElementSize, Count: SizeType); attribute (name = '_p_ReverseBytes'); external; procedure ConvertFromLittleEndian (var Buf; ElementSize, Count: SizeType); attribute (name = '_p_ConvertLittleEndian'); external; procedure ConvertFromBigEndian (var Buf; ElementSize, Count: SizeType); attribute (name = '_p_ConvertBigEndian'); external; procedure ConvertToLittleEndian (var Buf; ElementSize, Count: SizeType); external name '_p_ConvertLittleEndian'; procedure ConvertToBigEndian (var Buf; ElementSize, Count: SizeType); external name '_p_ConvertBigEndian'; { Read a block from a file and convert it from little or big endian format. This only works for a single variable or a plain array of a simple type, note the comment for ‘ConvertFromLittleEndian’ and ‘ConvertFromBigEndian’. } procedure BlockReadLittleEndian (var aFile: File; var Buf; ElementSize, Count: SizeType); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_BlockRead_LittleEndian'); external; procedure BlockReadBigEndian (var aFile: File; var Buf; ElementSize, Count: SizeType); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_BlockRead_BigEndian'); external; { Write a block variable to a file and convert it to little or big endian format before. This only works for a single variable or a plain array of a simple type. Apart from this, note the comment for ‘ConvertToLittleEndian’ and ‘ConvertToBigEndian’. } procedure BlockWriteLittleEndian (var aFile: File; const Buf; ElementSize, Count: SizeType); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_BlockWrite_LittleEndian'); external; procedure BlockWriteBigEndian (var aFile: File; const Buf; ElementSize, Count: SizeType); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_BlockWrite_BigEndian'); external; { Read and write strings from/to binary files, where the length is stored in the given endianness and with a fixed size (64 bits), and therefore is independent of the system. } procedure ReadStringLittleEndian (var f: File; var s: String); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_ReadStringLittleEndian'); external; procedure ReadStringBigEndian (var f: File; var s: String); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_ReadStringBigEndian'); external; procedure WriteStringLittleEndian (var f: File; const s: String); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_WriteStringLittleEndian'); external; procedure WriteStringBigEndian (var f: File; const s: String); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_WriteStringBigEndian'); external; { Initialization, from init.pas } var InitProc: ^procedure; attribute (name = '_p_InitProc'); external;
GPC distributions now include a number of useful Pascal units and a complete set of BP compatibility units – except for the ‘Graph’ unit (which is currently distributed separately due to its license) and the OOP stuff. The main use of these units is to provide a way to port BP programs to GPC as easily as possible. Some of the units also implement functionaliy not available otherwise.
Most of the BP compatibility units – except ‘CRT’ and ‘Printer’ – are merely meant to let programs written for BP compile with GPC as easily as possible. They should not be used in newly written code, and for code ported from BP to GPC, it is suggested to replace them successively with the more powerful – and often easier to use – alternatives that GPC's Run Time System (see Run Time System) offers.
The following sections describe all units included with GPC (besides the ‘GPC’ module which describes the interface to the Run Time System, Run Time System).
The following listing contains the interface of the CRT unit.
‘CRT’ is a ‘curses’ based unit for text screen handling. It is compatible to BP's ‘CRT’ unit, even in a lot of minor details like the values of function key codes and includes some routines for compatibility with TP5's ‘Win’ unit as well as BP's ‘WinCRT’ and Turbo Power's ‘TPCrt’ units, and some extensions.
The unit has been extended by many functions that were lacking in BP's unit and required assembler code or direct memory/port access to be implemented under BP. The GPC version is now fully suited for portable, real-world programming without any dirty tricks.
The unit is also available as ‘WinCRT’, completely identical to ‘CRT’. The only purpose of this “feature” is to let programs written for TPW or BP, with a ‘uses WinCRT’ directive, compile without changes. Unlike TPW/BP's ‘WinCRT’ unit, GPC's unit is not crippled, compared to ‘CRT’.
To use this unit, you will need the ‘ncurses’ (version 5.0 or newer) or ‘PDCurses’ library which can be found in http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/.
{ CRT (Crt Replacement Tool) Portable BP compatible CRT unit for GPC with many extensions This unit is aware of terminal types. This means programs using this unit will work whether run locally or while being logged in remotely from a system with a completely different terminal type (as long as the appropriate terminfo entry is present on the system where the program is run). NOTES: - The CRT unit needs the ncurses and panel libraries which should be available for almost any system. For Dos systems, where ncurses is not available, it is configured to use the PDCurses and its panel library instead. On Unix systems with X11, it can also use PDCurses (xcurses) and xpanel to produce X11 programs. The advantage is that the program won't need an xterm with a valid terminfo entry, the output may look a little nicer and function keys work better than in an xterm, but the disadvantage is that it will only run under X. The ncurses and PDCurses libraries (including panel and xpanel, resp.) can be found in http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/ (Note that ncurses is already installed on many Unix systems.) For ncurses, version 5.0 or newer is required. When an X11 version under Unix is wanted, give ‘-DX11’ when compiling crt.pas and crtc.c (or when compiling crt.pas or a program that uses CRT with ‘--automake’). On pre-X11R6 systems, give ‘-DNOX11R6’ additionally. You might also have to give the path to the X11 libraries with ‘-L’, e.g. ‘-L /usr/X11/lib’. - A few features cannot be implemented in a portable way and are only available on some systems: Sound, NoSound 1) -----------------------. GetShiftState ------------------. | TextMode etc. 2) -------------. | | CRTSavePreviousScreen --------. | | | Interrupt signal (Ctrl-C) handling ---. | | | | | | | | | Linux/IA32 3) (terminal) X X 4) X 5) X 6) X 6) Other Unix (terminal) X X 7) X 5) - - Unix (X11 version) X X - X - Dos (DJGPP) X X X X X MS-Windows (Cygwin, mingw, MSYS) X - X 8) X - Notes: 1) If you define NO_CRT_DUMMY_SOUND while compiling CRT, you will get linking errors when your program tries to use Sound/NoSound on a platform where it's not supported (which is useful to detect at compile time if playing sound is a major task of your program). Otherwise, Sound/NoSound will simply do nothing (which is usually acceptable if the program uses these routines just for an occasional beep). 2) Changing to monochrome modes works on all platforms. Changing the screen size only works on those indicated. However, even on the platforms not supported, the program will react to screen size changes by external means (e.g. changing the window size with the mouse if running in a GUI window or resizing a console or virtual terminal). 3) Probably also on other processors, but I've had no chance to test this yet. 4) Only on a local console with access permissions to the corresponding virtual console memory device or using the ‘crtscreen’ utility (see crtscreen.c in the demos directory). 5) Only if supported by an external command (e.g., in xterms and on local Linux consoles). The command to be called can be defined in the environment variable ‘RESIZETERM’ (where the variables ‘columns’ and ‘lines’ in the command are set to the size wanted). If not set, the code will try ‘resize -s’ in an xterm and otherwise ‘SVGATextMode’ and ‘setfont’. For this to work, these utilities need to be present in the PATH or ‘/usr/sbin’ or ‘/usr/local/sbin’. Furthermore, SVGATextMode and setfont require root permissions, either to the executable of the program compiled with CRT or to resizecons (called by setfont) or SVGATextMode. To allow the latter, do "chmod u+s `which resizecons`" and/or "chmod u+s `which SVGATextMode`", as root once, but only if you really want each user to be allowed to change the text mode. 6) Only on local consoles. 7) Some terminals only. Most xterms etc. support it as well as other terminals that support an "alternate screen" in the smcup/rmcup terminal capabilities. 8) Only with PDCurses, not with ncurses. Changing the number of screen *columns* doesn't work in a full-screen session. - When CRT is initialized (automatically or explicitly; see the comments for CRTInit), the screen is cleared, and at the end of the program, the cursor is placed at the bottom of the screen (curses behaviour). - All the other things (including most details like color and function key constants) are compatible with BP's CRT unit, and there are many extensions that BP's unit does not have. - When the screen size is changed by an external event (e.g., resizing an xterm or changing the screen size from another VC under Linux), the virtual "function key" kbScreenSizeChanged is returned. Applications can use the virtual key to resize their windows. kbScreenSizeChanged will not be returned if the screen size change was initiated by the program itself (by using TextMode or SetScreenSize). Note that TextMode sets the current panel to the full screen size, sets the text attribute to the default and clears the window (BP compatibility), while SetScreenSize does not. - After the screen size has been changed, whether by using TextMode, SetScreenSize or by an external event, ScreenSize will return the new screen size. The current window and all panels will have been adjusted to the new screen size. This means, if their right or lower ends are outside the new screen size, the windows are moved to the left and/or top as far as necessary. If this is not enough, i.e., if they are wider/higher than the new screen size, they are shrinked to the total screen width/height. When the screen size is enlarged, window sizes are not changed, with one exception: Windows that extend through the whole screen width/height are enlarged to the whole new screen width/height (in particular, full-screen windows remain full-screen). This behaviour might not be optimal for all purposes, but you can always resize your windows in your application after the screen size change. - (ncurses only) The environment variable ‘ESCDELAY’ specifies the number of milliseconds allowed between an ‘Esc’ character and the rest of an escape sequence (default 1000). Setting it to a value too small can cause problems with programs not recognizing escape sequences such as function keys, especially over slow network connections. Setting it to a value too large can delay the recognition of an ‘ESC’ key press notably. On local Linux consoles, e.g., 10 seems to be a good value. - When trying to write portable programs, don't rely on exactly the same look of your output and the availability of all the key combinations. Some kinds of terminals support only some of the display attributes and special characters, and usually not all of the keys declared are really available. Therefore, it's safer to provide the same function on different key combinations and to not use the more exotic ones. - CRT supports an additional modifier key (if present), called ‘Extra’. On DJGPP, it's the <Scroll Lock> key, under X11 it's the modifier #4, and on a local Linux console, it's the ‘CtrlL’ modifier (value 64) which is unused on many keytabs and can be mapped to any key(s), e.g. to those keys on new keyboards with these ugly symbols waiting to be replaced by penguins (keycodes 125 and 127) by inserting the following two lines into your /etc/default.keytab and reloading the keytab with ‘loadkeys’ (you usually have to do this as root): keycode 125 = CtrlL keycode 127 = CtrlL Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. Please also note the license of the curses library used. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030722} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030722 or newer.} {$endif} unit {$ifdef THIS_IS_WINCRT} WinCRT {$else} CRT {$endif}; interface uses GPC; const { CRT modes } BW40 = 0; { 40x25 Black/White } CO40 = 1; { 40x25 Color } BW80 = 2; { 80x25 Black/White } CO80 = 3; { 80x25 Color } Mono = 7; { 80x25 Black/White } Font8x8 = 256; { Add-in for 80x43 or 80x50 mode } { Mode constants for Turbo Pascal 3.0 compatibility } C40 = CO40; C80 = CO80; { Foreground and background color constants } Black = 0; Blue = 1; Green = 2; Cyan = 3; Red = 4; Magenta = 5; Brown = 6; LightGray = 7; { Foreground color constants } DarkGray = 8; LightBlue = 9; LightGreen = 10; LightCyan = 11; LightRed = 12; LightMagenta = 13; Yellow = 14; White = 15; { Add-in for blinking } Blink = 128; type TTextAttr = Byte; var { If False (default: True), catch interrupt signals (SIGINT; Ctrl-C), and other flow control characters as well as SIGTERM, SIGHUP and perhaps other signals } CheckBreak: Boolean = True; attribute (name = 'crt_CheckBreak'); { If True (default : False), replace Ctrl-Z by #0 in input } CheckEOF: Boolean = False; attribute (name = 'crt_CheckEOF'); { Ignored -- meaningless here } DirectVideo: Boolean = True; { Ignored -- curses or the terminal driver will take care of that when necessary } CheckSnow: Boolean = False; { Current (sic!) text mode } LastMode: CCardinal = 3; attribute (name = 'crt_LastMode'); { Current text attribute } TextAttr: TTextAttr = 7; attribute (name = 'crt_TextAttr'); { Window upper left coordinates. *Obsolete*! Please see WindowMin below. } WindMin: CCardinal = High (CCardinal); attribute (name = 'crt_WindMin'); { Window lower right coordinates. *Obsolete*! Please see WindowMax below. } WindMax: CCardinal = High (CCardinal); attribute (name = 'crt_WindMax'); procedure AssignCRT (var f: Text); function KeyPressed: Boolean; external name 'crt_KeyPressed'; function ReadKey: Char; external name 'crt_ReadKey'; { Not effective on all platforms, see above. See also SetScreenSize and SetMonochrome. } procedure TextMode (Mode: Integer); procedure Window (x1, y1, x2, y2: CInteger); external name 'crt_Window'; procedure GotoXY (x, y: CInteger); external name 'crt_GotoXY'; function WhereX: CInteger; external name 'crt_WhereX'; function WhereY: CInteger; external name 'crt_WhereY'; procedure ClrScr; external name 'crt_ClrScr'; procedure ClrEOL; external name 'crt_ClrEOL'; procedure InsLine; external name 'crt_InsLine'; procedure DelLine; external name 'crt_DelLine'; procedure TextColor (Color: TTextAttr); procedure TextBackground (Color: TTextAttr); procedure LowVideo; procedure HighVideo; procedure NormVideo; procedure Delay (MS: CCardinal); external name 'crt_Delay'; { Not available on all platforms, see above } procedure Sound (Hz: CCardinal); external name 'crt_Sound'; procedure NoSound; external name 'crt_NoSound'; { =================== Extensions over BP's CRT =================== } { Initializes the CRT unit. Should be called before using any of CRT's routines. Note: For BP compatibility, CRT is initizalized automatically when (almost) any of its routines are used for the first time. In this case, some defaults are set to match BP more closely. In particular, the PC charset (see SetPCCharSet) is enabled then (disabled otherwise), and the update level (see SetCRTUpdate) is set to UpdateRegularly (UpdateWaitInput otherwise). This feature is meant for BP compatibility *only*. Don't rely on it when writing a new program. Use CRTInit then, and set the defaults to the values you want explicitly. SetCRTUpdate is one of those few routines which will not cause CRT to be initialized immediately, and a value set with it will survive both automatic and explicit initialization, so you can use it to set the update level without caring which way CRT will be initialized. (This does not apply to SetPCCharSet. Since it works on a per-panel basis, it has to initialize CRT first, so there is a panel to start with.) If you terminate the program before calling CRTInit or any routine that causes automatic initialization, curses will never be initialized, so e.g., the screen won't be cleared. This can be useful, e.g., to check the command line arguments (or anything else) and if there's a problem, write an error and abort. Just be sure to write the error to StdErr, not Output (because Output will be assigned to CRT, and therefore writing to Output will cause CRT to be initialized, and because errors belong to StdErr, anyway), and to call ‘RestoreTerminal (True)’ before (just to be sure, in case some code -- perhaps added later, or hidden in the initialization of some unit -- does initialize CRT). } procedure CRTInit; external name 'crt_Init'; { Changes the input and output file and the terminal description CRT uses. Only effective with ncurses, and only if called before CRT is initialized (automatically or explicitly; see the comments for CRTInit). If TerminalType is nil, the default will be used. If InputFile and/or OutputFile are Null, they remain unchanged. } procedure CRTSetTerminal (TerminalType: CString; var InputFile, OutputFile: AnyFile); attribute (name = 'crt_SetTerminal'); { If called with an argument True, it causes CRT to save the previous screen contents if possible (see the comments at the beginning of the unit), and restore them when calling RestoreTerminal (True). After RestoreTerminal (False), they're saved again, and at the end of the program, they're restored. If called with an argument False, it will prohibit this behaviour. The default, if this procedure is not called, depends on the terminal (generally it is active on most xterms and similar and not active on most other terminals). This procedure should be called before initializing CRT (using CRTInit or automatically), otherwise the previous screen contents may already have been overwritten. It has no effect under XCurses, because the program uses its own window, anyway. } procedure CRTSavePreviousScreen (On: Boolean); external name 'crt_SavePreviousScreen'; { Returns True if CRTSavePreviousScreen was called with argument True and the functionality is really available. Note that the result is not reliable until CRT is initialized, while CRTSavePreviousScreen should be called before CRT is initialized. That's why they are two separate routines. } function CRTSavePreviousScreenWorks: Boolean; external name 'crt_SavePreviousScreenWorks'; { If CRT is initialized automatically, not via CRTInit, and CRTAutoInitProc is not nil, it will be called before actually initializing CRT. } var CRTAutoInitProc: procedure = nil; attribute (name = 'crt_AutoInitProc'); { Aborts with a runtime error saying that CRT was not initialized. If you set CRTAutoInitProc to this procedure, you can effectively disable CRT's automatic initialization. } procedure CRTNotInitialized; attribute (name = 'crt_NotInitialized'); { Set terminal to shell or curses mode. An internal procedure registered by CRT via RegisterRestoreTerminal does this as well, so CRTSetCursesMode has to be called only in unusual situations, e.g. after executing a process that changes terminal modes, but does not restore them (e.g. because it crashed or was killed), and the process was not executed with the Execute routine, and RestoreTerminal was not called otherwise. If you set it to False temporarily, be sure to set it back to True before doing any further CRT operations, otherwise the result may be strange. } procedure CRTSetCursesMode (On: Boolean); external name 'crt_SetCursesMode'; { Do the same as ‘RestoreTerminal (True)’, but also clear the screen after restoring the terminal (except for XCurses, because the program uses its own window, anyway). Does not restore and save again the previous screen contents if CRTSavePreviousScreen was called. } procedure RestoreTerminalClearCRT; attribute (name = 'crt_RestoreTerminalClearCRT'); { Keyboard and character graphics constants -- BP compatible! =:-} {$i crt.inc} var { Tells whether the XCurses version of CRT is used } XCRT: Boolean = {$ifdef XCURSES} True {$else} False {$endif}; attribute (name = 'crt_XCRT'); { If True (default: False), the Beep procedure and writing #7 do a Flash instead } VisualBell: Boolean = False; attribute (name = 'crt_VisualBell'); { Cursor shape codes. Only to be used in very special cases. } CursorShapeHidden: CInteger = 0; attribute (name = 'crt_CursorShapeHidden'); CursorShapeNormal: CInteger = 1; attribute (name = 'crt_CursorShapeNormal'); CursorShapeFull: CInteger = 2; attribute (name = 'crt_CursorShapeFull'); type TKey = CCardinal; TCursorShape = (CursorIgnored, CursorHidden, CursorNormal, CursorFat, CursorBlock); TCRTUpdate = (UpdateNever, UpdateWaitInput, UpdateInput, UpdateRegularly, UpdateAlways); TPoint = record x, y: CInteger end; PCharAttr = ^TCharAttr; TCharAttr = record ch : Char; Attr : TTextAttr; PCCharSet: Boolean end; PCharAttrs = ^TCharAttrs; TCharAttrs = array [1 .. MaxVarSize div SizeOf (TCharAttr)] of TCharAttr; TWindowXYInternalCard8 = Cardinal attribute (Size = 8); TWindowXYInternalFill = Integer attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (CCardinal) - 16); TWindowXY = packed record {$ifdef __BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN__} Fill: TWindowXYInternalFill; y, x: TWindowXYInternalCard8 {$elif defined (__BYTES_LITTLE_ENDIAN__)} x, y: TWindowXYInternalCard8; Fill: TWindowXYInternalFill {$else} {$error Endianness is not defined!} {$endif} end; { Make sure TWindowXY really has the same size as WindMin and WindMax. The value of the constant will always be True, and is of no further interest. } const AssertTWindowXYSize = CompilerAssert ((SizeOf (TWindowXY) = SizeOf (WindMin)) and (SizeOf (TWindowXY) = SizeOf (WindMax))); var { Window upper and left coordinates. More comfortable to access than WindMin, but also *obsolete*. WindMin and WindowMin still work, but have the problem that they implicitly limit the window size to 255x255 characters. Though that's not really small for a text window, it's easily possible to create bigger ones (e.g. in an xterm with a small font, on a high resolution screen and/or extending over several virutal desktops). When using coordinates greater than 254, the corresponding bytes in WindowMin/WindowMax will be set to 254, so, e.g., programs which do ‘Inc (WindowMin.x)’ will not fail quite as badly (but probably still fail). The routines Window and GetWindow use Integer coordinates, and don't suffer from any of these problems, so they should be used instead. } WindowMin: TWindowXY absolute WindMin; { Window lower right coordinates. More comfortable to access than WindMax, but also *obsolete* (see the comments for WindowMin). Use Window and GetWindow instead. } WindowMax: TWindowXY absolute WindMax; { The attribute set by NormVideo } NormAttr: TTextAttr = 7; attribute (name = 'crt_NormAttr'); { Tells whether the current mode is monochrome } IsMonochrome: Boolean = False; attribute (name = 'crt_IsMonochrome'); { This value can be set to a combination of the shFoo constants and will be ORed to the actual shift state returned by GetShiftState. This can be used to easily simulate shift keys on systems where they can't be accessed. } VirtualShiftState: CInteger = 0; attribute (name = 'crt_VirtualShiftState'); { Returns the size of the screen. Note: In BP's WinCRT unit, ScreenSize is a variable. But since writing to it from a program is pointless, anyway, providing a function here should not cause any incompatibility. } function ScreenSize: TPoint; attribute (name = 'crt_GetScreenSize'); { Change the screen size if possible. } procedure SetScreenSize (x, y: CInteger); external name 'crt_SetScreenSize'; { Turns colors off or on. } procedure SetMonochrome (Monochrome: Boolean); external name 'crt_SetMonochrome'; { Tell which modifier keys are currently pressed. The result is a combination of the shFoo constants defined in crt.inc, or 0 on systems where this function is not supported -- but note VirtualShiftState. If supported, ReadKey automatically converts kbIns and kbDel keys to kbShIns and kbShDel, resp., if shift is pressed. } function GetShiftState: CInteger; external name 'crt_GetShiftState'; { Get the extent of the current window. Use this procedure rather than reading WindMin and WindMax or WindowMin and WindowMax, since this routine allows for window sizes larger than 255. The resulting coordinates are 1-based (like in Window, unlike WindMin, WindMax, WindowMin and WindowMax). Any of the parameters may be Null in case you're interested in only some of the coordinates. } procedure GetWindow (var x1, y1, x2, y2: Integer); attribute (name = 'crt_GetWindow'); { Determine when to update the screen. The possible values are the following. The given conditions *guarantee* updates. However, updates may occur more frequently (even if the update level is set to UpdateNever). About the default value, see the comments for CRTInit. UpdateNever : never (unless explicitly requested with CRTUpdate) UpdateWaitInput: before Delay and CRT input, unless typeahead is detected UpdateInput : before Delay and CRT input UpdateRegularly: before Delay and CRT input and otherwise in regular intervals without causing too much refresh. This uses a timer on some systems (currently, Unix with ncurses). This was created for BP compatibility, but for many applications, a lower value causes less flickering in the output, and additionally, timer signals won't disturb other operations. Under DJGPP, this always updates immediately, but this fact should not mislead DJGPP users into thinking this is always so. UpdateAlways : after each output. This can be very slow. (Not so under DJGPP, but this fact should not mislead DJGPP users ...) } procedure SetCRTUpdate (UpdateLevel: TCRTUpdate); external name 'crt_SetUpdateLevel'; { Do an update now, independently of the update level } procedure CRTUpdate; external name 'crt_Update'; { Do an update now and completely redraw the screen } procedure CRTRedraw; external name 'crt_Redraw'; { Return Ord (key) for normal keys and $100 * Ord (fkey) for function keys } function ReadKeyWord: TKey; external name 'crt_ReadKeyWord'; { Extract the character and scan code from a TKey value } function Key2Char (k: TKey): Char; function Key2Scan (k: TKey): Char; { Convert a key to upper/lower case if it is a letter, leave it unchanged otherwise } function UpCaseKey (k: TKey): TKey; function LoCaseKey (k: TKey): TKey; { Return key codes for the combination of the given key with Ctrl, Alt, AltGr or Extra, resp. Returns 0 if the combination is unknown. } function CtrlKey (ch: Char): TKey; attribute (name = 'crt_CtrlKey'); function AltKey (ch: Char): TKey; external name 'crt_AltKey'; function AltGrKey (ch: Char): TKey; external name 'crt_AltGrKey'; function ExtraKey (ch: Char): TKey; external name 'crt_ExtraKey'; { Check if k is a pseudo key generated by a deadly signal trapped } function IsDeadlySignal (k: TKey): Boolean; { Produce a beep or a screen flash } procedure Beep; external name 'crt_Beep'; procedure Flash; external name 'crt_Flash'; { Get size of current window (calculated using GetWindow) } function GetXMax: Integer; function GetYMax: Integer; { Get/goto an absolute position } function WhereXAbs: Integer; function WhereYAbs: Integer; procedure GotoXYAbs (x, y: Integer); { Turn scrolling on or off } procedure SetScroll (State: Boolean); external name 'crt_SetScroll'; { Read back whether scrolling is enabled } function GetScroll: Boolean; external name 'crt_GetScroll'; { Determine whether to interpret non-ASCII characters as PC ROM characters (True), or in a system dependent way (False). About the default, see the comments for CRTInit. } procedure SetPCCharSet (PCCharSet: Boolean); external name 'crt_SetPCCharSet'; { Read back the value set by SetPCCharSet } function GetPCCharSet: Boolean; external name 'crt_GetPCCharSet'; { Determine whether to interpret #7, #8, #10, #13 as control characters (True, default), or as graphics characters (False) } procedure SetControlChars (UseControlChars: Boolean); external name 'crt_SetControlChars'; { Read back the value set by SetControlChars } function GetControlChars: Boolean; external name 'crt_GetControlChars'; procedure SetCursorShape (Shape: TCursorShape); external name 'crt_SetCursorShape'; function GetCursorShape: TCursorShape; external name 'crt_GetCursorShape'; procedure HideCursor; procedure HiddenCursor; procedure NormalCursor; procedure FatCursor; procedure BlockCursor; procedure IgnoreCursor; { Simulates a block cursor by writing a block character onto the cursor position. The procedure automatically finds the topmost visible panel whose shape is not CursorIgnored and places the simulated cursor there (just like the hardware cursor), with matching attributes, if the cursor shape is CursorFat or CursorBlock (otherwise, no simulated cursor is shown). Calling this procedure again makes the simulated cursor disappear. In particular, to get the effect of a blinking cursor, you have to call the procedure repeatedly (say, 8 times a second). CRT will not do this for you, since it does not intend to be your main event loop. } procedure SimulateBlockCursor; external name 'crt_SimulateBlockCursor'; { Makes the cursor simulated by SimulateBlockCursor disappear if it is active. Does nothing otherwise. You should call this procedure after using SimulateBlockCursor before doing any further CRT output (though failing to do so should not hurt except for possibly leaving the simulated cursor in its old position longer than it should). } procedure SimulateBlockCursorOff; external name 'crt_SimulateBlockCursorOff'; function GetTextColor: Integer; function GetTextBackground: Integer; { Write string at the given position without moving the cursor. Truncated at the right margin. } procedure WriteStrAt (x, y: Integer; const s: String; Attr: TTextAttr); { Write (several copies of) a char at then given position without moving the cursor. Truncated at the right margin. } procedure WriteCharAt (x, y, Count: Integer; ch: Char; Attr: TTextAttr); { Write characters with specified attributes at the given position without moving the cursor. Truncated at the right margin. } procedure WriteCharAttrAt (x, y, Count: CInteger; CharAttr: PCharAttrs); external name 'crt_WriteCharAttrAt'; { Write a char while moving the cursor } procedure WriteChar (ch: Char); { Read a character from a screen position } procedure ReadChar (x, y: CInteger; var ch: Char; var Attr: TTextAttr); external name 'crt_ReadChar'; { Change only text attributes, leave characters. Truncated at the right margin. } procedure ChangeTextAttr (x, y, Count: Integer; NewAttr: TTextAttr); { Fill current window } procedure FillWin (ch: Char; Attr: TTextAttr); external name 'crt_FillWin'; { Calculate size of memory required for ReadWin in current window. } function WinSize: SizeType; external name 'crt_WinSize'; { Save window contents. Buf must be WinSize bytes large. } procedure ReadWin (var Buf); external name 'crt_ReadWin'; { Restore window contents saved by ReadWin. The size of the current window must match the size of the window from which ReadWin was used, but the position may be different. } procedure WriteWin (const Buf); external name 'crt_WriteWin'; type WinState = record x1, y1, x2, y2, WhereX, WhereY, NewX1, NewY1, NewX2, NewY2: Integer; TextAttr: TTextAttr; CursorShape: TCursorShape; ScreenSize: TPoint; Buffer: ^Byte end; { Save window position and size, cursor position, text attribute and cursor shape -- *not* the window contents. } procedure SaveWin (var State: WinState); { Make a new window (like Window), and save the contents of the screen below the window as well as the position and size, cursor position, text attribute and cursor shape of the old window. } procedure MakeWin (var State: WinState; x1, y1, x2, y2: Integer); { Create window in full size, save previous text mode and all values that MakeWin does. } procedure SaveScreen (var State: WinState); { Restore the data saved by SaveWin, MakeWin or SaveScreen. } procedure RestoreWin (var State: WinState); { Panels } type TPanel = Pointer; function GetActivePanel: TPanel; external name 'crt_GetActivePanel'; procedure PanelNew (x1, y1, x2, y2: CInteger; BindToBackground: Boolean); external name 'crt_PanelNew'; procedure PanelDelete (Panel: TPanel); external name 'crt_PanelDelete'; procedure PanelBindToBackground (Panel: TPanel; BindToBackground: Boolean); external name 'crt_PanelBindToBackground'; function PanelIsBoundToBackground (Panel: TPanel): Boolean; external name 'crt_PanelIsBoundToBackground'; procedure PanelActivate (Panel: TPanel); external name 'crt_PanelActivate'; procedure PanelHide (Panel: TPanel); external name 'crt_PanelHide'; procedure PanelShow (Panel: TPanel); external name 'crt_PanelShow'; function PanelHidden (Panel: TPanel): Boolean; external name 'crt_PanelHidden'; procedure PanelTop (Panel: TPanel); external name 'crt_PanelTop'; procedure PanelBottom (Panel: TPanel); external name 'crt_PanelBottom'; procedure PanelMoveAbove (Panel, Above: TPanel); external name 'crt_PanelMoveAbove'; procedure PanelMoveBelow (Panel, Below: TPanel); external name 'crt_PanelMoveBelow'; function PanelAbove (Panel: TPanel): TPanel; external name 'crt_PanelAbove'; function PanelBelow (Panel: TPanel): TPanel; external name 'crt_PanelBelow'; { TPCRT compatibility } { Write a string at the given position without moving the cursor. Truncated at the right margin. } procedure WriteString (const s: String; y, x: Integer); { Write a string at the given position with the given attribute without moving the cursor. Truncated at the right margin. } procedure FastWriteWindow (const s: String; y, x: Integer; Attr: TTextAttr); { Write a string at the given absolute position with the given attribute without moving the cursor. Truncated at the right margin. } procedure FastWrite (const s: String; y, x: Integer; Attr: TTextAttr); { WinCRT compatibility } const cw_UseDefault = Integer ($8000); var { Ignored } WindowOrg : TPoint = (cw_UseDefault, cw_UseDefault); WindowSize: TPoint = (cw_UseDefault, cw_UseDefault); Origin : TPoint = (0, 0); InactiveTitle: PChar = '(Inactive %s)'; AutoTracking: Boolean = True; WindowTitle: {$ifdef __BP_TYPE_SIZES__} array [0 .. 79] of Char {$else} TStringBuf {$endif}; { Cursor location, 0-based } Cursor : TPoint = (0, 0); attribute (name = 'crt_Cursor'); procedure InitWinCRT; attribute (name = 'crt_InitWinCRT'); { Halts the program } procedure DoneWinCRT; attribute (noreturn, name = 'crt_DoneWinCRT'); procedure WriteBuf (Buffer: PChar; Count: SizeType); attribute (name = 'crt_WriteBuf'); function ReadBuf (Buffer: PChar; Count: SizeType): SizeType; attribute (name = 'crt_ReadBuf'); { 0-based coordinates! } procedure CursorTo (x, y: Integer); attribute (name = 'crt_CursorTo'); { Dummy } procedure ScrollTo (x, y: Integer); attribute (name = 'crt_ScrollTo'); { Dummy } procedure TrackCursor; attribute (name = 'crt_TrackCursor');
The following listing contains the interface of the Dos unit.
This is a portable implementation of most routines from BP's ‘Dos’ unit. A few routines that are Dos – or even IA32 real mode – specific, are only available if ‘__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__’ is defined, BP Incompatibilities.
The same functionality and much more is available in the Run Time System, Run Time System. In some cases, the RTS routines have the same interface as the routines in this unit (e.g. ‘GetEnv’, ‘FSplit’, ‘FExpand’, ‘FSearch’), in other cases, they have different names and/or easier and less limiting interfaces (e.g. ‘ReadDir’ etc. vs. ‘FindFirst’ etc.), and are often more efficient.
Therefore, using this unit is not recommended in newly written programs.
{ Portable BP compatible Dos unit This unit supports most of the routines and declarations of BP's Dos unit. Notes: - The procedures Keep, GetIntVec, SetIntVec are not supported since they make only sense for Dos real-mode programs (and GPC compiled programs do not run in real-mode, even on IA32 under Dos). The procedures Intr and MsDos are only supported under DJGPP if ‘__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__’ is defined (with the ‘-D__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__’ option). A few other routines are also only supported with this define, but on all platforms (but they are crude hacks, that's why they are not supported without this define). - The internal structure of file variables (FileRec and TextRec) is different in GPC. However, as far as TFDDs are concerned, there are other ways to achieve the same in GPC, see the GPC unit. Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Authors: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> Prof. Abimbola A. Olowofoyeku <African_Chief@bigfoot.com> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-,maximum-field-alignment 0} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.} {$endif} module Dos; { GPC and this unit use ‘AnyFile’ for different meanings. Export renaming helps us to avoid a conflict here. If you use both units, the meaning of the latter one will be effective, but you always get the built-in meaning by using ‘GPC_AnyFile’. } export Dos = all (DosAnyFile => AnyFile, FSearch, FExpand, FSplit, GetEnv); import GPC (MaxLongInt => GPC_Orig_MaxLongInt); System; type GPC_AnyFile = AnyFile; Byte8 = Cardinal attribute (Size = 8); Word16 = Cardinal attribute (Size = 16); Word32 = Cardinal attribute (Size = 32); TDosAttr = Word; const { File attribute constants } ReadOnly = $01; Hidden = $02; { set for dot files except '.' and '..' } SysFile = $04; { not supported } VolumeID = $08; { not supported } Directory = $10; Archive = $20; { means: not executable } DosAnyFile = $3f; { Flag bit masks -- only used by the unportable Dos routines } FCarry = 1; FParity = 4; FAuxiliary = $10; FZero = $40; FSign = $80; FOverflow = $800; { DosError codes } DosError_FileNotFound = 2; DosError_PathNotFound = 3; DosError_AccessDenied = 5; DosError_InvalidMem = 9; DosErorr_InvalidEnv = 10; DosError_NoMoreFiles = 18; DosError_IOError = 29; DosError_ReadFault = 30; type { String types. Not used in this unit, but declared for compatibility. } ComStr = String [127]; { Command line string } PathStr = String [79]; { File pathname string } DirStr = String [67]; { Drive and directory string } NameStr = String [8]; { File name string } ExtStr = String [4]; { File extension string } TextBuf = array [0 .. 127] of Char; { Search record used by FindFirst and FindNext } SearchRecFill = packed array [1 .. 21] of Byte8; SearchRec = record Fill: SearchRecFill; Attr: Byte8; Time, Size: LongInt; Name: {$ifdef __BP_TYPE_SIZES__} String [12] {$else} TString {$endif} end; { Date and time record used by PackTime and UnpackTime } DateTime = record Year, Month, Day, Hour, Min, Sec: Word end; { 8086 CPU registers -- only used by the unportable Dos routines } Registers = record case Boolean of False: (ax, bx, cx, dx, bp, si, di, ds, es, Flags: Word16); True : (al, ah, bl, bh, cl, ch, dl, dh: Byte8) end; var { Error status variable } DosError: Integer = 0; procedure GetDate (var Year, Month, Day, DayOfWeek: Word); procedure GetTime (var Hour, Minute, Second, Sec100: Word); procedure GetCBreak (var BreakOn: Boolean); procedure SetCBreak (BreakOn: Boolean); { GetVerify and SetVerify are dummies except for DJGPP (in the assumption that any real OS knows by itself when and how to verify its disks). } procedure GetVerify (var VerifyOn: Boolean); procedure SetVerify (VerifyOn: Boolean); function DiskFree (Drive: Byte): LongInt; function DiskSize (Drive: Byte): LongInt; procedure GetFAttr (var f: GPC_AnyFile; var Attr: TDosAttr); procedure SetFAttr (var f: GPC_AnyFile; Attr: TDosAttr); procedure GetFTime (var f: GPC_AnyFile; var MTime: LongInt); procedure SetFTime (var f: GPC_AnyFile; MTime: LongInt); { FindFirst and FindNext are quite inefficient since they emulate all the brain-dead Dos stuff. If at all possible, the standard routines OpenDir, ReadDir and CloseDir (in the GPC unit) should be used instead. } procedure FindFirst (const Path: String; Attr: TDosAttr; var SR: SearchRec); procedure FindNext (var SR: SearchRec); procedure FindClose (var SR: SearchRec); procedure UnpackTime (p: LongInt; var t: DateTime); procedure PackTime (const t: DateTime; var p: LongInt); function EnvCount: Integer; function EnvStr (EnvIndex: Integer): TString; procedure SwapVectors; { Exec executes a process via Execute, so RestoreTerminal is called with the argument True before and False after executing the process. } procedure Exec (const Path, Params: String); function DosExitCode: Word; { Unportable Dos-only routines and declarations } {$ifdef __BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__} {$ifdef __GO32__} { These are unportable Dos-only declarations and routines, since interrupts are Dos and CPU specific (and have no place in a high-level program, anyway). } procedure Intr (IntNo: Byte; var Regs: Registers); procedure MsDos (var Regs: Registers); {$endif} { Though probably all non-Dos systems have versions numbers as well, returning them here would usually not do what is expected, e.g. testing if certain Dos features are present by comparing the version number. Therefore, this routine always returns 7 (i.e., version 7.0) on non-Dos systems, in the assumption that any real OS has at least the features of Dos 7. } function DosVersion: Word; { Changing the system date and time is a system administration task, not allowed to a normal process. On non-Dos systems, these routines emulate the changed date/time, but only for GetTime and GetDate (not the RTS date/time routines), and only for this process, not for child processes or even the parent process or system-wide. } procedure SetDate (Year, Month, Day: Word); procedure SetTime (Hour, Minute, Second, Sec100: Word); {$endif}
The following listing contains the interface of the DosUnix unit.
This unit is there to overcome some of those differences between Dos and Unix systems that are not automatically hidden by GPC and the Run Time System. Currently features translation of bash style input/output redirections (‘foo 2>&1’) into ‘redir’ calls for DJGPP (‘redir -eo foo’) and a way to read files with Dos CR/LF pairs on any system.
When necessary, new features will be added to the unit in future releases.
{ Some routines to support writing programs portable between Dos and Unix. Perhaps it would be a good idea not to put features to make Dos programs Unix-compatible (shell redirections) and vice versa (reading Dos files from Unix) together into one unit, but rather into two units, DosCompat and UnixCompat or so -- let's wait and see, perhaps when more routines suited for this/these unit(s) will be found, the design will become clearer ... Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.} {$endif} unit DosUnix; interface uses GPC; { This function is meant to be used when you want to invoke a system shell command (e.g. via Execute or Exec from the Dos unit) and want to specify input/output redirections for the command invoked. It caters for the different syntax between DJGPP (with the ‘redir’ utility) and other systems. To use it, code your redirections in bash style (see the table below) in your command line string, pass this string to this function, and the function's result to Execute or the other routines. The function translates the following bash style redirections (characters in brackets are optional) into a redir call under Dos systems except EMX, and leave them unchanged under other systems. Note: ‘redir’ comes with DJGPP, but it should be possible to install it on other Dos systems as well. OS/2's shell, however, supports bash style redirections, I was told, so we don't translate on EMX. [0]< file redirect standard input from file [1]>[|] file redirect standard output to file [1]>> file append standard output to file [1]>&2 redirect standard output to standard error 2>[|] file redirect standard error to file 2>> file append standard error to file 2>&1 redirect standard error to standard output &> file redirect both standard output and standard error to file } function TranslateRedirections (const Command: String) = s: TString; { Under Unix, translates CR/LF pairs to single LF characters when reading from f, and back when writing to f. Under Dos, does nothing because the run time system alrady does this job. In the result, you can read both Dos and Unix files, and files written will be Dos. } procedure AssignDos (var f: AnyFile; const FileName: String); { Translates a character from the "OEM" charset used under Dos to the ISO-8859-1 (Latin1) character set. } function OEM2Latin1 (ch: Char): Char; function OEM2Latin1Str (const s: String) = r: TString; { Translates a character from the ISO-8859-1 (Latin1) character set to the "OEM" charset used under Dos. } function Latin12OEM (ch: Char): Char; function Latin12OEMStr (const s: String) = r: TString;
The following listing contains the interface of the FileUtils unit.
This unit provides some routines for file and directory handling on a higher level than those provided by the RTS.
{ Some routines for file and directory handling on a higher level than those provided by the RTS. Copyright (C) 2000-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.} {$endif} unit FileUtils; interface uses GPC; type TStringProc = procedure (const s: String); { Finds all files matching the given Mask in the given Directory and all subdirectories of it. The matching is done using all wildcards and brace expansion, like MultiFileNameMatch does. For each file found, FileAction is executed. For each directory found (including ‘.’ and ‘..’ if they match the Mask!), DirAction is executed. If MainDirFirst is True, this happens before processing the files in the directory and below, otherwise afterwards. (The former is useful, e.g., if this is used to copy a directory tree and DirAction does a MkDir, while the latter behaviour is required when removing a directory tree and DirAction does a RmDir.) Both FileAction and DirAction can be nil in which case nothing is done for files or directories found, respectively. (If DirAction is nil, the value of DirsFirst does not matter.) Of course, FileAction and DirAction may also be identical. The procedure leaves InOutRes set in case of any error. If FileAction or DirAction return with InOutRes set, FindFiles recognizes this and returns immediately. } procedure FindFiles (const Directory, Mask: String; MainDirFirst: Boolean; FileAction, DirAction: TStringProc); attribute (iocritical); { Creates the directory given by Path and all directories in between that are necessary. Does not report an error if the directory already exists, but, of course, if it cannot be created because of missing permissions or because Path already exists as a file. } procedure MkDirs (const Path: String); attribute (iocritical); { Removes Path if empty as well as any empty parent directories. Does not report an error if the directory is not empty. } procedure RmDirs (const Path: String); attribute (iocritical); { Copies the file Source to Dest, overwriting Dest if it exists and can be written to. Returns any errors in IOResult. If Mode >= 0, it will change the permissions of Dest to Mode immediately after creating it and before writing any data to it. That's useful, e.g., if Dest is not meant to be world-readable, because if you'd do a ChMod after FileCopy, you might leave the data readable (depending on the umask) during the copying. If Mode < 0, Dest will be set to the same permissions Source has. In any case, Dest will be set to the modification time of Source after copying. On any error, the destination file is erased. This is to avoid leaving partial files in case of full file systems (one of the most common reasons for errors). } procedure FileCopy (const Source, Dest: String; Mode: Integer); attribute (iocritical); { Creates a backup of FileName in the directory BackupDirectory or, if BackupDirectory is empty, in the directory of FileName. Errors are returned in IOResult (and on any error, no partial backup file is left), but if FileName does not exist, this does *not* count as an error (i.e., BackupFile will just return without setting IOResult then). If OnlyUserReadable is True, the backup file will be given only user-read permissions, nothing else. The name chosen for the backup depends on the Simple and Short parameters. The short names will fit into 8+3 characters (whenever possible), while the long ones conform to the conventions used by most GNU tools. If Simple is True, a simple backup file name will be used, and previous backups under the same name will be overwritten (if possible). Otherwise, backups will be numbered, where the number is chosen to be larger than all existing backups, so it will be unique and increasing in chronological order. In particular: Simple Short Backup name True True Base name of FileName plus '.bak' False True Base name of FileName plus '.b' plus a number True False Base name plus extension of FileName plus '~' False False Base name plus extension of FileName plus '.~', a number and '~' } procedure BackupFile (const FileName, BackupDirectory: String; Simple, Short, OnlyUserReadable: Boolean); attribute (iocritical);
The following listing contains the interface of the GMP unit.
This unit provides an interface to the GNU Multiprecision Library to perform arithmetic on integer, rational and real numbers of unlimited size and precision.
To use this unit, you will need the ‘gmp’ library which can be found in http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/.
{ Definitions for GNU multiple precision functions: arithmetic with integer, rational and real numbers of arbitrary size and precision. Translation of the C header (gmp.h) of the GMP library. Tested with GMP 3.x and 4.x. To use the GMP unit, you will need the GMP library which can be found in http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/ Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. Please also note the license of the GMP library. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.} {$endif} {$nested-comments} { If HAVE_GMP4 is set (the default unless HAVE_GMP3 is set, some interface changes made in GMP 4 are taken into account. I.e., if this is set wrong, programs might fail. However, this only affects a few routines related to random numbers. } {$if not defined (HAVE_GMP3)} {$define HAVE_GMP4} {$endif} {$undef GMP} { in case it's set by the user } unit GMP; interface uses GPC; {$if defined (__mips) and defined (_ABIN32) and defined (HAVE_GMP3)} { Force the use of 64-bit limbs for all 64-bit MIPS CPUs if ABI permits. } {$define _LONG_LONG_LIMB} {$endif} type {$ifdef _SHORT_LIMB} mp_limb_t = CCardinal; mp_limb_signed_t = CInteger; {$elif defined (_LONG_LONG_LIMB)} mp_limb_t = LongCard; mp_limb_signed_t = LongInt; {$else} mp_limb_t = MedCard; mp_limb_signed_t = MedInt; {$endif} mp_ptr = ^mp_limb_t; {$if defined (_CRAY) and not defined (_CRAYMPP)} mp_size_t = CInteger; mp_exp_t = CInteger; {$else} mp_size_t = MedInt; mp_exp_t = MedInt; {$endif} mpz_t = record mp_alloc, mp_size: CInteger; mp_d: mp_ptr end; mpz_array_ptr = ^mpz_array; mpz_array = array [0 .. MaxVarSize div SizeOf (mpz_t) - 1] of mpz_t; mpq_t = record mp_num, mp_den: mpz_t end; mpf_t = record mp_prec, mp_size: CInteger; mp_exp: mp_exp_t; mp_d: mp_ptr end; TAllocFunction = function (Size: SizeType): Pointer; TReAllocFunction = function (var Dest: Pointer; OldSize, NewSize: SizeType): Pointer; TDeAllocProcedure = procedure (Src: Pointer; Size: SizeType); var mp_bits_per_limb: CInteger; attribute (const); external name '__gmp_bits_per_limb'; procedure mp_set_memory_functions (AllocFunction: TAllocFunction; ReAllocFunction: TReAllocFunction; DeAllocProcedure: TDeAllocProcedure); external name '__gmp_set_memory_functions'; { Integer (i.e. Z) routines } procedure mpz_init (var Dest: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_init'; procedure mpz_clear (var Dest: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_clear'; function mpz_realloc (var Dest: mpz_t; NewAlloc: mp_size_t): Pointer; external name '__gmpz_realloc'; procedure mpz_array_init (Dest: mpz_array_ptr; ArraySize, FixedNumBits: mp_size_t); external name '__gmpz_array_init'; procedure mpz_set (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_set'; procedure mpz_set_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_set_ui'; procedure mpz_set_si (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: MedInt); external name '__gmpz_set_si'; procedure mpz_set_d (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: Real); external name '__gmpz_set_d'; procedure mpz_set_q (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: mpq_t); external name '__gmpz_set_q'; procedure mpz_set_f (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: mpf_t); external name '__gmpz_set_f'; function mpz_set_str (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: CString; Base: CInteger): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_set_str'; procedure mpz_init_set (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_init_set'; procedure mpz_init_set_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_init_set_ui'; procedure mpz_init_set_si (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: MedInt); external name '__gmpz_init_set_si'; procedure mpz_init_set_d (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: Real); external name '__gmpz_init_set_d'; function mpz_init_set_str (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: CString; Base: CInteger): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_init_set_str'; function mpz_get_ui (protected var Src: mpz_t): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_get_ui'; function mpz_get_si (protected var Src: mpz_t): MedInt; external name '__gmpz_get_si'; function mpz_get_d (protected var Src: mpz_t): Real; external name '__gmpz_get_d'; { Pass nil for Dest to let the function allocate memory for it } function mpz_get_str (Dest: CString; Base: CInteger; protected var Src: mpz_t): CString; external name '__gmpz_get_str'; procedure mpz_add (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_add'; procedure mpz_add_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_add_ui'; procedure mpz_sub (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_sub'; procedure mpz_sub_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_sub_ui'; procedure mpz_mul (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_mul'; procedure mpz_mul_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_mul_ui'; procedure mpz_mul_2exp (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_mul_2exp'; procedure mpz_neg (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_neg'; procedure mpz_abs (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_abs'; procedure mpz_fac_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_fac_ui'; procedure mpz_tdiv_q (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_q'; procedure mpz_tdiv_q_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_q_ui'; procedure mpz_tdiv_r (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_r'; procedure mpz_tdiv_r_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_r_ui'; procedure mpz_tdiv_qr (var DestQ, DestR: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_qr'; procedure mpz_tdiv_qr_ui (var DestQ, DestR: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_qr_ui'; procedure mpz_fdiv_q (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_fdiv_q'; function mpz_fdiv_q_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_fdiv_q_ui'; procedure mpz_fdiv_r (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_fdiv_r'; function mpz_fdiv_r_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_fdiv_r_ui'; procedure mpz_fdiv_qr (var DestQ, DestR: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_fdiv_qr'; function mpz_fdiv_qr_ui (var DestQ, DestR: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_fdiv_qr_ui'; function mpz_fdiv_ui (protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_fdiv_ui'; procedure mpz_cdiv_q (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_cdiv_q'; function mpz_cdiv_q_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_cdiv_q_ui'; procedure mpz_cdiv_r (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_cdiv_r'; function mpz_cdiv_r_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_cdiv_r_ui'; procedure mpz_cdiv_qr (var DestQ, DestR: mpz_t; protected var Src1,Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_cdiv_qr'; function mpz_cdiv_qr_ui (var DestQ, DestR: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_cdiv_qr_ui'; function mpz_cdiv_ui (protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2:MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_cdiv_ui'; procedure mpz_mod (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_mod'; procedure mpz_divexact (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_divexact'; procedure mpz_tdiv_q_2exp (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_q_2exp'; procedure mpz_tdiv_r_2exp (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_r_2exp'; procedure mpz_fdiv_q_2exp (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_fdiv_q_2exp'; procedure mpz_fdiv_r_2exp (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_fdiv_r_2exp'; procedure mpz_powm (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Base, Exponent, Modulus: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_powm'; procedure mpz_powm_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Base: mpz_t; Exponent: MedCard; protected var Modulus: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_powm_ui'; procedure mpz_pow_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Base: mpz_t; Exponent: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_pow_ui'; procedure mpz_ui_pow_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; Base, Exponent: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_ui_pow_ui'; procedure mpz_sqrt (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_sqrt'; procedure mpz_sqrtrem (var Dest, DestR: mpz_t; protected var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_sqrtrem'; function mpz_perfect_square_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_perfect_square_p'; function mpz_probab_prime_p (protected var Src: mpz_t; Repetitions: CInteger): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_probab_prime_p'; procedure mpz_gcd (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_gcd'; function mpz_gcd_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_gcd_ui'; procedure mpz_gcdext (var Dest, DestA, DestB: mpz_t; protected var SrcA, SrcB: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_gcdext'; function mpz_invert (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src, Modulus: mpz_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_invert'; function mpz_jacobi (protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_jacobi'; function mpz_cmp (protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_cmp'; function mpz_cmp_ui (protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_cmp_ui'; function mpz_cmp_si (protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedInt): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_cmp_si'; function mpz_sgn (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger; attribute (inline); procedure mpz_and (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_and'; procedure mpz_ior (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_ior'; procedure mpz_com (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_com'; function mpz_popcount (protected var Src: mpz_t): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_popcount'; function mpz_hamdist (protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_hamdist'; function mpz_scan0 (protected var Src: mpz_t; StartingBit: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_scan0'; function mpz_scan1 (protected var Src: mpz_t; StartingBit: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_scan1'; procedure mpz_setbit (var Dest: mpz_t; BitIndex: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_setbit'; procedure mpz_clrbit (var Dest: mpz_t; BitIndex: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_clrbit'; procedure mpz_random (var Dest: mpz_t; MaxSize: mp_size_t); external name '__gmpz_random'; procedure mpz_random2 (var Dest: mpz_t; MaxSize: mp_size_t); external name '__gmpz_random2'; function mpz_sizeinbase (protected var Src: mpz_t; Base: CInteger): SizeType; external name '__gmpz_sizeinbase'; { Rational (i.e. Q) routines } procedure mpq_canonicalize (var Dest: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_canonicalize'; procedure mpq_init (var Dest: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_init'; procedure mpq_clear (var Dest: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_clear'; procedure mpq_set (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_set'; procedure mpq_set_z (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpq_set_z'; procedure mpq_set_ui (var Dest: mpq_t; Nom, Den: MedCard); external name '__gmpq_set_ui'; procedure mpq_set_si (var Dest: mpq_t; Nom: MedInt; Den: MedCard); external name '__gmpq_set_si'; procedure mpq_add (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_add'; procedure mpq_sub (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_sub'; procedure mpq_mul (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_mul'; procedure mpq_div (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_div'; procedure mpq_neg (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_neg'; procedure mpq_inv (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_inv'; function mpq_cmp (protected var Src1, Src2: mpq_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpq_cmp'; function mpq_cmp_ui (protected var Src1: mpq_t; Nom2, Den2: MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpq_cmp_ui'; function mpq_sgn (protected var Src: mpq_t): CInteger; attribute (inline); function mpq_equal (protected var Src1, Src2: mpq_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpq_equal'; function mpq_get_d (protected var Src: mpq_t): Real; external name '__gmpq_get_d'; procedure mpq_set_num (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpq_set_num'; procedure mpq_set_den (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpq_set_den'; procedure mpq_get_num (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_get_num'; procedure mpq_get_den (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_get_den'; { Floating point (i.e. R) routines } procedure mpf_set_default_prec (Precision: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_set_default_prec'; procedure mpf_init (var Dest: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_init'; procedure mpf_init2 (var Dest: mpf_t; Precision: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_init2'; procedure mpf_clear (var Dest: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_clear'; procedure mpf_set_prec (var Dest: mpf_t; Precision: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_set_prec'; function mpf_get_prec (protected var Src: mpf_t): MedCard; external name '__gmpf_get_prec'; procedure mpf_set_prec_raw (var Dest: mpf_t; Precision: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_set_prec_raw'; procedure mpf_set (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_set'; procedure mpf_set_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_set_ui'; procedure mpf_set_si (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: MedInt); external name '__gmpf_set_si'; procedure mpf_set_d (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: Real); external name '__gmpf_set_d'; procedure mpf_set_z (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpf_set_z'; procedure mpf_set_q (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpq_t); external name '__gmpf_set_q'; function mpf_set_str (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: CString; Base: CInteger): CInteger; external name '__gmpf_set_str'; procedure mpf_init_set (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_init_set'; procedure mpf_init_set_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_init_set_ui'; procedure mpf_init_set_si (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: MedInt); external name '__gmpf_init_set_si'; procedure mpf_init_set_d (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: Real); external name '__gmpf_init_set_d'; function mpf_init_set_str (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: CString; Base: CInteger): CInteger; external name '__gmpf_init_set_str'; function mpf_get_d (protected var Src: mpf_t): Real; external name '__gmpf_get_d'; { Pass nil for Dest to let the function allocate memory for it } function mpf_get_str (Dest: CString; var Exponent: mp_exp_t; Base: CInteger; NumberOfDigits: SizeType; protected var Src: mpf_t): CString; external name '__gmpf_get_str'; procedure mpf_add (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_add'; procedure mpf_add_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1: mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_add_ui'; procedure mpf_sub (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_sub'; procedure mpf_ui_sub (var Dest: mpf_t; Src1: MedCard; protected var Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_ui_sub'; procedure mpf_sub_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1: mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_sub_ui'; procedure mpf_mul (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_mul'; procedure mpf_mul_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1: mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_mul_ui'; procedure mpf_div (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_div'; procedure mpf_ui_div (var Dest: mpf_t; Src1: MedCard; protected var Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_ui_div'; procedure mpf_div_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1: mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_div_ui'; procedure mpf_sqrt (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_sqrt'; procedure mpf_sqrt_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_sqrt_ui'; procedure mpf_neg (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_neg'; procedure mpf_abs (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_abs'; procedure mpf_mul_2exp (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1: mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_mul_2exp'; procedure mpf_div_2exp (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1: mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_div_2exp'; function mpf_cmp (protected var Src1, Src2: mpf_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpf_cmp'; function mpf_cmp_si (protected var Src1: mpf_t; Src2: MedInt): CInteger; external name '__gmpf_cmp_si'; function mpf_cmp_ui (protected var Src1: mpf_t; Src2: MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpf_cmp_ui'; function mpf_eq (protected var Src1, Src2: mpf_t; NumberOfBits: MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpf_eq'; procedure mpf_reldiff (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_reldiff'; function mpf_sgn (protected var Src: mpf_t): CInteger; attribute (inline); procedure mpf_random2 (var Dest: mpf_t; MaxSize: mp_size_t; MaxExp: mp_exp_t); external name '__gmpf_random2'; {$if False} { @@ commented out because they use C file pointers } function mpz_inp_str (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: CFilePtr; Base: CInteger): SizeType; external name '__gmpz_inp_str'; function mpz_inp_raw (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: CFilePtr): SizeType; external name '__gmpz_inp_raw'; function mpz_out_str (Dest: CFilePtr; Base: CInteger; protected var Src: mpz_t): SizeType; external name '__gmpz_out_str'; function mpz_out_raw (Dest: CFilePtr; protected var Src: mpz_t): SizeType ; external name '__gmpz_out_raw'; { @@ mpf_out_str has a bug in GMP 2.0.2: it writes a spurious #0 before the exponent for negative numbers } function mpf_out_str (Dest: CFilePtr; Base: CInteger; NumberOfDigits: SizeType; protected var Src: mpf_t): SizeType; external name '__gmpf_out_str'; function mpf_inp_str (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: CFilePtr; Base: CInteger): SizeType; external name '__gmpf_inp_str'; {$endif} { Available random number generation algorithms. } type gmp_randalg_t = (GMPRandAlgLC { Linear congruential. }); const GMPRandAlgDefault = GMPRandAlgLC; { Linear congruential data struct. } type gmp_randata_lc = record a: mpz_t; { Multiplier. } c: MedCard; { Adder. } m: mpz_t; { Modulus (valid only if M2Exp = 0). } M2Exp: MedCard; { If <> 0, modulus is 2 ^ M2Exp. } end; type gmp_randstate_t = record Seed: mpz_t; { Current seed. } Alg: gmp_randalg_t; { Algorithm used. } AlgData: record { Algorithm specific data. } case gmp_randalg_t of GMPRandAlgLC: (lc: ^gmp_randata_lc) { Linear congruential. } end end; procedure gmp_randinit (var State: gmp_randstate_t; Alg: gmp_randalg_t; ...); external name '__gmp_randinit'; procedure gmp_randinit_lc (var State: gmp_randstate_t; {$ifdef HAVE_GMP4} protected var {$endif} a: mpz_t; c: MedCard; {$ifdef HAVE_GMP4} protected var {$endif} m: mpz_t); external name '__gmp_randinit_lc'; procedure gmp_randinit_lc_2exp (var State: gmp_randstate_t; {$ifdef HAVE_GMP4} protected var {$endif} a: mpz_t; c: MedCard; M2Exp: MedCard); external name '__gmp_randinit_lc_2exp'; procedure gmp_randseed (var State: gmp_randstate_t; Seed: mpz_t); external name '__gmp_randseed'; procedure gmp_randseed_ui (var State: gmp_randstate_t; Seed: MedCard); external name '__gmp_randseed_ui'; procedure gmp_randclear (var State: gmp_randstate_t); external name '__gmp_randclear'; procedure mpz_addmul_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_addmul_ui'; procedure mpz_bin_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_bin_ui'; procedure mpz_bin_uiui (var Dest: mpz_t; Src1, Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_bin_uiui'; function mpz_cmpabs (protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_cmpabs'; function mpz_cmpabs_ui (protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_cmpabs_ui'; procedure mpz_dump (protected var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_dump'; procedure mpz_fib_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_fib_ui'; function mpz_fits_sint_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_fits_sint_p'; function mpz_fits_slong_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_fits_slong_p'; function mpz_fits_sshort_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_fits_sshort_p'; function mpz_fits_uint_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_fits_uint_p'; function mpz_fits_ulong_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_fits_ulong_p'; function mpz_fits_ushort_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_fits_ushort_p'; procedure mpz_lcm (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_lcm'; procedure mpz_nextprime (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_nextprime'; function mpz_perfect_power_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_perfect_power_p'; function mpz_remove (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_remove'; function mpz_root (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src: mpz_t; n: MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_root'; procedure mpz_rrandomb (var ROP: mpz_t; var State: gmp_randstate_t; n: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_rrandomb'; procedure mpz_swap (var v1, v2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_swap'; function mpz_tdiv_ui (protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_tdiv_ui'; function mpz_tstbit (protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_tstbit'; procedure mpz_urandomb ({$ifdef HAVE_GMP4} var {$endif} ROP: mpz_t; var State: gmp_randstate_t; n: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_urandomb'; procedure mpz_urandomm ({$ifdef HAVE_GMP4} var {$endif} ROP: mpz_t; var State: gmp_randstate_t; {$ifdef HAVE_GMP4} protected var {$endif} n: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_urandomm'; procedure mpz_xor (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_xor'; procedure mpq_set_d (var Dest: mpq_t; Src: Real); external name '__gmpq_set_d'; procedure mpf_ceil (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_ceil'; procedure mpf_floor (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_floor'; {$ifdef HAVE_GMP4} function mpf_get_si (protected var Src: mpf_t): MedInt; external name '__gmpf_get_si'; function mpf_get_ui (protected var Src: mpf_t): MedCard; external name '__gmpf_get_ui'; function mpf_get_d_2exp (var Exp: MedInt; protected var Src: mpf_t): Real; external name '__gmpf_get_d_2exp'; {$endif} procedure mpf_pow_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1: mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_pow_ui'; procedure mpf_trunc (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_trunc'; procedure mpf_urandomb (ROP: mpf_t; var State: gmp_randstate_t; n: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_urandomb'; const GMPErrorNone = 0; GMPErrorUnsupportedArgument = 1; GMPErrorDivisionByZero = 2; GMPErrorSqrtOfNegative = 4; GMPErrorInvalidArgument = 8; GMPErrorAllocate = 16; var gmp_errno: CInteger; external name '__gmp_errno'; { Extensions to the GMP library, implemented in this unit } procedure mpf_exp (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t); procedure mpf_ln (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t); procedure mpf_pow (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1, Src2: mpf_t); procedure mpf_sin (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t); procedure mpf_cos (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t); procedure mpf_arctan (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t); procedure mpf_pi (var Dest: mpf_t);
The following listing contains the interface of the GPCUtil unit.
This unit provides some utility routines for compatibility to some units available for BP, like some Turbo Power units.
{ Some utility routines for compatibility to some units available
for BP, like some ‘Turbo Power’ units.
@@NOTE - SOME OF THE ROUTINES IN THIS UNIT MAY NOT WORK CORRECTLY.
TEST CAREFULLY AND USE WITH CARE!
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Authors: Prof. Abimbola A. Olowofoyeku <African_Chief@bigfoot.com>
Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.}
{$endif}
module GPCUtil;
export GPCUtil = all
(
{ Return the current working directory }
GetCurrentDirectory => ThisDirectory,
{ Does a directory exist? }
DirectoryExists => IsDirectory,
{ Does file name s exist? }
FileExists => ExistFile,
{ Return just the directory path of Path. Returns
DirSelf + DirSeparator if Path contains no directory. }
DirFromPath => JustPathName,
{ Return just the file name part without extension of Path.
Empty if Path contains no file name. }
NameFromPath => JustFileName,
{ Return just the extension of Path. Empty if Path contains
no extension. }
ExtFromPath => JustExtension,
{ Return the full pathname of Path }
FExpand => FullPathName,
{ Add a DirSeparator to the end of s if there is not
already one. }
ForceAddDirSeparator => AddBackSlash,
{ Return a string stripped of leading spaces }
TrimLeftStr => TrimLead,
{ Return a string stripped of trailing spaces }
TrimRightStr => TrimTrail,
{ Return a string stripped of leading and trailing spaces }
TrimBothStr => Trim,
{ Convert a string to lowercase }
LoCaseStr => StLoCase,
{ Convert a string to uppercase }
UpCaseStr => StUpCase
);
import GPC;
{ Replace all occurences of OldC with NewC in s and return the
result }
function ReplaceChar (const s: String; OldC, NewC: Char) = Res:
TString;
{ Break a string into 2 parts, using Ch as a marker }
function BreakStr (const Src: String; var Dest1, Dest2: String; ch:
Char): Boolean; attribute (ignorable);
{ Convert a CString to an Integer }
function PChar2Int (s: CString) = i: Integer;
{ Convert a CString to a LongInt }
function PChar2Long (s: CString) = i: LongInt;
{ Convert a CString to a Double }
function PChar2Double (s: CString) = x: Double;
{ Search for s as an executable in the path and return its location
(full pathname) }
function PathLocate (const s: String): TString;
{ Copy file Src to Dest and return the number of bytes written }
function CopyFile (const Src, Dest: String; BufSize: Integer):
LongInt; attribute (ignorable);
{ Copy file Src to Dest and return the number of bytes written;
report the number of bytes written versus total size of the source
file }
function CopyFileEx (const Src, Dest: String; BufSize: Integer;
function Report (Reached, Total: LongInt): LongInt) = BytesCopied:
LongInt; attribute (ignorable);
{ Turbo Power compatibility }
{ Execute the program prog. Dummy1 and Dummy2 are for compatibility
only; they are ignored. }
function ExecDos (const Prog: String; Dummy1: Boolean; Dummy2:
Pointer): Integer; attribute (ignorable);
{ Return whether Src exists in the path as an executable -- if so
return its full location in Dest }
function ExistOnPath (const Src: String; var Dest: String) =
Existing: Boolean;
{ Change the extension of s to Ext (do not include the dot!) }
function ForceExtension (const s, Ext: String) = Res: TString;
{ Convert Integer to PChar; uses NewCString to allocate memory for
the result, so you must call StrDispose to free the memory later }
function Int2PChar (i: Integer): PChar;
{ Convert Integer to string }
function Int2Str (i: Integer) = s: TString;
{ Convert string to Integer }
function Str2Int (const s: String; var i: Integer): Boolean;
attribute (ignorable);
{ Convert string to LongInt }
function Str2Long (const s: String; var i: LongInt): Boolean;
attribute (ignorable);
{ Convert string to Double }
function Str2Real (const s: String; var i: Double): Boolean;
attribute (ignorable);
{ Return a string right-padded to length Len with ch }
function PadCh (const s: String; ch: Char; Len: Integer) = Padded:
TString;
{ Return a string right-padded to length Len with spaces }
function Pad (const s: String; Len: Integer): TString;
{ Return a string left-padded to length Len with ch }
function LeftPadCh (const s: String; ch: Char; Len: Byte) = Padded:
TString;
{ Return a string left-padded to length Len with blanks }
function LeftPad (const s: String; Len: Integer): TString;
{ Uniform access to big memory blocks for GPC and BP. Of course, for
programs that are meant only for GPC, you can use the usual
New/Dispose routines. But for programs that should compile with
GPC and BP, you can use the following routines for GPC. In the GPC
unit for BP (gpc-bp.pas), you can find emulations for BP that try
to provide access to as much memory as possible, despite the
limitations of BP. The drawback is that this memory cannot be used
freely, but only with the following moving routines. }
type
PBigMem = ^TBigMem;
TBigMem (MaxNumber: SizeType) = record
{ Public fields }
Number, BlockSize: SizeType;
Mappable: Boolean;
{ Private fields }
Pointers: array [1 .. Max (1, MaxNumber)] of ^Byte
end;
{ Note: the number of blocks actually allocated may be smaller than
WantedNumber. Check the Number field of the result. }
function AllocateBigMem (WantedNumber, aBlockSize: SizeType;
WantMappable: Boolean) = p: PBigMem;
procedure DisposeBigMem (p: PBigMem);
procedure MoveToBigMem (var Source; p: PBigMem; BlockNumber:
SizeType);
procedure MoveFromBigMem (p: PBigMem; BlockNumber: SizeType; var
Dest);
{ Maps a big memory block into normal addressable memory and returns
its address. The memory must have been allocated with
WantMappable = True. The mapping is only valid until the next
MapBigMem call. }
function MapBigMem (p: PBigMem; BlockNumber: SizeType): Pointer;
The following listing contains the interface of the HeapMon unit.
This unit provide a rather primitive means to watch the heap, i.e. check if all pointers that were allocated are released again. This is meant as a debugging help for avoiding memory leaks.
More extensive heap checking is provided by libraries like ‘efence’ which can be used in GPC programs without special provisions.
{ A unit to watch the heap, i.e. check if all pointers that were
allocated are released again. It is meant as a debugging help to
detect memory leaks.
Use it in the main program before all other units. When, at the
end of the program, some pointers that were allocated, have not
been released, the unit writes a report to StdErr or another file
(see below). Only pointers allocated via the Pascal mechanisms
(New, GetMem) are tracked, not pointers allocated with direct libc
calls or from C code. After a runtime error, pointers are not
checked.
Note that many units and libraries allocate memory for their own
purposes and don't always release it at the end. Therefore, the
usefulness of this unit is rather limited.
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit HeapMon;
interface
uses GPC;
{ This unit is automatically activated when used. The following
declarations are only needed for special purposes. }
{ The report generated at the end can be redirected to a certain
file by pointing HeapMonOutput to it. If not set, the report will
be printed to the error messages file given with ‘--gpc-rts’
options if given, and StdErr otherwise. }
var
HeapMonOutput: ^Text = nil;
{ HeapMonReport can be used to print a report on non-released memory
blocks at an arbitrary point during a program run to the file f.
It is invoked automatically at the end, so usually you don't have
to call it. Returns True if any non-released blocks were found,
False otherwise. }
function HeapMonReport (var f: Text; DoRestoreTerminal: Boolean) =
Res: Boolean; attribute (ignorable);
The following listing contains the interface of the Intl unit.
This unit provides national language support via locales and .mo files.
{ Welcome to the wonderful world of INTERNATIONALIZATION (i18n). This unit provides the powerful mechanism of national language support by accessing ‘.mo’ files and locale information. It includes: locales (not xlocales) and libintl. See documentation for gettext (‘info gettext’) for details. Because GPC can deal with both CStrings and Pascal Strings, there is an interface for both types of arguments and function results with slightly different names. E.g. for Pascal strings: function GetText (const MsgId: String): TString; And the same as above, but with a C interface: function GetTextC (MsgId: CString): CString; ‘PLConv’ in Pascal is very different from ‘struct lconv *’ in C. Element names do not have underscores and have sometimes different sizes. The conversion is done automatically and has correct results. Furthermore, we have a tool similar to ‘xgettext’ to extract all strings out of a Pascal source. It extracts the strings and writes a complete ‘.po’ file to a file. See http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/eike/ The filename is pas2po-VERSION.tar.gz. Copyright (C) 2001-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Eike Lange <eike.lange@uni-essen.de> GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, version 2. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with this library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.} {$endif} unit Intl; interface uses GPC; type IntlString = String (16); { Pascal translation from OrigLConv in intlc.c } PLConv = ^TLConv; TLConv = record { Numeric (non-monetary) information. } { Decimal point character. } DecimalPoint: IntlString; { Thousands separator. } ThousandsSep: IntlString; { Each element is the number of digits in each group; elements with higher indices are farther left. An element with value CharMax means that no further grouping is done. An element with value Chr (0) means that the previous element is used for all groups farther left. } Grouping: IntlString; { Monetary information. } { First three chars are a currency symbol from ISO 4217. Fourth char is the separator. Fifth char is Chr (0). } IntCurrSymbol: IntlString; { Local currency symbol. } CurrencySymbol: IntlString; { Decimal point character. } MonDecimalPoint: IntlString; { Thousands separator. } MonThousandsSep: IntlString; { Like ‘Grouping’ element (above). } MonGrouping: IntlString; { Sign for positive values. } PositiveSign: IntlString; { Sign for negative values. } NegativeSign: IntlString; { Int'l fractional digits. } IntFracDigits: ByteInt; { Local fractional digits. } FracDigits: ByteInt; { 1 if CurrencySymbol precedes a positive value, 0 if it succeeds. } PCSPrecedes: ByteInt; { 1 iff a space separates CurrencySymbol from a positive value. } PSepBySpace: ByteInt; { 1 if CurrencySymbol precedes a negative value, 0 if it succeeds. } NCSPrecedes: ByteInt; { 1 iff a space separates CurrencySymbol from a negative value. } NSepBySpace: ByteInt; { Positive and negative sign positions: 0 Parentheses surround the quantity and CurrencySymbol. 1 The sign string precedes the quantity and CurrencySymbol. 2 The sign string follows the quantity and CurrencySymbol. 3 The sign string immediately precedes the CurrencySymbol. 4 The sign string immediately follows the CurrencySymbol. } PSignPosn, NSignPosn: ByteInt; end; { Please do not assign anything to these identifiers! } var LC_CTYPE: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_CTYPE'; LC_NUMERIC: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_NUMERIC'; LC_TIME: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_TIME'; LC_COLLATE: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_COLLATE'; LC_MONETARY: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_MONETARY'; LC_MESSAGES: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_MESSAGES'; LC_ALL: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_ALL'; CharMax: Char; external name '_p_CHAR_MAX'; {@section Locales } { Set and/or return the current locale. } function SetLocale (Category: Integer; const Locale: String): TString; attribute (ignorable); { Set and/or return the current locale. Same as above, but returns a CString. } function SetLocaleC (Category: Integer; const Locale: String): CString; attribute (ignorable); { Return the numeric/monetary information for the current locale. The result is allocated from the heap. You can Dispose it when you don't need it anymore. } function LocaleConv: PLConv; {@section GetText } { Look up MsgId in the current default message catalog for the current LC_MESSAGES locale. If not found, returns MsgId itself (the default text). } function GetText (const MsgId: String): TString; { Same as above, but with a C interface } function GetTextC (MsgId: CString): CString; { Look up MsgId in the DomainName message catalog for the current LC_MESSAGES locale. } function DGetText (const DomainName, MsgId: String): TString; { Same as above, but with a C interface } function DGetTextC (DomainName, MsgId: CString): CString; { Look up MsgId in the DomainName message catalog for the current Category locale. } function DCGetText (const DomainName, MsgId: String; Category: Integer): TString; { Same as above, but with a C interface } function DCGetTextC (DomainName, MsgId: CString; Category: Integer): CString; { Set the current default message catalog to DomainName. If DomainName is empty, reset to the default of ‘messages’. } function TextDomain (const DomainName: String): TString; attribute (ignorable); { Same as above, but with a C interface. If DomainName is nil, return the current default. } function TextDomainC (DomainName: CString): CString; attribute (ignorable); { Specify that the DomainName message catalog will be found in DirName rather than in the system locale data base. } function BindTextDomain (const DomainName, DirName: String): TString; attribute (ignorable); { Same as above, but with a C interface } function BindTextDomainC (DomainName, DirName: CString): CString; attribute (ignorable);
The following listing contains the interface of the MD5 unit.
This unit provides functions to compute ‘MD5’ message digest of files or memory blocks, according to the definition of ‘MD5’ in RFC 1321 from April 1992.
{ Functions to compute MD5 message digest of files or memory blocks, according to the definition of MD5 in RFC 1321 from April 1992. Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 2000-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> Based on the C code written by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@gnu.ai.mit.edu>, 1995 as part of glibc. This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, version 2. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with this library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.} {$endif} unit MD5; interface uses GPC; { Representation of a MD5 value. It is always in little endian byte order and therefore portable. } type Card8 = Cardinal attribute (Size = 8); TMD5 = array [1 .. 16] of Card8; const MD5StrLength = 2 * High (TMD5); type MD5String = String (MD5StrLength); { Computes MD5 message digest for Length bytes in Buffer. } procedure MD5Buffer (const Buffer; Length: SizeType; var MD5: TMD5); { Computes MD5 message digest for the contents of the file f. } procedure MD5File (var f: File; var MD5: TMD5); attribute (iocritical); { Initializes a MD5 value with zeros. } procedure MD5Clear (var MD5: TMD5); { Compares two MD5 values for equality. } function MD5Compare (const Value1, Value2: TMD5): Boolean; { Converts an MD5 value to a string. } function MD5Str (const MD5: TMD5) = s: MD5String; { Converts a string to an MD5 value. Returns True if successful. } function MD5Val (const s: String; var MD5: TMD5): Boolean; { Composes two MD5 values to a single one. } function MD5Compose (const Value1, Value2: TMD5) = Dest: TMD5;
The following listing contains the interface of the Overlay unit.
This is just a dummy replacement for BP's ‘Overlay’ unit, since GPC doesn't need overlays.
{ Dummy BP compatible overlay unit for GPC Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.} {$endif} unit Overlay; interface const OvrOK = 0; OvrError = -1; OvrNotFound = -2; OvrNoMemory = -3; OvrIOError = -4; OvrNoEMSDriver = -5; OvrNoEMSMemory = -6; const OvrEmsPages: Word = 0; OvrTrapCount: Word = 0; OvrLoadCount: Word = 0; OvrFileMode: Byte = 0; type OvrReadFunc = function (OvrSeg: Word): Integer; var OvrReadBuf: OvrReadFunc; OvrResult: Integer = 0; procedure OvrInit (aFileName: String); procedure OvrInitEMS; procedure OvrSetBuf (Size: LongInt); function OvrGetBuf: LongInt; procedure OvrSetRetry (Size: LongInt); function OvrGetRetry: LongInt; procedure OvrClearBuf;
The following listing contains the interface of the Pipes unit.
This unit provides routines to start a child process and write to/read from its Input/Output/StdErr via pipes. All of this is emulated transparently under Dos as far as possible.
{ Piping data from and to processes Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.} {$endif} { Keep this consistent with the one in pipesc.c } {$if defined (MSDOS) or defined (__MINGW32__)} {$define NOFORK} {$endif} unit Pipes; interface uses GPC; const PipeForking = {$ifdef NOFORK} False {$else} True {$endif}; type TProcedure = procedure; PWaitPIDResult = ^TWaitPIDResult; TWaitPIDResult = (PIDNothing, PIDExited, PIDSignaled, PIDStopped, PIDUnknown); PPipeProcess = ^TPipeProcess; TPipeProcess = record PID : Integer; { Process ID of process forked } SignalPID: Integer; { Process ID to send the signal to. Equals PID by default } OpenPipes: Integer; { Number of pipes to/from the process, for internal use } Signal : Integer; { Send this signal (if not 0) to the process after all pipes have been closed after some time } Seconds : Integer; { Wait so many seconds before sending the signal if the process has not terminated by itself } Wait : Boolean; { Wait for the process, even longer than Seconds seconds, after sending the signal (if any) } Result : PWaitPIDResult; { Default nil. If a pointer to a variable is stored here, its destination will contain the information whether the process terminated by itself, or was terminated or stopped by a signal, when waiting after closing the pipes } Status : ^Integer; { Default nil. If a pointer to a variable is stored here, its destination will contain the exit status if the process terminated by itself, or the number of the signal otherwise, when waiting after closing the pipes } end; var { Default values for TPipeProcess records created by Pipe } DefaultPipeSignal : Integer = 0; DefaultPipeSeconds: Integer = 0; DefaultPipeWait : Boolean = True; { The procedure Pipe starts a process whose name is given by ProcessName, with the given parameters (can be Null if no parameters) and environment, and create pipes from and/or to the process' standard input/output/error. ProcessName is searched for in the PATH with FSearchExecutable. Any of ToInputFile, FromOutputFile and FromStdErrFile can be Null if the corresponding pipe is not wanted. FromOutputFile and FromStdErrFile may be identical, in which case standard output and standard error are redirected to the same pipe. The behaviour of other pairs of files being identical is undefined, and useless, anyway. The files are Assigned and Reset or Rewritten as appropriate. Errors are returned in IOResult. If Process is not Null, a pointer to a record is stored there, from which the PID of the process created can be read, and by writing to which the action after all pipes have been closed can be changed. (The record is automatically Dispose'd of after all pipes have been closed.) If automatic waiting is turned off, the caller should get the PID from the record before it's Dispose'd of, and wait for the process sometime in order to avoid zombies. If no redirections are performed (i.e., all 3 files are Null), the caller should wait for the process with WaitPipeProcess. When an error occurs, Process is not assigned to, and the state of the files is undefined, so be sure to check IOResult before going on. ChildProc, if not nil, is called in the child process after forking and redirecting I/O, but before executing the new process. It can even be called instead of executing a new process (ProcessName can be empty then). The procedure even works under Dos, but, of course, in a limited sense: if ToInputFile is used, the process will not actually be started until ToInputFile is closed. Signal, Seconds and Wait of TPipeProcess are ignored, and PID and SignalPID do not contain a Process ID, but an internal value without any meaning to the caller. Result will always be PIDExited. So, Status is the only interesting field (but Result should also be checked). Since there is no forking under Dos, ChildProc, if not nil, is called in the main process before spawning the program. So, to be portable, it should not do any things that would influence the process after the return of the Pipe function. The only portable way to use "pipes" in both directions is to call ‘Pipe’, write all the Input data to ToInputFile, close ToInputFile, and then read the Output and StdErr data from FromOutputFile and FromStdErrFile. However, since the capacity of pipes is limited, one should also check for Data from FromOutputFile and FromStdErrFile (using CanRead, IOSelect or IOSelectRead) while writing the Input data (under Dos, there simply won't be any data then, but checking for data doesn't do any harm). Please see pipedemo.pas for an example. } procedure Pipe (var ToInputFile, FromOutputFile, FromStdErrFile: AnyFile; const ProcessName: String; protected var Parameters: TPStrings; ProcessEnvironment: PCStrings; var Process: PPipeProcess; ChildProc: TProcedure); attribute (iocritical); { Waits for a process created by Pipe as determined in the Process record. (Process is Dispose'd of afterwards.) Returns True if successful. } function WaitPipeProcess (Process: PPipeProcess): Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { Alternative interface from PExecute } const PExecute_First = 1; PExecute_Last = 2; PExecute_One = PExecute_First or PExecute_Last; PExecute_Search = 4; PExecute_Verbose = 8; { PExecute: execute a chain of processes. Program and Arguments are the arguments to execv/execvp. Flags and PExecute_Search is non-zero if $PATH should be searched. Flags and PExecute_First is nonzero for the first process in chain. Flags and PExecute_Last is nonzero for the last process in chain. The result is the pid on systems like Unix where we fork/exec and on systems like MS-Windows and OS2 where we use spawn. It is up to the caller to wait for the child. The result is the exit code on systems like MSDOS where we spawn and wait for the child here. Upon failure, ErrMsg is set to the text of the error message, and -1 is returned. ‘errno’ is available to the caller to use. PWait: cover function for wait. PID is the process id of the task to wait for. Status is the ‘status’ argument to wait. Flags is currently unused (allows future enhancement without breaking upward compatibility). Pass 0 for now. The result is the process ID of the child reaped, or -1 for failure. On systems that don't support waiting for a particular child, PID is ignored. On systems like MSDOS that don't really multitask PWait is just a mechanism to provide a consistent interface for the caller. } function PExecute (ProgramName: CString; Arguments: PCStrings; var ErrMsg: String; Flags: Integer): Integer; attribute (ignorable); function PWait (PID: Integer; var Status: Integer; Flags: Integer): Integer; attribute (ignorable);
The following listing contains the interface of the Ports unit.
This unit provides access routines for the hardware ports on the IA32, as a partial replacement for BP's ‘Port’ and ‘PortW’ pseudo arrays.
Since port access is platform-specific, this unit cannot be used in code intended to be portable. Even on the IA32, its use can often be avoided – e.g. Linux provides a number of ‘ioctl’ functions, and DJGPP provides some routines to achieve things that would require port access under BP. Therefore, it is recommended to avoid using this unit whenever possible.
{ Access functions for I/O ports for GPC on an IA32 platform. This unit is *not* portable. It works only on IA32 platforms (tested under Linux and DJGPP). It is provided here only to serve as a replacement for BP's Port and PortW pseudo arrays. Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.} {$endif} {$ifndef __i386__} {$error The Ports unit is only for the IA32 platform} {$endif} unit Ports; interface { Port access functions } function InPortB (PortNumber: ShortWord): Byte; function InPortW (PortNumber: ShortWord): ShortWord; procedure OutPortB (PortNumber: ShortWord; aValue: Byte); procedure OutPortW (PortNumber, aValue: ShortWord); { libc functions for getting access to the ports -- only for root processes, of course -- and to give up root privileges after getting access to the ports for setuid root programs. Dummies under DJGPP. } {$ifdef MSDOS} function IOPerm (From, Num: MedCard; On: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = 'ioperm'); function IOPL (Level: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = 'iopl'); function SetEUID (EUID: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = 'seteuid'); {$else} function IOPerm (From, Num: MedCard; On: Integer): Integer; external name 'ioperm'; function IOPL (Level: Integer): Integer; external name 'iopl'; function SetEUID (EUID: Integer): Integer; external name 'seteuid'; {$endif}
The following listing contains the interface of the Printer unit.
This unit provides printer access, compatible to BP's ‘Printer’ unit, for Dos (using printer devices) and Unix systems (using printer utilities).
For BP compatibility, the variable ‘Lst’ is provided, but for newly written programs, it is recommended to use the ‘AssignPrinter’ procedure on a text file, and close the file when done (thereby committing the printer job). This method allows for sending multiple printer jobs in the same program.
{ BP compatible printer unit with extensions Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.} {$endif} unit Printer; interface uses GPC {$ifndef __OS_DOS__}, Pipes {$endif}; var { Dos-like systems: writing to a printer device } { The file name to write printer output into } PrinterDeviceName: PString = @'prn'; { Unix-like systems: printing via a printer program } { The file name of the printer program. If it contains a '/', it will be taken as a complete path, otherwise the file name will be searched for in the PATH with FSearchExecutable. } PrinterCommand: PString = @'lpr'; { Optional command line parameters for the printer program. Ignored when nil. } PrinterArguments: PPStrings = nil; { How to deal with the printer spooler after the printer pipe is closed, cf. the Pipes unit. } PrinterPipeSignal : Integer = 0; PrinterPipeSeconds: Integer = 0; PrinterPipeWait : Boolean = True; { Text file opened to default printer } var Lst: Text; { Assign a file to the printer. Lst will be assigned to the default printer at program start, but other files can be assigned to the same or other printers (possibly after changing the variables above). SpoolerOutput, if not Null, will be redirected from the printer spooler's standard output and error. If you use this, note that a deadlock might arise when trying to write data to the spooler while its output is not being read, though this seems quite unlikely, since most printer spoolers don't write so much output that could fill a pipe. Under Dos, where no spooler is involved, SpoolerOutput, if not Null, will be reset to an empty file for compatibility. } procedure AssignPrinter (var f: AnyFile; var SpoolerOutput: AnyFile);
The following listing contains the interface of the RegEx unit.
This unit provides routines to match strings against regular expressions and perform substitutions using matched subexpressions. Regular expressions are strings with some characters having special meanings. They describe (match) a class of strings. They are similar to wild cards used in file name matching, but much more powerful.
To use this unit, you will need the ‘rx’ library which can be found in http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/.
{$nested-comments} { Regular expression matching and replacement The RegEx unit provides routines to match strings against regular expressions and perform substitutions using matched subexpressions. To use the RegEx unit, you will need the rx library which can be found in http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/ Regular expressions are strings with some characters having special meanings. They describe (match) a class of strings. They are similar to wild cards used in file name matching, but much more powerful. There are two kinds of regular expressions supported by this unit, basic and extended regular expressions. The difference between them is not functionality, but only syntax. The following is a short overview of regular expressions. For a more thorough explanation see the literature, or the documentation of the rx library, or man pages of programs like grep(1) and sed(1). Basic Extended Meaning ‘.’ ‘.’ matches any single character ‘[aei-z]’ ‘[aei-z]’ matches either ‘a’, ‘e’, or any character from ‘i’ to ‘z’ ‘[^aei-z]’ ‘[^aei-z]’ matches any character but ‘a’, ‘e’, or ‘i’ .. ‘z’ To include in such a list the the characters ‘]’, ‘^’, or ‘-’, put them first, anywhere but first, or first or last, resp. ‘[[:alnum:]]’ ‘[[:alnum:]]’ matches any alphanumeric character ‘[^[:digit:]]’ ‘[^[:digit:]]’ matches anything but a digit ‘[a[:space:]]’ ‘[a[:space:]]’ matches the letter ‘a’ or a space character (space, tab) ... (there are more classes available) ‘\w’ ‘\w’ = [[:alnum:]] ‘\W’ ‘\W’ = [^[:alnum:]] ‘^’ ‘^’ matches the empty string at the beginning of a line ‘$’ ‘$’ matches the empty string at the end of a line ‘*’ ‘*’ matches zero or more occurences of the preceding expression ‘\+’ ‘+’ matches one or more occurences of the preceding expression ‘\?’ ‘?’ matches zero or one occurence of the preceding expression ‘\{N\}’ ‘{N}’ matches exactly N occurences of the preceding expression (N is an integer number) ‘\{M,N\}’ ‘{M,N}’ matches M to N occurences of the preceding expression (M and N are integer numbers, M <= N) ‘AB’ ‘AB’ matches A followed by B (A and B are regular expressions) ‘A\|B’ ‘A|B’ matches A or B (A and B are regular expressions) ‘\( \)’ ‘( )’ forms a subexpression, to override precedence, and for subexpression references ‘\7’ ‘\7’ matches the 7'th parenthesized subexpression (counted by their start in the regex), where 7 is a number from 1 to 9 ;-). *Please note:* using this feature can be *very* slow or take very much memory (exponential time and space in the worst case, if you know what that means ...). ‘\’ ‘\’ quotes the following character if it's special (i.e. listed above) rest rest any other character matches itself Precedence, from highest to lowest: * parentheses (‘()’) * repetition (‘*’, ‘+’, ‘?’, ‘{}’) * concatenation * alternation (‘|’) When performing substitutions using matched subexpressions of a regular expression (see ‘ReplaceSubExpressionReferences’), the replacement string can reference the whole matched expression with ‘&’ or ‘\0’, the 7th subexpression with ‘\7’ (just like in the regex itself, but using it in replacements is not slow), and the 7th subexpression converted to upper/lower case with ‘\u7’ or ‘\l7’, resp. (which also works for the whole matched expression with ‘\u0’ or ‘\l0’). A verbatim ‘&’ or ‘\’ can be specified with ‘\&’ or ‘\\’, resp. Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. Please also note the license of the rx library. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.} {$endif} unit RegEx; interface uses GPC; const { ‘BasicRegExSpecialChars’ contains all characters that have special meanings in basic regular expressions. ‘ExtRegExSpecialChars’ contains those that have special meanings in extended regular expressions. } BasicRegExSpecialChars = ['.', '[', ']', '^', '$', '*', '\']; ExtRegExSpecialChars = ['.', '[', ']', '^', '$', '*', '+', '?', '{', '}', '|', '(', ')', '\']; type { The type used by the routines of the ‘RegEx’ unit to store regular expressions in an internal format. The fields RegEx, RegMatch, ErrorInternal, From and Length are only used internally. SubExpressions can be read after ‘NewRegEx’ and will contain the number of parenthesized subexpressions. Error should be checked after ‘NewRegEx’. It will be ‘nil’ when it succeeded, and contain an error message otherwise. } RegExType = record RegEx, RegMatch: Pointer; { Internal } ErrorInternal: CString; { Internal } From, Length: CInteger; { Internal } SubExpressions: CInteger; Error: PString end; { Simple interface to regular expression matching. Matches a regular expression against a string starting from a specified position. Returns the position of the first match, or 0 if it does not match, or the regular expression is invalid. } function RegExPosFrom (const Expression: String; ExtendedRegEx, CaseInsensitive: Boolean; const s: String; From: Integer) = MatchPosition: Integer; { Creates the internal format of a regular expression. If ExtendedRegEx is True, Expression is assumed to denote an extended regular expression, otherwise a basic regular expression. CaseInsensitive determines if the case of letters will be ignored when matching the expression. If NewLines is True, ‘NewLine’ characters in a string matched against the expression will be treated as dividing the string in multiple lines, so that ‘$’ can match before the NewLine and ‘^’ can match after. Also, ‘.’ and ‘[^...]’ will not match a NewLine then. } procedure NewRegEx (var RegEx: RegExType; const Expression: String; ExtendedRegEx, CaseInsensitive, NewLines: Boolean); { Disposes of a regular expression created with ‘NewRegEx’. *Must* be used after ‘NewRegEx’ before the RegEx variable becomes invalid (i.e., goes out of scope or a pointer pointing to it is Dispose'd of). } procedure DisposeRegEx (var RegEx: RegExType); external name '_p_DisposeRegEx'; { Matches a regular expression created with ‘NewRegEx’ against a string. } function MatchRegEx (var RegEx: RegExType; const s: String; NotBeginningOfLine, NotEndOfLine: Boolean): Boolean; { Matches a regular expression created with ‘NewRegEx’ against a string, starting from a specified position. } function MatchRegExFrom (var RegEx: RegExType; const s: String; NotBeginningOfLine, NotEndOfLine: Boolean; From: Integer): Boolean; { Finds out where the regular expression matched, if ‘MatchRegEx’ or ‘MatchRegExFrom’ were successful. If n = 0, it returns the position of the whole match, otherwise the position of the n'th parenthesized subexpression. MatchPosition and MatchLength will contain the position (counted from 1) and length of the match, or 0 if it didn't match. (Note: MatchLength can also be 0 for a successful empty match, so check whether MatchPosition is 0 to find out if it matched at all.) MatchPosition or MatchLength may be Null and is ignored then. } procedure GetMatchRegEx (var RegEx: RegExType; n: Integer; var MatchPosition, MatchLength: Integer); { Checks if the string s contains any quoted characters or (sub)expression references to the regular expression RegEx created with ‘NewRegEx’. These are ‘&’ or ‘\0’ for the whole matched expression (if OnlySub is not set) and ‘\1’ .. ‘\9’ for the n'th parenthesized subexpression. Returns 0 if it does not contain any, and the number of references and quoted characters if it does. If an invalid reference (i.e. a number bigger than the number of subexpressions in RegEx) is found, it returns the negative value of the (first) invalid reference. } function FindSubExpressionReferences (var RegEx: RegExType; const s: String; OnlySub: Boolean): Integer; { Replaces (sub)expression references in ReplaceStr by the actual (sub)expressions and unquotes quoted characters. To be used after the regular expression RegEx created with ‘NewRegEx’ was matched against s successfully with ‘MatchRegEx’ or ‘MatchRegExFrom’. } function ReplaceSubExpressionReferences (var RegEx: RegExType; const s, ReplaceStr: String) = Res: TString; { Returns the string for a regular expression that matches exactly one character out of the given set. It can be combined with the usual operators to form more complex expressions. } function CharSet2RegEx (const Characters: CharSet) = s: TString;
The following listing contains the interface of the Strings unit.
This is a compatibility unit to BP's ‘Strings’ unit to handle C style ‘#0’-terminated strings.
The same functionality and much more is available in the Run Time System, Run Time System, under clearer names (starting with a ‘CString’ prefix),
Moreover, the use of ‘#0’-terminated C-style strings (‘PChar’ or ‘CString’) is generally not recommended in GPC, since GPC provides ways to deal with Pascal-style strings of arbitrary and dynamic size in a comfortable way, as well as automatic conversion to C-style strings in order to call external C functions.
Therefore, using this unit is not recommended in newly written programs.
{ BP compatible Strings unit Copyright (C) 1999-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.} {$endif} module Strings; export Strings = all (CStringLength => StrLen, CStringEnd => StrEnd, CStringMove => StrMove, CStringCopy => StrCopy, CStringCopyEnd => StrECopy, CStringLCopy => StrLCopy, CStringCopyString => StrPCopy, CStringCat => StrCat, CStringLCat => StrLCat, CStringComp => StrComp, CStringCaseComp => StrIComp, CStringLComp => StrLComp, CStringLCaseComp => StrLIComp, CStringChPos => StrScan, CStringLastChPos => StrRScan, CStringPos => StrPos, CStringLastPos => StrRPos, CStringUpCase => StrUpper, CStringLoCase => StrLower, CStringIsEmpty => StrEmpty, CStringNew => StrNew); import GPC; function StrPas (aString: CString): TString; procedure StrDispose (s: CString); external name '_p_Dispose';
The following listing contains the interface of the StringUtils unit.
This unit provides some routines for string handling on a higher level than those provided by the RTS.
{ Some routines for string handling on a higher level than those provided by the RTS. Copyright (C) 1999-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.} {$endif} unit StringUtils; interface uses GPC; { Various routines } { Appends Source to s, truncating the result if necessary. } procedure AppendStr (var s: String; const Source: String); { Cuts s to MaxLength characters. If s is already MaxLength characters or shorter, it doesn't change anything. } procedure StrCut (var s: String; MaxLength: Integer); { Returns the number of disjoint occurences of SubStr in s. Returns 0 if SubStr is empty. } function StrCount (const SubStr: String; s: String): Integer; { Returns s, with all disjoint occurences of Source replaced by Dest. } function StrReplace (const s, Source, Dest: String) = Result: TString; { Sets of characters accepted for ‘True’ and ‘False’ by Char2Boolean and StrReadBoolean. } var CharactersTrue : CharSet = ['Y', 'y']; CharactersFalse: CharSet = ['N', 'n']; { If ch is an element of CharactersTrue, Dest is set to True, otherwise if it is an element of CharactersFalse, Dest is set to False. In both cases True is returned. If ch is not an element of either set, Dest is set to False and False is returned. } function Char2Boolean (ch: Char; var Dest: Boolean): Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { Converts a digit character to its numeric value. Handles every base up to 36 (0 .. 9, a .. z, upper and lower case recognized). Returns -1 if the character is not a digit at all. If you want to use it for a base < 36, you have to check if the result is smaller than the base and not equal to -1. } function Char2Digit (ch: Char): Integer; { Encode a string in a printable format (quoted printable). All occurences of EscapeChar within the string are encoded. If QuoteHigh is True, all characters above the ASCII range are encoded as well (required in "7 bit" environments, as per several RFCs). ‘=’ is always encoded, as required for proper decoding, as are all characters below space (control characters), so if you don't need an escape char yourself, you can pass #0 for EscapeChar. } function QuoteStringEscape (const s: String; EscapeChar: Char; QuoteHigh: Boolean): TString; { Encode a string in a printable format (quoted printable and surrounded with ‘"’). All occurences of ‘"’ within the string are encoded, so the result string contains exactly two ‘"’ characters (at the beginning and ending). This is useful to store arbitrary strings in text files while keeping them as readable as possible (which is the goal of the quoted printable encoding in general, see RFC 1521, section 5.1) and being able to read them back losslessly (with UnQuoteString). } function QuoteString (const s: String): TString; { Encode a string in a printable format suitable for StrReadEnum. All occurences of ‘,’ within the string are encoded. } function QuoteEnum (const s: String): TString; { Decode a string encoded by QuoteString (removing the ‘"’ and expanding quoted printable encoded characters). Returns True if successful and False if the string has an invalid form. A string returned by QuoteString is always valid. } function UnQuoteString (var s: String): Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { Decode a quoted-printable string (not enclosed in ‘"’, unlike for UnQuoteString). Returns True if successful and False if the string has an invalid form. In the latter case, it still decodes as much as is valid, even after the error position. } function UnQPString (var s: String): Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { Quotes a string as done in shells, i.e. all special characters are enclosed in either ‘"’ or ‘’', where ‘"’, ‘$’ and ‘`’ are always enclosed in ‘’' and ‘’' is always enclosed in ‘"’. } function ShellQuoteString (const s: String) = Res: TString; { Replaces all tab characters in s with the appropriate amount of spaces, assuming tab stops at every TabSize columns. Returns True if successful and False if the expanded string would exceed the capacity of s. In the latter case, some, but not all of the tabs in s may have been expanded. } function ExpandTabs (var s: String; TabSize: Integer): Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { Returns s, with all occurences of C style escape sequences (e.g. ‘\n’) replaced by the characters they mean. If AllowOctal is True, also octal character specifications (e.g. ‘\007’) are replaced. If RemoveQuoteChars is True, any other backslashes are removed (e.g. ‘\*’ -> ‘*’ and ‘\\’ -> ‘\’), otherwise they are kept, and also ‘\\’ is left as two backslashes then. } function ExpandCEscapeSequences (const s: String; RemoveQuoteChars, AllowOctal: Boolean) = r: TString; { Routines for TPStrings } { Initialise a TPStrings variable, allocate Size characters for each element. This procedure does not dispose of any previously allocated storage, so if you use it on a previously used variable without freeing the storage yourself, this might cause memory leaks. } procedure AllocateTPStrings (var Strings: TPStrings; Size: Integer); { Clear all elements (set them to empty strings), does not free any storage. } procedure ClearTPStrings (var Strings: TPStrings); { Divide a string into substrings, using Separators as separator. A single trailing separator is ignored. Further trailing separators as well as any leading separators and multiple separators in a row produce empty substrings. } function TokenizeString (const Source: String; Separators: CharSet) = Res: PPStrings; { Divide a string into substrings, using SpaceCharacters as separators. The splitting is done according the usual rules of shells, using (and removing) single and double quotes and QuotingCharacter. Multiple, leading, and trailing separators are ignored. If there is an error, a message is stored in ErrMsg (if not Null), and nil is returned. nil is also returned (without an error message) if s is empty. } function ShellTokenizeString (const s: String; var ErrMsg: String) = Tokens: PPStrings; { String parsing routines } { All the following StrReadFoo functions behave similarly. They read items from a string s, starting at index i, to a variable Dest. They skip any space characters (spaces and tabs) by incrementing i first. They return True if successful, False otherwise. i is incremented accordingly if successful, otherwise i is left unchanged, apart from the skipping of space characters, and Dest is undefined. This behaviour makes it easy to use the functions in a row like this: i := 1; if StrReadInt (s, i, Size) and StrReadComma (s, i) and StrReadQuoted (s, i, Name) and StrReadComma (s, i) and ... StrReadReal (s, i, Angle) and (i > Length (s)) then ... (The check ‘i > Length (s)’ is in case you don't want to accept trailing "garbage".) } { Just skip any space characters as described above. } procedure StrSkipSpaces (const s: String; var i: Integer); { Read a quoted string (as produced by QuoteString) from a string and unquote the result using UnQuoteString. It is considered failure if the result (unquoted) would be longer than the capacity of Dest. } function StrReadQuoted (const s: String; var i: Integer; var Dest: String): Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { Read a string delimited with Delimiter from a string and return the result with the delimiters removed. It is considered failure if the result (without delimiters) would be longer than the capacity of Dest. } function StrReadDelimited (const s: String; var i: Integer; var Dest: String; Delimiter: Char): Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { Read a word (consisting of anything but space characters and commas) from a string. It is considered failure if the result would be longer than the capacity of Dest. } function StrReadWord (const s: String; var i: Integer; var Dest: String): Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { Check that a certain string is contained in s (after possible space characters). } function StrReadConst (const s: String; var i: Integer; const Expected: String) = Res: Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { A simpler to use version of StrReadConst that expects a ‘,’. } function StrReadComma (const s: String; var i: Integer) = Res: Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { Read an integer number from a string. } function StrReadInt (const s: String; var i: Integer; var Dest: Integer): Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { Read a real number from a string. } function StrReadReal (const s: String; var i: Integer; var Dest: Real): Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { Read a Boolean value, represented by a single character from CharactersTrue or CharactersFalse (cf. Char2Boolean), from a string. } function StrReadBoolean (const s: String; var i: Integer; var Dest: Boolean): Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { Read an enumerated value, i.e., one of the entries of IDs, from a string, and stores the ordinal value, i.e., the index in IDs (always zero-based) in Dest. } function StrReadEnum (const s: String; var i: Integer; var Dest: Integer; const IDs: array of PString): Boolean; attribute (ignorable); { String hash table } const DefaultHashSize = 1403; type THash = Cardinal; PStrHashList = ^TStrHashList; TStrHashList = record Next: PStrHashList; s: PString; i: Integer; p: Pointer end; PStrHashTable = ^TStrHashTable; TStrHashTable (Size: Cardinal) = record CaseSensitive: Boolean; Table: array [0 .. Size - 1] of PStrHashList end; function HashString (const s: String): THash; function NewStrHashTable (Size: Cardinal; CaseSensitive: Boolean) = HashTable: PStrHashTable; procedure AddStrHashTable (HashTable: PStrHashTable; s: String; i: Integer; p: Pointer); procedure DeleteStrHashTable (HashTable: PStrHashTable; s: String); function SearchStrHashTable (HashTable: PStrHashTable; const s: String; var p: Pointer): Integer; { p may be Null } procedure StrHashTableUsage (HashTable: PStrHashTable; var Entries, Slots: Integer); procedure DisposeStrHashTable (HashTable: PStrHashTable);
The following listing contains the interface of the System unit.
This unit contains only BP's more exotic routines which are not recommended to be used in new programs. Most of their functionality can be achieved by more standard means already.
Note: ‘MemAvail’ and ‘MaxAvail’, provided in this unit, cannot easily be achieved by other means. However, it is not recommended to use them on any multi-tasking system at all, where memory is a shared resource. The notes in the unit give some hints about how to avoid using them.
On special request, i.e., by defining the conditionals ‘__BP_TYPE_SIZES__’, ‘__BP_RANDOM__’ and/or ‘__BP_PARAMSTR_0__’, the unit also provides BP compatible integer type sizes, a 100% BP compatible pseudo random number generator and/or BP compatible ‘ParamStr (0)’ behaviour (the latter, however, only on some systems).
{ BP and partly Delphi compatible System unit for GPC This unit is released as part of the GNU Pascal project. It implements some rather exotic BP and Delphi compatibility features. Even many BP and Delphi programs don't need them, but they're here for maximum compatibility. Most of BP's and Delphi's System units' features are built into the compiler or the RTS. Note: The things in this unit are really exotic. If you haven't used BP or Delphi before, you don't want to look at this unit. :-) This unit depends on the conditional defines ‘__BP_TYPE_SIZES__’, ‘__BP_RANDOM__’, ‘__BP_PARAMSTR_0__’ and ‘__BP_NO_ALLOCMEM__’. If ‘__BP_TYPE_SIZES__’ is defined (with the ‘-D__BP_TYPE_SIZES__’ option), the integer data types will be redefined to the sizes they have in BP or Delphi. Note that this might cause problems, e.g. when passing var parameters of integer types between units that do and don't use System. However, of the BP compatibility units, only Dos and WinDos use such parameters, and they have been taken care of so they work. If ‘__BP_RANDOM__’ is defined (‘-D__BP_RANDOM__’), this unit will provide an exactly BP compatible pseudo random number generator. In particular, the range for integer randoms will be truncated to 16 bits like in BP. The RandSeed variable is provided, and if it's set to the same value as BP's RandSeed, it produces exactly the same sequence of pseudo random numbers that BP's pseudo random number generator does (whoever might need this ... ;-). Even the Randomize function will behave exactly like in BP. However, this will not be noted unless one explicitly tests for it. If ‘__BP_PARAMSTR_0__’ is defined (‘-D__BP_PARAMSTR_0__’), this unit will change the value of ‘ParamStr (0)’ to that of ‘ExecutablePath’, overwriting the value actually passed by the caller, to imitate BP's/Dos's behaviour. However *note*: On most systems, ‘ExecutablePath’ is *not* guaranteed to return the full path, so defining this symbol doesn't change anything. In general, you *cannot* expect to find the full executable path, so better don't even try it, or your program will (at best) run on some systems. For most cases where BP programs access their own executable, there are cleaner alternatives available. If ‘__BP_NO_ALLOCMEM__’ is defined (‘-D__BP_NO_ALLOCMEM__’), the two Delphi compatible functions ‘AllocMemCount’ and ‘AllocMemSize’ will not be provided. The advantage is that this unit will not have to ‘Mark’ the heap which makes memory de-/allocations much faster if the program doesn't use ‘Mark’ otherwise. Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Authors: Peter Gerwinski <peter@gerwinski.de> Prof. Abimbola A. Olowofoyeku <African_Chief@bigfoot.com> Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> Dominik Freche <dominik.freche@gmx.net> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.} {$endif} module System; export System = all (FileMode {$ifdef __BP_TYPE_SIZES__}, SystemInteger => Integer, SystemWord => Word {$endif}); import GPC (MaxLongInt => GPC_MaxLongInt); var { Chain of procedures to be executed at the end of the program } ExitProc: ^procedure = nil; { Contains all the command line arguments passed to the program, concatenated, with spaces between them } CmdLine: CString; {$ifdef __BP_RANDOM__} { Random seed, initialized by Randomize, but can also be set explicitly } RandSeed: Integer attribute (Size = 32) = 0; {$endif} type OrigInt = Integer; OrigWord = Word; { Delphi } SmallInt = Integer attribute (Size = 16); DWord = Cardinal attribute (Size = 32); { Short BP compatible type sizes if wanted } {$ifdef __BP_TYPE_SIZES__} ByteBool = Boolean attribute (Size = 8); WordBool = Boolean attribute (Size = 16); LongBool = Boolean attribute (Size = 32); ShortInt = Integer attribute (Size = 8); SystemInteger = Integer attribute (Size = 16); LongInt = Integer attribute (Size = 32); Comp = Integer attribute (Size = 64); Byte = Cardinal attribute (Size = 8); SystemWord = Cardinal attribute (Size = 16); LongWord = Cardinal attribute (Size = 32); { Delphi } {$else} SystemInteger = Integer; SystemWord = Word; {$endif} {$if False} { @@ doesn't work well (dialec3.pas) -- when GPC gets short strings, it will be unnecessary } {$ifopt borland-pascal} String = String [255]; {$endif} {$endif} const MaxInt = High (SystemInteger); MaxLongInt = High (LongInt); { Return the lowest-order byte of x } function Lo (x: LongestInt): Byte; { Return the second-lowest-order byte of x } function Hi (x: LongestInt): Byte; { Swap the lowest-order and second-lowest-order bytes, mask out the higher-order ones } function Swap (x: LongestInt): SystemWord; { Store the current directory name (on the given drive number if drive <> 0) in s } procedure GetDir (Drive: Byte; var s: String); { Dummy routine for compatibility. @@Use two overloaded versions rather than varargs when possible. } procedure SetTextBuf (var f: Text; var Buf; ...); { Mostly useless BP compatible variables } var SelectorInc: SystemWord = $1000; Seg0040: SystemWord = $40; SegA000: SystemWord = $a000; SegB000: SystemWord = $b000; SegB800: SystemWord = $b800; Test8086: Byte = 2; Test8087: Byte = 3; { floating-point arithmetic is emulated transparently by the OS if not present in hardware } OvrCodeList: SystemWord = 0; OvrHeapSize: SystemWord = 0; OvrDebugPtr: Pointer = nil; OvrHeapOrg: SystemWord = 0; OvrHeapPtr: SystemWord = 0; OvrHeapEnd: SystemWord = 0; OvrLoadList: SystemWord = 0; OvrDosHandle: SystemWord = 0; OvrEmsHandle: SystemWord = $ffff; HeapOrg: Pointer absolute HeapLow; HeapPtr: Pointer absolute HeapHigh; HeapEnd: Pointer = Pointer (High (PtrCard)); FreeList: Pointer = nil; FreeZero: Pointer = nil; StackLimit: SystemWord = 0; HeapList: SystemWord = 0; HeapLimit: SystemWord = 1024; HeapBlock: SystemWord = 8192; HeapAllocFlags: SystemWord = 2; CmdShow: SystemInteger = 0; SaveInt00: Pointer = nil; SaveInt02: Pointer = nil; SaveInt0C: Pointer = nil; SaveInt0D: Pointer = nil; SaveInt1B: Pointer = nil; SaveInt21: Pointer = nil; SaveInt23: Pointer = nil; SaveInt24: Pointer = nil; SaveInt34: Pointer = nil; SaveInt35: Pointer = nil; SaveInt36: Pointer = nil; SaveInt37: Pointer = nil; SaveInt38: Pointer = nil; SaveInt39: Pointer = nil; SaveInt3A: Pointer = nil; SaveInt3B: Pointer = nil; SaveInt3C: Pointer = nil; SaveInt3D: Pointer = nil; SaveInt3E: Pointer = nil; SaveInt3F: Pointer = nil; SaveInt75: Pointer = nil; RealModeRegs: array [0 .. 49] of Byte = (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0); { Mostly useless BP compatible pointer functions } function Ofs (const x): PtrWord; function Seg (const x): PtrWord; function Ptr (Seg, Ofs: PtrWord): Pointer; function CSeg: PtrWord; function DSeg: PtrWord; function SSeg: PtrWord; function SPtr: PtrWord; { Routines to handle BP's 6 byte ‘Real’ type which is formatted like this: 47 0 -|------- -------- -------- -------- --------|-------- | | +----------+ +------------+ 47 Sign Bit | 8..46 Mantissa | 0..7 Biased Exponent This format does not support infinities, NaNs and denormalized numbers. The first digit after the binary point is not stored and assumed to be 1. (This is called the normalized representation of a binary floating point number.) In GPC, this type is represented by the type ‘BPReal’ which is binary compatible to BP's type, and can therefore be used in connection with binary files used by BP programs. The functions ‘RealToBPReal’ and ‘BPRealToReal’ convert between this type and GPC's ‘Real’ type. Apart from that, ‘BPReal’ should be treated as opaque. The variables ‘BPRealIgnoreOverflow’ and ‘BPRealIgnoreUnderflow’ determine what to do in the case of overflows and underflows. The default values are BP compatible. } var { Ignore overflows, and use the highest possible value instead. } BPRealIgnoreOverflow: Boolean = False; { Ignore underflows, and use 0 instead. This is BP's behaviour, but has the disadvantage of diminishing computation precision. } BPRealIgnoreUnderflow: Boolean = True; type BPRealInteral = Cardinal attribute (Size = 8); BPReal = packed record Format: packed array [1 .. 6] of BPRealInteral end; function RealToBPReal (r: Real) = BR: BPReal; function BPRealToReal (const BR: BPReal) = RealValue: Real; { Heap management stuff } const { Possible results for HeapError } HeapErrorRunError = 0; HeapErrorNil = 1; HeapErrorRetry = 2; var { If assigned to a function, it will be called when memory allocations do not find enough free memory. Its result determines if a run time error should be raised (the default), or nil should be returned, or the allocation should be retried (causing the routine to be called again if the allocation still doesn't succeed). Notes: - Returning nil can cause some routines of the RTS and units (shipped with GPC or third-party) to crash when they don't expect nil, so better don't use this mechanism, but rather CGetMem where needed. - Letting the allocation be retried, of course, only makes sense if the routine freed some memory before -- otherwise it will cause an infinite loop! So, a meaningful HeapError routine should dispose of some temporary objects, if available, and return HeapErrorRetry, and return HeapErrorRunError when no (more) of them are available. } HeapError: ^function (Size: SystemWord): SystemInteger = nil; { Just returns HeapErrorNil. When this function is assigned to HeapError, GetMem and New will return a nil pointer instead of causing a runtime error when the allocation fails. See the comment for HeapError above. } function HeapErrorNilReturn (Size: SystemWord): SystemInteger; { Return the total free memory/biggest free memory block. Except under Win32 and DJGPP, these are expensive routines -- try to avoid them. Under Win32, MaxAvail returns the same as MemAvail, so don't rely on being able to allocate a block of memory as big as MaxAvail indicates. Generally it's preferable to not use these functions at all in order to do a safe allocation, but just try to allocate the memory needed using CGetMem, and check for a nil result. What makes these routines unrealiable is, e.g., that on multi-tasking systems, another process may allocate memory after you've called MemAvail/MaxAvail and before you get to do the next allocation. Also, please note that some systems over-commit virtual memory which may cause MemAvail to return a value larger than the actual (physical plus swap) memory available. Therefore, if you want to be "sure" (modulo the above restrictions) that the memory is actually available, use MaxAvail. } function MemAvail: Cardinal; function MaxAvail: Cardinal; { Delphi compatibility } function CompToDouble (x: Comp): Double; function DoubleToComp (x: Double): Comp; {$ifndef __BP_NO_ALLOCMEM__} function AllocMemCount = Count: SystemInteger; function AllocMemSize = Size: SizeType; {$endif} procedure Assert (Condition: Boolean); procedure DefaultAssertErrorProc (const Message, FileName: String; LineNumber: SystemInteger; ErrorAddr: Pointer); var AssertErrorProc: ^procedure (const Message, FileName: String; LineNumber: SystemInteger; ErrorAddr: Pointer) = @DefaultAssertErrorProc; NoErrMsg: Boolean = False;
The following listing contains the interface of the TFDD unit.
This unit provides some tricks with text files, e.g. a “tee” file which causes everything written to it to be written to two other files.
{ Some text file tricks. Copyright (C) 2002-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.} {$endif} unit TFDD; interface uses GPC; { Write to multiple files. Everything written to Dest after calling this procedure will be written to both File1 and File2. Can be chained. } procedure MultiFileWrite (var Dest, File1, File2: AnyFile);
The following listing contains the interface of the Trap unit.
This unit allows you to trap runtime errors, so a runtime error will not abort the program, but pass the control back to a point within the program. Use with care, and read the notes in the interface, please.
{ Trapping runtime errors
The Trap unit allows you to trap runtime errors, so a runtime
error will not abort the program, but pass the control back to a
point within the program.
The usage is simple. The TrapExec procedure can be called with a
function (p) as an argument. p must take a Boolean argument. p
will immediately be called with False given as its argument. When
a runtime error would otherwise be caused while p is active, p
will instead be called again with True as its argument. After p
returns, runtime error trapping ends.
When the program terminates (e.g. by reaching its end or by a Halt
statement) and a runtime error was trapped during the run, Trap
will set the ExitCode and ErrorAddr variables to indicate the
trapped error.
Notes:
- After trapping a runtime error, your program might not be in a
stable state. If the runtime error was a "minor" one (such as a
range checking or arithmetic error), it should not be a problem.
But if you, e.g., write a larger application and use Trap to
prevent a sudden abort caused by an unexpected runtime error,
you should make the program terminate regularly as soon as
possible after a trapped error (perhaps by telling the user to
save the data, then terminate the program and report the bug to
you).
- Since the trapping mechanism *jumps* back, it has all the
negative effects that a (non-local!) ‘goto’ can have! You should
be aware of the consequences of all active procedures being
terminated at an arbitrary point!
- Nested traps are supported, i.e. you can call TrapExec again
within a routine called by another TrapExec instance. Runtime
errors trapped within the inner TrapExec invocation will be
trapped by the inner TrapExec, while runtime errors trapped
after its termination will be trapped by the outer TrapExec
again.
Copyright (C) 1996-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit Trap;
interface
uses GPC;
var
TrappedExitCode: Integer = 0;
TrappedErrorAddr: Pointer = nil;
TrappedErrorMessageString: TString = '';
{ Trap runtime errors. See the comment at the top. }
procedure TrapExec (procedure p (Trapped: Boolean));
{ Forget about saved errors from the innermost TrapExec instance. }
procedure TrapReset;
The following listing contains the interface of the Turbo3 unit.
This is a compatibility unit to BP's ‘Turbo3’ compatibility unit to TP3. ;−) It is not meant to be used in any newly written code.
{ Turbo Pascal 3.0 compatibility unit Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.} {$endif} unit Turbo3; interface import GPC only (AssignTFDD); System (MemAvail => System_MemAvail, MaxAvail => System_MaxAvail); CRT (LowVideo => CRT_LowVideo, HighVideo => CRT_HighVideo); var Kbd: Text; CBreak: Boolean absolute CheckBreak; procedure AssignKbd (var f: AnyFile); function MemAvail: Integer; function MaxAvail: Integer; function LongFileSize (var f: AnyFile): Real; function LongFilePos (var f: AnyFile): Real; procedure LongSeek (var f: AnyFile; aPosition: Real); procedure LowVideo; procedure HighVideo;
The following listing contains the interface of the WinDos unit.
This is a portable implementation of most routines from BP's ‘WinDos’ unit. A few routines that are Dos – or even IA32 real mode – specific, are only available if ‘__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__’ is defined, BP Incompatibilities.
The same functionality and much more is available in the Run Time System, Run Time System. The RTS routines usually have different names and/or easier and less limiting interfaces (e.g. ‘ReadDir’ etc. vs. ‘FindFirst’ etc.), and are often more efficient.
Therefore, using this unit is not recommended in newly written programs.
{ Mostly BP compatible portable WinDos unit This unit supports most, but not all, of the routines and declarations of BP's WinDos unit. Notes: - The procedures GetIntVec and SetIntVec are not supported since they make only sense for Dos real-mode programs (and GPC compiled programs do not run in real-mode, even on IA32 under Dos). The procedures Intr and MsDos are only supported under DJGPP if ‘__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__’ is defined (with the ‘-D__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__’ option). A few other routines are also only supported with this define, but on all platforms (but they are crude hacks, that's why they are not supported without this define). - The internal structure of file variables (TFileRec and TTextRec) is different in GPC. However, as far as TFDDs are concerned, there are other ways to achieve the same in GPC, see the GPC unit. Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de> This file is part of GNU Pascal. GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU General Public License. } {$gnu-pascal,I-,maximum-field-alignment 0} {$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412} {$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.} {$endif} module WinDos; export WinDos = all (FCarry, FParity, FAuxiliary, FZero, FSign, FOverflow, DosError, GetDate, GetTime, GetCBreak, SetCBreak, GetVerify, SetVerify, DiskFree, DiskSize, GetFAttr, SetFAttr, GetFTime, SetFTime, UnpackTime, PackTime, {$ifdef __BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__} {$ifdef __GO32__} Intr, MsDos, {$endif} DosVersion, SetDate, SetTime, {$endif} CStringGetEnv => GetEnvVar); import GPC (MaxLongInt => GPC_Orig_MaxLongInt); System; Dos (FindFirst => Dos_FindFirst, FindNext => Dos_FindNext, FindClose => Dos_FindClose); const { File attribute constants } faReadOnly = ReadOnly; faHidden = Hidden; { set for dot files except ‘.’ and ‘..’ } faSysFile = SysFile; { not supported } faVolumeID = VolumeID; { not supported } faDirectory = Directory; faArchive = Archive; { means: not executable } faAnyFile = AnyFile; { Maximum file name component string lengths } fsPathName = 79; fsDirectory = 67; fsFileName = 8; fsExtension = 4; { FileSplit return flags } fcExtension = 1; fcFileName = 2; fcDirectory = 4; fcWildcards = 8; type PTextBuf = ^TTextBuf; TTextBuf = TextBuf; { Search record used by FindFirst and FindNext } TSearchRec = record Fill: SearchRecFill; Attr: Byte8; Time, Size: LongInt; Name: {$ifdef __BP_TYPE_SIZES__} packed array [0 .. 12] of Char {$else} TStringBuf {$endif}; Reserved: SearchRec end; { Date and time record used by PackTime and UnpackTime } TDateTime = DateTime; { 8086 CPU registers -- only used by the unportable Dos routines } TRegisters = Registers; { FindFirst and FindNext are quite inefficient since they emulate all the brain-dead Dos stuff. If at all possible, the standard routines OpenDir, ReadDir and CloseDir (in the GPC unit) should be used instead. } procedure FindFirst (Path: PChar; Attr: Word; var SR: TSearchRec); procedure FindNext (var SR: TSearchRec); procedure FindClose (var SR: TSearchRec); function FileSearch (Dest, FileName, List: PChar): PChar; function FileExpand (Dest, FileName: PChar): PChar; function FileSplit (Path, Dir, BaseName, Ext: PChar) = Res: Word; function GetCurDir (Dir: PChar; Drive: Byte): PChar; procedure SetCurDir (Dir: PChar); procedure CreateDir (Dir: PChar); procedure RemoveDir (Dir: PChar); function GetArgCount: Integer; function GetArgStr (Dest: PChar; ArgIndex: Integer; MaxLen: Word): PChar;
This chapter is intended to be a QuickStart guide for programmers who are familiar with Borland Pascal.
Throughout the manual, we talk of “Borland Pascal” or “BP” for short, to refer to Borland Pascal version 7 for Dos protected mode. Other versions of Borland Pascal and Turbo Pascall don't differ too much, but this one was the very last Dos version Borland has published, so in most if not all cases, you can safely substitute the version you're familiar with.
“Borland Pascal” and “Turbo Pascal” are registered trademarks of Borland Inc.
GNU Pascal (GPC) is compatible to version 7 of Borland Pascal (BP) to a large extent and comes with portable replacements of the BP standard units.
However, BP is a 16-bit compiler while GPC is a 32/64-bit compiler, so the size of the ‘Integer’ type, for instance, is 16 bits in BP, but at least 32 bits in GPC. If a BP program has been designed with portability in mind from the ground up, it may work with GPC without any change. Programs which rely on byte order, on the internals or sizes of data types or which use unportable things like interrupts and assembler code, will need to be changed. The following section lists the possible problems with solutions.
The GPC Run Time System (RTS) is fairly complete, and you can use all libraries written for GNU C from GNU Pascal, so there is much less need to use unportable constructs than there was in BP. (For example, BP's Turbo Vision library uses assembler to call a local procedure through a pointer. With GPC you can do this in Pascal just as with global procedures.) Please do not throw away the advantage of full portability by sticking to those workarounds.
We have successfully ported real-world projects (with several 10000s of lines) from BP to GPC, so this is possible for you, too.
This sections lists the remaining incompatibilities of GPC to BP, and the problems you might encounter when porting BP programs from 16-bit Dos to other platforms, and gives solutions for them.
By incompatibilites we mean problems that can arise when trying to compile a valid BP program with GPC. Of course, there are many features in GPC that BP doesn't know, but we call them extensions unless they can break valid BP programs, so they are not mentioned here. The subsequent sections of the ‘Borland Pascal’ chapter mention a number of useful extensions that you might want to know about but which will not break your BP code.
Some of the differences can be “overcome” by command-line switches. As a summary:
--borland-pascal -w --uses=System -D__BP_TYPE_SIZES__ --pack-struct -D__BP_RANDOM__ -D__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__ -D__BP_PARAMSTR_0__
But please read the following notes, and don't use these switches indiscriminately when not necessary. There are reasons why they are not GPC's defaults.
GPC's internal string format (Extended Pascal string schema) is different from BP's. BP compatible short strings will be implemented in GPC soon, but in the meantime, you'll have to live with the difference. In general, GPC's format has many advantages (no length limit of 255 characters, constant and reference parameters always know about their capacity, etc.), but you will see differences if you:
GPC supports qualified identifiers, liek BP does. (In addition, it also supports Extended Pascal style qualified identifiers which behave a little differently for units and modules imported with ‘import’ rather than ‘uses’.)
GPC's inline assembler is not compatible to BP's. It uses
AT&T syntax, supports a large variety of processors and works
together with GPC's optimizer. So, either convert your inline
assembly to AT&T syntax, or (usually better) to Pascal, or put it
into an external file which you can assemble with your favourite
(32 bit) assembler. A tutorial for using the GPC inline assembler is
available at
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/misc/gpcasm.zip
Since many things you usually do with assembler in BP are provided by GPC's Run Time System (RTS), you will not need the inline assembler as often as in BP. (See Portability hints.)
The same applies to BP's ‘inline’ directive for hand-written machine code. GPC's ‘inline’ directive works for Pascal routines (see Miscellaneous), so you'll have to convert any hand-written machine code to Pascal (and thereby make it more readable, portable and easier to maintain while still getting the performance of inline code).
GPC supports ‘Move’ and ‘FillChar’, and they're fully BP compatible. However, some data structures have different internal formats which may become relevant when using these procedures. E.g., using ‘Move’ on file variables does not work in GPC (there are reasons why assigning file variables with ‘:=’ is not allowed in Pascal, and circumventing this restriction with ‘Move’ is not a good idea). For other examples, see String type, Real type, and Endianness assumptions.
GPC does not support BP's 6-byte ‘Real’ type. It supports ‘Single’, ‘Double’ and ‘Extended’ which, at least on the IA32 and some other processors, are compatible to BP.
For BP's 6-byte ‘Real’ type, GPC's ‘System’ unit provides an emulation, called ‘BPReal’, as well as conversion routines to GPC's ‘Real’ type (which is the same as ‘Double’), called ‘RealToBPReal’ and ‘BPRealToReal’. You'll probably only need them when reading or writing binary files containing values of the BP 6-byte real type. There are no operators (e.g., ‘+’) available for ‘BPReal’, but since GPC supports operator overloading, you could define them yourself (e.g., convert to ‘Real’, do the operation, and convert back). Needless to say that this is very inefficient and should not be done for any serious computations. Better convert your data after reading them from the file and before writing them back, or simply convert your data files once (the other types are more efficient even with BP on any non-prehistoric processor, anyway).
A mostly BP compatible ‘Graph’ unit exists as part of the ‘GRX’ package. It is known to work under DJGPP, Cygwin, mingw, Linux/IA32 with svgalib, and should work under any Unix system with X11 (tested under Linux, Solaris, AIX, etc.).
There is a small difference in the color numbering, but it should be easy to work-around: You can't assume, e.g., that color 1 is always blue, and 2 is green, etc. On a system with 15 or more bits of color depth (i.e., 32768 or more colors, which most PCs today have), they will all be very dark shades of blue. This is not really a bug, but simply a property of modern high-color modes (whereas BP's ‘Graph’ unit was only designed for 16 and 256 color modes).
However, the names ‘Blue’, ‘Green’ etc. stand for the correct colors in the ‘Graph’ unit of GRX. They are no constants, but functions (because the color depth is in general not known until runtime), so you can't use them in contexts where constants are expected. Also, they might conflict with the identifiers of the ‘CRT’ unit if you use both units at the same time. If you want to use computed color values in the range 0 ... 15, you can translate them to the correct colors using the ‘EGAColor’ function.
The OOP stuff (Turbo Vision etc.) is not yet completed, but work on several projects is underway. If you want information about the current status or access to development source, please contact the GPC mailing list.
The routines ‘Keep’, ‘GetIntVec’ and ‘SetIntVec’ in the ‘Dos’ unit do not even make sense on DJGPP (32 bit Dos extender). If your program uses these, it is either a low-level Dos utility for which porting to a 32 bit environment might cause bigger problems (because the internal issues of DPMI become relevant which are usually hidden by DJGPP), or it installs interrupt handlers which will have to be thought about more carefully because of things like locking memory, knowing about and handling the differences between real and protected mode interrupts, etc. For these kinds of things, we refer you to the DJGPP FAQ (see DJGPP FAQ).
The internal structure of file variables (‘FileRec’ and ‘TextRec’ in BP's ‘Dos’ unit and ‘TFileRec’ and ‘TTextRec’ in BP's ‘WinDos’ unit) is different in GPC. However, as far as Text File Device Drivers (TFDDs) are concerned, GPC offers a more powerful mechanism. Please see the RTS reference (see Run Time System), under ‘AssignTFDD’.
Those few routines in the ‘System’ unit that deal with segmented pointers (e.g., ‘Ptr’) are emulated in such a way that such ugly BP constructs like
PInteger (Ptr (Seg (a), Ofs (a) + 6 * SizeOf (Integer)))^ = 42
work in GPC, but they do not provide access to absolute memory addresses. Neither do ‘absolute’ variables (which take a simple address in the program's address space in GPC, rather than a segmented address), and the ‘Mem’ and ‘Port’ arrays don't exist in GPC.
As a replacement for ‘Port’ on IA32 processors, you can use the routines provided in the ‘Ports’ unit, Ports. If you want to access absolute memory addresses in the first megabyte under DJGPP, you can't do this with normal pointers because DJGPP programs run in a protected memory environment, unless you use a dirty trick called near pointer hack. Please see the DJGPP FAQ (see DJGPP FAQ) for this and for other ways.
For similar reasons, the variable ‘PrefixSeg’ in the ‘System’ unit is not supported. Apart from TSRs, its only meaningful use in BP might be the setting of environment variables. GPC provides the ‘SetEnv’ and ‘UnSetEnv’ procedures for this purpose which you can use instead of any BP equivalents based on ‘PrefixSeg’. (However note that they will modify the program's own and its childs' environment, not its parent's environment. This is a property – most people call it a feature – of the environments, including DJGPP, that GPC compiled programs run in.)
GPC also runs on big-endian systems (see Endianness). This is, of course, a feature of GPC, but might affect your programs when running on a big-endian system if they make assumptions about endianness, e.g., by using type casts (or ‘absolute’ declarations or variant records misused as type casts) in certain ways. Please see the demo program absdemo.pas for an example and how to solve it.
Endianness is also relevant (the more common case) when exchanging data between different machines, e.g. via binary files or over a network. Since the latter is not easily possible in BP, and the techniques to solve the problems are mostly the same as for files, we concentrate on files here.
First, you have to choose the endianness to use for the file. Most known data formats have a specified endianness (usually that of the processor on which the format was originally created). If you define your own binary data format, you're free to choose the endianness to use.
Then, when reading or writing values larger than one byte from/to the file, you have to convert them. GPC's Run Time System supports this by some routines. E.g., you can read an array from a little-endian file with the procedure ‘BlockReadLittleEndian’, or write one to a big-endian file with ‘BlockWriteBigEndian’. Note: The endianness in the procedure names refers to the file, not the system – the routines know about the endianness of the system they run on, but you have to tell them the endianness of the file to use. This means you do not have to (and must not) use an ‘ifdef’ to use the version matching the system's endianness.
When reading or writing records or other more complicated structures, either read/write them field by field using ‘BlockReadBigEndian’ etc., or read/write them with the regular ‘BlockRead’ and ‘BlockWrite’ procedures and convert each field after reading or before writing using procedures like ‘ConvertFromBigEndian’ or ‘ConvertToLittleEndian’ (but remember, when writing, to undo the conversion afterwards, if you want to keep using the data – this is not necessary with ‘BlockWriteLittleEndian’ etc.).
Especially for strings, there are ready-made procedures like ‘ReadStringBigEndian’ or ‘WriteStringLittleEndian’ which will read/write the length as a 64 bit value (much space for really long strings :−) in the given endianness, followed by the characters (which have no endianness problem).
All these routines are described in detail in the RTS reference (see Run Time System), under ‘endianness’. The demo program endiandemo.pas contains an example on how to use these routines.
GPC warns about some BP constructs which are especially “dirty”, like misusing typed constants as initialized variables. GPC also supports some features that may conflict with BP code, like macros. The command line option ‘--borland-pascal’ disables both, so you might want to use it for a first attempt to compile your BP code under GPC. However, we suggest you try compiling without this switch and fixing any resulting problems as soon as you've become acquainted with GPC.
Even in ‘--borland-pascal’ mode, GPC may warn about some dangerous things. To disable all warnings, you can use the ‘-w’ option (note: lower-case ‘w’!). This is not recommended at all, but you may consider it more BP compatible ...
A few exotic BP routines and declarations (e.g., ‘Swap’ and ‘HeapError’) are contained in a ‘System’ unit, System, which GPC (unlike BP) does not automatically use in each program. To use it, you can add a ‘uses System;’ clause to your program. If you don't want to change your code, the command line option ‘--uses=System’ will do the same.
Since GPC runs on 32 and 64 bit platforms, integer types have larger sizes than in BP. However, if you use the ‘System’ unit (see - -uses=System - Swap; HeapError; etc.) and define the symbol ‘__BP_TYPE_SIZES__’ (by giving ‘-D__BP_TYPE_SIZES__’ on the command line), it will redeclare the types to the sizes used by BP. This is less efficient and more limiting, but might be necessary if your program relies on the exact type sizes.
GPC by default aligns fields of records and arrays suitably for higher performance, while BP doesn't. If you don't want the alignment (e.g., because the program relies on the internal format of your structures), give the ‘--pack-struct’ option.
GPC uses a more elaborate pseudo random number generator than BP does. Using the ‘Random’ and ‘Randomize’ functions works the same way, but there is no ‘RandSeed’ variable (but a ‘SeedRandom’ procedure). However, if you use the ‘System’ unit (see - -uses=System - Swap; HeapError; etc.) and define the symbol ‘__BP_RANDOM__’ (by giving ‘-D__BP_RANDOM__’ on the command line), it will provide a 100% BP compatible pseudo random number generator, including the ‘RandSeed’ variable, which will produce exactly the same sequence of pseudo random numbers that BP's pseudo random number generator does. Even the ‘Randomize’ function will then behave exactly like in BP.
A few more routines in the ‘Dos’ and ‘WinDos’ units besides the ones mentioned under Keep; GetIntVec; SetIntVec, like ‘Intr’ or ‘DosVersion’, are meaningless on non-Dos systems. By default, the ‘Dos’ unit does not provide these routines (it only provides those that are meaningful on all systems, which are most of its routines, including the most commonly used ones). If you need the unportable ones, you get them by using the ‘System’ unit (see - -uses=System - Swap; HeapError; etc.) and defining the symbol ‘__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__’ (by giving ‘-D__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__’ on the command line). If you use ‘Intr’ or ‘MsDos’, your program will only compile under DJGPP then. Other routines, e.g. ‘DosVersion’ are emulated quite roughly on other systems. Please see the notes in the ‘Dos’ unit (see Dos) for details.
In BP (or under Dos), ‘ParamStr (0)’ always contains the full path of the current executable. Under GPC, by default it contains what was passed by the caller as the 0th argument – which is often the name of the executable, but that's merely a convention, and it usually does not include the path.
If you use the ‘System’ unit (see - -uses=System - Swap; HeapError; etc.) and define the symbol ‘__BP_PARAMSTR_0__’ (by giving ‘-D__BP_PARAMSTR_0__’ on the command line), it will change the value of ‘ParamStr (0)’ to that of ‘ExecutablePath’, overwriting the value actually passed by the caller, to imitate BP's/Dos's behaviour. However note: On most systems, ‘ExecutablePath’ is not guaranteed to return the full path, so defining this symbol doesn't change anything. In general, you cannot expect to find the full executable path, so better don't even try it, or your program will (at best) run on some systems. For most cases where BP programs access their own executable, there are cleaner alternatives available.
On the Dos (DJGPP) and Linux platforms, you can use RHIDE for GNU Pascal; check the subdirectories of your DJGPP distribution.
Unfortunately, there is no IDE which would run on all platforms. We are working on it, but this will take some time. Please be patient – or offer your help!
Without an IDE, the GNU Pascal Compiler, GPC, is called about like the command-line version of the Borland Pascal Compiler, BPC. Edit your source file(s) with your favorite ASCII editor, then call GNU Pascal with a command line like
C:\GNU-PAS> gpc hello.pas -o hello.exe
on your Dos or OS/2 box or
myhost:/home/joe/gnu-pascal> gpc hello.pas -o hello
on your Unix (or Unix-compatible) system.
Don't omit the .pas suffix: GPC is a common interface for a Pascal compiler, a C, ObjC and C++ compiler, an assembler, a linker, and perhaps an Ada and a FORTRAN compiler. From the extension of your source file GPC figures out which compiler to run. GPC recognizes Pascal sources by the extension .pas, .p, .pp or .dpr.
The -o
is a command line option which tells GPC how the
executable has to be named. If not given, the executable will be
called ‘a.out’ (Unix) or ‘a.exe’ (Dos). However, you can
use the ‘--executable-file-name’ to tell GPC to always call the
executable like the source (with the extension removed under Unix
and changed to ‘.exe’ under Dos).
Note that GPC is case-sensitive concerning file names and options, so it will not work if you type
C:\GNU-PAS> GPC HELLO.PAS -O HELLO.EXE
GPC is a very quiet compiler and doesn't print anything on the screen unless you request it or there is an error. If you want to see what is going on, invoke GPC with additional options:
-Q "don't be quiet" (or: Quassel-Modus in German)
(with capital ‘Q’!) means that GPC prints out the names of procedures and functions it processes, and
--verbose
or abbreviated
-v
means that GPC informs you about the stages of compilation, i.e. preprocessing, compiling, assembling, and linking.
One example (this time for OS/2):
[C:\GNU-Pascal] gpc --verbose -Q hello.pas
Throughout this chapter, we will tell you about a lot of command-line switches. They are all invoked this way.
After compilation, there will be an executable hello
file in
the current directory. (hello.exe
on Dos or OS/2.) Just run
it and enjoy. If you're new to Unix, please note that the current
directory is not on the PATH in most installations, so you might
have to run your program as ‘./hello’. This also helps to avoid
name conflicts with other programs. Such conflicts are especially
common with the program name ‘test’ which happens to be a
standard utility under Unix that does not print any output. If you
call your program ‘test.pas’, compile it, and then invoke
‘test’, you will usually not run your program, but the utility
which leads to mysterious problems. So, invoke your program as
‘./test’ or, better yet, avoid the name ‘test’ for your
programs.
If there are compilation errors, GNU Pascal will not stop
compilation after the first one – as Borland Pascal does – but try
to catch all errors in one compilation. If you get more error
messages than your screen can hold, you can catch them in a file
(e.g. gpc.out
) or pipe them to a program like ‘more’
in the following way:
gpc hello.pas 2> gpc.out
This works with OS/2 and any bash-like shell under Unix; for Dos you
must get a replacement for command.com
which supports this
kind of redirection, or use the ‘redir’ utility (see also the
DJGPP FAQ, DJGPP FAQ.):
C:\GNU-PAS> redir -eo gpc hello.pas -o hello.exe | more
You can also use Borland's IDE for GNU Pascal on the Dos platform: Install the GNU Pascal Compiler in the Tools menu (via Options/Tools).
Name: GNU Pascal Path: gpc Arguments: $SAVE ALL --executable-file-name $NAME($EDNAME).pas HotKey: Shift+F9
Note once more that GPC is case-sensitive, so it is important to
specify .pas
instead of the .PAS
Borland Pascal would
append otherwise!
You can include more command-line arguments to GNU Pascal (e.g. ‘--automake’; see below) as you will learn more about them.
Since Borland Pascal will try to recompile your program if you use
its Run
menu function, you will need another tool to run your
program:
Name: Run Program Path: command.com Arguments: /c $NAME($EDNAME) HotKey: Shift+F10
GPC supports comments surrounded by ‘{ }’ and ‘(* *)’,
just like BP does. According to the ISO 7185 and ISO 10206
standards, Pascal allows comments opened with (*
and closed
with }
. Borland Pascal does not support such mixed
comments, so you might have sources where passages containing
comments are “commented out” using the other kind of comment
delimiters. GPC's default behaviour is (like BP) not to allow mixed
comments, so you don't need to worry about this. However, if you
happen to like mixed comments, you can turn them on either by a
command-line option, or by a compiler directive:
--mixed-comments {$mixed-comments} (*$mixed-comments*)
GPC supports nested comments (e.g., ‘{ foo { bar } baz }’), but they are disabled by default (compatible to BP which doesn't know nested comments at all). You can enable them with the option ‘--nested-comments’ (or the equivalent compiler directive)
GPC also supports Delphi style comments starting with ‘//’ and extending until the end of the line. This comment style is activated by default unless one of the ‘--classic-pascal’, ‘--extended-pascal’, ‘--object-pascal’ or ‘--borland-pascal’ dialect options is given. You can turn them on or off with the ‘--[no-]delphi-comments’ option.
All of BP's one-letter compiler directives (except H, P, Q, R, V) are supported by GPC, though some of them are ignored because they are not necessary under GPC. Besides, GPC supports a lot more directives. For an overview, see Compiler Directives.
You can use units in the same way as in Borland Pascal. However, there are some additional features.
Concerning the syntax of a unit, you can, if you want, use Extended Pascal syntax to specify a unit initializer, i.e., instead of writing
begin ... end.
at the end of the unit, you can get the same result with
to begin do begin ... end;
and there also exists
to end do begin ... end;
which specifies a finalization routine. You can use this instead of Borland Pascal's exit procedures, but for compatibility, the included ‘System’ unit also provides the ‘ExitProc’ variable. The ‘to begin do’ and/or ‘to end do’ parts must be followed by the final ‘end.’. See Modules, for information about Extended Pascal modules, an alternative to units.
When GPC compiles a unit, it produces two files: an .o
object
file (compatible with other GNU compilers such as GNU C) plus a
.gpi
file which describes the interface.
If you are interested in the internal format of GPI file, see GPI files.
If you want to compile a program that uses units, you must “make” the project. (This is the command-line switch ‘-M’ or the IDE keystroke ‘F9’ in BP.) For this purpose, GPC provides the command-line switch ‘--automake’:
gpc --automake hello.pas
If you want to force everything to be rebuilt rather than only recompile changed files (‘-B’ or “build” in BP), use ‘--autobuild’ instead of ‘--automake’:
gpc --autobuild hello.pas
For more information about the automake mechanism, see Automake.
If you do not want to use the automake mechanism for whatever reason, you can also compile every unit manually and then link everything together.
GPC does not automatically recognize that something is a unit and cannot be linked; you have to tell this by a command line switch:
-c only compile, don't link.
(If you omit this switch when compiling a unit, you only get a linker error message ‘undefined reference to `main'’. Nothing serious.)
For example, to compile two units, use:
gpc -c myunit1.pas myunit2.pas
When you have compiled all units, you can compile a program that uses them without using ‘--automake’:
gpc hello.pas
However, using ‘--automake’ is recommended, since it will recompile units that were modified.
You could also specify the program and the units in one command line:
gpc hello.pas myunit1.pas myunit2.pas
One of the purposes of writing units is to compile them separately.
However, GNU Pascal allows you to have one or more units in the same
source file (producing only one .o
file but separate
.gpi
files). You even can have a program and one or more
units in one source file; in this case, no .o
file is
produced at all.
GNU Pascal is a 32/64 bit compiler with excellent optimization algorithms (which are identically the same as those of GNU C). There are six optimization levels, specified by the command line options ‘-O’, ‘-O2’, ..., ‘-O6’.
One example:
program OptimizationDemo; procedure Foo; var A, B: Integer; begin A := 3; B := 4; WriteLn (A + B) end; begin Foo end.
When GNU Pascal compiles this program with optimization
(‘-O3’), it recognizes that the argument to `WriteLn' is the
constant 7 – and optimizes away the variables A
and
B
. If the variables were global, they would not be optimized
away because they might be accessed from other places, but the
constant 7 would still be optimized.
For more about optimization, see the GNU C documentation.
The command line option ‘-g’ specifies generation of debugging information for GDB, the GNU debugger. GDB comes with its own documentation. Currently, GDB does not understand Pascal syntax, so you should be familiar with C expressions if you want to use it.
See also “Notes for debugging” in the “Programming” chapter; see Notes for Debugging.
Sometimes it is nice to have a look at the assembler output of the
compiler. You can do this in a debugger or disassembler (which is
the only way to do it in BP), but you can also tell GPC to produce
assembler code directly: When you specify the -S
command line
option, GPC produces an .s
file instead of an .o
file.
The .s
file contains assembler source for your program. More
about this in the next section.
Objects in the Borland Pascal 7.0 notation are implemented into GNU Pascal with the following differences:
type MyObj = object x: Integer; procedure Foo; virtual; y: Real; function Bar: Char; end;
Strings are “Schema types” in GNU Pascal which is something more
advanced than Borland-style strings. For variables, you cannot
specify just String
as a type like in Borland Pascal; for
parameters and pointer types you can. There is no 255 characters
length limit. According to Extended Pascal, the maximum string
length must be in (parentheses); GNU Pascal accepts [brackets], too,
however, like BP.
For more about strings and schema types see Schema Types.
GPC supports Borland Pascal's string handling functions and some more (see String Operations):
Borland Pascal | GNU Pascal
|
Length | Length
|
Pos | Pos, Index (1)
|
Str | Str, WriteStr (1) (2)
|
Val | Val, ReadStr (2)
|
Copy | Copy, SubStr, MyStr[2 .. 7] (3)
|
Insert | Insert
|
Delete | Delete
|
MyStr[0] := #7 | SetLength (MyStr, 7)
|
=, <>, <, <=, >, >= | =, <>, <, <=, >, >= (4)
|
EQ, NE, LT, LE, GT, GE
| |
n/a | Trim
|
Notes:
(1) The order of parameters of the Extended Pascal routines (‘Index’, ‘WriteStr’) is different from the Borland Pascal routines.
(2) ‘ReadStr’ and ‘WriteStr’ allow an arbitrary number of arguments, and the arguments are not limited to numbers. ‘WriteStr’ also allows comfortable formatting like ‘WriteLn’ does, e.g. ‘WriteStr (Dest, Foo : 20, Bar, 1/3 : 10 : 2)’.
(3) ‘SubStr’ reports a runtime error if the requested substring does not fit in the given string, ‘Copy’ does not (like in BP).
(4) By default, the string operators behave like in BP. However, if you use the option ‘--no-exact-compare-strings’ or ‘--extended-pascal’, they ignore differences of trailing blanks, so, e.g., ‘'foo'’ and ‘'foo '’ are considered equal. The corresponding functions (‘EQ’, ...) always do exact comparisons.
GNU Pascal supports Borland Pascal's “typed constants” but also Extended Pascal's initialized variables:
var x: Integer value 7;
or
var x: Integer = 7;
When a typed constant is misused as an initialized variable, a warning is given unless you specify ‘--borland-pascal’.
When you want a local variable to preserve its value, define it as ‘static’ instead of using a typed constant. Typed constants also become static automatically for Borland Pascal compatibility, but it's better not to rely on this “feature” in new programs. Initialized variables do not become static automatically.
program StaticDemo; procedure Foo; { x keeps its value between two calls to this procedure } var x: Integer = 0; attribute (static); begin WriteLn (x); Inc (x) end; begin Foo; Foo; Foo; end.
For records and arrays, GPC supports both BP style and Extended
Pascal style initializers. When you initialize a record, you may
omit the field names. When you initialize an array, you may provide
indices with a :
. However, this additional information is
ignored completely, so perhaps it's best for the moment to only
provide the values ...
program BPInitVarDemo; const A: Integer = 7; B: array [1 .. 3] of Char = ('F', 'o', 'o'); C: array [1 .. 3] of Char = 'Bar'; Foo: record x, y: Integer; end = (x: 3; y: 4); begin end.
The bitwise operators ‘shl’, ‘shr’, ‘and’, ‘or’, ‘xor’ and ‘not’ work in GNU Pascal like in Borland Pascal. As an extension, you can use them as procedures, for example
program AndProcedureDemo; var x: Integer; begin and (x, $0000ffff); end.
as an alternative to
program AndOperatorDemo; var x: Integer; begin x := x and $0000ffff; end.
GPC accepts the BP style notation ‘$abcd’ for hexadecimal numbers, but you also can use Extended Pascal notation:
program EPBaseDemo; const Binary = 2#11111111; Octal = 8#177; Hex = 16#ff; begin end.
and so on up to a basis of 36. Of course, you can mix the notations as you like, e.g.:
program BPEPBaseDemo; begin WriteLn ($cafe = 2#1100101011111110) end.
‘Inc’ and ‘Dec’ are implemented like in Borland Pascal. ‘Pred’ and ‘Succ’ are generalized according to Extended Pascal and can have a second (optional) parameter:
procedure SuccDemo; var a: Integer = 42; begin a := Succ (a, 5); WriteLn (a) { 47 } end.
BP style ‘absolute’ variables work in the context of overloading other variables as well as in the context of specifying an absolute address, but the latter is highly unportable and not very useful even in Dos protected mode.
program BPAbsoluteDemo; type TString = String (80); TTypeChoice = (t_Integer, t_Char, t_String); { @@ WARNING: BAD STYLE! } procedure ReadVar (var x: Void; TypeChoice: TTypeChoice); var xInt: Integer absolute x; xChar: Char absolute x; xStr: TString absolute x; begin case TypeChoice of t_Integer: ReadLn (xInt); t_Char : ReadLn (xChar); t_String : ReadLn (xStr); end end; var i: Integer; c: Char; s: TString; begin ReadVar (i, t_Integer); ReadVar (c, t_Char); ReadVar (s, t_String); WriteLn (i, ' ', c, ' ', s) end.
GNU Pascal knows Borland Pascal's procedures FillChar
and
Move
. However, their use can be dangerous because it often
makes implicit unportable assumptions about type sizes, endianness,
internal structures or similar things. Therefore, avoid them
whenever possible. E.g., if you want to clear an array of strings,
don't ‘FillChar’ the whole array with zeros (this would
overwrite the Schema discriminants, see Strings), but rather
use a ‘for’ loop to assign the empty string to each string. In
fact, this is also more efficient than ‘FillChar’, since it
only has to set the length field of each string to zero.
GNU Pascal allows the user to define operators according to the Pascal-SC syntax:
program PXSCOperatorDemo; type Point = record x, y: Real; end; operator + (a, b: Point) c: Point; begin c.x := a.x + b.x; c.y := a.y + b.y; end; var a, b, c: Point = (42, 0.5); begin c := a + b end.
The Pascal-SC operators ‘+>’, ‘+<’, etc. for exact numerical calculations are not implemented, but you can define them.
Borland Pascal | GNU Pascal | Bits (1) | Signed
|
ShortInt | ByteInt | 8 | yes
|
Integer | ShortInt | 16 | yes
|
LongInt | Integer | 32 | yes
|
Comp | LongInt, Comp | 64 | yes
|
Byte | Byte | 8 | no
|
Word | ShortWord | 16 | no
|
n/a | Word | 32 | no
|
n/a | LongWord | 64 | no
|
(1) The size of the GNU Pascal types may depend on the platform. The sizes above apply to 32 bit platforms, including the IA32.
If you care for types with exactly the same size as in Borland Pascal, take a look at the ‘System’ unit and read its comments.
You can get the size of a type with ‘SizeOf’ in bytes (like in Borland Pascal) and with ‘BitSizeOf’ in bits, and you can declare types with a specific size (given in bits), e.g.:
program IntegerSizeDemo; type MyInt = Integer attribute (Size = 42); { 42 bits, signed } MyWord = Word attribute (Size = 2); { 2 bits, unsigned, i.e., 0 .. 3 } MyCard = Cardinal attribute (Size = 2); { the same } HalfInt = Integer attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (Integer) div 2); { A signed integer type which is half as big as the normal ‘Integer’ type, regardless of how big ‘Integer’ is on any platform the program is compiled on. } begin end.
Borland Pascal | GNU Pascal
|
Single | Single, ShortReal
|
Real | n/a (1)
|
Double | Double, Real
|
Extended | Extended, LongReal
|
Comp | LongInt, Comp (see above)
|
(1) But see ‘BPReal’, ‘RealToBPReal’ and
‘BPRealToReal’ in GPC's System
unit.
type MyRec = record f, o, oo: Boolean; Bar: Integer end;
has 8 bytes, not 7. Use the --pack-struct
option or declare
the record as ‘packed’ to force GPC to pack it to 7 bytes.
However, note that this produces somewhat less efficient code on the
IA32 and far less efficient code on certain other processors.
Packing records and arrays is mostly useful only when using large
structures where memory usage is a real concern, or when reading or
writing them from/to binary files where the exact layout matters.
In addition to BP's procedural types, GNU Pascal has pointers to procedures:
type FuncPtr = ^function (Real): Real;
The differences between procedure pointers and procedural types are only syntactical:
One can use both kinds in the same program, of course, though it is recommended to stick to one kind throughout to avoid maximum confusion.
GNU Pascal also supports Standard Pascal's procedural parameters (see Special Parameters).
Furthermore, GNU Pascal allows you to call even local procedures through procedural pointers, variables or parameters without reverting to any dirty tricks such as assembler (which is necessary in BP).
The differences between the various kinds of procedural types, pointers and parameters are demonstrated in the demo program procvardemo.pas. An example for calling local routines through procedural parameters can be found in the demo program iteratordemo.pas.
Besides the routines supproted by BP, there are many more routines available that deal with files, file names and similar things in a portable way. In contrast to Borland Pascal, you don't have to use any platform-specific units to do these kinds of things, though portable emulations of those units (e.g., of the ‘Dos’ and ‘WinDos’ units) are also available for compatibility.
Besides the operators found in Borland Pascal, GNU Pascal supports the following operators:
pow
and **
which do not
exist in Borland Pascal. You can use x pow y
for integer and
x ** y
for real or complex exponents. The basis may be
integer, real or complex in both cases.
set1 >< set2
. For more about this, see Set Operations.
The second parameter to ‘FreeMem’ is ignored by GNU Pascal and may be omitted. Memory blocks are always freed with the same size they were allocated with.
Remark: Extended Pascal Schema types provide a cleaner approach to most of the applications of ‘GetMem’ and ‘FreeMem’.
procedure Foo (var x);
like in Borland Pascal. In GNU Pascal, you can also use
procedure Foo (var x: Void);
procedure Foo (a: Integer; ...);
However, GPC does not (yet) provide a portable mechanism to access the additional arguments.
procedure Foo (a: array of Integer);
are implemented. However, Standard Pascal ‘conformant array parameters’ are usually a cleaner mechanism to pass arrays of variable size.
procedure DrawGraph (function f (x: Real): Real);
program Foo (Input, Output); begin end.
In GNU Pascal, headline parameters are optional. If the headline is omitted entirely, a warning is given unless you have specified ‘--borland-pascal’ in the command line.
otherwise
(according to Extended Pascal) as an
alternative to else
:
program CaseOtherwiseDemo; var x: Integer; begin ReadLn (x); case x of 1: WriteLn ('one'); 2: WriteLn ('two'); otherwise WriteLn ('many') end end.
Note: In the absence of a ‘case’ or ‘otherwise’ branch, missing cases labels cause an error in Extended Pascal (which goes unnoticed in Borland Pascal). GPC does not give this error, but a warning if the ‘-Wswitch’ option is given, however only for enumeration types.
Card
function for sets which counts
their elements. Unlike Borland Pascal, GNU Pascal does not limit
sets to the range 0 .. 255.
Borland Pascal:
function Max (x, y: Integer): Integer; inline ($58 / $59 / $3b / $c1 / $7f / $01 / $91);
GNU Pascal:
program InlineDemo; function Max (x, y: Integer): Integer; attribute (inline); begin if x > y then Max := x else Max := y end; begin WriteLn (Max (42, 17), ' ', Max (-4, -2)) end.
(Actually, a more general ‘Max’ function is already built in.)
This feature is not so important as it might seem because in optimization level 3 or higher (see GPC Options), GNU Pascal automatically inlines short procedures and functions.
Pascal is a well-known programming language and hardly needs to be described here. Note, however, that there is a large difference between the language used by the BP compiler and the Pascal Standards.
Extended Pascal is a standardized language based on the original Standard Pascal, but with significant extensions. Unfortunately, Borland Pascal does not conform to any of the Pascal standards. Writing a program that both complies to Extended Pascal (or even Standard Pascal) and compiles with BP is almost impossible for any non-trivial task.
On the other hand, BP has some nice features that make it very powerful in the environments in which it runs. However, some of those features are of little use on non-Dos systems and would not be good candidates for standardization.
There are also several BP features which are semantically similar to features in Standard Pascal or Extended Pascal, but syntactically different.
Therefore, in order to be useful to users coming from either side, GPC supports both the standards and the BP dialect as good as possible. By default, GPC allows features from any dialect it knows. By giving a dialect option such as ‘--borland-pascal’ or ‘--extended-pascal’, you can tell GPC to disable the features not found in that dialect, and to adjust its warning behaviour to the dialect.
The different sets of reserved words are a little problem, but GPC solves it by making the words in question only “conditionally reserved” which works transparently without problems in most cases. Still, giving a dialect option will disable all keywords not part of this dialect.
Apart from this, there are surprisingly few real conflicts between the dialects. Therefore, you can usually compile your BP code without the ‘--borland-pascal’ option and make use of all of GPC's features. You might be surprised, though, when GPC accepts things you didn't know were allowed. :−)
Finally, if you want to make use of some of GPC's extensions (compared to BP) and still keep the code compileable with BP without using ‘ifdef’s all over the place, we suggest you look at the unit ‘gpc-bp.pas’, shipped with GPC, which contains BP versions of some of GPC's features. Please read the comments at the beginning of the unit to find out more about it.
GPC offers you the possibility to make your code fully portable to each of the many platforms supported by GPC. It would be a pity not to make use of this.
This section lists some known pitfalls that often hinder otherwise well-written programs to take full advantage of GPC. If you have never used any compiler but Borland Pascal and similar compilers, some of the advices might look strange to you. But this is just the same level of strangeness that your old programs will have for you once you have understood the principles of cross-platform portability. Remember that many tricks you have always been applying almost automatically in Borland Pascal were necessary to overcome certain limitations of the Dos platform and to compensate for the compiler's missing optimization. Programming with an optimizing compiler like GPC for platforms without a 64 kB limit is a completely new experience – and perhaps it is among the reasons why you are now working with GPC in the first place?
Okay – but why should I bother and make my program portable? I know that all who want to use my program are running WXYZ-OS anyway.
Yes, but that's the result of a self-fulfilling prophecy. It depends on you whether it will always remain like this or not. Consider a program ABC written for a single platform, WXYZ-OS. Naturally, only WXYZ-OS-users get interested in ABC. The author gets feedback only from WXYZ-OS users and does not see any reason to make the program cross-platform. Then people realize that if they want to run ABC they must move to WXYZ-OS. The author concludes that people only want WXYZ-OS programs, and so on.
To break out, just create a portable version of your program now. Then all OSes have equal chances to show their abilities when running your program, and your customers can choose their OS. Then, maybe, they decide to use your program just for the reason that they can be sure that it will run on all present and future platforms and not only on a specific one – who knows?
My program is a tool specifically designed to make the best of the STUV feature of WXYZ-OS. There is no point in making it portable.
How much do you know about non-WXYZ-OSes? Just ask an expert how the STUV feature is named elsewhere. Be sure, if it is of value, it exists almost everywhere.
I am using a lot of low-level stuff in my programs, so they cannot be portable.
You do not use those low-level routines directly in your high-level routines, do you? There should always be a layer “in-between” that encapsulates the low-level routines and present an API to your program that exactly reflects the needs of your application. This “API in between” is the point where you can exchange the low-level routines by portable calls to GPC's Run Time System.
If you do not have such a layer in-between, then the API of the low-level routines you call are your first approximation for such a layer. If you have ever thought “it would be great if that API function had that additional parameter”, then your own extended version of that API function that has that parameter can become part of your “API in between”. But then don't stop here: Certainly the API of the OS is not ideal for your program's needs. Just create more routines that encapsulate all OS-specific stuff ...
When the low-level stuff in question consists of interrupts, assembler and similar things, then the first thing you need is a portable replacement of the functionality. Fortunately, GPC covers many things already in Pascal that require assembler in Borland Pascal:
This chapter is still under development. All keywords and built-in identifiers are listed, but not all with explanations.
This chapter contains an alphabetical list of all keywords (reserved words) and built-in identifiers of the GNU Pascal compiler. For detailed and comprehensive description of syntax and reserved words, see Programming. This chapter explains only built-in procedures and functions in detail.
It does not cover extensions provided by external units and libraries which are supposed to come with their own documentation. For the interfaces of the units that come with GPC, see GPC Units.
function Abs (i: integer_type): integer_type;
or
function Abs (x: real_type): real_type;
or
function Abs (z: complex_type): real_type;
Returns the absolute value of the argument. For integer or real values of ‘x’, the definition is
function Abs (x: integer_or_real_type): integer_or_real_type; begin if x < 0 then Abs := -x else Abs := x end;
whereas for complex values it is
function Abs (x: Complex): Real; begin Abs := SqRt (x * Conjugate (x)) end;
The function ‘Abs’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal; its application to complex values is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal.
program AbsDemo; var i1: Complex; begin WriteLn (Abs (42)); { 42 } WriteLn (Abs (-42)); { 42 } WriteLn (Abs (-12.1) : 0 : 1); { 12.1 } i1 := Cmplx (1, 1); { 1 + i } WriteLn (Abs (i1) : 0 : 3) { 1.414, i.e. SqRt (2) } end.
Sqr.
var variable_name: data_type absolute variable_reference;
or
var variable_name: data_type absolute integer_expression;
The first meaning of the ‘absolute’ directive allows to put a variable to the address of another one and thus provides a type-casting mechanism.
In most cases, variable_reference will be just a variable name, but GPC also allows arbitrary pointer expressions here. If variable_reference has neither a constant address nor is a variable parameter, GPC prints a warning. This warning is suppressed in “extended syntax” mode which is switched on by the ‘--extended-syntax’ option or the ‘{$X+}’ compiler directive.
GPC also allows explicit type casts. Variant records (as defined in ISO 7185 Pascal), however, have no guaranteed overlaying and are therefore not suitable for type casts.
The second meaning of ‘absolute’ places a variable at a specified address. This is useful on machines without virtual memory addressing for doing certain low-level operations, but should be avoided on systems with memory protection such as Unix-like systems. GPC does not check whether the specified virtual address makes any sense and does not provide a built-in mechanism to map it to a real address.
GPC warns about this second use of ‘absolute’ unless “extended syntax” has been requested.
‘absolute’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
Borland Pascal has a slightly different syntax for the second meaning related to the addressing scheme of IA32 processors working in real mode.
Allowing arbitrary memory references instead of just variable names in the first meaning of ‘absolute’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AbsoluteDemo; {$X+} const IOMem = $f0000000; MaxVarSize = MaxInt div 8; var Mem: array [0 .. MaxVarSize - 1] of Byte absolute 0; { This address has no actual meaning } MyPort: Byte absolute IOMem + $c030; { Beware: Using any of the variables above will crash your program unless you know exactly what you do! That's why GPC warns about it without the $X+ directive. } var x: Real; a: array [1 .. SizeOf (Real)] of Byte absolute x; i: Integer; b: Byte absolute a[i]; { GNU Pascal extension: non-constant memory reference. } begin x := 3.14; { Look at the internal representation of a real variable. } for i := 1 to SizeOf (Real) do Write (a[i] : 4); WriteLn; { The same again, more ugly ... } for i := 1 to SizeOf (Real) do Write (b : 4); WriteLn; { And yes, there's an even more ugly way to do it ... } for i := 1 to SizeOf (Real) do Write (Mem[PtrCard (@x) + i - 1] : 4); WriteLn end.
Abstract object type or method declaration.
‘abstract’ is an Object Pascal extension.
function Addr (const Foo): Pointer;
‘Addr’ returns the address of its argument. It is equivalent to the address operator.
Note: In BP, ‘Addr’ returns an untyped pointer. GPC does this only with ‘--borland-pascal’. Otherwise it returns a typed pointer. ‘Addr’ never depends on the ‘--[no]-typed-address’ option/compiler directive, unlike the address operator. (It is recommended you never rely on untyped pointer results, but use a type-cast if really necessary.)
‘Addr’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program AddrDemo; var Foo: ^Integer; Bar: Integer; begin Foo := Addr (Bar); { Let `Foo' point to `Bar'. } Bar := 17; Foo^ := 42; { Change the value of `Bar' to 42 } WriteLn (Bar) end.
function AlignOf (var x): Integer;
Returns the alignment of a type or variable in bytes.
‘AlignOf’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AlignOfDemo; var a: Integer; b: array [1 .. 8] of Char; begin WriteLn (AlignOf (a)); { Alignment of `Integer', e.g. 4 bytes. } WriteLn (AlignOf (Integer)); { The same. } WriteLn (AlignOf (b)); { Alignment of `Char'; usually 1 byte. } end.
Although the array is bigger than a single char, it is accessed char by char, so there usually is no need to align it on a 4 byte boundary or such. (This may be false on some platforms.)
‘export’ extension (‘export foo = all’).
‘all’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
operator and (operand1, operand2: Boolean) = Result: Boolean;
or
operator and (operand1, operand2: integer_type) = Result: integer_type;
or
procedure and (var operand1: integer_type; operand2: integer_type);
In GNU Pascal, ‘and’ has three built-in meanings:
By default, ‘and’ acts as a short-circuit operator in GPC: If the first operand is ‘False’, the second operand is not evaluated because the result is already known to be ‘False’. You can change this to complete evaluation using the ‘--no-short-circuit’ command-line option or the ‘{$B+}’ compiler directive.
The logical ‘and’ operator is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal.
According to ISO, you cannot rely on ‘and’ being a short-circuit operator. On the other hand, GPC's default behaviour does not contradict the ISO standard. (See and_then.) However, since it seems to be a de-facto standard among ISO Pascal compilers to evaluate both operands of ‘and’, GPC switches to ‘--no-short-circuit’ mode if one of the language dialect options selecting ISO Pascal, for instance ‘--extended-pascal’, is given. Use ‘--short-circuit’ to override.
Use of ‘and’ as a bitwise operator for integers is a Borland Pascal extension.
Use of ‘and’ as a “procedure” is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AndDemo; var a, b, c: Integer; begin if (a = 0) and (b = 0) then { logical `and' } c := 1 else if (a and b) = 0 then { bitwise `and' } c := 2 else and (c, a) { same as `c := c and a' } end.
Note the difference between the logical ‘and’ and the bitwise ‘and’: When ‘a’ is 2 and ‘b’ is 4, then ‘a and b’ is 0. Beware: ‘a and b = 0’ has nothing to do with ‘(a = 0) and (b = 0)’!
Since bitwise ‘and’ has a higher priority than the ‘=’ operator, parentheses are needed in ‘if (a = 0) and (b = 0)’ because otherwise ‘0 and b’ would be calculated first, and the remainder would cause a parse error.
Keywords, and_then, and then, or, xor, Operators.
{ `and then' is built in. A user-defined operator cannot consist of two words. } operator and then (operand1, operand2: Boolean) = Result: Boolean;
‘and then’ is an alias for the short-circuit logical operator ‘and_then’.
While ‘and_then’ is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal, ‘and then’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AndThenDemo; var p: ^Integer; begin New (p); ReadLn (p^); if (p <> nil) and then (p^ < 42) then { This is safe. } WriteLn (p^, ' is less than 42') end.
Keywords, and_then, and, or else.
operator and_then (operand1, operand2: Boolean) = Result: Boolean;
The ‘and_then’ short-circuit logical operator performs the same operation as the logical operator ‘and’. But while the ISO standard does not specify anything about the evaluation of the operands of ‘and’ – they may be evaluated in any order, or not at all – ‘and_then’ has a well-defined behaviour: It evaluates the first operand. If the result is ‘False’, ‘and_then’ returns ‘False’ without evaluating the second operand. If it is ‘True’, the second operand is evaluated and returned.
Since the behaviour described above is the most efficient way to implement ‘and’, GPC by default treats ‘and’ and ‘and_then’ exactly the same. If you want, for some reason, to have both operands of ‘and’ evaluated completely, you must assign both to temporary variables and then use ‘and’ – or ‘and_then’, it does not matter.
‘and_then’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Some people think that the ISO standard requires both operands of ‘and’ to be evaluated. This is false. What the ISO standard does say is that you cannot rely on a certain order of evaluation of the operands of ‘and’; in particular things like the following program can crash according to ISO Pascal, although they cannot crash when compiled with GNU Pascal running in default mode.
program AndBug; var p: ^Integer; begin New (p); ReadLn (p^); if (p <> nil) and (p^ < 42) then { This is NOT safe! } WriteLn ('You''re lucky. But the test could have crashed ...') end.
program And_ThenDemo; var p: ^Integer; begin New (p); ReadLn (p^); if (p <> nil) and_then (p^ < 42) then { This is safe. } WriteLn (p^, ' is less than 42') end.
Keywords, and then, and, or_else.
type AnsiChar = Char;
‘AnsiChar’ is an 8 bit char type. Currently, it is the same as ‘Char’, but this might change in the future, once ‘wide chars’ (16 bit chars) will be introduced into GPC. Depending on the platform, ‘Char’ might be either ‘AnsiChar’ or ‘WideChar’ then.
‘AnsiChar’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
program AnsiCharDemo; var A: AnsiChar; { There is nothing special with `AnsiChar'. } B: Char; begin A := 'A'; A := B end.
type AnyFile { built-in type }
‘AnyFile’ is a built-in type that can only be used for parameters and pointer targets. Any kind of file variable (‘Text’, untyped and typed ‘file’) can be passed to such a parameter and their address assigned to such a pointer. On the other side, only generic file operations are possible with ‘AnyFile’ parameters/pointer targets.
This type is useful for implementing generic file handling routines. Also some built-in file routines use this type for their parameters, e.g. ‘IOSelectRead’ (see Run Time System).
‘BlockRead’ (see BlockRead) and ‘BlockWrite’ (see BlockWrite) treat ‘AnyFile’ specially, in that they accept all ‘AnyFile’s as arguments (even if the actual file is a typed or ‘Text’ file) and always use a block size of 1 (even if the actual file is an untyped file with different block size or a typed file of a type with size not equal to one). This is the only way to reliably read/write a certain amount of data from/to an ‘AnyFile’.
‘AnyFile’ pointers cannot be allocated with ‘New’ (because it would be unspecified which kind of file to create).
‘AnyFile’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AnyFileDemo; procedure Test (var f: AnyFile); var v: ^AnyFile; begin { Generic file operations are allowed for `AnyFile' } Rewrite (f); { `AnyFile' can also be accessed via pointers } v := @f; Close (v^) end; var t: Text; f: file; g: file of Integer; begin { Any kind of file variable can be passed as `AnyFile' } Test (t); Test (f); Test (g) end.
procedure Append (var F: any_file; [FileName: String;] [BlockSize: Cardinal]);
‘Append’ opens a file for writing. If the file does not exist, it is created. If it does exist, the file pointer is positioned after the last element.
Like ‘Rewrite’, ‘Reset’ and ‘Extend’ do, ‘Reset’ accepts an optional second parameter for the name of the file in the filesystem and a third parameter for the block size of the file. The third parameter is allowed only (and by default also required) for untyped files. For details, see Rewrite.
‘Append’, including the ‘BlockSize’ parameter, is a Borland Pascal extension. ISO 10206 Extended Pascal has Extend instead. The ‘FileName’ parameter is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AppendDemo; var Sample: Text; begin Assign (Sample, 'sample.txt'); Rewrite (Sample); WriteLn (Sample, 'Hello, World!'); { `sample.txt' now has one line } Close (Sample); { ... } Append (Sample); WriteLn (Sample, 'Hello again!'); { `sample.txt' now has two lines } Close (Sample) end.
Assign, Reset, Rewrite, Update, Extend.
function ArcCos (x: Real): Real;
or
function ArcCos (z: Complex): Complex;
‘ArcCos’ returns the (principal value of the) arcus cosine of the argument. The result is in the range ‘0 < ArcCos (x) < Pi’ for real arguments.
‘ArcCos’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ArcCosDemo; begin { yields 3.14159 as ArcCos (0.5) = Pi / 3 } WriteLn (3 * ArcCos (0.5) : 0 : 5) end.
ArcSin, ArcTan, Sin, Cos, Ln, Arg.
function ArcSin (x: Real): Real;
or
function ArcSin (z: Complex): Complex;
‘ArcSin’ returns the (principal value of the) arcus sine of the argument. The result is in the range ‘-Pi / 2 < ArcSin (x) < Pi / 2’ for real arguments.
‘ArcSin’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ArcSinDemo; begin { yields 3.14159 as ArcSin (0.5) = Pi / 6 } WriteLn (6 * ArcSin (0.5) : 0 : 5) end.
ArcCos, ArcTan, Sin, Cos, Ln, Arg.
function ArcTan (x: Real): Real;
or
function ArcTan (z: Complex): Complex;
‘ArcTan’ returns the (principal value of the) arcus tangent of the argument. The result is in the range ‘-Pi / 2 < ArcTan (x) < Pi / 2’ for real arguments.
‘ArcTan’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal; its application to complex values is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal.
program ArcTanDemo; begin { yields 3.14159 as ArcTan (1) = Pi / 4 } WriteLn (4 * ArcTan (1) : 0 : 5) end.
ArcSin, ArcCos, Sin, Cos, Ln, Arg.
function Arg (z: Complex): Real;
‘Arg’ returns the complex “argument”, i.e. the angle (in radian) in the complex plane with respect to the real axis, of its parameter ‘z’. The result is in the range of ‘-Pi < Arg (z) <= Pi’.
‘Arg’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program ArgDemo; var z: Complex; begin z := Cmplx (1, 1); { 1 + i } WriteLn (Arg (z) : 0 : 5) { yields 0.78540, i.e. Pi / 4 } end.
In type definitions:
array [index_type] of element_type
or
array [index_type, ..., index_type] of element_type
In parameter list declarations:
array of element_type
The reserved word ‘array’ is used to define an array type.
@@conformant/open arrays
Array types are defined in ISO 7185 Pascal.
program ArrayDemo; type IntArray = array [1 .. 20] of Integer; WeekDayChars = array [(Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun)] of Char; Foo = array [0 .. 9, 'a' .. 'z', (Baz, Glork1, Fred)] of Real; TwoDimIntArray = array [1 .. 10] of IntArray; { is equivalent to: } TwoDimIntArray2 = array [1 .. 10, 1 .. 20] of Integer; procedure PrintChars (F: array of Char); var i: Integer; begin for i := Low (F) to High (F) do WriteLn (F[i]) end; var Waldo: WeekDayChars; begin Waldo := 'HiWorld'; PrintChars (Waldo) end.
Keywords, Array Types, High, Low
Object type membership test and conversion.
‘as’ is an Object Pascal and a Borland Delphi extension.
See ‘http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/misc/gpcasm.zip’.
‘asm’, as implemented in GPC, is a GNU Pascal extension. It is mostly compatible to GCC's ‘asm’, but not compatible to that of Borland Pascal.
Deprecated! Use ‘external name’ now.
Keywords, external, name, Importing Libraries from Other Languages.
procedure Assert (Condition: Boolean);
or
procedure Assert (Condition: Boolean; const Message: String);
‘Assert’ checks the given ‘Condition’ at run-time. If it is true, it does nothing. If it is false, it raises a runtime error, using the second argument for the message if given.
However, if the switch ‘--no-assertions’ is given (see GPC Command Line Options), ‘Assert’ is deactivated. It still evaluates the condition if it has side effects, but never raises a runtime error.
‘Assert’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
procedure Assign (var F: any_file; FileName: String);
‘Assign’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
Reset, Rewrite, Update, Extend, Append.
function Assigned (p: Pointer): Boolean;
or
function Assigned (p: procedural_type): Boolean;
The ‘Assigned’ function returns ‘True’ if the pointer parameter or the address of the procedural parameter is not ‘nil’; it returns ‘False’ if it is ‘nil’.
‘Assigned’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program AssignedDemo; type PInt = ^Integer; procedure TellIfOdd (p: PInt); begin if Assigned (p) and then Odd (p^) then WriteLn ('The pointer p points to an odd value.') end; var foo: Integer; begin TellIfOdd (nil); foo := 1; TellIfOdd (@foo); foo := 2; TellIfOdd (@foo) end.
declaration attribute (name);
or
declaration attribute (name = parameter);
or
declaration attribute (name (parameter, parameter ...));
Several attributes can be given in one ‘attribute’ directive, separated with ‘,’, or in several ‘attribute’ directives.
Besides the attributes that GCC supports (see Attribute Syntax), GPC allows the following attributes for variables:
For routines it allows the following additional attributes:
For types it allows the following additional attributes:
‘Size’ can be applied to integer and Boolean types to produce types with a specified size in bits; for example
type Card16 = Cardinal attribute (Size = 16);
defines an unsigned integer type with 16 bits.
Variable and routine attributes are preceded by a ‘;’, type attributes are not. So, e.g., in the following example, the ‘Size’ attribute applies to the type, and the ‘static’ attribute to the variable.
var a: Integer attribute (Size = 64); attribute (static);
‘attribute’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AttributeDemo; { Demo for `iocritical' attribute. } { Program will abort with a runtime error! } {$I-} procedure p; attribute (iocritical); var t: Text; begin Reset (t) { Will not cause a runtime error here because I/O checking is off, but leave InOutRes set. } end; {$I+} begin p; { Since `p' was declared `iocritical', and I/O checking is now on, InOutRes is checked immediately after the call to p, and a runtime error raised. } { So this statement is never reached. } InOutRes := 0; { Neither this one, which would be reached without the `iocritical' attribute. } WriteLn ('never gets here') end.
begin statement; statement; ... statement end;
The reserved word ‘begin’ opens a ‘begin ... end’ statement which joins several statements to one compound statement.
‘begin’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program BeginDemo; begin if True then WriteLn ('single statement'); if True then begin { clamp statement1 ... } WriteLn ('statement1'); WriteLn ('statement2') end { ... to statement2 } end.
Keywords, begin end Compound Statement, end
procedure Bind (var F: any_file; B: BindingType);
‘Bind’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Unbind, Binding, BindingType, bindable.
External bindability of files.
‘bindable’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Keywords, Bind, Unbind, Binding, BindingType.
function Binding (F: any_file): BindingType;
‘Binding’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Bind, Unbind, BindingType, bindable.
type UnixTimeType = LongInt; BindingType = packed record Bound, Force, { Can be set to allow binding to directories or inaccessible files } Extensions_Valid, Readable, Writable, Executable, Existing, { Binding points to an existing file } Directory, { Binding points to an existing directory; ‘Existing’ is False in this case } Special, { Binding points to an existing special file (device, pipe, socket, etc.); ‘Existing’ is False in this case } SymLink: Boolean; { Binding points to a symbolic link } Size: FileSizeType; { Size of file, or -1 if unknown } AccessTime, { Time of last access } ModificationTime, { Time of last modification } ChangeTime: UnixTimeType; { Time of last change } User, { User ID of owner } Group, { Group ID of owner } Mode, { Access permissions, cf. ChMod } Device, { Device the file is on } INode, { Unix INode number } Links: Integer; { Number of hard links } TextBinary: Boolean; { Open a Text file in binary mode } Handle: Integer; { Can be set to bind a Pascal file to a given file handle } CloseFlag: Boolean; { If Handle is used, tell whether to close it when file is closed } Name: String (BindingNameLength) end;
BindingNameLength
is an implementation-defined constant.
‘BindingType’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension. The fields ‘Bound’ and ‘Name’ are required by Extended Pascal, the other ones are GNU Pascal extensions.
Bind, Unbind, Binding, bindable.
function BitSizeOf (var x): SizeType;
Returns the size of a type or variable in bits.
‘BitSizeOf’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program BitSizeOfDemo; type Int12 = Integer attribute (Size = 12); var a: Integer; b: array [1 .. 8] of Char; c: Int12; d: packed record x: Int12; y: 0 .. 3 end; begin WriteLn (BitSizeOf (a)); { Size of an `Integer'; usually 32 bits. } WriteLn (BitSizeOf (Integer)); { The same. } WriteLn (BitSizeOf (b)); { Size of eight `Char's; usually 64 bits. } WriteLn (BitSizeOf (c)); { e.g. 16 bits (smallest addressable space holding a 12 bit integer). } WriteLn (BitSizeOf (d)); { e.g. 16 } WriteLn (BitSizeOf (d.x)); { 12 } WriteLn (BitSizeOf (d.y)) { 2 } end.
procedure BlockRead (var F: File; var Buffer; Blocks: Integer);
or
procedure BlockRead (var F: File; var Buffer; Blocks: Integer; var BlocksRead: Integer);
‘BlockRead’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
procedure BlockWrite (var F: File; const Buffer; Blocks: Integer);
or
procedure BlockWrite (var F: File; const Buffer; Blocks: Integer; var BlocksWritten: Integer);
‘BlockWrite’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
type Boolean = (False, True); { built-in type }
The intrinsic ‘Boolean’ represents boolean values, i.e. it can only assume the two values ‘True’ and ‘False’ (which are predefined constants).
‘Boolean’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program BooleanDemo; var a: Boolean; begin a := True; WriteLn (a) end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), True, False, CBoolean, ByteBool, ShortBool, MedBool, WordBool, LongBool, LongestBool.
Break { simple statement }
With ‘Break’ you can exit the body of the current loop instantly. It can only be used within a ‘while’, ‘repeat’ or a ‘for’ loop.
‘Break’ is a Borland Pascal extension. Mac Pascal has ‘Leave’ instead.
program BreakDemo; var Foo: Integer; begin while True do begin repeat WriteLn ('Enter a number less than 100:'); ReadLn (Foo); if Foo < 100 then Break; { Exits `repeat' loop } WriteLn (Foo, ' is not exactly less than 100! Try again ...') until False; if Foo > 50 then Break; { Exits `while' loop } WriteLn ('The number entered was not greater than 50.') end end.
Loop Control Statements, Continue, Cycle, Exit, Halt, Leave, Return, goto.
type Byte { built-in type }
‘Byte’ is an unsigned integer type which is one “unit” wide. On most platforms one unit has 8 bits, therefore the type is named “byte” and usually has a range of ‘0 .. 255’. (It is the same as ByteCard.)
‘Byte’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘unsigned char’ in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘Byte’ is a Borland Pascal extension. (For something equivalent in ISO Pascal, see Subrange Types.)
program ByteDemo; var a: Byte; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type ByteBool = Boolean attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (Byte));
The intrinsic ‘ByteBool’ represents boolean values, but occupies the same memory space as a ‘Byte’. It is used when you need to define a parameter or record that conforms to some external library or system specification.
‘ByteBool’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program ByteBoolDemo; var a: ByteBool; begin Byte (a) := 1; if a then WriteLn ('Ord (True) = 1') end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), Boolean, True, False, CBoolean, ShortBool, MedBool, WordBool, LongBool, LongestBool.
type ByteCard = Cardinal attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (Byte));
‘ByteCard’ is an unsigned integer type which is one “unit” wide. On most platforms one unit has 8 bits, therefore the type is prefixed “byte-” and usually has a range of ‘0 .. 255’.
‘ByteCard’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘unsigned char’ in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘ByteCard’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ByteCardDemo; var a: ByteCard; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type ByteInt = Integer attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (Byte));
‘ByteInt’ is a signed integer type which is one “unit” wide. On most platforms one unit has 8 bits, therefore the type is prefixed “byte-” and usually has a range of ‘-128 .. 127’.
‘ByteInt’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘signed char’ in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘ByteInt’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
‘ByteInt’ in GNU Pascal corresponds to ShortInt in Borland Pascal.
program ByteIntDemo; var a: ByteInt; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
Deprecated! Use ‘external’ now.
Keywords, Importing Libraries from Other Languages, external.
function Card (S: any_set): Integer;
The function ‘Card (S)’ returns the number of elements in the set ‘S’.
‘Card’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program CardDemo; var Foo: set of 1 .. 100; begin Foo := [1, 2, 3, 5, 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 5, 5]; { four elements } WriteLn ('foo consists of ', Card (Foo), ' elements') end.
type Cardinal { built-in type }
‘Cardinal’ is the “natural” unsigned integer type in GNU Pascal. On some platforms it is 32 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘0 .. 4294967295’. Use it whenever you need a general-purpose unsigned integer type and don't need to care about compatibility to other Pascal dialects.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘Cardinal’ is not defined in ISO Pascal, but several Pascal compilers support it as an extension. In Borland Delphi, for instance, it is an unsigned 16-bit in version 1.0, an unsigned 31-bit integer from version 2.0 on, and an unsigned 32-bit integer from version 4.0 on.
program CardinalDemo; var a: Cardinal; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
case expression of selector: statement; ... selector: statement; end;
or, with alternative statement sequence:
case expression of selector: statement; ... selector: statement; otherwise { ``else'' instead of ``otherwise'' is allowed } statement; ... statement; end;
or, as part of the invariant record
type definition:
foo = record field_declarations case bar: variant_type of selector: (field_declarations); selector: (field_declarations); ... end;
or, without a variant selector field,
foo = record field_declarations case variant_type of selector: (field_declarations); selector: (field_declarations); ... end;
‘case’ opens a case statement. For further description see case Statement.
For ‘case’ in a variant record type definition, see Record Types.
The ‘case’ statement is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
According to ISO 7185 Pascal, the selector type must be a named type. UCSD Pascal and Borland Pascal allow any ordinal type here.
The alternative statement execution with ‘otherwise’ it is an Extended Pascal extension; with ‘else’ it is a Borland Pascal extension. In GNU Pascal, both are allowed.
program CaseDemo; var Foo: String (10); Bar: Integer; begin WriteLn ('Enter up to ten arbitrary characters:'); ReadLn (Foo); for Bar := 1 to Length (Foo) do begin Write (Foo[Bar], ' is '); case Foo[Bar] of 'A' .. 'Z', 'a' .. 'z': WriteLn ('an English letter'); '0' .. '9': WriteLn ('a number'); otherwise WriteLn ('an unrecognized character') end end end.
Keywords, if Statement, Record Types, else, otherwise
type CBoolean { built-in type }
‘CBoolean’ is a Boolean type. In GNU Pascal it is compatible to ‘_Bool’ in GNU C (which is defined as ‘bool’ in stdbool.h). This compatibility is the reason why ‘CBoolean’ exists.
‘CBoolean’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CBooleanDemo; var a: CBoolean; begin a := True; if Ord (a) = 1 then WriteLn ('Ord (True) = 1') end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), Integer Types, Boolean, True, False, ByteBool, ShortBool, MedBool, WordBool, LongBool, LongestBool.
type CCardinal { built-in type }
‘CCardinal’ is an unsigned integer type. On some platforms it is 32 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘0 .. 4294967295’.
‘CCardinal’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘unsigned int’ in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘CCardinal’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CCardinalDemo; var a: CCardinal; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type Char { built-in type }
The built-in type ‘Char’ holds elements of the operating system's character set (usually ASCII). The ‘Char’ type is a special case of ordinal type. Conversion between character types and ordinal types is possible with the built-in functions ‘Ord’ and ‘Chr’.
‘Char’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program CharDemo; var a: Char; begin a := 'x'; WriteLn (a) end.
Character Types, Ordinal Types, Type Casts, Ord, Chr.
procedure ChDir (Directory: String);
‘ChDir’ changes the current directory to Directory, if its argument is a valid parameter to the related operating system's function. Otherwise, a runtime error is caused.
‘ChDir’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program ChDirDemo; var Foo: String (127); begin WriteLn ('Enter directory name to change to:'); ReadLn (Foo); {$I-} { Don't abort the program on error } ChDir (Foo); if IOResult <> 0 then WriteLn ('Cannot change to directory `', Foo, '''.') else WriteLn ('Okay.') end.
function Chr (AsciiCode: Integer): Char;
‘Chr’ returns a character whose ASCII code corresponds to the value given by ‘AsciiCode’.
‘Chr’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program ChrDemo; var x: Integer; begin for x := 32 to 122 do Write (Chr (x)) end.
type CInteger { built-in type }
‘CInteger’ is a signed integer type. On some platforms it is 32 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘-2147483648 .. 2147483647’.
‘CInteger’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘int’ in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘CInteger’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CIntegerDemo; var a: CInteger; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
Deprecated! Use ‘external’ now.
Keywords, Importing Libraries from Other Languages, external.
OOE/Delphi style object class.
‘class’ is an Object Pascal and a Borland Delphi extension.
procedure Close (var F: any_file);
‘Close’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
function Cmplx (RealPart, ImaginaryPart: Real): Complex;
‘Cmplx’ makes a complex number from ‘RealPart’ and ‘ImaginaryPart’.
‘Cmplx’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program CmplxDemo; var z: Complex; x, y: Real; begin z := Cmplx (x, y) { z := x + iy } end.
type Comp = LongInt;
‘Comp’ is a signed integer type which is longer than ‘Integer’. On some platforms it is 64 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘-9223372036854775808 .. 9223372036854775807’.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘Comp’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
In some contexts, Borland Pascal treats ‘Comp’ as a “real” type – this behaviour is not supported by GPC.
program CompDemo; var a: Comp; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
procedure CompilerAssert (Condition: Boolean);
or
function CompilerAssert (Condition: Boolean): Boolean;
or
function CompilerAssert (Condition: Boolean; ResultValue: Any_Type): type of ResultValue;
‘CompilerAssert’ checks the given ‘Condition’ at compile-time. If it is a compile-time constant of Boolean type with the value ‘True’, it returns ‘ResultValue’, or if called with only one argument, it returns ‘True’ or nothing if used as a procedure.
If ‘Condition’ cannot be evaluated at compile-time or does not have the value ‘True’, it causes a compile-time error.
So it can be used to make sure that certain assumptions hold before relying on them.
‘CompilerAssert’ does not depend on the ‘--[no-]assertions’ options. It does not generate any run-time code.
‘CompilerAssert’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CompilerAssertDemo; var a: LongInt; const { Make sure that the highest value a can hold is larger than MaxInt, and set b to that value. } b = CompilerAssert (High (a) > MaxInt, High (a)); { Do a similar check for the minimum value, setting c to True (which can be ignored). } c = CompilerAssert (Low (a) < Low (Integer)); begin { Procedure-like use of CompilerAssert in the statement part. } CompilerAssert (MaxInt >= 100000); WriteLn (b, ' ', c) end.
type Internal_Complex = record { not visible } RealPart, ImaginaryPart: Real end; Complex = restricted Internal_Complex;
‘Complex’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program ComplexDemo; var a: Complex; begin a := Cmplx (42, 3); WriteLn (Re (a), ' + ', Im (a), ' i') end.
function Concat (S1, S2: String): String;
or
function Concat (S1, S2, S3: String): String;
or
...
‘Concat’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
function Conjugate (z: Complex): Complex;
‘Conjugate’ computes the complex conjugate of the complex number ‘z’
‘Conjugate’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ConjugateDemo; var z: Complex; begin z := Cmplx (2, 3); { z is 2 + i * 3 } WriteLn ('z = ', Re (z) : 0 : 5, ' + i * ', Im (z) : 0 : 5); z := Conjugate (z); { z conjugate is 2 - i * 3 } WriteLn ('z conjugate = ', Re (z) : 0 : 5,' + i * ', Im (z) : 0 : 5) end.
Constant declaration or constant parameter declaration.
‘const’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants. ‘const’ parameters are a Borland Pascal extension. Pointers to ‘const’ are a GNU Pascal extension.
Constant declarations allow you to define names for constant (unchanging) values, such as using ‘SecondsPerHour’ instead of 3600. This can make your program much more readable and maintainable.
GNU Pascal allows you to define constant strings, records and arrays as well as simple numeric constants.
GNU Pascal also implements the const parameter extension which allows the compiler to pass parameters by reference while still allowing you to pass constant values as inputs. See Subroutine Parameter List Declaration for more information.
@@ Pointers to ‘const’ @@
program ConstDemo; type Rec = record x: Integer; y: Integer; end; const a = 5; constr: Rec = (10, 12); procedure doit (const r: Rec; const s: String); begin WriteLn (r.x); WriteLn (r.y); WriteLn (s); end; var variabler: Rec; begin variabler.x := 16; variabler.y := 7; doit (variabler, 'Should be 16 and 7'); doit (constr, 'Should be 10 and 12'); end.
Keywords, var, protected, Subroutine Parameter List Declaration.
Object constructor.
‘constructor’ is an Object Pascal and a Borland Pascal extension.
Continue { simple statement }
‘Continue’ goes on with loop iteration by jumping to the end of the current loop body. Note: ‘Continue’ can only stand within a ‘while’, ‘repeat’ or a ‘for’ loop.
‘Continue’ is a Borland Pascal extension, Mac Pascal has ‘Cycle’ instead.
program ContinueDemo; var Foo, Bar: Integer; begin WriteLn ('Enter three numbers:'); for Bar := 1 to 3 do begin ReadLn (Foo); if Foo < 5 then Continue; WriteLn ('Your number was greater than 5.') end end.
Loop Control Statements, Break, Cycle, Exit, Halt, Leave, Return, goto.
function Copy (S: String; FirstChar, Count: Integer): String;
or
function Copy (S: String; FirstChar: Integer): String;
‘Copy’ returns a sub-string of ‘S’ starting with the character at position FirstChar. If Count is given, such many characters will be copied into the sub-string. If Count is omitted, the sub-string will range to the end of S.
If ‘Count’ is too large for the sub-string to fit in S, the result will be truncated at the end of S. If ‘FirstChar’ exceeds the length of S, the empty string will be returned. (For a function which does not truncate but triggers a runtime error instead, see SubStr.)
Please note that GPC's strings may be longer than 255 characters. If you want to isolate the second half of a string S starting with the third character, use ‘Copy (S, 3)’ instead of ‘Copy (S, 3, 255)’.
‘Copy’ is a UCSD Pascal extension. The possibility to omit the third parameter is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CopyDemo; var S: String (42); begin S := 'Hello'; WriteLn (Copy (S, 2, 3)); { yields `ell' } WriteLn (Copy (S, 3)); { yields `llo' } WriteLn (Copy (S, 4, 7)); { yields `lo' } WriteLn (Copy (S, 42)) { yields the empty string } end.
function Cos (x: Real): Real;
or
function Cos (z: Complex): Complex;
‘Cos’ returns the cosine of the argument. The result is in the range ‘-1 < Cos (x) < 1’ for real arguments.
The function ‘Cos’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal; its application to complex values is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal.
program CosDemo; begin { yields 0.5 since Cos (Pi / 3) = 0.5 } WriteLn (Cos (Pi / 3) : 0 : 5) end.
type CString = ^Char;
‘CString’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CStringDemo; var s: CString; begin s := 'Hello, world!'; {$X+} WriteLn (s) end.
function CString2String (S: CString): String;
‘CString2String’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
function CStringCopyString (Dest: CString; const Source: String): CString;
‘CStringCopyString’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
function CurrentRoutineName: String;
‘CurrentRoutineName’ returns the name of the current routine from where it's called.
‘CurrentRoutineName’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CurrentRoutineNameDemo; procedure FooBar; begin WriteLn (CurrentRoutineName) { `FooBar' } end; begin WriteLn (CurrentRoutineName); { `main program' } FooBar end.
type CWord = CCardinal;
‘CCardinal’ is an unsigned integer type. On some platforms it is 32 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘0 .. 4294967295’. It is the same as CCardinal.
‘CWord’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘unsigned int’ in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘CWord’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CWordDemo; var a: CWord; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
CCardinal, Integer Types, Subrange Types.
Cycle { simple statement }
‘Cycle’ goes on with loop iteration by jumping to the end of the current loop body. Note: ‘Cycle’ can only stand within a ‘while’, ‘repeat’ or a ‘for’ loop.
‘Cycle’ is a Mac Pascal extension. Borland Pascal has ‘Continue’ instead.
program CycleDemo; var Foo, Bar: Integer; begin WriteLn ('Enter three numbers:'); for Bar := 1 to 3 do begin ReadLn (Foo); if Foo < 5 then Cycle; WriteLn ('Your number was greater than 5.') end end.
Loop Control Statements, Break, Continue, Exit, Halt, Leave, Return, goto.
function Date (T: TimeStamp): packed array [1 .. Date_length] of Char;
Date takes a TimeStamp
parameter and returns the date as a
string (in the form of a packed array of Char
).
Date_length is an implementation defined invisible constant.
‘Date’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Set TimeStamp.
TimeStamp, GetTimeStamp, Time, Date And Time Routines.
For ordinal types:
procedure Dec (var x: ordinal_type);
or
procedure Dec (var x: ordinal_type; Amount: and_integer_type);
For pointer types:
procedure Dec (var p: any_pointer_type);
or
procedure Dec (var p: any_pointer_type; Amount: and_integer_type);
For ordinal types, ‘Dec’ decreases the value of ‘x’ by one or by ‘amount’ if specified.
If the argument ‘p’ is pointing to a specified type (typed pointer), ‘Dec’ decreases the address of ‘p’ by the size of the type ‘p’ is pointing to or by ‘amount’ times that size respectively. If ‘p’ is an untyped pointer (i.e. ‘p’ is of type Pointer), ‘p’ is decreased by one, otherwise by ‘amount’ if specified.
‘Dec’ is a Borland Pascal extension. The combination of the second argument with application to pointers is a GNU Pascal extension.
program DecDemo; var x: Integer; y: array [1 .. 5] of Integer; p: ^Integer; begin x := 9; Dec (x, 10); { yields -1 } {$X+} { Turn on extended systax } p := @y[5]; { p points to y[5] } Dec (p, 3) { p points to y[2] } end.
Inc, Pred, Succ, Pointer Arithmetics.
procedure DefineSize (var F: any_file; NewSize: Integer);
‘DefineSize’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
procedure Delete (var S: String; FirstChar, Count: Integer);
or
procedure Delete (var S: String; FirstChar: Integer);
‘Delete’ is a UCSD Pascal extension. The possibility to omit the third parameter is a GNU Pascal extension.
Object destructor.
‘destructor’ is an Object Pascal and a Borland Pascal extension.
Discard (Value);
‘Discard’ does nothing, but tells the compiler that the value given as an argument is not further used. It can be applied, e.g., to routine parameters which are to be ignored, so no warning about them will be given with ‘-Wunused’, or when calling a function and ignore its result.
An alternative for the latter case is to give the function the ‘ignorable’ attribute. This is useful is the function's result is expected to be ignored regularly. If, however, a result is generally meaningful and only to be ignored in a particular case, using ‘Discard’ is preferable.
‘Discard’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program DiscardDemo;
function Foo (a: Integer): Integer; begin WriteLn (a); Foo := a + 1 end;
{ Parameter `a' is there only to make the parameter list compatible to that of function `Foo'. } function Bar (a: Integer): Integer; begin Discard (a); { Tell the compiler that we intentionally do not use `a' in this function. } Bar := a + 1 end;
var c: Char; f: function (a: Integer): Integer;
begin Write ('With output? '); ReadLn (c); if LoCase (c) = 'y' then f := Foo else f := Bar; Discard (f (42)) { Call the function, but ignore its result } end.
Dispose (PointerVar: Pointer);
or
Dispose (PointerVar: Pointer; tag_field_values);
or
Dispose (ObjectPointerVar: Pointer; destructor_call);
‘Dispose’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by most known Pascal variants, but not by UCSD Pascal. Its use for objects is a Borland Pascal extension.
operator div (p, q: Integer) = r: Integer;
Integer division operator.
‘div’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program DivDemo; var a, b: Integer; begin a := 16; b := 7; WriteLn (a div b); { `2' } end.
for ... do statement
or
while ... do statement
or
with ... do statement
or
to begin do statement
or
to end do statement
The ‘do’ reserved word is used in combination with other Pascal keywords in many ways. For description and examples see the relevant reference sections: ‘for’, ‘while’, ‘with’, ‘to begin’, ‘to end’.
‘do’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
See references.
Keywords, for, while, with, to begin do, to end do.
type Double = Real;
‘Double’ is a synonym for the ‘Real’ data type and supported for compatibility with other compilers.
‘Double’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program DoubleDemo; var A: Double; { There is nothing special with `Double'. } B: Real; begin A := Pi; A := B end.
for variable := value1 downto value2 do statement
The ‘downto’ reserved word is used in combination with ‘for’ to build a ‘for’ loop.
‘downto’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program DowntoDemo; var i: Integer; begin for i := 10 downto 1 do WriteLn (i) end.
As part of the if
... then
... else
statement:
if Boolean_expression then statement1 else statement2
or, as part of the case
... else
statement:
case expression of selector: statement; ... selector: statement else { ``otherwise'' instead of ``else'' is allowed } statement; ... statement end
‘else’ is part of the ‘if ... then ... else’
statement which provides a possibility to execute statements
alternatively. In the case
statement, ‘else’ starts a
series of statements which is executed if no selector fit in
expression. In this situation, ‘else’ is a synonym for
otherwise
.
‘else’ in ‘if’ statements is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants. ‘else’ in ‘case’ statements is a Borland Pascal extension; ISO 10206 Extended Pascal has ‘otherwise’ instead.
program ElseDemo; var i: Integer; begin Write ('Enter a number: '); ReadLn (i); if i > 42 then WriteLn ('The number is greater than 42') else WriteLn ('The number is not greater than 42') end.
Keywords, if, case, otherwise.
function Empty (var F: any_file): Boolean;
‘Empty’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
begin statement; statement; ... statement end
The reserved word ‘end’ closes a ‘begin’ ... ‘end’; statement which joins several statements together into one compound statement.
@@ end of a ‘case’ statement @@ end of a record or object declaration @@ part of a ‘to end do’ module destructor
‘end’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program EndDemo; begin if True then WriteLn ('single statement'); if True then begin { clamp statement1 ... } WriteLn ('statement1'); WriteLn ('statement2') end { ... to statement2 } end.
Keywords, begin end Compound Statement, begin
function EOF ([var F: any_file]): Boolean;
or
function EOF: Boolean;
‘EOF’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
function EOLn ([var F: Text]): Boolean;
or
function EOLn: Boolean;
‘EOLn’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
‘EpsReal’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
function EQ (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
‘EQ’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
function EQPad (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
‘EQPad’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
procedure Erase (var F: any_file);
‘Erase’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
‘except’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
Exclude (set_variable, ordinal_value);
Remove (subtract) a single element from a set. ordinal_value must be compatible with the base type of set_variable. Exclude is equivalent to:
set_variable := set_variable - [ordinal_value];
If set_variable does not contain ordinal_value, nothing happens.
‘Exclude’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program ExcludeDemo; var Ch: Char; MyCharSet: set of Char; begin MyCharSet := ['P', 'N', 'L']; Exclude (MyCharSet , 'N') { L, P } end.
See other examples in set and Set Operations.
Keywords, Set Operations, set, in, Include.
procedure Exit;
or
procedure Exit (program);
or
procedure Exit (Identifier);
‘Exit’ without an argument leaves the currently executed procedure or function. Note: If ‘Exit’ is called within the main program, it will be terminated instantly.
‘Exit’ with an argument that is ‘program’ or the name of the current program, terminates the program, and is equivalent to ‘Halt’.
‘Exit’ with an argument that is the name of the current or an encompassing routine leaves that routine.
‘Exit’ is a UCSD Pascal extension. Borland Pascal only allows it without an argument.
program ExitDemo; procedure Foo (Bar: Integer); var Baz, Fac: Integer; begin if Bar < 1 then Exit; { Exit `Foo' } Fac := 1; for Baz := 1 to Bar do begin Fac := Fac * Baz; if Fac >= Bar then Exit; { Exit `Foo' } WriteLn (Bar,' is greater than ', Baz, '!, which is equal to ', Fac) end end; begin Foo (-1); Foo (789); Exit; { Terminates program } Foo (987654321) { This is not executed anymore } end.
function Exp (x: Real): Real;
or
function Exp (z: Complex): Complex;
The exponential function ‘Exp’ computes the value of e to the power of x, where the Euler number e = Exp (1) is the base of the natural logarithm.
The function ‘Exp’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal; its application to complex values is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal.
program ExpDemo; var z: Complex; begin z := Cmplx (1, - 2 * Pi); { z = 1 - 2 pi i } z := Exp (z); { yields e = Exp (1), since Exp ix = Cos x + i Sin x } WriteLn (Ln (Re (z)) : 0 : 5) { prints 1 = Ln (Exp (1)) } end.
export ‘interface_name’ = (identifier, identifier, ...);
or
export ‘interface_name’ = all;
Interface export for Extended Pascal modules.
‘all’ means to automatically export all identifiers declared in the interface module.
‘export’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension. It also exists in Borland Pascal, but with a different meaning, not (yet) supported by GPC.
‘export all’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ExportDemo; import AllInterface in 'somemodule.pas'; begin Bar (a); WriteLn (b) end.
module SomeModule interface; export SomeInterface = (a); AllInterface = all; { Same as `AllInterface = (a, b, Bar);' } var a, b: Integer; procedure Bar (i: Integer); end. module SomeModule implementation; procedure Bar (i: Integer); begin b := a end; to begin do a := 42; end.
Library export.
‘exports’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
procedure Extend (var F: any_file; [FileName: String;] [BlockSize: Cardinal]);
‘Extend’ opens a file for writing. If the file does not exist, it is created. If it does exist, the file pointer is positioned after the last element.
Like ‘Rewrite’, ‘Reset’ and ‘Append’ do, ‘Reset’ accepts an optional second parameter for the name of the file in the filesystem and a third parameter for the block size of the file. The third parameter is allowed only (and by default also required) for untyped files. For details, see Rewrite.
‘Extend’ is an ISO 10206 Extended extension. Borland Pascal has Append instead. The ‘BlockSize’ parameter is a Borland Pascal extension. The ‘FileName’ parameter is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ExtendDemo; var Sample: Text; begin Assign (Sample, 'sample.txt'); Rewrite (Sample); WriteLn (Sample, 'Hello, World!'); { `sample.txt' now has one line } Close (Sample); { ... } Extend (Sample); WriteLn (Sample, 'Hello again!'); { `sample.txt' now has two lines } Close (Sample) end.
Assign, Reset, Rewrite, Update, Append.
type Extended = LongReal;
‘Extended’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program ExtendedDemo; var a: Extended; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
declaration external;
or
declaration external name linker_name;
Declaration of external object.
‘external’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
‘Fail’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
type Boolean = (False, True); { built-in type }
‘False’ is one of the two Boolean values and is used to represent a condition which is never fullfilled. For example, the expression, ‘1 = 2’ always yields ‘False’. It is the opposite of ‘True’. ‘False’ has the ordinal value 0.
‘False’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program FalseDemo; var a: Boolean; begin a := 1 = 2; { yields False } WriteLn (Ord (False)); { 0 } WriteLn (a); { False } if False then WriteLn ('This is not executed.') end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), True, Boolean.
The ‘far’ directive can be appended to a procedure or function heading but is ignored by GPC. It is there for Borland compatibility, only. (Since the GNU compilers provide a flat memory model, the distinction between ‘near’ and ‘far’ pointers is void.)
‘far’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program FarDemo; var p: procedure; {$W no-near-far} { Don't warn about the uselessness of `far' } procedure Foo; far; { `far' has no effect in GPC } begin WriteLn ('Foo') end; begin p := Foo; { Would also work without `far' in GPC. } p end.
In type definitions:
file of Type
or
file
Non-text file type declaration.
Typed files (‘file of Type’) are defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants. Untyped files (‘file’) are a Borland Pascal extension.
function FilePos (var F: any_file): Integer;
‘FilePos’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
function FileSize (var F: any_file): Integer;
‘FileSize’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
procedure FillChar (var Dest; Count: SizeType; Val: Char);
or
procedure FillChar (var Dest; Count: SizeType; Val: Byte);
‘FillChar’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
Unit finalization.
It is equivalent to Extended Pascal's ‘to end do’.
‘finalization’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
Keywords, initialization, to end do.
procedure Finalize (var Aynthing);
‘Finalize’ does all necessary clean-ups for the parameter. This is normally done automatically when a variable goes out of scope, so you need to call ‘Finalize’ only in special situations, e.g. when you deallocate a dynamic variable with ‘FreeMem’ rather than ‘Dispose’.
Using a variable after applying ‘Finalize’ to it (and without applying ‘Initialize’ to it again) is invalid and produces undefined results.
‘Finalize’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
‘finally’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
procedure Flush (var F: any_file);
‘Flush’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
For ordinal index variables:
for ordinal_variable := initial_value to final_value do statement
or
for ordinal_variable := initial_value downto final_value do statement
For sets:
for set_element_type_variable in some_set do statement
For pointer index variables:
for pointer_variable := initial_address to final_address do statement
or
for pointer_variable := initial_address downto final_address do statement
@@ Set member iteration
The ‘for’ statement is a count loop. For further information see for Statement.
‘for’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants. Iteration of Pointers is a Borland Pascal extension. Set member iteration is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program ForDemo; var CharSet: set of Char; c: Char; n: Integer; Fac: array [0 .. 10] of Integer; PInt: ^Integer; begin CharSet := ['g', 'p', 'c']; for c in CharSet do WriteLn (c); { prints `c', `g', `p' in three lines } Fac[0] := 1; for n := 1 to 10 do { computes the factorial of n for n = 0 .. 10 } Fac[n] := Fac[n - 1] * n; {$X+} { prints n! for n = 0 .. 10 } for PInt := @Fac[0] to @Fac[10] do WriteLn (PInt - @Fac[0], '! = ', PInt^) end.
Keywords, Set Types, Pointer Arithmetics
‘FormatString’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
Declaration of a routine whose definition follows below.
‘forward’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
function Frac (x: Real): Real;
‘Frac’ returns the fractional part of a floating point number.
‘Frac’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program FracDemo; begin WriteLn (Frac (12.345) : 1 : 5); { 0.34500 } WriteLn (Int (12.345) : 1 : 5); { 12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (12.345) : 1); { 12 } WriteLn (Trunc (12.345) : 1); { 12 } WriteLn (Frac (-12.345) : 1 : 5); { -0.34500 } WriteLn (Int (-12.345) : 1 : 5); { -12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (-12.345) : 1); { -12 } WriteLn (Trunc (-12.345) : 1); { -12 } WriteLn (Frac (12.543) : 1 : 5); { 0.54300 } WriteLn (Int (12.543) : 1 : 5); { 12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (12.543) : 1); { 13 } WriteLn (Trunc (12.543) : 1); { 12 } WriteLn (Frac (-12.543) : 1 : 5); { -0.54300 } WriteLn (Int (-12.543) : 1 : 5); { -12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (-12.543) : 1); { -13 } WriteLn (Trunc (-12.543) : 1); { -12 } end.
Real Types, Real, Int, Round, Trunc.
‘FrameAddress’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
procedure FreeMem (var p: Pointer; Size: Cardinal);
or
procedure FreeMem (var p: Pointer);
Releases a chunk of memory previously allocated using ‘GetMem’. The parameter Size is optional. Its value is currently ignored.
Since Extended Pascal's schemata provide a cleaner way to implement dynamical arrays and such, we recommend using ‘GetMem’ and ‘FreeMem’ only for low-level applications or for interfacing with other languages.
‘FreeMem’ is a Borland Pascal extension. ‘FreeMem’ with only one parameter is a GNU Pascal extension.
See GetMem.
GetMem, Schema Types, Dispose, Mark, Release.
Function declaration.
‘function’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
function GE (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
‘GE’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
function GEPad (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
‘GEPad’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
procedure Get (var F: typed_file);
‘Get’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants except UCSD/Borland Pascal and its variants.
procedure GetMem (var p: Pointeger; Size: Cardinal);
Allocates dynamical storage on the heap and returns a pointer to it in ‘p’.
Since Extended Pascal's schemata provide a cleaner way to implement dynamical arrays and such, we recommend using ‘GetMem’ and ‘FreeMem’ only for low-level applications.
‘GetMem’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
The Borland-comatibility unit ‘Graph’ from the BPcompat package supports a ‘GetImage’ and a ‘PutImage’ procedure which need a variable of size ‘ImageSize’ as a buffer. Since these are “black box” routines, the buffer can't reasonably be a schema providing a dynamical array. Instead, we have to use ‘GetMem’ and ‘FreeMem’ for dynamical memory allocation.
program GetMemDemo; var Buffer: Pointer; Size: Cardinal; begin Size := Random (10000); { the size can be determined at run time } GetMem (Buffer, Size); { Do something with Buffer } FreeMem (Buffer) { or: FreeMem (Buffer, Size) } end.
procedure GetTimeStamp (var T: TimeStamp);
GetTimeStamp gets the current local date and time as a
TimeStamp
record containing the Year, Month, Day, Hour,
Minute, Second, and so on.
‘GetTimeStamp’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Set TimeStamp.
TimeStamp, Date, Time, Date And Time Routines.
goto label
The ‘goto’ statement transfers control to statement with the label ‘label’.
‘goto’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
function GT (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
‘GT’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
function GTPad (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
‘GTPad’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
Halt;
or
Halt (ExitCode: Integer);
‘Halt’ terminates the program with exitcode 0. If ‘ExitCode’, is specified, it is returned by ‘Halt’ on exit.
‘Halt’ is an Extended Pascal and a UCSD Pascal extension.
program HaltDemo; begin WriteLn ('This string will always be this program''s output.'); Halt; { Terminate right here and right now. } WriteLn ('And this string won''t ever!') end.
Break, Continue, Exit, Return, goto.
function High (ordinal_type_or_variable): ordinal_type;
or
function High (array_type_or_variable): array_index_type;
or
function High (string_variable): Integer;
For ordinal types or variables of that type, ‘High’ returns the highest value a variable of that type can assume.
For array types or variables of that type, ‘High’ returns the highest index a variable of that type can assume. Note: the result is of the same type as the array index is. If the array has more than one dimension, ‘High’ returns the highest index in the first dimension.
If the argument is a string variable, ‘High’ returns the discriminant of the string type (i.e. its capacity).
‘High’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program HighDemo; type Colors = (Red, Green, Blue); var Col: array [Colors] of (Love, Hope, Faithfulness); Foo: Colors; Bar: Integer; Baz: String (123); begin Foo := High (Col); { yields Blue } Bar := Ord (High (Col[Foo])); { yields Ord (Faithfulness), i.e., 2 } Bar := High (Integer); { highest possible value of `Integer' } Bar := High (Baz) { returns 123 } end.
if Boolean_expression then statement
or with an alternative statement:
if Boolean_expression then statement1 else statement2
The ‘if ... then’ statement executes statement1 depending on ‘Boolean expression’ being true. If ‘else’ is specified, it continues executing statement2 instead.
‘if’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program IfDemo; var Foo, Bar: Boolean; begin Foo := True; Bar := False; if ((1 = 1) or (2 = 3)) and (Foo = not Bar) then begin { This is executed if either Foo is true but not Bar or vice versa } WriteLn ('Either Foo or Bar is true.'); if Bar then WriteLn ('You will see this text if Bar is true.') end else { This whole `else' branch is not executed } if 1 = 1 then if True = False then WriteLn ('This text is never written on screen.') else { Note: This ``else'' belongs to ``if True = False'' } WriteLn ('This text is never written on screen as well.') else { Note: This ``else'' belongs to ``if 1 = 1'' } WriteLn ('Nor is this.') end.
Keywords, if Statement, else, then
function Im (z: Complex): Real;
‘Im’ extracts the imaginary part of the complex number ‘z’. The result is a real value.
‘Im’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program ImDemo; var z: Complex; begin z := Cmplx (1, 2); { 1 + i * 2 } WriteLn (Im (z) : 0 : 5) { 2.00000 } end.
Module or unit implementation part.
‘implementation’ is an Extended Pascal and a UCSD Pascal extension.
program @@fragment foo; import bar1; bar3 (baz1 => glork1) in 'baz.pas'; bar2 only (baz2, baz3 => glork2); bar4 qualified; [...]
In module:
module @@fragment Bar; import bar1; bar3 (baz1 => glork1) in 'baz.pas'; bar2 only (baz2, baz3 => glork2); bar4 qualified; [...]
The reserved word ‘import’ in the import part of a program makes the program import an interface.
The ‘in’ above tells GPC to look for the module in the specified file; otherwise the file name is derived from the name of the interface by adding first .p, then .pas – which only works if the name of the exported interface coincides with the file name.
The symbol ‘=>’ denotes import renaming: The entity which is exported under the name ‘baz1’ by the interface ‘bar3’ will be known under the new name ‘glork1’ in the program.
The ‘only’ qualifier means that only the listed identifiers will be imported from the interface. Renaming works together with ‘only’, too.
The ‘qualified’ qualifier means “qualified import”: The imported identifiers will be accessible only trough a “qualified name”. The entity which is exported under the name ‘baz2’ by the interface ‘bar4’ will be accessible as ‘bar4.baz2’.
There must be at most one import part at the begining of a block. Each module or function/procedure (and also main program) can have its own import part. A single import part can import arbitrarly many interfaces.
The interfaces needn't be exported by Extended Pascal modules but may be UCSD/Borland Pascal units as well. GPC also allows ‘import’ parts in units.
‘import’ and modules in general are an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
As part of the set
membership test, as a boolean expression:
ordinal_value in set_expression
or, as part of a ‘for’ loop iterating through a set:
for ordinal_variable in set_expression do ...
When ‘in’ is used as a membership test, it acts as a binary operator taking ordinal_value as its left parameter and set_expression as its right parameter and returning a boolean result which is true if set_expression contains the element ordinal_value.
When ‘in’ is used as part of a ‘for’ loop, it iterates
ordinal_variable over the elements contained in
set_expression, that is every ordinal_value that
would return true if tested as ordinal_value in
set_expression.
‘in’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
Set set
Keywords, Set Operations, set, Exclude, Include, for.
For ordinal types:
procedure Inc (var x: ordinal_type);
or
procedure Inc (var x: ordinal_type; Amount: and_integer_type);
For pointer types:
procedure Inc (var p: any_pointer_type);
or
procedure Inc (var p: any_pointer_type; Amount: and_integer_type);
For ordinal types, ‘inc’ increases the value of ‘x’ by one or by ‘amount’ if it is given.
If the argument ‘p’ is pointing to a specified type (typed pointer), ‘inc’ increases the address of ‘p’ by the size of the type ‘p’ is pointing to or by ‘amount’ times that size respectively. If ‘p’ is an untyped pointer (i.e. ‘p’ is of type Pointer), ‘p’ is increased by one.
‘Inc’ is a Borland Pascal extension. Yet application of ‘Inc’ to pointers is defined in Borland Pascal. The combination of the second argument with application to pointers is a GNU Pascal extension.
program IncDemo; var Foo: Integer; Bar: array [1 .. 5] of Integer; Baz: ^Integer; begin Foo := 4; Inc (Foo, 5); { yields 9 } {$X+} { Turn on extended systax } Baz := @Bar[1]; { Baz points to y[1] } Inc (Baz, 2); { Baz points to y[3] } end.
Dec, Pred, Succ, Pointer Arithmetics.
Include (set_variable, ordinal_value);
Add (join) a single element to a set. ordinal_value must be compatible with the base type of set_variable. Include is equivalent to:
set_variable := set_variable + [ordinal_value];
If set_variable already contains ordinal_value, nothing happens.
‘Include’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program IncludeDemo; var Ch: Char; MyCharSet: set of Char; begin MyCharSet := ['P', 'N', 'L']; Include (MyCharSet , 'A') { A, L, N, P } end.
See other examples in set and Set Operations.
Keywords, Set Operations, set, in, Exclude.
‘Index’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Reference to methods of ancestor object types.
‘inherited’ is an Object Pascal, Borland Pascal and traditional Macintosh Pascal extension.
Unit initialization.
It is equivalent to Extended Pascal's ‘to begin do’.
‘initialization’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
Keywords, finalization, to begin do.
procedure Initialize (var Aynthing);
‘Initialize’ does all necessary initializations for the parameter (e.g., setting of string and schema discriminants, and object VMT pointers, initialization of file variables). This is normally done automatically at the start of the lifetime of a variable, so you need to call ‘Initialize’ only in special situations, e.g. when you allocate a dynamic variable with ‘GetMem’ rather than ‘New’.
‘Initialize’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
var InOutRes: Integer;
‘InOutRes’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
var Input: Text;
‘Input’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
procedure Insert (Source: String; var Dest: String; Position: Integer);
‘Insert’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
function Int (x: Real): Real;
‘Int’ returns the integer part of a floating point number as a floating point number. Use ‘Trunc’ to get the integer part as an integer.
‘Int’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
program IntDemo; begin WriteLn (Frac (12.345) : 1 : 5); { 0.34500 } WriteLn (Int (12.345) : 1 : 5); { 12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (12.345) : 1); { 12 } WriteLn (Trunc (12.345) : 1); { 12 } WriteLn (Frac (-12.345) : 1 : 5); { -0.34500 } WriteLn (Int (-12.345) : 1 : 5); { -12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (-12.345) : 1); { -12 } WriteLn (Trunc (-12.345) : 1); { -12 } WriteLn (Frac (12.543) : 1 : 5); { 0.54300 } WriteLn (Int (12.543) : 1 : 5); { 12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (12.543) : 1); { 13 } WriteLn (Trunc (12.543) : 1); { 12 } WriteLn (Frac (-12.543) : 1 : 5); { -0.54300 } WriteLn (Int (-12.543) : 1 : 5); { -12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (-12.543) : 1); { -13 } WriteLn (Trunc (-12.543) : 1); { -12 } end.
Real Types, Real, Frac, Round, Trunc.
type Integer { built-in type }
‘Integer’ is the “natural” signed integer type in GNU Pascal. On some platforms it is 32 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘-2147483648 .. 2147483647’. Use it whenever you need a general-purpose signed integer type.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
In ISO Pascal, ‘Integer’ is the only built-in integer type. (However see Subrange Types.)
program IntegerDemo; var a: Integer; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
Module or unit interface part.
‘interface’ is an Extended Pascal and a UCSD Pascal extension.
Interrupt handler declaration (not yet implemented).
‘interrupt’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
function IOResult: Integer;
‘IOResult’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
Object type membership test.
‘is’ is an Object Pascal and a Borland Delphi extension.
Label declaration for a ‘goto’ statement.
‘label’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
function LastPosition (var F: typed_file): index_type;
‘LastPosition’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
function LE (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
‘LE’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Leave { simple statement }
With ‘Leave’ you can exit the body of the current loop instantly. It can only be used within a ‘while’, ‘repeat’ or a ‘for’ loop.
‘Leave’ is a Mac Pascal extension. Borland Pascal has ‘Break’ instead.
program LeaveDemo; var Foo: Integer; begin while True do begin repeat WriteLn ('Enter a number less than 100:'); ReadLn (Foo); if Foo < 100 then Leave; { Exits `repeat' loop } WriteLn (Foo, ' is not exactly less than 100! Try again ...') until False; if Foo > 50 then Leave; { Exits `while' loop } WriteLn ('The number entered was not greater than 50.') end end.
Loop Control Statements, Break, Continue, Cycle, Exit, Halt, Return, goto.
function Length (S: String): Integer;
‘Length’ is an Extended Pascal and a UCSD Pascal extension.
function LEPad (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
‘LEPad’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
Library declaration.
‘library’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
function Ln (x: Real): Real;
or
function Ln (z: Complex): Complex;
The natural logarith ‘Ln’ is the logarithm with base e, where e is the Euler number e = Exp (1) = 2.718281828...
The function ‘Ln’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal; its application to complex values is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal.
program LnDemo; var z: Complex; begin z := Cmplx (1, 1); z := Ln (z) { yields Ln (SqRt (2)) + i * Pi / 4 } { since Ln (i * x) = Ln Abs (x) + i * Arg (x) } end.
function LoCase (Ch: Char): Char;
‘LoCase’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
type LongBool = Boolean attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (LongInt));
The intrinsic ‘LongBool’ represents boolean values, but occupies the same memory space as a ‘LongInt’. It is used when you need to define a parameter or record that conforms to some external library or system specification.
‘LongBool’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program LongBoolDemo; var a: LongBool; begin LongInt (a) := 1; if a then WriteLn ('Ord (True) = 1') end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), Boolean, True, False, CBoolean, ByteBool, ShortBool, MedBool, WordBool, LongestBool.
type LongCard = Cardinal attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (LongInt));
‘LongCard’ is an unsigned integer type which is longer than ‘Cardinal’. On some platforms it is 64 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘0 .. 18446744073709551615’.
‘LongCard’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘long long unsigned int’ in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘LongCard’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program LongCardDemo; var a: LongCard; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type LongestBool = Boolean attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (LongestInt));
The intrinsic ‘LongestBool’ represents boolean values, but occupies the same memory space as a ‘LongestInt’. It is used when you need to define a parameter or record that conforms to some external library or system specification.
‘LongestBool’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program LongestBoolDemo; var a: LongestBool; begin LongestInt (a) := 1; if a then WriteLn ('Ord (True) = 1') end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), Boolean, True, False, CBoolean, ByteBool, ShortBool, MedBool, WordBool, LongBool.
type LongestCard = Cardinal attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (LongestInt));
‘LongestCard’ is GPC's longest-possible unsigned integer type. Currently, this is the same as LongCard. On some platforms it is 64 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘0 .. 18446744073709551615’.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘LongestCard’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program LongestCardDemo; var a: LongestCard; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type LongestInt = LongInt; { might get bigger than LongInt someday }
‘LongestInt’ is GPC's longest-possible signed integer type. Currently, this is the same as LongInt. On some platforms it is 64 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘-9223372036854775808 .. 9223372036854775807’.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘LongestInt’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program LongestIntDemo; var a: LongestInt; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type LongestReal = LongReal; { might get bigger than LongReal someday }
‘LongestReal’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program LongestRealDemo; var a: LongestReal; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
type LongestWord = LongestCard;
‘LongestWord’ is GPC's longest-possible unsigned integer type. Currently, this is the same as LongWord. On some platforms it is 64 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘0 .. 18446744073709551615’. (It is the same as LongestCard.)
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘LongestWord’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program LongestWordDemo; var a: LongestWord; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
LongestCard, Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type LongInt { built-in type }
‘LongInt’ is a signed integer type which is longer than ‘Integer’. On some platforms it is 64 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘-9223372036854775808 .. 9223372036854775807’.
‘LongInt’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘long long int’ in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘LongInt’ is a Borland Pascal extension. Borland Pascal defines ‘LongInt’ as a 32-bit signed integer type (Integer in GNU Pascal).
program LongIntDemo; var a: LongInt; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type LongReal { built-in type }
‘LongReal’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program LongRealDemo; var a: LongReal; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
type LongWord = LongCard;
‘LongWord’ is an unsigned integer type which is larger than ‘Word’. On some platforms it is 64 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘0 .. 18446744073709551615’. It is the same as LongCard.
‘LongWord’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘long long unsigned int’ in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘LongWord’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program LongWordDemo; var a: LongWord; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
LongCard, Integer Types, Subrange Types.
function Low (ordinal_type_or_variable): ordinal_type;
or
function Low (array_type_or_variable): array_element_type;
or
function Low (string_variable): Integer;
For ordinal types or variables of that type, ‘Low’ returns the lowest value a variable of that type can assume.
For array types or variables of that type, ‘Low’ returns the lowest index a variable of that type can assume. Note: the result is of the same type as the array index is. If the array has more than one dimension, ‘Low’ returns the lowest index in the first dimension.
If the argument is a string variable, ‘Low’ returns one.
‘Low’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program LowDemo; type Colors = (Red, Green, Blue); var Col: array [12 .. 20] of Colors; Foo: 12 .. 20; Bar: Integer; begin Foo := Low (Col); { returns 12 } Col[Foo] := Low (Col[Foo]); { returns Red } Bar := Low (Integer) { lowest possible value of `Integer' } end.
function LT (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
‘LT’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
function LTPad (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
‘LTPad’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
procedure Mark (var P: Pointer);
‘Mark’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
function Max (x1, x2: ordinal_or_real_type): same_type;
‘Max’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
The value of MaxChar
is the largest value of Char
.
‘MaxChar’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
The MaxInt
constant defines the maximum value of
Integer
. This constant is a built-in compiler value.
‘MaxInt’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
‘MaxReal’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
type MedBool = Boolean attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (MedInt));
The intrinsic ‘MedBool’ represents boolean values, but occupies the same memory space as a ‘MedInt’. It is used when you need to define a parameter or record that conforms to some external library or system specification.
‘MedBool’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program MedBoolDemo; var a: MedBool; begin MedInt (a) := 1; if a then WriteLn ('Ord (True) = 1') end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), Boolean, True, False, CBoolean, ByteBool, ShortBool, WordBool, LongBool, LongestBool.
type MedCard = Cardinal attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (MedInt));
‘MedCard’ is an unsigned integer type which is not smaller than ‘Cardinal’. On some platforms it actually is the same as ‘Cardinal’ and 32 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘0 .. 4294967295’.
‘MedCard’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘long unsigned int’ in GNU C. This compatibility is the reason why ‘MedCard’ exists.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘MedCard’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program MedCardDemo; var a: MedCard; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type MedInt { built-in type }
‘MedInt’ is a signed integer type which is not smaller than ‘Integer’. On some platforms it actually is the same as ‘Integer’ and 32 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘-2147483648 .. 2147483647’.
‘MedInt’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘long int’ in GNU C. This compatibility is the reason why ‘MedInt’ exists.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘MedInt’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program MedIntDemo; var a: MedInt; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type MedReal = Real;
‘MedReal’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program MedRealDemo; var a: MedReal; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
type MedWord = MedCard;
‘MedWord’ is an unsigned integer type which is not smaller than ‘Word’. On some platforms it actually is the same as ‘Word’ and 32 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘0 .. 4294967295’. It is the same as MedCard.
‘MedWord’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘long unsigned int’ in GNU C. This compatibility is the reason why ‘MedWord’ exists.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘MedWord’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program MedWordDemo; var a: MedWord; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
MedCard, Integer Types, Subrange Types.
function Min (x1, x2: ordinal_or_real_type): same_type;
‘Min’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
‘MinReal’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
procedure MkDir (Directory: String);
‘MkDir’ creates the given Directory, if its argument is a valid parameter to the related operating system's function. Otherwise a runtime error is caused.
‘MkDir’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program MkDirDemo; var Foo: String (127); begin WriteLn ('Enter directory name to create:'); ReadLn (Foo); {$I-} { Don't abort program on error } MkDir (Foo); if IOResult <> 0 then WriteLn ('Directory `', Foo, ''' could not be created') else WriteLn ('Okay') end.
operator mod (p, q: Integer) = r: Integer;
Integer remainder operator.
‘mod’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
EP style or PXSC style module.
‘module’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
procedure Move (const Source; var Dest; Count: Integer);
‘Move’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
procedure MoveLeft (const Source; var Dest; Count: Integer);
‘MoveLeft’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
procedure MoveRight (const Source; var Dest; count: Integer);
‘MoveRight’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
procedure/function_header; external name name;
procedure/function_header; attribute (name = name);
or
variable_declaration; external name name;
variable_declaration; attribute (name = name);
or
unit Name; attribute (name = name);
The ‘name’ directive declares the external name of a procedure, function or variable. It can be used after ‘external’ or within ‘attribute’.
This directive declares the external name of a procedure, function or variable. The external name of the routine is given explicitly as a case-sensitive constant string expression. This is useful when interfacing with libraries written in other languages.
With this extension it is possible to access all external functions, for example the X11 interface functions, and not only those written in lowercase.
‘name’ can also be applied to units and module interfaces. In this case it denotes the prefix prepended to the external name of the initializer of the unit: While it is normally called ‘init_Modulename’, it is called ‘init_name_Modulename’ when ‘name’ is given.
This is not of interest under normal circumstances since the initializers are called automatically. It can help avoiding conflicts when there are several units of the same name within one program. Again, this does not happen normally, but e.g., when a program uses a unit/module that has the same name as one of the units the RTS consists of: The RTS uses ‘GPC’ as the name for its units to avoid conflicts.
In the future, a ‘name’ directive applied to units, modules and programs (the latter is recognized syntactically already, but has no effect yet) will also affect the default external name of routines and variables which have no ‘name’ directive themselves. Again, this is mostly useful for libraries etc., and will not be necessary for normal units, modules and programs.
‘name’ is a Borland Pascal extension. ‘attribute’ and the application of ‘name’ to units, modules and programs are GNU Pascal extensions.
program NameDemo; { Make two variables aliases of each other by using `name'. This is not good style. If you must have aliases for any reason, `absolute' declarations may be the lesser evil ... } var Foo: Integer; attribute (name = 'Foo_Bar'); Bar: Integer; external name 'Foo_Bar'; { A function from the C library } function PutS (Str: CString): Integer; external name 'puts'; var Result: Integer; begin Result := PutS ('Hello World!'); WriteLn ('puts wrote ', Result, ' characters (including a newline).'); Foo := 42; WriteLn ('Foo = ', Foo); Bar := 17; WriteLn ('Setting Bar to 17.'); WriteLn ('Now, Foo = ', Foo, '!!!') end.
Keywords, attribute, external, Importing Libraries from Other Languages.
function NE (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
‘NE’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
The ‘near’ directive can be appended to a procedure or function heading but is ignored by GPC. It is there for Borland compatibility, only. (Since the GNU compilers provide a flat memory model, the distinction between ‘near’ and ‘far’ pointers is void.)
‘near’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program NearDemo; var p: procedure; {$W no-near-far} { Don't warn about the uselessness of `near' } procedure Foo; near; { `near' has no effect in GPC } begin WriteLn ('Foo') end; begin p := Foo; { Works, despite the `near'. } p end.
function NEPad (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
‘NEPad’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
procedure New (var P: any_Pointer);
or
procedure New (var P: Pointer_to_a_variant_record; tag_fields);
or
procedure New (var P: Pointer_to_a_schema; discriminants);
or
procedure New (var P: Pointer_to_an_object; constructor_call);
or
function New (any_Pointer_type): same_type;
or
function New (variant_record_Pointer_type; tag_fields): same_type;
or
function New (schema_Pointer_type; discriminants): same_type;
or
function New (object_Pointer_type; constructor_call): same_type;
‘New’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
function NewCString (const S: String): CString;
‘NewCString’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
‘nil’ is a predefined constant
‘nil’ is a predefined pointer constant that indicates an unassigned pointer. “nil” stands for “not in list”. Every pointer type can be associated with this constant.
‘nil’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program NilDemo; const NodeNum = 10; type PNode = ^TNode; TNode = record Key: Integer; Next: PNode end; var Root, Node: PNode; Foo: Integer; begin New (Root); Root^.Key := 1; { Set root key } Node := Root; for Foo := 2 to NodeNum do { Create linked list with NODE_NUM nodes } begin New (Node^.Next); Node := Node^.Next; Node^.Key := Foo { Set key } end; Node^.Next := nil; { Mark end of linked list } { Shorten list by removing its first element until list is empty } while Root <> nil do begin Node := Root; WriteLn ('Current key:', Root^.Key); Root := Root^.Next; Dispose (Node); Node := nil { Indicate old node is not assigned } end end.
operator not (b1, b2: Boolean) = Result: Boolean;
or
operator not (i1, i2: integer_type) = Result: integer_type;
Boolean or bitwise negation operator.
‘not’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
var Null: Void absolute 0;
‘Null’ is a predefined variable at address ‘nil’. ‘Null’ can be passed as a “void” argument to a procedure, function or operator expecting a “var” parameter. Note: Make sure they can handle this case, otherwise this is likely to cause an exception and the program will be terminated. Since ‘Null’ is an L-value, it can be taken as “nil-reference”.
‘Null’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
program NullDemo; type PString = ^String; var Com1: String (25) = 'This is an amazing number'; Com2: String (25) = 'This is a boring number'; procedure FooBar (Foo: Integer; var Comment: PString); begin if Odd (Foo) then WriteLn ('FooBar:', Foo, ' is odd') else WriteLn ('FooBar:', Foo, ' is even'); if @Comment <> nil then if not Odd (Foo) then Comment := @Com1 else Comment := @Com2 end; var S: String (25); P: PString value @S; begin { FooBar allows you to leave out variables for any information you might not need } FooBar (1, Null); { But FooBar is flexible, after all } FooBar (6, P); WriteLn ('FooBar said about 6: `', P^, '''') end.
The keyword ‘object’ is used to declare a new object type:
type foo = object a: Integer; constructor Init; procedure Bar (x: Integer); virtual; end;
(For a longer example, see OOP.)
GNU Pascal follows the Borland Pascal 7.0 object model.
ISO Pascal does not support Object-oriented programming. There is an ANSI draft for an “Object Pascal” language which is not yet supported by GPC, but planned. The Delphi language, also called “Object Pascal” by Borland, is currently not supported by GPC either.
function Odd (i: Integer): Boolean;
‘Odd’ checks the parity of its argument ‘i’. It returns ‘True’ if the argument is odd, ‘False’ if it is even.
‘Odd’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program OddDemo; var Foo: Integer; begin Write ('Please enter an odd number: '); ReadLn (Foo); if not Odd (Foo) then WriteLn ('Odd''s not even! Something''s odd out there ...') else WriteLn (Foo, ' is pretty odd.') end.
Part of an ‘array’, ‘set’ or typed ‘file’ type declaration, a ‘case’ statement, a variant ‘record’ type or a ‘type of’ type inquiry.
‘of’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
‘on’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
Import specification.
‘only’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Operator declaration.
‘operator’ is PASCAL_SC extension.
operator or (operand1, operand2: Boolean) = Result: Boolean;
or
operator or (operand1, operand2: integer_type) = Result: integer_type;
or
procedure or (var operand1: integer_type; operand2: integer_type);
In GNU Pascal, ‘or’ has three built-in meanings:
By default, ‘or’ acts as a short-circuit operator in GPC: If the first operand is ‘True’, the second operand is not evaluated because the result is already known to be ‘True’. You can change this to complete evaluation using the ‘--no-short-circuit’ command-line option or the ‘{$B+}’ compiler directive.
The logical ‘or’ operator is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal.
According to ISO, you cannot rely on ‘or’ being a short-circuit operator. On the other hand, GPC's default behaviour does not contradict the ISO standard. (See or_else.) However, since it seems to be a de-facto standard among ISO Pascal compilers to evaluate both operands of ‘or’, GPC switches to ‘--no-short-circuit’ mode if one of the language dialect options selecting ISO Pascal, for instance ‘--extended-pascal’, is given. Use ‘--short-circuit’ to override.
Use of ‘or’ as a bitwise operator for integers is a Borland Pascal extension.
Use of ‘or’ as a “procedure” is a GNU Pascal extension.
program OrDemo; var a, b, c: Integer; begin if (a = 0) or (b = 0) then { logical `or' } c := 1 else if (a or b) = 0 then { bitwise `or' } c := 2 else or (c, a) { same as `c := c or a' } end.
Note the difference between the logical ‘or’ and the bitwise ‘or’: When ‘a’ is 2 and ‘b’ is 4, then ‘a or b’ is 6. Beware: ‘a or b = 0’ happens to mean the same as ‘(a = 0) and (b = 0)’. (Note the ‘and’!)
Since bitwise ‘or’ has a higher priority than the ‘=’ operator, parentheses are needed in ‘if (a = 0) or (b = 0)’ because otherwise ‘0 or b’ would be calculated first, and the remainder would cause a parse error.
Keywords, and, xor, Operators.
function Ord (ordinal_value): Integer;
‘Ord’ returns the ordinal value of any ordinal variable or constant. For characters, this would be the ASCII code corresponding to the character. For enumerated types, this would be the ordinal value of the constant or variable (remember that ordinal value of enumerated constants start from zero).
‘Ord’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program OrdDemo; var Ch: Char; Day: (Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday); begin Ch := 'A'; WriteLn (Ord (Ch)); { 65 } Day := Thursday; WriteLn (Ord (Day)); { 3 } end.
Character Types, Ordinal Types, Chr, Char
{ `or else' is built in. A user-defined operator cannot consist of two words. } operator or else (operand1, operand2: Boolean) = Result: Boolean;
‘or else’ is an alias for the short-circuit logical operator ‘or_else’.
While ‘or_else’ is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal, ‘or else’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program OrElseDemo; var a: Integer; begin ReadLn (a); if (a = 0) or else (100 div a > 42) then { This is safe. } WriteLn ('100 div a > 42') end.
Keywords, or_else, or, and then.
operator or_else (operand1, operand2: Boolean) = Result: Boolean;
The ‘or_else’ short-circuit logical operator performs the same operation as the logical operator ‘or’. But while the ISO standard does not specify anything about the evaluation of the operands of ‘or’ – they may be evaluated in any order, or not at all – ‘or_else’ has a well-defined behaviour: It evaluates the first operand. If the result is ‘True’, ‘or_else’ returns ‘True’ without evaluating the second operand. If it is ‘False’, the second operand is evaluated and returned.
GPC by default treats ‘or’ and ‘or_else’ exactly the same. If you want, for some reason, to have both operands of ‘or’ evaluated completely, you must assign both to temporary variables and then use ‘or’ – or ‘or_else’, it does not matter.
‘or_else’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Some people think that the ISO standard requires both operands of ‘or’ to be evaluated. This is false. What the ISO standard does say is that you cannot rely on a certain order of evaluation of the operands of ‘or’; in particular things like the following program can crash according to ISO Pascal, although they cannot crash when compiled with GNU Pascal running in default mode.
program OrBug; var a: Integer; begin ReadLn (a); if (a = 0) or (100 div a > 42) then { This is *not* safe! } WriteLn ('You''re lucky. But the test could have crashed ...') end.
program Or_ElseDemo; var a: Integer; begin ReadLn (a); if (a = 0) or_else (100 div a > 42) then { This is safe. } WriteLn ('100 div a > 42') end.
Keywords, or else, or, and_then.
Default ‘case’ branch as part of the case
...
otherwise
statement:
case expression of selector: statement; ... selector: statement otherwise { ``else'' instead of ``otherwise'' is allowed } statement; ... statement end
Use in a structured value of ‘array’ type:
[index1: value1; index2: value2 otherwise value_otherwise]
‘otherwise’ starts a series of statements which is executed if no
selector matches expression. In this situation, ‘else’ is a
synonym for otherwise
.
‘otherwise’ also defines the default value in an Extended Pascal structured values of array type.
‘otherwise’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program OtherwiseDemo; var i: Integer; a: array [1 .. 10] of Integer value [1: 2; 4: 5 otherwise 3]; begin for i := 1 to 10 do case a[i] of 2: WriteLn ('a[', i, '] has value two.'); 3: WriteLn ('a[', i, '] has value three.'); otherwise WriteLn ('a[', i, '] has neither value two nor three.') end end.
Keywords, case Statement, case, else.
var Output: Text;
‘Output’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
‘overload’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
‘override’ directive is defined in OOE draft and supported by Delphi and Mac Pascal
procedure Pack (Source: unpacked_array; FirstElement: index_type; var Dest: packed_array);
‘Pack’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants except UCSD/Borland Pascal and its variants.
‘packed’ is a reserved word. According to ISO 7185 Pascal it can precede ‘array’ and ‘record’ type definitions to indicate that memory usage should be minimized for variables of this type, possibly at the expense of loss of speed.
As a GNU Pascal extension, ‘packed’ can also be applied to Subrange Types.
The reserved word ‘packed’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal.
According to ISO standard, only packed arrays of char with lower bound 1 qualify as strings of fixed length. GNU Pascal neither requires ‘packed’ nor the lower bound of 1 here.
program PackedDemo; type MonthInt = packed 1 .. 12; { needs one byte } FastMonthInt = 1 .. 12; { needs e.g. four bytes } FixString10 = packed array [1 .. 10] of Char; FoxyString10 = array [0 .. 9] of Char; Flags = packed array [1 .. 32] of Boolean; { needs four bytes } Int15 = Integer attribute (Size = 15); DateRec = packed record Day: 1 .. 31; { five bits } Month: MonthInt; { four bits } Year: Int15 { 15 bits = -16384 .. 16383 } end; Dates = array [1 .. 1000] of DateRec; var S: FixString10; T: FoxyString10; begin S := 'Hello!'; { blank padded } WriteLn (S); T := 'GNU Pascal'; { GPC extension: this also works. } WriteLn (T) end.
‘DateRec’ has 24 bits = 3 bytes in total; ‘Dates’ has 3000 bytes.
Keywords, Pack, Unpack, SizeOf, AlignOf, BitSizeOf.
procedure Page ([var F: Text]);
or
procedure Page;
‘Page’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal, but missing in Borland Pascal.
type PAnsiChar = ^AnsiChar;
‘PAnsiChar’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
program PAnsiCharDemo; var s: PAnsiChar; begin s := 'Hello, world!'; {$X+} WriteLn (s) end.
function ParamCount: Integer;
‘ParamCount’ returns the number of command-line arguments given to the program. ‘ParamCount’ returns 0 if no arguments have been given to the program; the name of the program as an implicit argument is not counted.
‘ParamCount’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program ParamCountDemo; var i: Integer; begin WriteLn ('You have invoked this program with ', ParamCount, ' arguments.'); WriteLn ('These are:'); for i := 1 to ParamCount do WriteLn (ParamStr (i)) end.
function ParamStr (ParmNumber: Integer): String;
Please note: If you are using the Dos (DJGPP) or MS-Windows (mingw32) version of GPC and are getting unexpected results from ‘ParamStr’, please see the section “Command-line Arguments Handling in DJGPP” of the DJGPP FAQ list.
‘ParamStr’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program ParamStrDemo; var i: Integer; begin WriteLn ('You have invoked this program with ', ParamCount, ' arguments.'); WriteLn ('These are:'); for i := 1 to ParamCount do WriteLn (ParamStr (i)) end.
type PChar = ^Char;
or
type PChar = CString;
‘PChar’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program PCharDemo; var s: PChar; begin s := 'Hello, world!'; {$X+} WriteLn (s) end.
‘Pi’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
type InternalSignedSizeType = Integer attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (SizeType)); PObjectType = ^const record Size: SizeType; NegatedSize: InternalSignedSizeType; Parent: PObjectType; Name: ^const String end;
(Note: ‘^record’ is not valid syntax. It is just used here in the explanation because the record type has no name by itself. Because of the added method pointers (see below), there is no useful usage of the record type.)
‘PObjectType’ is the type returned by ‘TypeOf’ and required by ‘SetType’. In fact, the record pointed to (the VMT, “virtual method table”) also contains pointers to the virtual methods. However, these are not declared in ‘PObjectType’ because they vary from object type to object type. The fields declared here are those that are shared by every object type and can be accessed via ‘TypeOf’.
‘Size’ contains the size of the object type, ‘NegatedSize’ contains the size negated (for runtime checks). ‘Parent’ contains a pointer to the parent type's VMT (or nil if the type has no parent). ‘Name’ points to a string containing the type's name.
‘PObjectType’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
type Pointer { built-in type }
‘Pointer’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program PointerDemo; var a: Integer; b: Boolean; p: Pointer; begin p := nil; p := @a; p := @b end.
function Polar (rho, phi: Real): Complex;
‘Polar’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
function Pos (SearchPattern, Source: String): Integer;
‘Pos’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
function Position (var F: typed_file): index_type;
‘Position’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
operator pow (base: Real; exponent: Integer) = power: Real;
or
operator pow (base: Complex; exponent: Integer) = power: Complex;
Exponentiation operator with integer exponent.
‘pow’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
function Pred (i: ordinal_type): ordinal_type;
or
function Pred (i: ordinal_type; j: and_integer_type): ordinal_type;
or, with extended syntax (‘--extended-syntax’ or ‘{$X+}’),
function Pred (p: Pointer_type): Pointer_type;
or
function Pred (p: Pointer_type; j: and_integer_type): Pointer_type;
Returns the predecessor of the ordinal_type value ‘i’, or, if the second argument ‘j’ is given, its ‘j’th predecessor. For integer values ‘i’, this is ‘i - 1’ (or ‘i - j’). (No, ‘Pred’ does not work faster than plain subtraction. Both are optimized the same way, often to a single machine instruction.)
If extended syntax is on, the argument may also be a pointer value. In this case, the address is decremented by the size of the variable pointed to, or, if ‘j’ is given, by ‘j’ times the size of the variable pointed to. If ‘p’ points to an element of an array, the returned pointer will point to the (‘j’th) previous element of the array.
The ‘Pred’ function is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal. The optional second parameter is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal. Application of ‘Pred’ to pointers is defined in Borland Pascal. The combination of the second argument with application to pointers is a GNU Pascal extension.
program PredDemo; type Metasyntactical = (foo, bar, baz); var m: Metasyntactical; c: Char; a: array [1 .. 7] of Integer; p: ^Integer; begin m := Pred (bar); { foo } c := Pred ('Z', 2); { 'X' } a[1] := 42; a[4] := Pred (a[1]); { 41 } a[5] := Pred (a[4], 3); { 38 } {$X+} p := @a[5]; p := Pred (p); { now p points to a[4] } p := Pred (p, 3); { now p points to a[1] } end.
Succ, Dec, Pointer Arithmetics.
GPC currently accepts but ignores the ‘private’ directive in object type declarations.
‘private’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
Keywords, protected, public, published.
Procedure declaration.
‘procedure’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
Start of a Pascal program.
‘program’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
Object properties.
‘property’ is an Object Pascal and a Borland Delphi extension.
The Extended Pascal meaning of ‘protected’ is supported by GPC.
GPC currently accepts but ignores the ‘protected’ directive in object type declarations.
Extended Pascal and Borland Pascal, but with different meanings.
Keywords, const, import, private, public, published.
type PtrCard = Cardinal attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (Pointer));
An unsigned integer type of the same size as a pointer.
‘PtrCard’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program PtrCardDemo; var a: PtrCard; p: Pointer; begin GetMem (p, 10); a := PtrCard (p); Inc (a); p := Pointer (a) end.
type PtrDiffType { built-in type }
‘PtrDiffType’ is a (signed) integer type to represent the difference between two positions in memory. It is not needed except for rather low-level purposes.
‘PtrDiffType’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program PtrDiffTypeDemo; var a: array [1 .. 10] of Integer; d: PtrDiffType; p, q: ^Integer; begin p := @a[1]; q := @a[4]; {$X+} d := q - p end.
type PtrInt = Integer attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (Pointer));
A signed integer type of the same size as a pointer.
‘PtrInt’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program PtrIntDemo; var a: PtrInt; p: Pointer; begin GetMem (p, 10); a := PtrInt (p); Inc (a); p := Pointer (a) end.
type PtrWord = PtrCard;
An unsigned integer type of the same size as a pointer.
‘PtrWord’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program PtrWordDemo; var a: PtrWord; p: Pointer; begin GetMem (p, 10); a := PtrWord (p); Inc (a); p := Pointer (a) end.
GPC currently accepts but ignores the ‘public’ directive in object type declarations.
‘public’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
Keywords, private, protected, published.
GPC currently accepts but ignores the ‘published’ directive in object type declarations.
‘published’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
Keywords, private, protected, public.
procedure Put (var F: typed_file);
‘Put’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants except UCSD/Borland Pascal and its variants.
Import specification.
‘qualified’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
‘overload’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
‘Random’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
‘Randomize’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
function Re (z: Complex): Real;
‘Re’ extracts the real part of the complex number ‘z’.
‘Re’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program ReDemo; var z: Complex; begin z := Cmplx (1, 2); WriteLn (Re (z) : 0 : 5) end.
procedure Read (var F: typed_file; variable);
or
procedure Read (var F: Text; variables);
or
procedure Read (variables);
‘Read’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
procedure ReadLn (var F: Text; variables);
or
procedure ReadLn (variables);
‘ReadLn’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
procedure ReadStr (const S: String; variables);
‘ReadStr’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
type Real { built-in type }
‘Real’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program RealDemo; var a: Real; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Real Types, Int, Frac, Round, Trunc.
In type definitions:
record_type_identifier = record field_identifier: type_definition ... field_identifier: type_definition end;
or, with a variant part,
record_type_identifier = record field_identifier: type_definition ... field_identifier: type_definition case bar: variant_type of selector: (field_declarations); selector: (field_declarations); ... end;
or, without a variant selector field,
record_type_identifier = record field_identifier: type_definition ... field_identifier: type_definition case variant_type of selector: (field_declarations); selector: (field_declarations); ... end;
The reserved word ‘record’ starts the definition of a new record type.
Records can be ‘packed’ to save memory usage at the expense of speed.
The variants of a variant record may – but are not required to – share one location in memory (inside the record).
Sometimes variant records are used to emulate type casting in ISO 7185 Pascal. This is in fact a violation of the standard and not portable. There is intentionally no possibility in ISO 7185 Pascal to emulate type casting.
The reserved word ‘record’ and record types are defined in ISO 7185 Pascal.
According to ISO Pascal, the variant type must be an identifier. GNU Pascal, like UCSD and Borland Pascal, also allows a subrange here.
Subranges in the variant fields, e.g. case Integer of 2 .. 5
,
are a GPC extension.
program RecordDemo; type FooPtr = ^Foo; Foo = record Bar: Integer; NextFoo: FooPtr; case Choice: 1 .. 3 of 1: (a: Integer); { These three choices may share } 2: (b: Real); { one location in memory. } 3: (c: Char; d: Boolean); end; Int5 = Integer attribute (Size = 5); SmallFoo = packed record b: 0 .. 3; a: Int5; r: Boolean end; { needs 1 byte } var f: Foo; begin f.b := 3.14; WriteLn (f.a) { yields some strange number which is part of the } { internal representation of the real number `f.b'. } end.
Keywords, packed, case Statement
procedure Release (P: Pointer);
‘Release’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
procedure Rename (var F: any_file; NewName: String);
‘Rename’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
repeat statement; ... statement; until boolean_expression;
The ‘repeat ... until’ statement declares a loop. For further description see repeat Statement.
‘repeat’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program RepeatDemo; var Number, Sum: Integer; begin WriteLn ('Black Jack for beginners.'); WriteLn ('You can choose your cards yourself. :-)'); Sum := 0; repeat Write ('Your card (number)? '); ReadLn (Number); Inc (Sum, Number); WriteLn ('You have ', Sum, '.') until Sum >= 21; if Sum = 21 then WriteLn ('You win!') else WriteLn ('You lose.') end.
Keywords, while Statement, for Statement.
procedure Reset (var F: any_file; [FileName: String;] [BlockSize: Cardinal]);
‘Reset’ opens an existing file for reading. The file pointer is positioned at the beginning of the file.
Like ‘Rewrite’, ‘Append’ and ‘Extend’ do, ‘Reset’ accepts an optional second parameter for the name of the file in the filesystem and a third parameter for the block size of the file. The third parameter is allowed only (and by default also required) for untyped files. For details, see Rewrite.
‘Reset’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal. The ‘BlockSize’ parameter is a Borland Pascal extension. The ‘FileName’ parameter is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ResetDemo; var Sample: Text; s: String (42); begin Rewrite (Sample); { Open an internal file for writing } WriteLn (Sample, 'Hello, World!'); Reset (Sample); { Open it again for reading } ReadLn (Sample, s); WriteLn (s); Close (Sample) end.
Assign, Rewrite, Append, Extend.
Library export specification.
‘resident’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
Restricted type specification.
‘restricted’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Please note: GPC deactivates ‘Result’ by default because it is incompatible with standard program semantics. Only in ‘--delphi’ mode or with the option ‘--implicit-result’, it is activated. Explicit result variables provide a safer alternative that works in default mode.
‘Result’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
‘Return’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
‘ReturnAddress’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
procedure Rewrite (var F: any_file; [FileName: String;] [BlockSize: Cardinal]);
‘Rewrite’ opens a file for writing. If the file does not exist, it is created. The file pointer is positioned at the beginning of the file.
Like ‘Reset’, ‘Append’ and ‘Extend’ do, ‘Rewrite’ accepts an optional second and third parameter.
The second parameter can specify the name of the file in the filesystem. If it is omitted, the following alternative ways can be used to specify the name. There are so many different ways in order to be compatible to the idiosyncrasies of as many other Pascal compilers as possible. (If you know about yet other ways, let us know ...)
The following ways are only available if the file is external, i.e. a global variable which is mentioned in the program header. Otherwise, the file will be internal, i.e. get no name in the file system (it may get a name temporarily, but will then be erased automatically again). This is useful to store some data and read them back within a program without the need for permanent storage.
The last optional parameter determines the block size of the file. It is valid only for untyped files. Often 1 is a reasonable value here. However, the existence of this parameter is a BP compatibility feature, and in BP it defaults to 128 because of historic misdesign. Therefore, GPC requires this parameter to be present. In ‘--borland-pascal’ mode, it makes it optional (like BP does), but warns about the strange default if omitted.
‘Rewrite’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal. The ‘BlockSize’ parameter is a Borland Pascal extension. The ‘FileName’ parameter is a GNU Pascal extension.
program RewriteDemo; var Sample: Text; begin Assign (Sample, 'sample.txt'); Rewrite (Sample); WriteLn (Sample, 'Hello, World!'); Close (Sample) end.
Assign, Reset, Append, Extend, Update.
procedure RmDir (Directory: String);
‘RmDir’ removes the given Directory if its argument is a valid parameter to the related operating system's function. Otherwise a runtime error is caused.
‘RmDir’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program RmDirDemo; var Foo: String (127); begin WriteLn ('Enter directory name to remove: '); ReadLn (Foo); {$I-} { Don't abort on I/O errors } RmDir (Foo); if IOResult <> 0 then WriteLn ('Directory ', Foo, ' could not be removed.') else WriteLn ('Okay.') end.
function Round (x: Real): Integer;
‘Round’ returns the nearest integer to ‘x’. The result is of type integer. In the case of equidistance, the result is machine-dependent (or depends on the behaviour of the processor).
‘Round’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program RoundDemo; var Foo: Real; begin Foo := 9.876543; WriteLn (Round (Foo)); { Prints 10 } Foo := 3.456789; WriteLn (Round (Foo)); { Prints 3 } WriteLn (Frac (12.345) : 1 : 5); { 0.34500 } WriteLn (Int (12.345) : 1 : 5); { 12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (12.345) : 1); { 12 } WriteLn (Trunc (12.345) : 1); { 12 } WriteLn (Frac (-12.345) : 1 : 5); { -0.34500 } WriteLn (Int (-12.345) : 1 : 5); { -12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (-12.345) : 1); { -12 } WriteLn (Trunc (-12.345) : 1); { -12 } WriteLn (Frac (12.543) : 1 : 5); { 0.54300 } WriteLn (Int (12.543) : 1 : 5); { 12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (12.543) : 1); { 13 } WriteLn (Trunc (12.543) : 1); { 12 } WriteLn (Frac (-12.543) : 1 : 5); { -0.54300 } WriteLn (Int (-12.543) : 1 : 5); { -12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (-12.543) : 1); { -13 } WriteLn (Trunc (-12.543) : 1); { -12 } end.
Real Types, Real, Int, Frac, Trunc.
procedure RunError (ErrorCode: Integer);
‘RunError’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
procedure Seek (var F: typed_file; NewPosition: index_type);
‘Seek’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
function SeekEOF ([var F: Text]): Boolean;
‘SeekEOF’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
function SeekEOLn ([var F: Text]): Boolean;
‘SeekEOLn’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
procedure SeekRead (var F: typed_file; NewPosition: index_type);
‘SeekRead’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
procedure SeekUpdate (var F: typed_file; NewPosition: index_type);
‘SeekUpdate’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
procedure SeekWrite (var F: typed_file; NewPosition: index_type);
‘SeekWrite’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Segment specification.
‘segment’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
‘Self’ is an Object Pascal and a Borland Pascal extension.
In type definitions:
set of ordinal_type { built-in type class }
A set contains zero or more elements from an ordinal type, e.g. Char, a subrange of Char, or a subrange of an enumerated type or integers. The elements of a sets do not have any ordering (that is a set containing 'B' and 'A' is the same as a set containing 'A' and 'B'), nor can an element be included more than once. Sets simply store the information about which elements are included in the set.
‘set’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program SetDemo; type TCharSet = set of Char; var Ch: Char; MyCharSet: TCharSet; begin MyCharSet := ['P','N','L']; if 'A' in MyCharSet then WriteLn ('Wrong: A in set MyCharSet') else WriteLn ('Right: A is not in set MyCharSet'); Include (MyCharSet, 'A'); { A, L, N, P } Exclude (MyCharSet, 'N'); { A, L, P } MyCharSet := MyCharSet + ['B','C']; { A, B, C, L, P } MyCharSet := MyCharSet - ['C','D']; { A, B, L, P } WriteLn ('set MyCharSet contains:'); for Ch in MyCharSet do WriteLn (Ch); end.
Set also Set Operations or examples of some of the many set operations.
Keywords, Set Operations, in, Exclude, Include.
procedure SetFileTime (var f: any_file; AccessTime, ModificationTime: UnixTimeType);
‘SetFileTime’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
procedure SetLength (var S: String; NewLength: Integer);
‘SetLength’ explicitly assigns a new length ‘NewLength’ to the string parameter ‘S’. The contents of the string elements (characters) are not changed; if the operation increases the length of the string, the characters appended at the end are undefined.
‘SetLength’ is a Borland Delphi 2.0 extension.
program SetLengthDemo; var S: String (26); begin S := 'Hello, world!'; SetLength (S, Length ('Hello')); WriteLn (S); { 'Hello' } SetLength (S, 26); WriteLn (S); { 'Hello, world!(%$xy"!#&~+(/]' } { undefined characters ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ } { SetLength (S, 42); GPC detects this overflow at compile time. } end.
procedure SetType (var SomeObject; VMT: PObjectType);
The procedure ‘SetType’ explicitly assigns a value to the implicit VMT field of an object. This is normally done implicitly when a constructor is called.
You can use this to write a polymorphic I/O routine which reads an object from a file. In this case, you cannot reasonably use ‘New’ to allocate the storage, but you ‘GetMem’ it and initialize the object manually using ‘SetType’ before calling the constructor explicitly.
The only values you should assign to an object via ‘SetType’ are actual VMT pointers that were obtained via ‘TypeOf’. In particular, declaring a record like the one shown in the description of ‘PObjectType’ and assigning a pointer to it to an object via ‘SetType’ will usually not work because the virtual method pointers are missing.
Since ‘SetType’ is a dangerous feature, it yields a warning unless ‘{$X+}’ is given.
‘SetType’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program SetTypeDemo; type BasePtr = ^BaseObj; BaseObj = object constructor Load; end; ChildObj = object (BaseObj) constructor Load; end; constructor BaseObj.Load; begin end; constructor ChildObj.Load; begin end; {$X+} { This is somewhat fragmentary code. } function GetObject (var InputFile: File) = Result: BasePtr; const VMTTable: array [1 .. 2] of PObjectType = (TypeOf (BaseObj), TypeOf (ChildObj)); var Size: Cardinal; TypeID: Integer; VMT: PObjectType; begin { Read the size of the object from some file and store it in `Size'. } BlockRead (InputFile, Size, SizeOf (Size)); { Allocate memory for the object. } GetMem (Result, Size); { Read some ID from some file. } BlockRead (InputFile, TypeID, SizeOf (TypeID)); { Look up the `VMT' from some table. } { Explicit range checking wouldn't be a bad idea here ... } { Without it, a wrong value just leads to a runtime error. } VMT := VMTTable[TypeID]; SetType (Result^, VMT); { Now the object is ready, and the constructor can be called. } { Look up the correct constructor from some table and call it. } end; begin end.
PObjectType, TypeOf, OOP.
operator shl (operand1, operand2: integer_type) = Result: integer_type;
or
procedure shl (var operand1: integer_type; operand2: integer_type);
In GNU Pascal, ‘shl’ has two built-in meanings:
‘shl’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
Use of ‘shl’ as a “procedure” is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ShlDemo; var a: Integer; begin a := 1 shl 7; { yields 128 = 2 pow 7 } shl (a, 4) { same as `a := a shl 4' } end.
type ShortBool = Boolean attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (ShortInt));
The intrinsic ‘ShortBool’ represents boolean values, but occupies the same memory space as a ‘ShortInt’. It is used when you need to define a parameter or record that conforms to some external library or system specification.
‘ShortBool’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ShortBoolDemo; var a: ShortBool; begin ShortInt (a) := 1; if a then WriteLn ('Ord (True) = 1') end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), Boolean, True, False, CBoolean, ByteBool, MedBool, WordBool, LongBool, LongestBool.
type ShortCard = Cardinal attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (ShortInt));
‘ShortCard’ is an unsigned integer type which is not larger than ‘Cardinal’. On some platforms it is 16 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘0 .. 65535’.
‘ShortCard’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘short unsigned int’ in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘ShortCard’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ShortCardDemo; var a: ShortCard; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type ShortInt { built-in type }
‘ShortInt’ is a signed integer type which is not larger than ‘Integer’. On some platforms it is 16 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘-32768 .. 32767’.
‘ShortInt’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘short int’ in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘ShortInt’ is a Borland Pascal extension. In Borland Pascal, ‘ShortInt’ is an 8-bit signed integer type (‘ByteInt’ in GNU Pascal).
program ShortIntDemo; var a: ShortInt; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type ShortReal { built-in type }
‘ShortReal’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ShortRealDemo; var a: ShortReal; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
type ShortWord = ShortCard;
‘ShortWord’ is an unsigned integer type which is not larger than ‘Word’. On some platforms it is 16 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘0 .. 65535’. It is the same as ShortCard.
‘ShortWord’ in GNU Pascal is compatible to ‘short unsigned int’ in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘ShortWord’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
‘ShortWord’ in GNU Pascal essentially corresponds to ‘Word’ in Borland Pascal and Delphi where it is a 16-bit unsigned integer type.
program ShortWordDemo; var a: ShortWord; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
ShortCard, Integer Types, Subrange Types.
operator shr (operand1, operand2: integer_type) = Result: integer_type;
or
procedure shr (var operand1: integer_type; operand2: integer_type);
In GNU Pascal, ‘shr’ has two built-in meanings:
‘shr’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
Unlike the Borland compilers, GNU Pascal cares about the signedness of the first operand: If a signed integer with a negative value is shifted right, “one” bits are filled in from the left.
Use of ‘shr’ as a “procedure” is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ShrDemo; var a: Integer; begin a := 1024 shr 4; { yields 64 } a := -127 shr 4; { yields -8 } shr (a, 2) { same as `a := a shr 2' } end.
function Sin (x: Real): Real;
or
function Sin (z: Complex): Complex;
‘Sin’ returns the sine of the argument. The result is in the range ‘-1 <= Sin (x) <= 1’ for real arguments.
The function ‘Sin’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal; its application to complex values is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal.
program SinDemo; begin { yields 0.5 since Sin (Pi / 6) = 0.5 } WriteLn (Sin (Pi / 6) : 0 : 5) end.
type Single = ShortReal;
‘Single’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
function SizeOf (var x): SizeType;
Returns the size of a type or variable in bytes.
‘SizeOf’ can be applied to expressions and type names. If the argument is a polymorphic object, the size of its actual type is returned.
‘SizeOf’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
program SizeOfDemo; var a: Integer; b: array [1 .. 8] of Char; begin WriteLn (SizeOf (a)); { Size of an `Integer'; often 4 bytes. } WriteLn (SizeOf (Integer)); { The same. } WriteLn (SizeOf (b)) { Size of eight `Char's; usually 8 bytes. } end.
type SizeType { built-in type }
‘SizeType’ is an integer type (usually unsigned) to represent the size of objects in memory.
‘SizeType’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program SizeTypeDemo; var a: array [1 .. 10] of Integer; Size: SizeType; begin Size := SizeOf (a); WriteLn (Size) end.
type SmallInt = ShortInt;
‘SmallInt’ is a signed integer type which is not larger than ‘Integer’. On some platforms it is 16 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘-32768 .. 32767’. It is the same as ‘ShortInt’ (see ShortInt).
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘SmallInt’ is a Borland Delphi 2.0 extension.
program SmallIntDemo; var a: SmallInt; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
ShortInt, Integer Types, Subrange Types.
function Sqr (i: integer_type): integer_type;
or
function Sqr (x: real_type): real_type;
or
function Sqr (z: complex_type): complex_type;
Returns the square of the argument:
function Sqr (x: some_type): some_type; begin Sqr := x * x { or: x pow 2 } end;
The function ‘Sqr’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal; its application to complex values is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal.
program SqrDemo; var i: Complex; begin i := Cmplx (0, 1); WriteLn (Re (Sqr (i)) : 0 : 3) { yields -1.000 } end.
function SqRt (x: real_type): real_type;
or
function SqRt (z: complex_type): complex_type;
Returns the positive square root of the argument.
For real arguments, it is an error if the argument is negative.
For complex arguments, ‘SqRt’ returns the principal value of the root of the argument, i.e. the root with positive real part, or, if the real part is zero, that one with positive imaginary part.
The function ‘SqRt’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal; its application to complex values is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal.
program SqRtDemo; var m1: Complex; begin m1 := Cmplx (-1, 0); { -1 } WriteLn (Re (SqRt (m1)) : 6 : 3, Im (SqRt (m1)) : 6 : 3); { yields 1.000 -1.000, i.e. the imaginary unit, i } end.
‘StandardError’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
‘StandardInput’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
‘StandardOutput’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
var StdErr: Text;
The ‘StdErr’ variable is connected to the standard error file handle. To report errors, you should prefer ‘WriteLn (StdErr, 'everything wrong')’ over ‘WriteLn ('everything wrong')’.
‘StdErr’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program StdErrDemo; var Denominator: Integer; begin ReadLn (Denominator); if Denominator = 0 then WriteLn (StdErr, ParamStr (0), ': division by zero') else WriteLn ('1 / ', Denominator, ' = ', 1 / Denominator) end.
procedure Str (x: integer_or_real; var Dest: String);
or
procedure Str (x: integer_or_real : field_width; var Dest: String);
or
procedure Str (x: Real : field_width : precision; var Dest: String);
or
procedure Str (repeated_constructs_as_described_above; var Dest: String);
‘Str’ is a UCSD Pascal extension, generalized by Borland Pascal. The possibility to handle more than one variable in one ‘Str’ statement is a GNU Pascal extension.
ISO 10206 Extended Pascal defines ‘WriteStr’ instead of ‘Str’.
‘String’ is an Extended Pascal and a UCSD Pascal extension.
function String2CString (const S: String): CString;
‘String2CString’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
function SubStr (S: String; FirstChar: Integer): String;
or
function SubStr (S: String; FirstChar, Count: Integer): String;
‘SubStr’ returns a sub-string of S starting with the character at position FirstChar. If Count is given, such many characters will be copied into the sub-string. If Count is omitted, the sub-string will range to the end of S.
If ‘Count’ is too large for the sub-string to fit in S or if ‘FirstChar’ exceeds the length of S, ‘SubStr’ triggers a runtime error. (For a function returning the empty string instead, see Copy.)
‘SubStr’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program SubStrDemo; var S: String (42); begin S := 'Hello'; WriteLn (SubStr (S, 2, 3)); { yields `ell' } WriteLn (SubStr (S, 3)); { yields `llo' } WriteLn (SubStr (S, 4, 7)); { yields a runtime error } WriteLn (SubStr (S, 42)); { yields a runtime error } end.
function Succ (i: ordinal_type): ordinal_type;
or
function Succ (i: ordinal_type; j: and_integer_type): ordinal_type;
or, with extended syntax (‘--extended-syntax’ or ‘{$X+}’),
function Succ (p: Pointer_type): Pointer_type;
or
function Succ (p: Pointer_type; j: and_integer_type): Pointer_type;
Returns the successor of the ordinal_type value ‘i’, or, if the second argument ‘j’ is given, its ‘j’th successor. For integer values ‘i’, this is ‘i + 1’ (or ‘i + j’). (No, ‘Succ’ does not work faster than plain addition. Both are optimized the same way, often to a single machine instruction.)
If extended syntax is on, the argument may also be a pointer value. In this case, the address is incremented by the size of the variable pointed to, or, if ‘j’ is given, by ‘j’ times the size of the variable pointed to. If ‘p’ points to an element of an array, the returned pointer will point to the (‘j’th) next element of the array.
The ‘Succ’ function is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal. The optional second parameter is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal. Application of ‘Succ’ to pointers is defined in Borland Pascal. The combination of the second argument with application to pointers is a GNU Pascal extension.
program SuccDemo; type Metasyntactical = (foo, bar, baz); var m: Metasyntactical; c: Char; a: array [1 .. 7] of Integer; p: ^Integer; begin m := Succ (foo); { bar } c := Succ ('A', 4); { 'E' } a[1] := 42; a[2] := Succ (a[1]); { 43 } a[5] := Succ (a[2], 7); { 50 } {$X+} p := @a[1]; p := Succ (p); { points to `a[2]' now } p := Succ (p, 3); { points to `a[5]' now } end.
Pred, Inc, Pointer Arithmetics.
type Text { built-in type }
‘Text’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program TextDemo; var t: Text; begin Rewrite (t, 'hello.txt'); WriteLn (t, 'Hello, world!') end.
Part of an ‘if’ statement or part of the ‘and then’ operator.
‘then’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program ThenDemo; var i: Integer; begin Write ('Enter a number: '); ReadLn (i); if i > 42 then WriteLn ('The number is greater than 42') end.
function Time (T: TimeStamp): packed array [1 .. Time_Length] of Char;
Date takes a TimeStamp
parameter and returns the time as a
string (in the form of a packed array of Char
).
Time_length is an implementation defined invisible constant.
‘Time’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Set TimeStamp.
TimeStamp, GetTimeStamp, Date, Date And Time Routines.
type TimeStamp = packed record DateValid, TimeValid : Boolean; Year : Integer; Month : 1 .. 12; Day : 1 .. 31; DayOfWeek : 0 .. 6; { 0 means Sunday } Hour : 0 .. 23; Minute : 0 .. 59; Second : 0 .. 61; { to allow for leap seconds } MicroSecond: 0 .. 999999; TimeZone : Integer; { in seconds east of UTC } DST : Boolean; TZName1, TZName2 : String (32); end;
The TimeStamp
record holds all the information about a
particular time. You can get the current time with
GetTimeStamp
and you can get the date or time in a printable
form using the Date
and Time
functions.
‘TimeStamp’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension. The fields ‘DateValid’, ‘TimeValid’, ‘Year’, ‘Month’, ‘Day’, ‘Hour’, ‘Minute’, ‘Second’ are required by Extended Pascal, the other ones are GNU Pascal extensions.
program TimeStampDemo; var t: TimeStamp; begin GetTimeStamp (t); WriteLn ('DateValid: ', t.DateValid); WriteLn ('TimeValid: ', t.TimeValid); WriteLn ('Year: ', t.Year); WriteLn ('Month: ', t.Month); WriteLn ('Day: ', t.Day); WriteLn ('DayOfWeek (0 .. 6, 0=Sunday): ', t.DayOfWeek); WriteLn ('Hour (0 .. 23): ', t.Hour); WriteLn ('Minute (0 .. 59): ', t.Minute); WriteLn ('Second (0 .. 61): ', t.Second); WriteLn ('MicroSecond (0 .. 999999): ', t.MicroSecond); WriteLn ('TimeZone (in seconds east of UTC): ', t.TimeZone); WriteLn ('DST: ', t.DST); WriteLn ('TZName1: ', t.TZName1); WriteLn ('TZName2: ', t.TZName2); WriteLn; WriteLn ('Date is: ', Date (t)); WriteLn ('Time is: ', Time (t)); end.
GetTimeStamp, Date, Time, Date And Time Routines.
Part of a ‘for’ loop counting upwards or a ‘to begin do’ or ‘to end do’ module constructor or destructor.
‘to’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
‘to begin do’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
‘to begin end’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
function Trim (S: String): String;
‘Trim’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
type Boolean = (False, True); { built-in type }
‘True’ is one of the two Boolean values and is used to
represent a condition which is always fullfilled. For example, the
expression 1 = 1
always yields the value ‘True’. It is
the opposite of ‘False’. ‘True’ has the ordinal value 1.
‘True’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program TrueDemo; var a: Boolean; begin a := 1 = 1; { yields True } WriteLn (Ord (True)); { 1 } WriteLn (a); { True } if True then WriteLn ('This is executed.') end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), False, Boolean.
function Trunc (x: Real): Integer;
‘Trunc’ returns the integer part of a floating point number as an integer. Use ‘Int’ to get the integer part as a floating point number.
‘Trunc’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program TruncDemo; begin WriteLn (Frac (12.345) : 1 : 5); { 0.34500 } WriteLn (Int (12.345) : 1 : 5); { 12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (12.345) : 1); { 12 } WriteLn (Trunc (12.345) : 1); { 12 } WriteLn (Frac (-12.345) : 1 : 5); { -0.34500 } WriteLn (Int (-12.345) : 1 : 5); { -12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (-12.345) : 1); { -12 } WriteLn (Trunc (-12.345) : 1); { -12 } WriteLn (Frac (12.543) : 1 : 5); { 0.54300 } WriteLn (Int (12.543) : 1 : 5); { 12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (12.543) : 1); { 13 } WriteLn (Trunc (12.543) : 1); { 12 } WriteLn (Frac (-12.543) : 1 : 5); { -0.54300 } WriteLn (Int (-12.543) : 1 : 5); { -12.00000 } WriteLn (Round (-12.543) : 1); { -13 } WriteLn (Trunc (-12.543) : 1); { -12 } end.
Real Types, Real, Int, Frac, Round.
procedure Truncate (var F: any_file);
‘Truncate’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
‘try’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
As a type declaration:
type type_indentifier = type_definition;
or with initialization:
type type_indentifier = type_definition value constant_expression;
The reserved word ‘type’ starts the declaration of a type identifier which is defined by type_definition. For further description see Type Declaration, Type Declaration, Type Definition, Data Types.
‘type’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants. Initializers are an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program TypeDemo; type { This side is the } { That side is the } { type declaration } { type definition } { array type } ArrayType = array [0 .. 9] of Integer; { record type } RecordType = record Bar: Integer end; { subrange type } SubrangeType = -123 .. 456; { enumeration type } EnumeratedType = (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun); { set type } CharSetType = set of Char; { object type } ObjectType = object constructor Init; procedure Method; destructor Done end; { pointer type to another type identifier } PArrayType = ^ArrayType; { an alias name for another type identifier } IntegerType = Integer; { an integer which is initialized by 123 } InitializedInt = Integer value 123; { a schema with discriminants x and y of type Integer } SchemaType (x, y: Integer) = array [x .. y] of Integer; { Dummy methods of the object type } constructor ObjectType.Init; begin end; procedure ObjectType.Method; begin end; destructor ObjectType.Done; begin end; begin end.
Keywords, Type Declaration, Type Definition, Data Types, Variable Declaration, array, record, object, set, Pointer, value.
function TypeOf (var x): PObjectType;
Returns a pointer to the VMT of an object type or variable. This pointer can be used to identify the type of an object.
‘TypeOf’ can be applied to expressions of object type and to object type names. In the former case, the actual type of polymorphic objects is returned.
‘TypeOf’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program TypeOfDemo; type FooPtr = ^Foo; BarPtr = ^Bar; Foo = object { Has a VMT, though it doesn't } x: Integer; { contain virtual methods. } constructor Init; end; Bar = object (Foo) y: Integer; end; constructor Foo.Init; begin end; var MyFoo: FooPtr; begin MyFoo := New (BarPtr, Init); if TypeOf (MyFoo^) = TypeOf (Bar) then { True } WriteLn ('OK') end.
BitSizeOf, AlignOf, PObjectType, SetType, SizeOf, OOP.
procedure Unbind (var F: any_file);
‘Unbind’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Bind, Binding, BindingType, bindable.
UCSD and BP style unit declaration.
‘unit’ is a UCSD Pascal extension.
procedure Unpack (Source: packed_array; var Dest: unpacked_array; FirstElement: index_type);
‘Unpack’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants except UCSD/Borland Pascal and its variants.
‘until’ is part of the ‘repeat ... until’ loop statement.
‘until’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
function UpCase (Ch: Char): Char;
‘UpCase’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
procedure Update (var F: any_file);
‘Update’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
In a program:
program @@fragment foo; uses bar1, bar2 in 'baz.pas', bar3; [...]
In a unit:
unit @@fragment Bar3; interface uses bar1, bar2 in 'baz.pas'; [...] implementation uses bar3, bar4 in 'qux.pas'; [...]
The reserved word ‘uses’ in the import part of a program or unit makes the program or unit import an interface.
The keyword ‘in’ tells GPC to look for the ‘unit’ in the specified file; otherwise the file name is derived from the name of the interface, coverted to lower-case, by adding first .p, then .pas.
In BP, there must be at most one ‘uses’ part in a program, and in a unit, there can be one import part in the interface part and one in the implementation part. GPC, as an extention, allows for several ‘uses’ parts, and also allows ‘uses’ parts in a module.
The imported interface needn't be a UCSD/Borland Pascal unit, it may be an interface exported by an Extended Pascal module as well.
ISO Pascal does not define ‘uses’ and units at all. UCSD and Borland Pascal do, but without the ‘in’ extension. Delphi supports ‘uses’ like described above.
Keywords, unit, module, import.
procedure Val (const Source: String; var x: integer_or_real; var ErrorPosition: Integer);
‘Val’ converts the integer or real number that is represented by the characters in the string ‘Source’ and places it into ‘x’.
The ‘Source’ string can have a base prefix (‘$’ for hexadecimal or ‘Base#’). The optional ‘ErrorCode’ will be set to the position of the first invalid character, or to a 0 if the entire string represents a valid number. In case an invalid character occurrs in ‘Source’, ‘x’ will be undefined.
‘Val’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program ValDemo; var x, ec: Integer; l: LongInt; r: Real; begin Val ('123', x, ec); { x := 123; ec := 0; } Val ('-123', x, ec); { x := -123; ec := 0; } Val ('123.456', r, ec); { r := 123.456; ec := 0; } Val ('$ffff', x, ec); { x := 65535; ec := 0; } Val ('$F000', x, ec); { x := 61440; ec := 0; } Val ('-$ffff', x, ec); { x := -65535; ec := 0; } Val ('12#100', x, ec); { x := 144; ec := 0; } Val ('-2#11111111', x, ec); { x := -255; ec := 0; } { here we have the invalid character 'X' for base 16 } Val ('$fffeX', x, ec); { x := <undefined>; ec := 6; } Val ('12#100invalid', x, ec); { x := <undefined>; ec := 7; } Val ('36#Jerusalem', l, ec); { l := 54758821170910; ec := 0; } end.
ReadLn, ReadStr, WriteLn, WriteStr, Str.
The reserved word ‘value’ is part of a type or var declaration. It can be replaced by ‘:=’ or ‘=’.
‘value’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension. ‘:=’ in this context is a VAX Pascal extension, and ‘=’ is a Borland Delphi extension.
Keywords, var, type, Variable Declaration, Type Declaration.
As part of a variable declaration part or in a statement block:
var variable_identifier: type_identifier;
or
var variable_identifier: type_definition;
and with initializing value:
var variable_identifier: type_identifier value constant_expression;
or
var variable_identifier: type_definition value constant_expression;
As part of a parameter list (passing by reference):
var var_parameter: type_identifier;
or without type declaration
var var_parameter;
or protected (i.e., the called routine can't modify the parameter):
protected var var_parameter: type_identifier;
or without type declaration
protected var var_parameter;
In a declaration part: The reserved word ‘var’ declares a variable_identifier whose type is of type_identifier or which is defined by type_definition. For further description see Variable Declaration, Type Declaration, Type Definition, Data Types.
In a parameter list: see Subroutine Parameter List Declaration.
‘var’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants. Untyped ‘var’ parameters in parameter lists are a UCSD Pascal extension. The ability to do ‘var’ declarations in a statement block is a GNU Pascal extension.
program VarDemo; type FooType = Integer; var Bar: FooType; ArrayFoo: array [0 .. 9] of Integer; { array var definition } FecordFoo: record { record var definition } Bar: Integer end; CharsetFoo: set of Char; { set var } SubrangeFoo: -123 .. 456; { subrange var } EnumeratedFoo: (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun); {enumerated var } PointerBar: ^FooType; { pointer var } procedure ReadFoo (var Foo: FooType); begin ReadLn (Foo) end; begin var Bar: Integer; { GNU Pascal extension } Bar := 42 end.
Keywords, type, array, record, set, Subrange Types, Pointer, protected.
Object class view.
‘view’ is an Object Pascal extension. Currently GPC only supports views without parents.
Virtual object method declaration.
‘virtual’ is an Object Pascal and a Borland Pascal extension.
type Void { built-in type }
‘Void’ is a GNU Pascal extension.
program VoidDemo; procedure p (var x: Void); begin end; var i: Integer; s: String (42); begin p (i); p (s) end.
while boolean_expression do statement
The ‘while’ statement declares a loop. For further description see while Statement.
‘while’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program WhileDemo; var Foo, Bar: Integer; begin WriteLn ('Enter an descending series of integer numbers.'); WriteLn ('Terminate by breaking this rule.'); WriteLn ('Enter start number: '); Bar := MaxInt; ReadLn (Foo); while Foo < Bar do begin Bar := Foo; ReadLn (Foo) end; WriteLn ('The last number of your series was: ', Bar) end.
Keywords, repeat Statement, for Statement.
Automatic ‘record’ or object field access.
‘with’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
...
{ Note bar is shadowed by foo.bar } ...
type Word = Cardinal;
‘Word’ is the “natural” unsigned integer type in GNU Pascal. On some platforms it is 32 bits wide and thus has a range of ‘0 .. 4294967295’. It is the same as Cardinal, introduced for compatibility with other Pascal compilers.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
‘Word’ is defined in Borland Pascal and Borland Delphi, where it is a 16-bit unsigned integer type.
program WordDemo; var a: Word; begin a := 42; WriteLn (a) end.
Cardinal, Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type WordBool = Boolean attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (Word));
The intrinsic ‘WordBool’ represents boolean values, but occupies the same memory space as a ‘Word’. It is used when you need to define a parameter or record that conforms to some external library or system specification.
‘WordBool’ is a Borland Pascal extension.
program WordBoolDemo; var a: WordBool; begin Word (a) := 1; if a then WriteLn ('Ord (True) = 1') end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), Boolean, True, False, CBoolean, ByteBool, ShortBool, MedBool, LongBool, LongestBool.
procedure Write (var F: typed_file; variable);
or
procedure Write (var F: Text; values_and_format_specifications);
or
procedure Write (values_and_format_specifications);
‘Write’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
procedure WriteLn (var F: Text; values_and_format_specifications);
or
procedure WriteLn (values_and_format_specifications);
‘WriteLn’ is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
procedure WriteStr (var Dest: String; values_and_format_specifications);
‘WriteStr’ is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
operator xor (operand1, operand2: Boolean) = Result: Boolean;
or
operator xor (operand1, operand2: integer_type) = Result: integer_type;
or
procedure xor (var operand1: integer_type; operand2: integer_type);
In GNU Pascal, ‘xor’ has three built-in meanings:
ISO Pascal does not define the ‘xor’ operator; Borland Pascal and Delphi do.
Use of ‘xor’ as a “procedure” is a GNU Pascal extension.
program XorDemo; var a, b, c: Integer; begin if (a = 0) xor (b = 0) then c := 1 { happens if either `a' or `b' is zero, } { but not if both are zero or both nonzero } else if (a xor b) = 0 then { bitwise xor } c := 2 { happens if a = b } else xor (c, a) { same as `c := c xor a' } end.
This chapter lists all keywords understood by GNU Pascal. The keywords are taken from the following standards and dialects:
The table below lists all known keywords with short descriptions. The links point to the longer descriptions in the reference.
By default (using GPC extensions) all keywords are enabled. Only those are marked ‘GPC’ in the table below that are valid only in the GPC extensions.
All keywords that are specific to some dialects (i.e., not marked “any”) can also be used as identifiers (with a few exceptions, see below). Then, however, they generally cannot be used as keywords anymore. So you can compile code from dialects that use them as keywords and code that uses them as identifiers, i.e., you do not have to modify your correct ISO 7185 programs in order to compile them with GPC without any dialect option. Some words can even be used as keywords and identifiers in parallel, including ‘forward’ (according to ISO 7185 Pascal), and ‘near’ and ‘far’ (according to Borland Pascal).
The exceptions are:
A dialect option turns off all keywords that do not belong to this dialect. Besides, any keyword can be enabled and disabled with the compiler options ‘{$enable-keyword}’ and ‘{$disable-keyword}’.
Here you can find information on where to find the most up-to-date information about GPC, how you can get support (professional or voluntary), how to use GPC's Test Suite, and how to report new bugs you might encounter.
If you have problems with GNU Pascal, please read the relevant sections of the GPC Manual. The most current version of the manual is available at http://www.gnu-pascal.de/gpc/index.html for online browsing. You can also download the complete manual in HTML format (tar.bz2). The manual is also available in PDF, PostScript (compressed with bzip2) and DVI (compressed with bzip2) formats for printing or online reading.
If the manual doesn't help you, here is what we recommend you to do:
FAQ Check the GPC FAQ
There is a mailing list devoted to GNU Pascal. You can write to the mailing list, e.g. if you have problems installing GPC or if you found a problem with GPC (please see Reporting Bugs). You can also use it to discuss suggestions for improving GPC and, most welcome, to offer your help or contribute code, documentation or other work. Mails to the list should be in English.
To subscribe to the mailing list, send the command
subscribe gpc your@email.address
in the body of a mail to majordomo@gnu.de (not to ‘gpc@gnu.de’!). The subject is ignored. (Please replace ‘your@email.address’ with your real email address.) For more info, send a line ‘help’ to majordomo@gnu.de.
After subscribing, you can send a message to the mailing list by sending email to the list address gpc@gnu.de as if it were a person.
To leave the mailing list, send the command
unsubscribe gpc your@email.address
to majordomo@gnu.de.
You can reach a human moderator at gpc-owner@gnu.de.
There is a separate mailing list for discussions about GPC documentation, gpc-doc@gnu.de. To subscribe, send the command
subscribe gpc-doc your@email.address
to majordomo@gnu.de.
There is also a (low-traffic) announce list, gpc-announce@gnu.de that you can subscribe to stay up-to-date. To subscribe to the list, write an email with
subscribe gpc-announce your@email.address
in the body to majordomo@gnu.de. If you like to announce a contribution, a service or an event related to GPC, you are invited to post to this list rather than ‘gpc@gnu.de’, but please don't use the announce list for questions or discussions. Please note that all mail sent to the announce list is forwarded to the regular list, so you won't have to subscribe to both lists if you don't want to miss anything. For the same reason, please don't cross-post to both lists.
There is also a German speaking mailing list, gpc-de@gnu.de. To subscribe send the command
subscribe gpc-de your@email.address
in the body of a mail to majordomo@gnu.de (note the hints above).
Perhaps your problem was already discussed on the list. There is a searchable archive of the mailing list on the WWW. It can be browsed or searched at
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/crystal/gpc/en/
The archive of the documentation list is at
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/crystal/gpc-doc/en/
The archive of the announce list is at
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/crystal/gpc-announce/en/
The archive of the German GPC list is at
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/crystal/gpc-de/de/
To get support, you can also ask the Usenet newsgroups for help. There are several Pascal related newsgroups, but none is dedicated just to GNU Pascal, so use the one which is most appropriate for your problem. For general Pascal questions, we recommend the following one:
news://comp.lang.pascal.misc | Pascal in general and ungrouped Pascals.
|
Pascal syntax related questions may be appropriate in:
news://comp.lang.pascal.ansi-iso | Pascal according to ANSI and ISO standards.
|
The next newsgroup is a haven for beginners, answering questions that would apply to almost any Pascal. However, if you have a GPC-specific question don't post there – use the GPC mailing list. And when in doubt use the GPC mailing list.
news://comp.lang.pascal.borland | Borland Pascal questions.
|
Don't forget to give back what you have obtained. None of us is getting money for answering your questions (unless you pay us by yourself). Please do your part by answering the questions of others instead.
GPC is free software and comes without any warranty.
If you want to get professional support, you can hire an individual or a company for providing such a service.
G-N-U GmbH is doing large parts of the development of GNU Pascal. This company offers special support for GPC and can be contacted at info@g-n-u.de.
More generally, to find a company or an individual who offers support and other consulting services for free software, look into the GNU Service Directory.
If the compiler crashes, you have discovered a bug. A reliable compiler never crashes. To help the maintainers fix this bug, it is important that you send us a problem report.
If you're on Unix, you can find out where the compiler crashed if you enable coredumps, then load the compiler (gpc1) plus the core file in the debugger (‘gdb /your_path_here/gpc1 core’), then type ‘backtrace’ to get a stacktrace. Include this stacktrace in your bug report.
If you encounter a bug with GPC, please check whether it is one of the known bugs (see Known Bugs). If not, please report it to the GNU Pascal mailing list (see Mailing List). That way, they always reach the maintainers. Please note the following points.
Another good article “How To Ask Questions The Smart Way” is available as http://www.catb.org/~esr/faqs/smart-questions.html
Please note that the authors of these articles have no relation to GPC and will not help you with your problems! The articles contain general hints about how to report problems well.
If the problem is with the compiler itself, not an installation problem or something like this, please provide a test program to reproduce the problem, and note the following hints. You can also contribute test programs for features that are working in GPC to ensure they will not break in future releases.
The preferred form for test programs is the form that the automated GPC Test Suite understands. Please, if at all possible, send your test programs in this form which should be easy to do, so we won't have to waste our time to bring them into this form, and can concentrate on fixing the problem.
Please note: While it is possible to combine several ‘OK’ tests in a single test program (if you make sure that it outputs ‘OK’ only if all tests pass), you cannot put several ‘WRONG’ tests into one test program. This is because the compiler will fail (and the test therefore be regarded as successful) already if one error occurs. So, for ‘WRONG’ tests, do only one check per test program. Also, try to keep such a test program as small and simple as possible, to avoid the risk that it will fail because of other problems (and therefore the test be mistakenly considered successful).
uses GPC; procedure ExpectError; begin if ExitCode = 0 then WriteLn ('failed') else begin WriteLn ('OK'); Halt (0) end end; begin AtExit (ExpectError); { Your code which should provoke a runtime error } end.
The following special features of the Test Suite may be helpful for constructing slightly unusual tests:
{ FLAG --extended-pascal -Werror }
... uses GPC; var RandomSeed: Integer; begin RandomSeed := Random (MaxInt); SeedRandom (RandomSeed); ... { do your normal tests } { when printing an error message: } if ... then begin WriteLn ('failed (', RandomSeed, ') ', ... { possibly additional information } ); Halt end end.
This is a little unnatural since a random number is used to (re-)seed the random number generator, but there's currently no way to retrieve the internal state of the random number generator (and in fact, it's not represented by a single number, but by a large array).
Given the value of ‘RandomSeed’ in an error message, it should then be possible to reproduce the problem by inserting this value in place of the ‘Random (MaxInt)’. Just be sure to print this value in every message of failure the program may produce.
Note: If you have installed a GPC binary distribution, you usually don't have the Test Suite installed (you can download the GPC source distribution to get it, however), so this section does not apply to you. Still, you can find in the section ‘Contributing Tests to the Test Suite’ how to report GPC bugs in the form of new test programs so we can fix them as fast as possible.
The files in the test directory and subdirectories are for testing GPC only and should not be of any other use.
Note: A few of the tests do not make sense on all systems. They are equipped with checks and will be skipped if they find the system not suitable. Skipped tests do not indicate a GPC bug, unless you have a reason to be sure that the particular test should make sense on your system.
This is the To-Do list for the GNU Pascal Compiler.
The GNU Pascal development team is constantly working on making GNU Pascal more reliable and more comfortable. However, there are some known bugs which will take some time to be fixed (any help welcome!), and we do not want to hide them from you. You might also be interested to know what features are planned to be implemented in the future. This list is meant to keep track of the known bugs and wanted features of GPC.
If you want to report a new bug or suggest a new feature, the best way to do it is in the mailing list. This way, other GPC users can provide additional ideas, perhaps work-arounds for bugs, and the GPC maintainers can sooner start to think about how to solve the problem. The GPC mailing list is gpc@gnu.de. To subscribe, send the command ‘subscribe gpc your@email.address’ in the body of a mail to majordomo@gnu.de (the subject is ignored). An archive of the mailing list can be found at http://www.gnu-pascal.de/crystal/gpc/en/.
The list changes regularly. The present version refers to the current GPC snapshot, 20060325.
This list is part of the GNU Pascal Manual, included in GPC distributions and snapshots. You can always browse the most current version of the list on GPC's WWW page. If you check the To-Do list regularly you can decide if and when to try a new snapshort.
In this section, you can find information about GPC bugs that are known to the developers.
If you encounter a bug with GPC, please check whether it is one of the known bugs. If not, report it to the GNU Pascal mailing list. (But always report if you solve the problem! :−)
Solved problems are moved to “Fixed Bugs” (see Fixed Bugs), and implemented features to the “News” chapter (see News).
A message ID (like ‘<42@foo.bar>’) refers to a message in the GPC mailing list or a newsgroup where the topic was discussed (often a bug report). A note of the form (xy20001231) refers to an internal message of the GPC developers. A file name like (foo42.pas) refers to the according program in the GPC test suite included in the GPC source distribution.
In the following sections, you can find informations about features which have been suggested and/or discussed for inclusion into GPC, usually in the GPC mailing list. The division into the sections and the names of the sections may change when this seems useful. The entries within each section are in no particular order.
Some of the entries may be a bit difficult to read. Double question marks (‘??’) within the entries mean that it's not yet clear how to do the thing. Triple question marks (‘???’) mean that it's not clear whether to do it at all. ;−)
This section lists the bugs fixed since the last (non alpha/beta) GPC release, together with the date (YYYYMMDD) on which they were fixed, so you can check if some problem has already been solved in a recent release or developer version. For new features, see News.
“The Source will be with you. Always.”
This chapter describes internals of GPC. It is meant for GPC developers and those who want to become developers, or just want to know more about how the compiler works. It does not contain information needed to just use GPC to compile programs.
This chapter tells you how to look up additional information about the GNU Pascal compiler from its source code.
Please note: If you intend to modify GPC's source, please check the top of each file you're going to modify. A number of files are generated automatically by various tools. The top of these files will tell you by which tool and from what file they were generated. Modifying a generated file is pointless, since it will be overwritten the next time the tool is run. Instead, modify the original source (which will usually be easier in fact, e.g. a bison input file vs. the generated C code). This also holds for various documentation and other files.
Proprietary compilers often come with a lot of technical information about the internals of the compiler. This is necessary because their vendors want to avoid to distribute the source of the compiler – which is always the most definitive source of this technical information.
With GNU compilers, on the other hand, you are free to get the source code, look how your compiler works internally, customize it for your own needs, and to re-distribute it in modified or unmodified form. You may even take money for this redistribution. (For details, see the GNU General Public License, Copying.)
The following subsections are your guide to the GNU Pascal source code. If you have further questions, be welcome to ask them at the GNU Pascal mailing list (see Support).
All file paths mentioned in this chapter are relative to the GNU Pascal source directory, a subdirectory gcc/p below the top-level GCC source directory.
The following sections roughly coincide with the order of the steps a Pascal source passes through during compilation (omitting the code generation which is the job of the GCC backend, and the assembler and linker steps at the end which are done by the programs ‘as’ and ‘ld’ of binutils and possibly other utilities like ‘collect2’). Also missing here is the compiler driver ‘gpc’ which behaves very similarly to ‘gcc’ and whose main job is to invoke the other parts in the right order, with the right arguments etc.
Note, this chapter docuemnts only selected parts of the compiler. Many things are missing because nobody has yet had the time to write something about them. In any case, for real understanding of the inner workings, you should always refer to the source code.
For more information, see the manual of GCC internals, Top.
‘gpc’ contains integrated preprocessor. It is internally identical to the former ‘gpcpp’ standalone preprocessor, so it does everything ‘gpcpp’ did. In turn ‘gpcpp’ is based on ‘cpp’ so it has most capabilities of ‘cpp’ (see the cpp manual) and some more. In particular:
The source files gpc-lex.c and pascal-lex.l contain the so-called lexical analyzer of the GNU Pascal compiler. The latter file is processed with ‘flex’ to produce pascal-lex.c which is not meant to be read by a human, but compiled.
This very first stage of the compiler is responsible for reading what you have written and dividing it into tokens, the “atoms” of a computer language. Here is, for example, where integer and real numbers such as ‘42’ and ‘3.14e-5’, string constants, symbols, keywords and identifiers etc. are recognized.
The main entry point is the function ‘yylex’ which calls the flex-generated function ‘lexscan’ which does the main work of token separation.
Pascal is a language that's easy to lex and parse. Then came Borland ...
A number of their ad-hoc syntax extensions cause lexing or parsing problems, and even ambiguities. This lexer tries to solve them as well as possible, sometimes with clever rules, other times with gross hacks and with help from the parser. (And, BTW, it handles regular Pascal as well. ;-)
Some of the problems are (see also see Parsing conflicts):
Borland-style character constants of the form ‘^M’ need special care. For example look at the following type declaration:
type X = Integer; Y = ^X; { pointer type } Z = ^X .. ^Y; { subrange type }
One way one could attempt to resolve this is to let the parser tell the lexer (via a global flag) whether a character constant or the symbol ‘^’ (to create pointer types or to dereference pointer expressions) is suitable in the current context. This was done in previous versions, but it had a number of disadvantages: First, any dependency of the lexer on the parser (see Lexical Tie-Ins) is problematic by itself since it must be taken care of manually in each relevant parser rule. Furthermore, the parser read-ahead must be taken into account, so the flag must usually be changed apparently one token too early. Using GLR (see GLR Parsers) makes this problem worse since it may read many tokens while the parser is split before it can perform any semantic action (which is where the flag could be modified). Secondly, as the example above shows, there are contexts in which both meanings are acceptable. So further look-ahead (within the lexer) was needed to resolve the problem.
Therefore, we now use another approach. When seeing ‘^X’, the lexer returns two tokens, a regular ‘^’ and a special token ‘LEX_CARET_LETTER’ with semantic value ‘X’. The parser accepts ‘LEX_CARET_LETTER’ wherever an identifier is accepted, and turns it into the identifier ‘X’ via the nonterminal ‘caret_letter’. Furthermore, it accepts the sequence ‘^’, ‘LEX_CARET_LETTER’ as a string constant (whose value is a one-character string). Since ‘LEX_CARET_LETTER’ is only produced by the lexer immediately after ‘^’, with no white-space in between, this works (whereas otherwise, pasting tokens in the parser is not reliable due to white-space, e.g. the token sequence ‘:’ and ‘=’ could stand for ‘:=’ (if ‘:=’ weren't a token by itself), but also for ‘: =’ with a space in between). With this trick, we can handle ‘^’ followed by a single letter or underscore. The fact that this doesn't cause any conflict in the grammar tell us that this method works.
However, BP even allows any other character after ‘^’ as a char constant. E.g., ‘^)’ could be a pointer dereference after an expression and followed by a closing parenthesis, or the character ‘i’ (sic!).
Some characters are unproblematic because they can never occur after a ‘^’ in its regular meaning, so the sequence can be lexed as a char constant directly. These are all characters that are not part of any Pascal tokens at all (which includes all control characters except white-space, all non-ASCII characters and the characters ‘!’, ‘&’, ‘%’, ‘?’, ‘\’, ‘`’, ‘|’, ‘~’ and ‘}’ – the last one occurs at the end of comments, but within a comment this issue doesn't occur, anyway) and those characters that can only start constants because a constant can never follow a ‘^’ in Pascal; these are ‘#’, ‘$’, ‘'’, ‘"’ and the digits.
For ‘^’ followed by whitespace, we return the token ‘LEX_CARET_WHITE’ which the parser accepts as either a string constant or equivalent to ‘^’ (because in the regular meaning, the white-space is meaningless).
If ‘^’ is followed by one of the remaining characters (apart from one, see below), namely ‘,’, ‘.’, ‘:’, ‘;’, ‘(’, ‘)’, ‘[’, ‘]’, ‘+’, ‘-’, ‘*’, ‘/’, ‘<’, ‘=’, ‘>’, ‘@’, ‘^’, the lexer just returns the tokens regularly, and the parser accepts these sequences as a char constant (besides the normal meaning of the tokens). (Again, since white-space after ‘^’ is already dealt with, this token pasting works here.)
But ‘^’ can also be followed by a multi-character alphanumeric sequence such as ‘^cto’ which might be read as ‘^ cto’ or ‘^c to’ (since BP also allows omitting white-space after constants), or by a multi-character token such as ‘^<=’ which could be ‘^ <=’ or ‘^< =’. Both could be solved with extra tokens, e.g. lexing ‘^<=’ as ‘^’, ‘LEX_CARET_LESS’, ‘=’ and accepting ‘^’, ‘LEX_CARET_LESS’ in the parser as a string constant and ‘LEX_CARET_LESS’, ‘=’ as equivalent to ‘<=’ (relying on the fact that the lexer doesn't produce ‘LEX_CARET_LESS’ if there's white-space after the ‘<’ because then the simple ‘^’, ‘<’ will work, so justifying the token-pasting once again). This has not been done yet (in the alphanumeric case, this might add a lot of special tokens because of keywords etc., and it's doubtful whether that's worth it).
Finally, we have ‘^{’ and ‘^(*’. This is so incredibly stupid (e.g., think of the construct ‘type c = Integer; foo = ^{ .. ^|; bar = {} c;’ which would become ambiguous then), that perhaps we should not attempt to handle this ...
(As a side-note, BP itself doesn't handle ‘^’ character constants in many situations, including many that GPC does handle with the mechanisms described above, probably the clearest sign for a design bug. But if we support them at all, we might just as well do it better than BP ... :−)
Compiler directives are mostly handled in options.c, mostly in common with command-line options, using the definitions in lang-options.h and the tables in gpc-options.h.
A special problem is that the parser sometimes has to read tokens before they're used to decide what to do next. LALR(1) parsers would read at most one such token, but with GLR, the parser can split and consume tokens while not doing any actions. The number of such tokens is unbounded, though the relevant context can be determined by analyzing the grammar.
Reading look-ahead tokens is generally harmless, but if there is a compiler directive before such a look-ahead token, it would be handled apparently too early. This looks strange from the programmer's point of view – even more so since the programmer cannot easily predict when the parser needs to read ahead and when not, and therefore cannot be sure where exactly to place the directive. This is particularly important for local directives that are meant to have a scope as small as possible.
To solve this problem, GPC keeps those options that can be changed by directives in a linked list of ‘struct options’. There are several pointers into the list:
‘lexer_options’ are the options current to the lexer. These are always the ones read most recently. Compiler directives are applied here when read. Each directive causes a new ‘struct options’ to be chained to the list.
‘compiler_options’ points to the options current for the compiler, i.e. seen before the last token handled in a parser rule. To facilitate this, we abuse Bison's location tracking feature (see Locations) and refer to the options seen before a token in the token's location (‘yylloc’). Before each grammar rule is handled, the compiler options are pointed to those of the last token involved in the rules handled so far, using Bison's ‘YYLLOC_DEFAULT’ feature. Actual locations, used for error messages etc., are handled the same way (according to the real purpose of Bison's location tracking), also distinct for the lexer and compiler.
Please Note: Tokens are not always handled in order. E.g., in ‘2 + 3 * 4’, first ‘3 * 4’ is evaluated, then ‘2 + 12’, i.e., the tokens ‘2’ and ‘+’ are handled after the following ones. To avoid jumping back in the options, we store a counter, rather than a pointer, in ‘yyloc’, so we can compare it to the current counter. This also allows us to free any ‘struct options’ that ‘compiler_options’ has advanced beyond because it can never go back.
Finally, the pointer ‘co’ points to the current options which is ‘lexer_options’ when we're in the lexer and ‘compiler_options’ otherwise. All routines that use or set options refer to ‘co’, so there is no problem when they may be called both from the lexer and from other parts of the compiler. (Previously, ‘lookup_name’ was such a routine, but now the lexer doesn't call it anymore.)
Please Note: Some of the options are flags declared in the backend. Since we can't keep them in ‘struct option’ directly, we have to copy them back and forth in ‘activate_options’. This is a little annoyance, but no real problem.
The file parse.y contains the “bison” source code of GNU Pascal's parser. This stage of the compilation analyzes and checks the syntax of your Pascal program, and it generates an intermediate, language-independent code which is then passed to the GNU back-end.
The bison language essentially is a machine-readable form of the Backus-Naur Form, the symbolic notation of grammars of computer languages. “Syntax diagrams” are a graphical variant of the Backus-Naur Form.
For details about the “bison” language, see the Bison manual (see Top). A short overview how to pick up some information you might need for programming follows.
Suppose you have forgotten how a variable is declared in Pascal. After some searching in parse.y you have found the following:
simple_decl_1: ... | p_var variable_declaration_list { [...] } ; variable_declaration_list: variable_declaration { } | variable_declaration_list variable_declaration ;
Translated into English, this means: “A declaration can (amoung other things like types and constants, omitted here) consist of the keyword (lexical token) ‘var’ followed by a `variable declaration list'. A `variable declaration list' in turn consists of one or more `variable declarations'.” (The latter explanation requires that you understand the recursive nature of the definition of ‘variable_declaration_list’.)
Now we can go on and search for ‘variable_declaration’.
variable_declaration: id_list_limited ':' type_denoter_with_attributes { [...] } absolute_or_value_specification optional_variable_directive_list ';' { [...] } ;
The ‘[...]’ are placeholders for some C statements, the semantic actions which (for the most part) aren't important for understanding GPC's grammar.
From this you can look up that a variable declaration in GNU Pascal consists of an identifier list, followed by a colon, “type denoter with attributes”, an “absolute or value specification” and an “optional variable directive list”, terminated by a semicolon. Some of these parts are easy to understand, the others you can look up from parse.y. Remember that the reserved word ‘var’ precedes all this.
Now you know how to get the exact grammar of the GNU Pascal language from the source.
The semantic actions, not shown above, are in some sense the most important part of the bison source, because they are responsible for the generation of the intermediate code of the GNU Pascal front-end, the so-called tree nodes (which are used to represent most things in the compiler). For instance, the C code in “type denoter” returns (assigns to ‘$$’) information about the type in a variable of type ‘tree’.
The “variable declaration” gets this and other information in the numbered arguments (‘$1’ etc.) and passes it to some C functions declared in the other source files. Generally, those functions do the real work, while the main job of the C statements in the parser is to call them with the right arguments.
This, the parser, is the place where it becomes Pascal.
Some problematic parts of Pascal syntax in various dialects (see also see Lexer problems):
Keywords can be potential problems since they are (generally) not available for use as identifiers. Only those keywords that are defined in ISO 7185 Pascal are unproblematic because no valid program should ever use them as identifiers.
To cope with this problem, GPC does several things:
This is solved by listing these keywords in the ‘new_identifier’ rule of the parser. This means, first the lexer recognizes them as keywords, then the parser “turns them back” into identifiers. The advantage, compared to explicit enabling and disabling of keywords, is that bison automatically finds the places in which to apply the ‘new_identifier’ rule, i.e. treat them as plain identifiers.
Of course, there is a catch. Since the keyword tokens are listed in ‘new_identifier’, they can conflict with occurrences of the actual keywords (bison will find such cases as S/R or R/R conflicts). Such conflicts have to be sorted out carefully and either removed or left to GLR handling. Fortunately, for many keywords, removing the conflicts turned out quite easy – in some cases no conflicts arose at all.
‘forward’ is a little special in ISO 7185 in that it is no keyword, so it may be used as an identifier and a directive at the same time. That's more than what our weak keywords allow.
This problem would be easy to solve if we just parsed it as a plain identifier (‘LEX_ID’) and then check that it was in fact ‘forward’.
However, the same applies to the BP directives ‘near’ and ‘far’. (At least so it seems – the BP documentation claims they're reserved words, but the compiler seems to think otherwise.)
Parsing all the three together as an identifier and then checking which one it was fails because ‘forward’ is a remote directive, i.e. a routine declared so has no body, while ‘near’ and ‘far’ are not. So it makes a syntactical difference for what follows.
So we lex the three like regular (non-weak) keywords, but throw their tokens together with ‘LEX_ID’ very early in the parser, in the ‘id’ rule which is used everywhere an existing identifier is expected. But in the context of these three directives, no identifier is allowed, so the three tokens can be used without conflicts between each other or with ‘id’.
If you want really to understand how the GNU Pascal language front-end works internally and perhaps want to improve the compiler, it is important that you understand GPC's internal data structures.
The data structure used by the language front-end to hold all information about your Pascal program are the so-called “tree nodes”. (Well, it needn't be Pascal source – tree nodes are language independent.) The tree nodes are kind of objects, connected to each other via pointers. Since the GNU compiler is written in C and was created at a time where nobody really thought about object-oriented programming languages yet, a lot of effort has been taken to create these “objects” in C.
Here is an extract from the “object hierarchy”. Omissions are marked with “...”; nodes in parentheses are “abstract”: They are never instantiated and aren't really defined. They only appear here to clarify the structure of the tree node hierarchy. The complete list is in ../tree.def; additional information can be found in ../tree.h.
(tree_node) | |--- ERROR_MARK { enables GPC to continue after an error } | |--- (identifier) | | | |--- IDENTIFIER_NODE | | | \--- OP_IDENTIFIER | |--- TREE_LIST { a list of nodes, also used as a | general-purpose "container object" } | |--- TREE_VEC | |--- BLOCK | |--- (type) { information about types } | | | |--- VOID_TYPE | | | |--- INTEGER_TYPE | ... | | | |--- RECORD_TYPE | | | |--- FUNCTION_TYPE | | | \--- LANG_TYPE { for language-specific extensions } | |--- INTEGER_CST { an integer constant } | |--- REAL_CST | |--- STRING_CST | |--- COMPLEX_CST | |--- (declaration) | | | |--- FUNCTION_DECL | ... | | | |--- TYPE_DECL | | | \--- VAR_DECL | |--- (reference) | | | |--- COMPONENT_REF | ... | | | \--- ARRAY_REF | |--- CONSTRUCTOR | \--- (expression) | |--- MODIFY_EXPR { assignment } | |--- PLUS_EXPR { addition } ... | |--- CALL_EXPR { procedure/function call } | |--- GOTO_EXPR | \--- LOOP_EXPR { for all loops }
Most of these tree nodes – struct variables in fact – contain pointers to other tree nodes. A ‘TREE_LIST’ for instance has a ‘TREE_VALUE’ and a ‘TREE_PURPOSE’ slot which can contain arbitrary data; a third pointer ‘TREE_CHAIN’ points to the next ‘TREE_LIST’ node and thus allows us to create linked lists of tree nodes.
One example: When GPC reads the list of identifiers in a variable declaration
var Foo, Bar, Baz: Integer;
the parser creates a chain of ‘TREE_LIST’s whose ‘TREE_VALUE’s hold ‘IDENTIFIER_NODE’s for the identifiers ‘Foo’, ‘Bar’, and ‘Baz’. The function ‘declare_variables()’ (declared in declarations.c) gets this tree list as a parameter, does some magic, and finally passes a chain of ‘VAR_DECL’ nodes to the back-end.
The ‘VAR_DECL’ nodes in turn have a pointer ‘TREE_TYPE’ which holds a ‘_TYPE’ node – an ‘INTEGER_TYPE’ node in the example above. Having this, GPC can do type-checking when a variable is referenced.
For another example, let's look at the following statement:
Baz := Foo + Bar;
Here the parser creates a ‘MODIFY_EXPR’ tree node. This node has two pointers, ‘TREE_OPERAND[0]’ which holds a representation of ‘Baz’, a ‘VAR_DECL’ node, and ‘TREE_OPERAND[1]’ which holds a representation of the sum ‘Foo + Bar’. The sum in turn is represented as a ‘PLUS_EXPR’ tree node whose ‘TREE_OPERAND[0]’ is the ‘VAR_DECL’ node ‘Foo’, and whose ‘TREE_OPERAND[1]’ is the ‘VAR_DECL’ node ‘Bar’. Passing this (the ‘MODIFY_EXPR’ node) to the back-end results in assembler code for the assignment.
If you want to have a closer look at these tree nodes, write a line ‘{$debug-tree FooBar}’ into your program with ‘FooBar’ being some identifier in your program. This tells GPC to output the contents of the ‘IDENTIFIER_NODE’ to the standard error file handle in human-readable form.
While hacking and debugging GPC, you will also wish to have a look at these tree nodes in other cases. Use the ‘debug_tree()’ function to do so. (In fact ‘{$debug-tree FooBar}’ does nothing else than to ‘debug_tree()’ the ‘IDENTIFIER_NODE’ of the ‘Foobar’ identifier node – note the capitalization of the first character in the internal representation.)
GPC supports a lot of funny things in parameter lists: value and reference, ‘protected’ and ‘const’ parameters, strings and other schemata with specified or unspecified discriminants, conformant and open arrays, objects, procedural parameters, untyped reference parameters, etc. All this requires sophisticated type-checking; the responsible function is ‘convert_arguments()’ in the source file typecheck.c. Every detail can be looked up from there.
Some short notes about the most interesting cases follow.
This section documents the mechanism how GPC transfers information from the exporting modules and units to the program, module or unit which imports (uses) the information.
A GPI file contains a precompiled GNU Pascal interface. “Precompiled” means in this context that the interface already has been parsed (i.e. the front-end has done its work), but that no assembler output has been produced yet.
The GPI file format is an implementation-dependent (but not too implementation-dependent ;−) file format for storing GNU Pascal interfaces to be exported – Extended Pascal and PXSC module interfaces as well as interface parts of UCSD/Borland Pascal units compiled with GNU Pascal.
To see what information is stored in or loaded from a GPI file, run GPC with an additional command-line option ‘--debug-gpi’. Then, GPC will write a human-readable version of what is being stored/loaded to the standard error file handle. (See also: Tree nodes.) Please note: This will usually produce huge amounts of output!
While parsing an interface, GPC stores the names of exported objects in tree lists – look for ‘handle_autoexport’ in the GPC source files. At the end of the interface, everything is stored in one or more GPI files. This is done in module.c. There you can find the source of ‘create_gpi_files()’ which documents the file format:
First, a header of 33 bytes containing the string ‘GNU Pascal unit/module interface’ plus a newline.
This is followed by an integer containing the “magic” value 12345678 (hexadecimal) to carry information about the endianness. Note that, though a single GPI file is always specific to a particular target architecture, the host architecture (i.e., the system on which GPC runs) can be different (cross-compilers). Currently, GPC is not able to convert endianness in GPI files “on the fly”, but at least it will detect and reject GPI files with the “wrong” endianness. When writing GPI files, always the host's endianness is used (this seems to be a good idea even when converting on the fly will be supported in the future, since most often, GPI files created by a cross-compiler will be read again by the same cross-compiler). “Integer” here and in the following paragraphs means a ‘gpi_int’ (which is currently defined as ‘HOST_WIDE_INT’).
The rest of the GPI file consists of chunks. Each chunk starts with a one-byte code that describes the type of the chunk. It is followed by an integer that specifies the size of the chunk (excluding this chunk header). The further contents depend on the type, as listed below.
For the numeric values of the chunk type codes, please refer to ‘GPI_CHUNKS’ in module.c. Chunk types denoted with ‘(*)’ must occur exactly once in a GPI file. Other types may occur any number of times (including zero times). The order of chunks is arbitrary. “String” here simply means a character sequence whose length is the chunk's length (so no terminator is needed).
The checksum is currently a simple function of the contents of the
‘GPI_CHUNK_NODES’ chunk's contents (see below). This might be
replaced in the future by a MD5 hash or something else more
elaborate.
The main problem when storing tree nodes is that they form a complicated structure in memory with a lot of circular references (actually, not a tree, but a directed graph in the usual terminology, so the name “tree nodes” is actually a misnomer), so the storing mechanism must make sure that nothing is stored multiple times.
The functions ‘load_node()’ and ‘store_node_fields()’ do the main work of loading/storing the contents of a tree node with references to all its contained pointers in a GPI file. Each tree node has a ‘TREE_CODE’ indicating what kind of information it contains. Each kind of tree nodes must be stored in a different way which is not described here. See the source of these functions for details.
As most tree nodes contain pointers to other tree nodes, ‘load_node()’ is an (indirectly) recursive function. Since this recursion can be circular (think of a record containing a pointer to a record of the same type), we must resolve references to tree nodes which already have been loaded. For this reason, all tree nodes being loaded are kept in a table (‘rb.nodes’). They are entered there before all their fields have been loaded (because loading them is what causes the recursion). So the table contains some incomplete nodes during loading, but at the end of loading a GPI file, they have all been completed.
On the other hand, for ‘store_node_fields()’ the (seeming) recursion must be resolved to an iterative process so that the single tree nodes are stored one after another in the file, and not mixed together. This is the job of ‘store_tree()’. It uses a hash table (see ‘get_node_id()’) for efficiency.
When re-exporting (directly or indirectly) a node that was imported from another interface, and a later compiler run imports both interfaces, it must merge the corresponding nodes loaded from both interfaces. Otherwise it would get only similar, but not identical items. However, we cannot simply omit the re-exported nodes from the new interface in case a later compiler run imports only one of them. The same problem occurs when a module exports several interfaces. In this case, a program that imports more than one of them must recognize their contents as identical where they overlap.
Therefore, each node in a GPI file is prefixed (immediately before its tree code) with information about the interface it was originally imported from or stored in first. This information is represented as a reference to an ‘INTERFACE_NAME_NODE’ followed by the id (as an integer) of the node in that interface. If the node is imported again and re-re-exported, this information is copied unchanged, so it will always refer to the interface the node was originally contained it. For nodes that appear in an interface for the first time (the normal case), a single 0 integer is stored instead of interface ‘INTERFACE_NAME_NODE’ and id (for shortness, since this information is implicit).
This mechanism is not applied to ‘INTERFACE_NAME_NODE’s since there would be a problem when the identifier they represent is the name of the interface they come from; neither to ‘IDENTIFIER_NODE’s because they are handled somewhat specially by the backend (e.g., they contain fields like ‘IDENTIFIER_VALUE’ which depend on the currently active declarations, so storing and loading them in GPI files would be wrong) because there is only one ‘IDENTIFIER_NODE’ ever made for any particular name. But for the same reason, it is no problem that the mechanism can't be applied to them.
‘INTERFACE_NAME_NODE’s are a special kind of tree nodes, only used for this purpose. They contain the name of the interface, the name of the module (to detect the unlikely case that different modules have interfaces of the same name which otherwise might confuse GPC), and the checksum of that interface. The latter may seem redundant with the checksum stored in the ‘GPI_CHUNK_IMPORT’ chunk, but in fact it is not. On the one hand, ‘GPI_CHUNK_IMPORT’ chunks occur only for interfaces imported directly, while the ‘INTERFACE_NAME_NODE’ mechanism might also refer to interfaces imported indirectly. On the other hand, storing the checksum in the ‘GPI_CHUNK_IMPORT’ chunks allows the import mechanism to detect discrepancies and refuse to load inconsistent interfaces, whereas during the handling of the ‘GPI_CHUNK_NODES’ chunk, the imported modules must already have been loaded. (It would be possible to scan the ‘GPI_CHUNK_NODES’ chunk while deciding whether to recompile, but that would be a lot of extra effort, compared to storing the checksum in the ‘GPI_CHUNK_IMPORT’ chunks.)
Finally, at the end of the ‘GPI_CHUNK_NODES’ chunk, a checksum
of its own contents (excluding the checksum itself, of course) is
appended. This is to detect corrupted GPI files and is independent
of the other uses of checksums.
For the remaining nodes, the ‘GPI_CHUNK_OFFSETS’ table contains
the file offsets as integers where they are stored within the (only)
‘GPI_CHUNK_NODES’ chunk. The offsets are relative to the start
of that chunk, i.e. after the chunk header. After the table (but
still in this chunk) the id of the main node which contains the list
of all exported names is stored as an integer. (Currently, this is
always the last node, but for the file format definition, this is
not guaranteed.)
That's it. Now you should be able to “read” GPI files using GPC's ‘--debug-gpi’ option. There is also a utility gpidump (built and installed with GPC, source code in the utils directory) to decode and show the contents of GPI files. It does also some amount of integrity checking (a little more than GPC does while loading GPI files), so if you suspect a problem with GPI files, you might want to run ‘gpidump’ on them, discarding its standard output (it writes all error reports to standard error, of course).
If you encounter a case where the loaded information differs too much from the stored information, you have found a bug – congratulations! What “too much” means, depends on the object being stored in or loaded from the GPI file. Remember that the order things are loaded from a GPI file is the reversed order things are stored when considering different recursion levels, but the same order when considering the same recursion level. (This is important when using ‘--debug-gpi’; with ‘gpidump’ you can read the file in any order you like.)
When a program/module/unit imports (uses) an interface, GPC searches for the GPI file (see GPI files) derived from the name of the interface.
Case 1: A GPI file was found.
Each GPI file contains the name of the primary source file (normally a .pas or .p file) of the module/unit, and the names of all interfaces imported. GPC reads this information and invokes itself with a command like
gpc foo.pas -M -o foo.d
This means: preprocess the file, and write down the name of the object file and those of all its source files in foo.d. GPC reads foo.d and looks if the object file exists and if the source was modified since the creation of the object file and the gpi file. If so, GPC calls itself again to compile the primary source file. When everything is done, the .d file is removed. If there was no need to recompile, all interfaces imported by the module/unit are processed in the same way as this one.
Case 2: No GPI file was found.
In this case, GPC derives the name of the source file from that of the interface by trying first interface.p, then interface.pas. This will almost always work with UCSD/Borland Pascal units, but not always with Extended Pascal modules. The programmer can override this assumption using ‘uses ... in’ or ‘import ... in’.
All this is done by the function ‘gpi_open()’ which uses some auxiliary functions such as ‘module_must_be_recompiled()’ and ‘compile_module()’.
Each time an object file is compiled or recognized as being up-to-date, its name is stored in a temporary file with the same base name as all the other temporary files used by GPC but the extension .gpc. When the top-level gpc is invoked (which calls gpc1 later on), it passes the name of this temporary file as an additional command line parameter to gpc1. After compilation has been completed, the top-level gpc reads the temporary file and adds the new object files to the arguments passed to the linker.
The additional command ‘--amtmpfile’ (not to be specified by the user!) is passed to child GPC processes, so all compiles use the same temporary file.
The source for this is merely in module.c, but there are also some hacks in gpc.c, additional command line options in lang-options.h and options.c, and gpc.h contains declarations for the functions and global variables.
The GNU back end (gbe) is used to convert RTL into assembler code. It is supposed to be language independent. Files are in the .. directory (i.e., the directory called gcc). It also uses files in the ../config subdirectories etc.
Unfortunately, some of them are not completely language independent and need patching for GPC. These patches (against all supported GCC versions) are in the diffs subdirectory.
The Pascal language implementation files are in the directory called p. Some of them were written from scratch. Others are hacked from GCC sources. Their roots, if any, are mentioned in the comment at their top.
GetCapacity (s): LongString : s.Capacity UndiscriminatedString : MaxInt ShortString : High (s) FixedString : High (s) - Low (s) + 1 CString (Array) : High (s) - Low (s) CString (Zeiger) : strlen (s) ObjectString : s.GetCapacity GetLength (s): LongString : s.Length UndiscriminatedString : s.Length ShortString : Ord (s[0]) FixedString : c := High (s); while (c >= Low (s)) and (s[c] = ' ') do Dec (c); c - Low (s) + 1 CString : strlen (s) ObjectString : s.GetLength SetLength (s,n): if n > GetCapacity (s) then if TruncateFlag then n := GetCapacity (s) else Error; LongString : s.Length := n UndiscriminatedString : if n > s.Capacity then begin tmp := @s; { possibly round n up to m * 2^k to avoid frequent reallocations } New (@s, n); Move (tmp^[1], s[1], Length (tmp^); Dispose (tmp) end; s.Length := n ShortString : s[0] := Chr (n) FixedString : FillChar (s[Low (s) + n], GetCapacity (s) - n, ' ') CString : s[n] := #0 ObjectString : s.SetLength (n) GetFirstChar (s): LongString : @s[1] UndiscriminatedString : @s[1] ShortString : @s[1] FixedString : @s[Low (s)] CString : s ObjectString : s.GetFirstChar
Anything else can be reduced to these, e.g. string assignment:
SetLength (Dest, GetLength (Src)); Move (GetFirstChar (Src) ^, GetFirstChar (Dest) ^, GetLength (Dest)); ^^^^ (because of truncate!)
Note pointer CStrings because assignments to them (from long, undiscriminated (with appending #0) or CStrings, not from short, fixed or object strings) should set the pointer, not overwrite the memory pointed to.
Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place – Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software – to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does. Copyright (C) year name of author This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items – whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.
Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place – Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software—to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software—typically libraries—of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the library's name and an idea of what it does. Copyright (C) year name of author This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker. signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice
That's all there is to it!
This is the common copying notice for all files found in demos/ and ‘docdemos/’ (unless stated otherwise in the file itself). They are distributed under the GNU General Public License with a notable exception:
Copyright (C) 1997-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Authors: See notice in the demo program. If not listed there, these are the authors of the GNU Pascal Compiler.
This demo program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version.
This demo program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this demo program; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. Top.
As a special exception, if you incorporate even large parts of the code of this demo program into another program with substantially different functionality, this does not cause the other program to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why it might be covered by the GNU General Public License.
The development of GNU Pascal profits a lot from independent contributions:
(−:−−−−−−−−−:−)
We thank everybody who supports us by reporting bugs, providing feedback, contributing knowledge and good ideas, donating development tools, and giving us the opportunity to test GPC on a large variety of systems. We are particularly indebted (in alphabetical order, individuals first) to
Sietse Achterop, Jawaad Ahmad, Montaz Ali, Jamie Allan, Strobe Anarkhos, John P. R. Archer, Phil Armsdon, Geoffrey Arnold, Artur Bac, Steven J. Backus, Geoff Bagley, Andy Ball, Uwe Bauermann, Silvio a Beccara, Michael Behm, Ariel Bendersky, Pablo Bendersky, John Blakeney, Nicolas Bley, Philip Blundell, Preben Mikael Bohn, Ernst-Ludwig Bohnen, Nils Bokermann, Francesco Bonomi, J. Booij, Patrice Bouchand, Jim Brander, Frank Thomas Braun, Matthias Braun, Marcus Brinkmann, Steve Brooker, Doug Brookmann, J. David Bryan, Kev Buckley, Jason Burgon, Ricky W. Butler, Dr. E. Buxbaum, Andrew Cagney, Loris Caren, Theo Carr-Brion, Fernando Carrilho, Larry Carter, Fabio Casamatta, Janet Casey, Romain Chantereau, Emmanuel Chaput, Jean-Pierre Chevillard, Carl Eric Codere, Jean-Philippe Combe, Paolo Cortelli, F. Couperin, Nicolas Courtel, Miklos Cserzo, Tim Currie, Serafim Dahl, Paul Davidson, Martin G. C. Davies, Stefan A. Deutscher, Jerry van Dijk, Thomas Dunbar, Andreas Eckleder, Stephan Eickschen, Frank D. Engel Jr., Sven Engelhardt, Klaus Espenlaub, Toby Ewing, Chuck B. Falconer, Joachim Falk, Irfan Fazel, Carel Fellinger, Francisco Javier Fernandez, Christopher Ferrall, David Fiddes, Alfredo Cesar Fontana, Kevin A. Foss, B. Gayathri, Marius Gedminas, Philip George, Nicholas Geovanis, Jose Oliver Gil, Thorsten Glaser, Jing Gloria, Roland Goretzki, Morten Gulbrandsen, Gerrit P. Haase, Kocherlakota Harikrishna, Joe Hartley, Hans Hauska, Jakob Heinemann, Boris Herman, Arvid Herzenberg, Thorsten Hindermann, Honda Hirotaka, Stephen Hurd, Nick Ioffe, Mason Ip, Fredrik Ismyren, Richard D. Jackson, Daniel Jacobowitz, Grant Jacobs, Andreas Jaeger, Frank Jahnke, David James, Nathalie Jarosz, Sven Jauring, Niels Kristian Bech Jensen, Johanna Johnston, Achim Kalwa, Christine Karow, Tim Kaulmann, Thomas Keller, Clark Kent, Victor Khimenko, Russell King, Niels Ole Staub Kirkeby, Prof. Donald E. Knuth, Michael Kochiashvili, Tomasz Kowaltowski, David Kredba, Peter Ulrich Kruppa, Jochen Kuepper, Casper ter Kuile, Oliver Kullmann, Krzysztof Kwapien, Randy Latimer, Bernard Leak, Olivier Lecarme, Wren Lee, Martin Liddle, Kennith Linder, Stephen Lindholm, Orlando Llanes, Miguel Lobo, Benedict Lofstedt, Steve Loft, John Logsdon, Dominique Louis, Dmitry S. Luhtionov, Jesper Lund, Martin Maechler, Muhammad Umer Mansoor, Claude Marinier, Ingvar Marny, Antony Matranga, Michael McCarthy, Michael Meeks, Clyde Meli, Axel Mellinger, Bryan Meredith, Jeff Miller, John Miller, Russell Minnich, Rudy Moddemeijer, Jason Moore, Scott A. Moore, Jeffrey Moskot, Pierre Muller, Adam Naumowicz, Nathanael Nerode, Andreas Neumann, Christian Neumann, Peter Norton, Adam Oldham, Gerhard Olejniczak, Alexandre Oliva, John G. Ollason, Marius Onica, Ole Osterby, Klaus Friis Ostergaard, Jean-Marc Ottorini, Michael Paap, Gale Paeper, Matija Papec, Miguel A. Alonso Pardo, Laurent Parise, Andris Pavenis, Robert R. Payne, Opie Pecheux, Jose M. Perez, Ronald Perrella, Bjorn Persson, Per Persson, Michael Pfeiffer, Pierre Phaneuf, Pascal Pignard, Tam Pikey, Nuno Pinhao, Philip Plant, Larry Poorman, Stuart Pope, Yuri Prokushev, Huge Rademaker, Shafiek Rasdien, Mike Reid, Leon Renkema, John L. Ries, Phil Robertson, Clive Rodgers, Jim Roland, Guillaume Rousse, Daniel Rudy, Marten Jan de Ruiter, Martin Rusko, Sven Sahle, Neil Santos, Carl-Johan Schenstrom, Robert B. Scher, Hartmut Schmider, Thomas D. Schneider, Dominique Schuppli, Egbert Seibertz, George Shapovalov, Richard Sharman, Patrick Sharp, Joe da Silva, Arcadio Alivio Sincero, Ian Sinclair, Kasper Souren, Tomas Srb, Anuradha Srinivasan, David Starner, Andrew Stribblehill, Alan Sun, Veli Suorsa, Matthew Swift, Mark Taylor, Paul Tedaldi, Robin S. Thompson, Ian Thurlbeck, Gerhard Tonn, Ivan Torshin, Bernhard Tschirren, Josef Urban, Luiz Vaz, Tom Verhoeff, Kresimir Veselic, Jean-Pierre Vial, Alejandro Villarroel, Bohdan Vlasyuk, Marco van de Voort, Raymond Wang, Nic Webb, Peter Weber, Francisco Stefano Wechsler, Christian Wendt, Benedikt Wildenhain, Gareth Wilson, Marc van Woerkom, David Wood, Michael Worsley, Takashi Yamanoue, George L. Yang, Salaam Yitbarek, Dafi Yondra, Eli Zaretskii, Artur Zaroda, Gerhard Zintel, Mariusz Zynel, the BIP at the University of Birmingham, UK, the Institut fuer Festkoerperforschung (IFF) at the Forschungszentrum Juelich, Germany, CARNet (Croatian Academic and Research NETwork), the Academy of Fine Arts and the Faculty of Graphic Arts at the University of Zagreb, Croatia,
and everybody we might have forgotten to mention here. Thanks to all of you!
GNU Pascal is based on GNU CC by Richard Stallman. Several people have contributed to GNU CC:
protoize
and unprotoize
tools, the support for Dwarf symbolic debugging information, and
much of the support for System V Release 4. He has also worked
heavily on the Intel 386 and 860 support.
Many of the programs mentioned here, plus some more, can be found at
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/
![]() (PNG, 10 KB) |
Here is our GNU Pascal drawing as a small (1 KB) and a large PNG image (10 KB), as an EPS file (45 KB), and as a PDF file (18 KB).
Due to patent problems we do not use GIF files. Fortunately the PNG format, the successor of GIF, does not have this problem – and introduces better compression and more advanced features anyway.
By the way, the color gradient that makes our page background is a PNG file of only 632 bytes. It was generated by a Pascal program compiled with GPC and ‘pnmtopng’. [Example]
![]() (PNG, 7 KB) |
PENG is an integrated development environment (IDE) for GNU Compilers and other purposes on any platform supported by GPC, written by Frank Heckenbach. The home page of PENG is
http://fjf.gnu.de/peng/.
![]() (PNG, 8 KB) |
RHIDE is an integrated development environment (IDE) for GNU Compilers on DOS (DJGPP) or Linux, written by Robert Höhne. The home page of RHIDE is
http://www.rhide.com.
DevPascal is an integrated development environment (IDE) for GNU Pascal on mingw32. The home page of DevPascal is
http://www.bloodshed.net/devpascal.html.
![]() (PNG, 38 KB) |
GRX is a graphics library for C and GNU Pascal, including a mostly BP compatible ‘Graph’ unit. It is available from
http://www.gnu.de/software/grx/
Although GRX originated on DJGPP, a DOS programming platform, it is portable to Linux with SVGAlib, to all Unix-like systems running the X11 window system, and to MS-Windows 9x/NT.
Units and tools for internationalization are available in
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/eike/
GNU Pascal units to access MySQL, GNU DBM and PostgreSQL databases are available in
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/eike/
GNU Pascal units for the GTK+ and GTK+ GL libraries are available in
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/nicola/
A book about GPC manual in German written by Eike Lange can be found in
http://www.gnu-pascal.org/~eike/
Prof. Abimbola A. Olowofoyeku (“The African Chief”) wrote a Delphi-compatible (though a few routines are still missing) ‘SysUtils’ unit. It has been tested under Cygwin, mingw, Linux (Mandrake 7.0), and Solaris 7. It can be downloaded from http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/chief/.
Crystal is a web based mailing list archive, written for GNU Pascal and used for the archives of GPC's mailing lists (see Mailing List Archives). The source code can be found at http://fjf.gnu.de/crystal/.
The Pascal standard specifications are available in PostScript format at
http://ftp.digital.com/pub/Digital/Pascal/
Alternative addresses are
ftp://ftp.europe.digital.com/pub/DEC/Pascal/
ftp://ftp.digital.com/pub/DEC/Pascal/
There are also copies at
http://www.moorecad.com/standardpascal/iso7185.ps (ISO 7185 Pascal)
http://www.moorecad.com/standardpascal/iso10206.ps (ISO 10206 Extended Pascal)
Note: These documents are a bit hard to navigate (e.g., in ghostview) because they are missing the so called “document structuring comments” (DSC). The GPC source distribution contains a little script ps2dsc to add the DSC again and make the documents easier to navigate. Note that for reasons of copyright, you are probably only allowed to do this for your own use and not to distribute the modified files.
You can find an easy-to-read introduction to Extended Pascal by Prospero Software at
http://www.prosperosoftware.com/epintro.html
Please note that Standard Pascal is not the same as Borland Pascal nor a subset of it. See Highlights for examples of Standard Pascal features that are missing in Borland Pascal.
Scott A. Moore's ANSI-ISO Pascal FAQ (132 KB) discusses the differences between both dialects in detail.
The draft standard “Object-Oriented Extensions to Pascal” can be found at
http://pascal-central.com/OOE-stds.html
Programming activities of small companies and individuals are threatened by software patents. If you are a programmer, you are in danger, too! Your employer or yourself might be sued by a large company holding a patent on some ideas you are using in your programs. (You need not use foreign code in order to become vulnerable.)
For more information look at
http://swpat.ffii.org (Europe) http://lpf.ai.mit.edu (USA)
GNU Pascal is part of the GNU project which was founded by Richard Stallman in 1984. The aim of the GNU project is to provide a complete operating system with editors, compilers etc. as Free Software.
People often confuse Free Software with public domain software or have other wrong information about the GNU project. If you want to know it definitely, please read the GNU General Public License.
For even more information, please consult the official GNU home page of the Free Software Foundation (FSF), http://www.gnu.org/ or one of its mirror sites.
Some small notes about common misunderstandings follow.
The GNU Manifesto which appears below was written by Richard Stallman at the beginning of the GNU project, to ask for participation and support. For the first few years, it was updated in minor ways to account for developments, but now it seems best to leave it unchanged as most people have seen it.Since that time, we have learned about certain common misunderstandings that different wording could help avoid. Footnotes added in 1993 help clarify these points.
For up-to-date information about the available GNU software, please see the latest issue of the GNU's Bulletin. The list is much too long to include here.
GNU, which stands for Gnu's Not Unix, is the name for the complete Unix-compatible software system which I am writing so that I can give it away free to everyone who can use it.1 Several other volunteers are helping me. Contributions of time, money, programs and equipment are greatly needed.
So far we have an Emacs text editor with Lisp for writing editor commands, a source level debugger, a yacc-compatible parser generator, a linker, and around 35 utilities. A shell (command interpreter) is nearly completed. A new portable optimizing C compiler has compiled itself and may be released this year. An initial kernel exists but many more features are needed to emulate Unix. When the kernel and compiler are finished, it will be possible to distribute a GNU system suitable for program development. We will use TeX as our text formatter, but an nroff is being worked on. We will use the free, portable X window system as well. After this we will add a portable Common Lisp, an Empire game, a spreadsheet, and hundreds of other things, plus on-line documentation. We hope to supply, eventually, everything useful that normally comes with a Unix system, and more.
GNU will be able to run Unix programs, but will not be identical to Unix. We will make all improvements that are convenient, based on our experience with other operating systems. In particular, we plan to have longer file names, file version numbers, a crashproof file system, file name completion perhaps, terminal-independent display support, and perhaps eventually a Lisp-based window system through which several Lisp programs and ordinary Unix programs can share a screen. Both C and Lisp will be available as system programming languages. We will try to support UUCP, MIT Chaosnet, and Internet protocols for communication.
GNU is aimed initially at machines in the 68000/16000 class with virtual memory, because they are the easiest machines to make it run on. The extra effort to make it run on smaller machines will be left to someone who wants to use it on them.
To avoid horrible confusion, please pronounce the `G' in the word `GNU' when it is the name of this project.
I consider that the golden rule requires that if I like a program I must share it with other people who like it. Software sellers want to divide the users and conquer them, making each user agree not to share with others. I refuse to break solidarity with other users in this way. I cannot in good conscience sign a nondisclosure agreement or a software license agreement. For years I worked within the Artificial Intelligence Lab to resist such tendencies and other inhospitalities, but eventually they had gone too far: I could not remain in an institution where such things are done for me against my will.
So that I can continue to use computers without dishonor, I have decided to put together a sufficient body of free software so that I will be able to get along without any software that is not free. I have resigned from the AI lab to deny MIT any legal excuse to prevent me from giving GNU away.
Unix is not my ideal system, but it is not too bad. The essential features of Unix seem to be good ones, and I think I can fill in what Unix lacks without spoiling them. And a system compatible with Unix would be convenient for many other people to adopt.
GNU is not in the public domain. Everyone will be permitted to modify and redistribute GNU, but no distributor will be allowed to restrict its further redistribution. That is to say, proprietary modifications will not be allowed. I want to make sure that all versions of GNU remain free.
I have found many other programmers who are excited about GNU and want to help.
Many programmers are unhappy about the commercialization of system software. It may enable them to make more money, but it requires them to feel in conflict with other programmers in general rather than feel as comrades. The fundamental act of friendship among programmers is the sharing of programs; marketing arrangements now typically used essentially forbid programmers to treat others as friends. The purchaser of software must choose between friendship and obeying the law. Naturally, many decide that friendship is more important. But those who believe in law often do not feel at ease with either choice. They become cynical and think that programming is just a way of making money.
By working on and using GNU rather than proprietary programs, we can be hospitable to everyone and obey the law. In addition, GNU serves as an example to inspire and a banner to rally others to join us in sharing. This can give us a feeling of harmony which is impossible if we use software that is not free. For about half the programmers I talk to, this is an important happiness that money cannot replace.
I am asking computer manufacturers for donations of machines and money. I'm asking individuals for donations of programs and work.
One consequence you can expect if you donate machines is that GNU will run on them at an early date. The machines should be complete, ready to use systems, approved for use in a residential area, and not in need of sophisticated cooling or power.
I have found very many programmers eager to contribute part-time work for GNU. For most projects, such part-time distributed work would be very hard to coordinate; the independently-written parts would not work together. But for the particular task of replacing Unix, this problem is absent. A complete Unix system contains hundreds of utility programs, each of which is documented separately. Most interface specifications are fixed by Unix compatibility. If each contributor can write a compatible replacement for a single Unix utility, and make it work properly in place of the original on a Unix system, then these utilities will work right when put together. Even allowing for Murphy to create a few unexpected problems, assembling these components will be a feasible task. (The kernel will require closer communication and will be worked on by a small, tight group.)
If I get donations of money, I may be able to hire a few people full or part time. The salary won't be high by programmers' standards, but I'm looking for people for whom building community spirit is as important as making money. I view this as a way of enabling dedicated people to devote their full energies to working on GNU by sparing them the need to make a living in another way.
Once GNU is written, everyone will be able to obtain good system software free, just like air.2
This means much more than just saving everyone the price of a Unix license. It means that much wasteful duplication of system programming effort will be avoided. This effort can go instead into advancing the state of the art.
Complete system sources will be available to everyone. As a result, a user who needs changes in the system will always be free to make them himself, or hire any available programmer or company to make them for him. Users will no longer be at the mercy of one programmer or company which owns the sources and is in sole position to make changes.
Schools will be able to provide a much more educational environment by encouraging all students to study and improve the system code. Harvard's computer lab used to have the policy that no program could be installed on the system if its sources were not on public display, and upheld it by actually refusing to install certain programs. I was very much inspired by this.
Finally, the overhead of considering who owns the system software and what one is or is not entitled to do with it will be lifted.
Arrangements to make people pay for using a program, including licensing of copies, always incur a tremendous cost to society through the cumbersome mechanisms necessary to figure out how much (that is, which programs) a person must pay for. And only a police state can force everyone to obey them. Consider a space station where air must be manufactured at great cost: charging each breather per liter of air may be fair, but wearing the metered gas mask all day and all night is intolerable even if everyone can afford to pay the air bill. And the TV cameras everywhere to see if you ever take the mask off are outrageous. It's better to support the air plant with a head tax and chuck the masks.
Copying all or parts of a program is as natural to a programmer as breathing, and as productive. It ought to be as free.
“Nobody will use it if it is free, because that means they can't rely on any support.”“You have to charge for the program to pay for providing the support.”
If people would rather pay for GNU plus service than get GNU free without service, a company to provide just service to people who have obtained GNU free ought to be profitable.3
We must distinguish between support in the form of real programming work and mere handholding. The former is something one cannot rely on from a software vendor. If your problem is not shared by enough people, the vendor will tell you to get lost.
If your business needs to be able to rely on support, the only way is to have all the necessary sources and tools. Then you can hire any available person to fix your problem; you are not at the mercy of any individual. With Unix, the price of sources puts this out of consideration for most businesses. With GNU this will be easy. It is still possible for there to be no available competent person, but this problem cannot be blamed on distribution arrangements. GNU does not eliminate all the world's problems, only some of them.
Meanwhile, the users who know nothing about computers need handholding: doing things for them which they could easily do themselves but don't know how.
Such services could be provided by companies that sell just hand-holding and repair service. If it is true that users would rather spend money and get a product with service, they will also be willing to buy the service having got the product free. The service companies will compete in quality and price; users will not be tied to any particular one. Meanwhile, those of us who don't need the service should be able to use the program without paying for the service.
“You cannot reach many people without advertising, and you must charge for the program to support that.”“It's no use advertising a program people can get free.”
There are various forms of free or very cheap publicity that can be used to inform numbers of computer users about something like GNU. But it may be true that one can reach more microcomputer users with advertising. If this is really so, a business which advertises the service of copying and mailing GNU for a fee ought to be successful enough to pay for its advertising and more. This way, only the users who benefit from the advertising pay for it.
On the other hand, if many people get GNU from their friends, and such companies don't succeed, this will show that advertising was not really necessary to spread GNU. Why is it that free market advocates don't want to let the free market decide this?4
“My company needs a proprietary operating system to get a competitive edge.”
GNU will remove operating system software from the realm of competition. You will not be able to get an edge in this area, but neither will your competitors be able to get an edge over you. You and they will compete in other areas, while benefiting mutually in this one. If your business is selling an operating system, you will not like GNU, but that's tough on you. If your business is something else, GNU can save you from being pushed into the expensive business of selling operating systems.
I would like to see GNU development supported by gifts from many manufacturers and users, reducing the cost to each.5
“Don't programmers deserve a reward for their creativity?”
If anything deserves a reward, it is social contribution. Creativity can be a social contribution, but only in so far as society is free to use the results. If programmers deserve to be rewarded for creating innovative programs, by the same token they deserve to be punished if they restrict the use of these programs.
“Shouldn't a programmer be able to ask for a reward for his creativity?”
There is nothing wrong with wanting pay for work, or seeking to maximize one's income, as long as one does not use means that are destructive. But the means customary in the field of software today are based on destruction.
Extracting money from users of a program by restricting their use of it is destructive because the restrictions reduce the amount and the ways that the program can be used. This reduces the amount of wealth that humanity derives from the program. When there is a deliberate choice to restrict, the harmful consequences are deliberate destruction.
The reason a good citizen does not use such destructive means to become wealthier is that, if everyone did so, we would all become poorer from the mutual destructiveness. This is Kantian ethics; or, the Golden Rule. Since I do not like the consequences that result if everyone hoards information, I am required to consider it wrong for one to do so. Specifically, the desire to be rewarded for one's creativity does not justify depriving the world in general of all or part of that creativity.
“Won't programmers starve?”
I could answer that nobody is forced to be a programmer. Most of us cannot manage to get any money for standing on the street and making faces. But we are not, as a result, condemned to spend our lives standing on the street making faces, and starving. We do something else.
But that is the wrong answer because it accepts the questioner's implicit assumption: that without ownership of software, programmers cannot possibly be paid a cent. Supposedly it is all or nothing.
The real reason programmers will not starve is that it will still be possible for them to get paid for programming; just not paid as much as now.
Restricting copying is not the only basis for business in software. It is the most common basis because it brings in the most money. If it were prohibited, or rejected by the customer, software business would move to other bases of organization which are now used less often. There are always numerous ways to organize any kind of business.
Probably programming will not be as lucrative on the new basis as it is now. But that is not an argument against the change. It is not considered an injustice that sales clerks make the salaries that they now do. If programmers made the same, that would not be an injustice either. (In practice they would still make considerably more than that.)
“Don't people have a right to control how their creativity is used?”
“Control over the use of one's ideas” really constitutes control over other people's lives; and it is usually used to make their lives more difficult.
People who have studied the issue of intellectual property rights carefully (such as lawyers) say that there is no intrinsic right to intellectual property. The kinds of supposed intellectual property rights that the government recognizes were created by specific acts of legislation for specific purposes.
For example, the patent system was established to encourage inventors to disclose the details of their inventions. Its purpose was to help society rather than to help inventors. At the time, the life span of 17 years for a patent was short compared with the rate of advance of the state of the art. Since patents are an issue only among manufacturers, for whom the cost and effort of a license agreement are small compared with setting up production, the patents often do not do much harm. They do not obstruct most individuals who use patented products.
The idea of copyright did not exist in ancient times, when authors frequently copied other authors at length in works of non-fiction. This practice was useful, and is the only way many authors' works have survived even in part. The copyright system was created expressly for the purpose of encouraging authorship. In the domain for which it was invented – books, which could be copied economically only on a printing press – it did little harm, and did not obstruct most of the individuals who read the books.
All intellectual property rights are just licenses granted by society because it was thought, rightly or wrongly, that society as a whole would benefit by granting them. But in any particular situation, we have to ask: are we really better off granting such license? What kind of act are we licensing a person to do?
The case of programs today is very different from that of books a hundred years ago. The fact that the easiest way to copy a program is from one neighbor to another, the fact that a program has both source code and object code which are distinct, and the fact that a program is used rather than read and enjoyed, combine to create a situation in which a person who enforces a copyright is harming society as a whole both materially and spiritually; in which a person should not do so regardless of whether the law enables him to.
“Competition makes things get done better.”
The paradigm of competition is a race: by rewarding the winner, we encourage everyone to run faster. When capitalism really works this way, it does a good job; but its defenders are wrong in assuming it always works this way. If the runners forget why the reward is offered and become intent on winning, no matter how, they may find other strategies – such as, attacking other runners. If the runners get into a fist fight, they will all finish late.
Proprietary and secret software is the moral equivalent of runners in a fist fight. Sad to say, the only referee we've got does not seem to object to fights; he just regulates them (“For every ten yards you run, you can fire one shot”). He really ought to break them up, and penalize runners for even trying to fight.
“Won't everyone stop programming without a monetary incentive?”
Actually, many people will program with absolutely no monetary incentive. Programming has an irresistible fascination for some people, usually the people who are best at it. There is no shortage of professional musicians who keep at it even though they have no hope of making a living that way.
But really this question, though commonly asked, is not appropriate to the situation. Pay for programmers will not disappear, only become less. So the right question is, will anyone program with a reduced monetary incentive? My experience shows that they will.
For more than ten years, many of the world's best programmers worked at the Artificial Intelligence Lab for far less money than they could have had anywhere else. They got many kinds of non-monetary rewards: fame and appreciation, for example. And creativity is also fun, a reward in itself.
Then most of them left when offered a chance to do the same interesting work for a lot of money.
What the facts show is that people will program for reasons other than riches; but if given a chance to make a lot of money as well, they will come to expect and demand it. Low-paying organizations do poorly in competition with high-paying ones, but they do not have to do badly if the high-paying ones are banned.
“We need the programmers desperately. If they demand that we stop helping our neighbors, we have to obey.”
You're never so desperate that you have to obey this sort of demand. Remember: millions for defense, but not a cent for tribute!
“Programmers need to make a living somehow.”
In the short run, this is true. However, there are plenty of ways that programmers could make a living without selling the right to use a program. This way is customary now because it brings programmers and businessmen the most money, not because it is the only way to make a living. It is easy to find other ways if you want to find them. Here are a number of examples.
A manufacturer introducing a new computer will pay for the porting of operating systems onto the new hardware.
The sale of teaching, hand-holding and maintenance services could also employ programmers.
People with new ideas could distribute programs as freeware, asking for donations from satisfied users, or selling hand-holding services. I have met people who are already working this way successfully.
Users with related needs can form users' groups, and pay dues. A group would contract with programming companies to write programs that the group's members would like to use.
All sorts of development can be funded with a Software Tax:
Suppose everyone who buys a computer has to pay x percent of the price as a software tax. The government gives this to an agency like the NSF to spend on software development.But if the computer buyer makes a donation to software development himself, he can take a credit against the tax. He can donate to the project of his own choosing – often, chosen because he hopes to use the results when it is done. He can take a credit for any amount of donation up to the total tax he had to pay.
The total tax rate could be decided by a vote of the payers of the tax, weighted according to the amount they will be taxed on.
The consequences:
- The computer-using community supports software development.
- This community decides what level of support is needed.
- Users who care which projects their share is spent on can choose this for themselves.
In the long run, making programs free is a step toward the post-scarcity world, where nobody will have to work very hard just to make a living. People will be free to devote themselves to activities that are fun, such as programming, after spending the necessary ten hours a week on required tasks such as legislation, family counseling, robot repair and asteroid prospecting. There will be no need to be able to make a living from programming.
We have already greatly reduced the amount of work that the whole society must do for its actual productivity, but only a little of this has translated itself into leisure for workers because much nonproductive activity is required to accompany productive activity. The main causes of this are bureaucracy and isometric struggles against competition. Free software will greatly reduce these drains in the area of software production. We must do this, in order for technical gains in productivity to translate into less work for us.
If you want to have more free software a few years from now, it makes sense for you to help encourage people to contribute funds for its development. The most effective approach known is to encourage commercial redistributors to donate.
Users of free software systems can boost the pace of development by encouraging for-a-fee distributors to donate part of their selling price to free software developers – the Free Software Foundation, and others.
The way to convince distributors to do this is to demand it and expect it from them. So when you compare distributors, judge them partly by how much they give to free software development. Show distributors they must compete to be the one who gives the most.
To make this approach work, you must insist on numbers that you can compare, such as, “We will donate ten dollars to the Frobnitz project for each disk sold.” Don't be satisfied with a vague promise, such as “A portion of the profits are donated,” since it doesn't give a basis for comparison.
Even a precise fraction “of the profits from this disk” is not very meaningful, since creative accounting and unrelated business decisions can greatly alter what fraction of the sales price counts as profit. If the price you pay is $50, ten percent of the profit is probably less than a dollar; it might be a few cents, or nothing at all.
Some redistributors do development work themselves. This is useful too; but to keep everyone honest, you need to inquire how much they do, and what kind. Some kinds of development make much more long-term difference than others. For example, maintaining a separate version of a program contributes very little; maintaining the standard version of a program for the whole community contributes much. Easy new ports contribute little, since someone else would surely do them; difficult ports such as adding a new CPU to the GNU C compiler contribute more; major new features or packages contribute the most.
By establishing the idea that supporting further development is “the proper thing to do” when distributing free software for a fee, we can assure a steady flow of resources into making more free software.
Copyright (C) 1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Verbatim copying and redistribution of this section is permitted without royalty; alteration is not permitted.
[1] The wording here was careless. The intention was that nobody would have to pay for permission to use the GNU system. But the words don't make this clear, and people often interpret them as saying that copies of GNU should always be distributed at little or no charge. That was never the intent; later on, the manifesto mentions the possibility of companies providing the service of distribution for a profit. Subsequently I have learned to distinguish carefully between “free” in the sense of freedom and “free” in the sense of price. Free software is software that users have the freedom to distribute and change. Some users may obtain copies at no charge, while others pay to obtain copies – and if the funds help support improving the software, so much the better. The important thing is that everyone who has a copy has the freedom to cooperate with others in using it.
[2] This is another place I failed to distinguish carefully between the two different meanings of “free”. The statement as it stands is not false – you can get copies of GNU software at no charge, from your friends or over the net. But it does suggest the wrong idea.
[3] Several such companies now exist.
[4] The Free Software Foundation raises most of its funds from a distribution service, although it is a charity rather than a company. If no one chooses to obtain copies by ordering from the FSF, it will be unable to do its work. But this does not mean that proprietary restrictions are justified to force every user to pay. If a small fraction of all the users order copies from the FSF, that is sufficient to keep the FSF afloat. So we ask users to choose to support us in this way. Have you done your part?
[5] A group of computer companies recently pooled funds to support maintenance of the GNU C Compiler.